F7

YASKAWA
Varispeed F7
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GENERAL PURPOSE INVERTER (CURRENT VECTOR CONTROL)
MODEL: CIMR-F7A
200V CLASS 0.4 to 110kW (1.2 to 160kVA)
400V CLASS 0.4 to 300kW (1.4 to 510kVA)
Upon receipt of the product and prior to initial operation, read these instructions
thoroughly, and retain for future reference.
YASKAWA MANUAL NO. TOE-S616-55.1D

Preface
This manual is designed to ensure correct and suitable
application of Varispeed F7-Series Inverters. Read this
manual before attempting to install, operate, maintain,
or inspect an Inverter and keep it in a safe, convenient
location for future reference. Be sure you understand
all precautions and safety information before attempt-
ing application.
General Precautions
• The diagrams in this manual may be indicated without covers or safety shields to show details.
Be sure to restore covers or shields before operating the Units and run the Units according to the
instructions described in this manual.
• Any illustrations, photographs, or examples used in this manual are provided as examples only
and may not apply to all products to which this manual is applicable.
• The products and specifications described in this manual or the content and presentation of the
manual may be changed without notice to improve the product and/or the manual.
• When ordering a new copy of the manual due to damage or loss, contact your Yaskawa represen-
tatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office and provide the manual number shown on the front
cover.
• If nameplates become warn or damaged, order new ones from your Yaskawa representatives or
the nearest Yaskawa sales office.
i
Safety Information
The following conventions are used to indicate precautions in this manual. Failure to heed pre-
cautions provided in this manual can result in serious or possibly even fatal injury or damage to
the products or to related equipment and systems.
Indicates precautions that, if not heeded, could possibly result in loss of life or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates precautions that, if not heeded, could result in relatively serious or minor injury, damage
CAUTION to the product, or faulty operation.
Failure to heed a precaution classified as a caution can result in serious consequences depending
on the situation.
Indicates important information that should be memorized.
IMPORTANT
ii
Safety Precautions
Confirmations upon Delivery
CAUTION
• Never install an Inverter that is damaged or missing components.
Doing so can result in injury.
Installation
CAUTION
• Always hold the case when carrying the Inverter.
If the Inverter is held by the front cover, the main body of the Inverter may fall, possibly resulting in injury.
• Attach the Inverter to a metal or other noncombustible material.
Fire can result if the Inverter is attached to a combustible material.
• Install a cooling fan or other cooling device when installing more than one Inverter in the same
enclosure so that the temperature of the air entering the Inverters is below 45°C.
Overheating can result in fires or other accidents.
Wiring
WARNING
• Always turn OFF the input power supply before wiring terminals.
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
• Wiring must be performed by an authorized person qualified in electrical work.
• Be sure to ground the ground terminal. (200 V Class: Ground to 100 Ω or less, 400 V Class:
Ground to 10 Ω or less)
• Always check the operation of any emergency stop circuits after they are wired.
Otherwise, there is the possibility of injury. (Wiring is the responsibility of the user.)
• Never touch the output terminals directly with your hands or allow the output lines to come into con-
tact with the Inverter case. Never short the output circuits.
Otherwise, an electric shock or ground short can occur.
• If the power supply is turned ON during the FWD (or REV) Run Command is given, the motor will
start automatically.
Turn the power supply ON after verifying that the RUN signal is OFF.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
• When the 3-wire sequence is set, do not make the wiring for the control circuit unless the multi-
function input terminal constant is set.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
CAUTION
• Check to be sure that the voltage of the main AC power supply satisfies the rated voltage of the
Inverter.
Injury or fire can occur if the voltage is not correct.
• Do not perform voltage withstand tests on the Inverter.
Otherwise, semiconductor elements and other devices can be damaged.
• Connect braking resistors, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units as shown in the I/O wiring
examples.
Otherwise, a fire can occur and the Inverter, braking resistors, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units can be damaged.
iii
CAUTION
• Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque.
Otherwise, a fire may occur.
• Do not connect AC power to output terminals U, V, and W.
The interior parts of the Inverter will be damaged if voltage is applied to the output terminals.
• Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors or LC/RC noise filters to the output circuits.
The Inverter can be damaged or interior parts burnt if these devices are connected.
• Do not connect magnetic contactors to the output circuits.
If a load is connected while the Inverter is operating, surge current will cause the overcurrent protection circuit inside the
Inverter to operate.
Setting User Constants
CAUTION
• Disconnect the load (machine, device) from the motor before performing rotational autotuning.
The motor may turn, possibly resulting in injury or damage to equipment. Also, motor constants cannot be correctly set
with the motor attached to a load.
• Stay clear of the motor during rotational autotuning.
The motor repeats running and stopping until autotuning has been completed, possibly resulting in injury.
• In stationary autotuning 1, when the motor is first operated in the drive mode after tuning, the
remaining motor constants E2-02 (Motor rated slip) and E2-03 (Motor no-load current) are set auto-
matically. To perform an operation immediately after stationary autotuning 1, use the following pro-
cedure under the recommended conditions.
(1) Check the values of E2-02 and E2-03 in verify mode or advanced programming mode.
(2) Run the motor once in drive mode under the following conditions.
• The Inverter and the motor are connected.
• The motor shaft is not locked with a mechanical brake or other stopping mechanism (or function).
• A motor-load ratio of 30% or less is maintained.
• A speed of 30% or more of the base frequency set at E1-06 (default = highest frequency) is maintained at
a constant speed for one second or more.
(3) After stopping the motor, check the values of E2-02 and E2-03 again in verify mode or advanced program-
ming mode. If the values of E2-02 and E2-03 differ from the ones before the first operation was carried out,
the settings have been successfully completed. Next, check if the values are suitable or not.
If the values of E2-02 and E2-03 differed greatly from the reference data of the motor in the test report or the instruction
manual (TOE-S616-55.1), hunting, motor vibrations, insufficient motor torque, or an overcurrent may occur because the
motor is operated although the aforementioned conditions have not been fulfilled after stationary autotuning 1. For eleva-
tors, failure to observe this caution may result in the cage falling or injury. If so, perform stationary autotuning 1 again and
run the motor using the aforementioned procedure under the recommended conditions or perform stationary autotuning 2
or rotational autotuning.
Usually the standard setting for E2-02 is 1 Hz to 3 Hz, and that for E2-03 is 30% to 65% of the rated current for a general-
purpose motor. Generally, the larger the motor capacity is, the smaller the rated slip and the ratio of the no-load current to
the rated current become. Use the data given in Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04) of Chap-
ter 5 User Constants as a reference.
iv
Trial Operation
WARNING
• Check to be sure that the front cover is attached before turning ON the power supply.
An electric shock may occur.
• Do not come close to the machine when the fault reset function is used. If the alarmed is cleared,
the machine may start moving suddenly.
Also, design the machine so that human safety is ensured even when it is restarted.
Injury may occur.
• Provide a separate emergency stop switch; the Digital Operator STOP Key is valid only when its
function is set.
Injury may occur.
• Reset alarms only after confirming that the RUN signal is OFF.
Injury may occur.
CAUTION
• Don't touch the radiation fins (heatsink), braking resistor, or Braking Resistor Unit. These can
become very hot.
Otherwise, a burn injury may occur.
• Be sure that the motor and machine is within the applicable ranges before starting operation.
Otherwise, an injury may occur.
• Provide a separate holding brake if necessary.
Always construct the external sequence to confirm that the holding brake is activated in the event
of an emergency, a power failure, or an abnormality in the Inverter.
Failure to observe this caution can result in injury.
• If using an Inverter with an elevator, take safety measures on the elevator to prevent the elevator
from dropping.
• Don't check signals while the Inverter is running.
Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged.
• Be careful when changing Inverter settings. The Inverter is factory set to suitable settings. For the
Inverters in the 400 V class of 75 kW or more, however, select the correct connector according to
the input voltage.
Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged.
Maintenance and Inspection
WARNING
• Do not touch the Inverter terminals. Some of the terminals carry high voltages and are extremely
dangerous.
Doing so can result in electric shock.
• Always have the protective cover in place when power is being supplied to the Inverter. When
attaching the cover, always turn OFF power to the Inverter through the MCCB.
Doing so can result in electric shock.
• Turn OFF the main circuit power supply, wait for the time indicated on the front cover, and make
sure the CHARGE indicator light has gone out, and then perform maintenance and inspection.
The capacitor will remain charged and is dangerous.
• Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized person-
nel.
Remove all metal objects, such as watches and rings, before starting work. Always use grounded tools.
Failure to heed these warning can result in electric shock.
v
WARNING
• Provide a separate holding brake if necessary.
Always make any adjustments other than those involving the operation of the Inverter with the holding brake released.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury.
• If using an Inverter with an elevator, take safety measures on the elevator to prevent the elevator
from dropping.
CAUTION
• A CMOS IC is used in the control board. Handle the control board and CMOS IC carefully.
The CMOS IC can be destroyed by static electricity if touched directly.
• Do not change the wiring, or remove connectors or the Digital Operator, during operation.
Doing so can result in personal injury.
Other
WARNING
• Do not attempt to modify or alter the Inverter.
Doing so can result in electrical shock or injury.
CAUTION
• Do not subject the Inverter to halogen gases, such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine, at any
time even during transportation or installation.
Otherwise, the Inverter can be damaged or interior parts burnt.
vi
Warning Information and Position
There is warning information on the Inverter in the position shown in the following illustration.
Always heed the warnings.
Warning
information
position Warning
information
position
Illustration shows the CIMR-F7A20P4 Illustration shows the CIMR-F7A2022
Warning Information
! WARNING
Risk of electric shock.
yRead manual before installing.
yWait 5 minutes for capacitor discharge
after disconnecting power supply.
! AVERTISSEMENT
Risque de décharge électrique.
yLire le manuel avant l' installation.
yAttendre 5 minutes aprés la coupure de
l' allmentation. Pour permettre la
décharge des condensateurs.
vii
Warranty Information
Free Warranty Period and Scope
Warranty Period
This product is warranted for twelve months after being delivered to Yaskawa’s customer or if
applicable eighteen months from the date of shipment from Yaskawa’s factory whichever comes
first.
Scope of Warranty
Inspections
Periodic inspections must be conducted by the customer. However, upon request, Yaskawa or
one of Yaskawa’s Service Centers can inspect the product for a fee. In this case, if after confer-
ring with the customer, a Yaskawa product is found to be defective due to Yaskawa workman-
ship or materials and the defect occurs during the warranty period, then this fee will be waived
and the problem remedied free of charge.
Repairs
If a Yaskawa product is found to be defective due to Yaskawa workmanship or materials and the
defect occurs during the warranty period, Yaskawa will provide a replacement, repair the defec-
tive product, and provide shipping to and from the site free of charge.
However, if the Yaskawa Authorized Service Center determines that the problem with a
Yaskawa product is not due to defects in Yaskawa’s workmanship or materials, then the cus-
tomer will be responsible for the cost of any necessary repairs. Some problems that are outside
the scope of this warranty are:
• Problems due to improper maintenance or handling, carelessness, or other reasons where the
customer is determined to be responsible.
• Problems due to additions or modifications made to a Yaskawa product without Yaskawa’s
understanding.
• Problems due to the use of a Yaskawa product under conditions that do not meet the recom-
mended specifications.
• Problems caused by natural disaster or fire.
• Or other problems not due to defects in Yaskawa workmanship or materials.
Warranty service is only applicable within Japan.
However, after-sales service is available for customers outside of Japan for a reasonable fee.
Contact your local Yaskawa representative for more information.
Exceptions
Any inconvenience to the customer or damage to non-Yaskawa products due to Yaskawa's
defective products whether within or outside the warranty period are NOT covered by this war-
ranty.
Restrictions
• The Varispeed F7 was not designed or manufactured for use in devices or systems that may
directly affect or threaten human lives or health.
• Customers who intend to use the product described in this manual for devices or systems
relating to transportation, health care, space aviation, atomic or electric power, or underwater
use must contact their Yaskawa representatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office before-
hand.
• This product has been manufactured under strict quality-control guidelines. However, if this
product is to be installed in any location where failure of this product could involve or result
in a life-and-death situation or loss of human life or in a facility where failure may cause a
serious accident or physical injury, safety devices must be installed to minimize the likelihood
of any accident.
viii
Registered Trademarks
The following registered trademarks are used in this manual.
• DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendors Association,
Inc.).
• InterBus is a registered trademark of Phoenix Contact Co.
• ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International, Ltd.
• LONWORKS is a registered trademark of the Echelon.
Before Reading This Manual

This manual explains both the conventional Varispeed F7-Series Inverters and the F7-series
Inverters with SPEC: E or later.
The shaded sections or those specified as being for SPEC: E or later apply only to F7-series
Inverters with SPEC: E or later (Inverter with design revision order of E or later.)
Be certain to check the specification on the Inverter nameplate.
Example of Inverter Nameplate
Design revision order
1030
FILE NO: E131457
Precautions when Using a F7-series Inverter with SPEC: C or Earlier

The design revision number and software version of the F7-series Inverters with SPEC: E or
later have been modified as shown in the table below. The design revision order and software
version can be found on the Inverter nameplate. When using a F7-series Inverter with SPEC: C
or earlier, observe the following precautions.
Inverter Design Revision Order Software Version

Inverter with SPEC: C or earlier A, B, or C PRG:101
Inverter with SPEC: E or later E or later PRG:103
Precautions
• The factory settings of C6-01 (CT/VT selection) and the constants related to C6-01 of the F7-
series Inverter with SPEC: C or earlier are different from those of the F7-series Inverter with
SPEC: E or later.
Refer to Application and Overload Selections of Chapter 6 Constant Settings by Function,
and set the constants according to your application.
• The COPY function of the Digital Operator for the F7-series Inverter with SPEC: C or earlier
is limited because of the software version different from that of the F7-series Inverter with
SPEC: E or later.
Set the related constants, referring to Application and Overload Selections of Chapter 6 Con-
stant Settings by Function.
ix
Contents
Safety Information ...........................................................................................ii
Safety Precautions .........................................................................................iii
Warning Information and Position .................................................................vii
Warranty Information .................................................................................... viii
Registered Trademarks ..................................................................................ix
Before Reading This Manual ..........................................................................ix
1 Handling Inverters ...................................................................1-1

Varispeed F7 Introduction ............................................................................ 1-2
Varispeed F7 Applications .............................................................................................. 1-2
Varispeed F7 Models...................................................................................................... 1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery ........................................................................ 1-4
Checks ........................................................................................................................... 1-4
Nameplate Information ................................................................................................... 1-4
Component Names ........................................................................................................ 1-6
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions .............................................................. 1-7
Open Chassis Inverters (IP00) ....................................................................................... 1-7
Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters [NEMA1 (Type 1)] ..................................................... 1-8
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site............................................ 1-10
Installation Site ............................................................................................................. 1-10
Controlling the Ambient Temperature........................................................................... 1-10
Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter ................................................................. 1-10
Installation Orientation and Space.............................................................. 1-11
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover ............................................. 1-12
Removing the Terminal Cover ...................................................................................... 1-12
Attaching the Terminal Cover ....................................................................................... 1-12
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover ........................ 1-13
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less ........................................................................................ 1-13
Inverters of 22 kW or More ........................................................................................... 1-16
Removing and Attaching the Protection Cover .......................................... 1-17
Removing the Protection Cover ................................................................................... 1-17
Attaching the Protection Cover..................................................................................... 1-18
x
2 Wiring....................................................................................... 2-1
Connections to Peripheral Devices ..............................................................2-2
Connection Diagram.....................................................................................2-3
Terminal Block Configuration........................................................................2-5
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals .......................................................................2-6
Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors ...................................................... 2-6
Main Circuit Terminal Functions ................................................................................... 2-12
Main Circuit Configurations........................................................................................... 2-13
Standard Connection Diagrams.................................................................................... 2-14
Wiring the Main Circuits................................................................................................ 2-15
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals .................................................................2-23

Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors ...................................................................... 2-23
Control Circuit Terminal Functions ............................................................................... 2-25
Control Circuit Terminal Connections ........................................................................... 2-29
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions................................................................................ 2-30
Wiring Check ..............................................................................................2-31

Checks.......................................................................................................................... 2-31
Installing and Wiring Option Boards ...........................................................2-32
Option Board Models and Specifications ...................................................................... 2-32
Installation..................................................................................................................... 2-33
PG Speed Control Board Terminals and Specifications................................................ 2-34
Wiring............................................................................................................................ 2-36
Wiring Terminal Blocks ................................................................................................. 2-39
Selecting the Number of PG (Encoder) Pulses ............................................................ 2-40
3 Digital Operator and Modes................................................... 3-1

Digital Operator ............................................................................................3-2
Digital Operator Display.................................................................................................. 3-2
Digital Operator Keys...................................................................................................... 3-2
Modes...........................................................................................................3-5
Inverter Modes................................................................................................................ 3-5
Switching Modes............................................................................................................. 3-6
Drive Mode .....................................................................................................................3-7
Quick Programming Mode .............................................................................................. 3-8
Advanced Programming Mode ....................................................................................... 3-9
Verify Mode................................................................................................................... 3-11
Autotuning Mode........................................................................................................... 3-12
xi
4 Trial Operation .........................................................................4-1
Overview of Trial Operation Procedure ........................................................ 4-2
Trial Operation Procedures .......................................................................... 4-3
Application Confirmation ................................................................................................ 4-3
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or Higher) 4-3
Power ON....................................................................................................................... 4-3
Checking the Display Status........................................................................................... 4-4
Basic Settings................................................................................................................. 4-5
Settings for the Control Methods.................................................................................... 4-7
Autotuning ...................................................................................................................... 4-9
Application Settings...................................................................................................... 4-16
No-load Operation ........................................................................................................ 4-16
Loaded Operation......................................................................................................... 4-16
Check and Recording User Constants ......................................................................... 4-17
Adjustment Suggestions ............................................................................ 4-18
5 User Constants ........................................................................5-1

User Constant Descriptions.......................................................................... 5-2
Description of User Constant Tables .............................................................................. 5-2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels........................................... 5-3
User Constants Settable in Quick Programming Mode .................................................. 5-4
User Constant Tables ................................................................................... 5-8
A: Setup Settings............................................................................................................ 5-8
Application Constants: b............................................................................................... 5-10
Autotuning Constants: C .............................................................................................. 5-20
Reference Constants: d................................................................................................ 5-26
Motor Constant Constants: E ....................................................................................... 5-32
Option Constants: F ..................................................................................................... 5-38
Terminal Function Constants: H ................................................................................... 5-45
Protection Function Constants: L ................................................................................. 5-55
N: Special Adjustments ................................................................................................ 5-66
Digital Operator Constants: o ....................................................................................... 5-69
T: Motor Autotuning...................................................................................................... 5-73
U: Monitor Constants.................................................................................................... 5-74
Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02) ................................... 5-81
Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)................................. 5-83
6 Constant Settings by Function...............................................6-1

Application and Overload Selections ........................................................... 6-2
Select the Overload to Suit the Application .................................................................... 6-2
Frequency Reference................................................................................... 6-6
Selecting the Frequency Reference Source................................................................... 6-6
Using Multi-Step Speed Operation ............................................................................... 6-10
Varispeed F7 Function Block ....................................................................................... 6-13
xii
Run Command ...........................................................................................6-15
Selecting the Run Command Source ........................................................................... 6-15
Stopping Methods.......................................................................................6-17
Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Sent................................... 6-17
Using the DC Injection Brake........................................................................................ 6-22
Using an Emergency Stop ............................................................................................ 6-24
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics...........................................6-25
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times ............................................................... 6-25
Accelerating and Decelerating Heavy Loads (Dwell Function)..................................... 6-29
Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration
(Stall Prevention During Acceleration Function) ........................................................... 6-30
Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration
(Stall Prevention During Deceleration Function)........................................................... 6-32
Preventing Overvoltage by Automatically Reducing the Regenerative Torque Limit
(Overvoltage Inhibit Function, SPEC: E or later only)................................................... 6-33
Adjusting Frequency References ...............................................................6-35

Adjusting Analog Frequency References ..................................................................... 6-35
Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Frequency Function) ....................................... 6-38
Adjusting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Inputs ........................................... 6-40
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function) ...................................6-41
Limiting Maximum Output Frequency ........................................................................... 6-41
Limiting Minimum Frequency........................................................................................ 6-41
Improved Operating Efficiency ...................................................................6-43
Reducing Motor Speed Fluctuation (Slip Compensation Function) .............................. 6-43
Compensating for Insufficient Torque at Startup and Low-speed Operation
(Torque Compensation) ................................................................................................ 6-45
Hunting-prevention Function......................................................................................... 6-47
Stabilizing Speed (Speed Feedback Detection Function) ............................................ 6-48
Machine Protection.....................................................................................6-49
Limiting Motor Torque (Torque Limit Function) ............................................................. 6-49
Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation ................................................................. 6-52
Changing Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input .................. 6-53
Using Frequency Detection .......................................................................................... 6-53
Detecting Motor Torque ................................................................................................ 6-56
Changing Overtorque and Undertorque Detection Levels Using an Analog Input ....... 6-59
Motor Overload Protection............................................................................................ 6-60
Setting Motor Protection Operation Time...................................................................... 6-62
Motor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs........................................ 6-63
Limiting Motor Rotation Direction.................................................................................. 6-65
Continuing Operation..................................................................................6-66
Restarting Automatically After Power Is Restored ........................................................ 6-66
Speed Search ............................................................................................................... 6-67
Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is Lost............ 6-74
Restarting Operation After Transient Fault (Auto Restart Function)............................. 6-75
Operation Selection After Cooling Fan Fault (SPEC: E or Later Only)......................... 6-76
xiii
Inverter Protection...................................................................................... 6-77
Performing Overheating Protection on Mounted Braking Resistors ............................. 6-77
Reducing Inverter Overheating Pre-Alarm Warning Levels ......................................... 6-78
Input Terminal Functions ............................................................................ 6-79
Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and
Control Circuit Terminals .............................................................................................. 6-79
Blocking Inverter Outputs (Baseblock Commands)...................................................... 6-80
Stopping Acceleration and Deceleration (Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold) ....... 6-81
Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Contact Signals (UP/DOWN) .... 6-82
Accelerating and Decelerating Constant Frequencies in the Analog References
(+/- Speed) ................................................................................................................... 6-85
Hold Analog Frequency Using User-set Timing ........................................................... 6-86
Switching Operations between a Communications Option Board and
Control Circuit Terminals .............................................................................................. 6-86
Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands (FJOG/RJOG) . 6-87
Stopping the Inverter by Notifying Programming Device Errors to the Inverter
(External Fault Function) .............................................................................................. 6-88
Output Terminal Functions ......................................................................... 6-89

Monitor Constants ...................................................................................... 6-91
Using the Analog Monitor Constants ............................................................................ 6-91
Using Pulse Train Monitor Contents............................................................................. 6-94
Individual Functions ................................................................................... 6-96
Using MEMOBUS Communications ............................................................................. 6-96
Using the Timer Function ........................................................................................... 6-108
Using PID Control....................................................................................................... 6-109
Energy-saving ............................................................................................................ 6-118
Setting Motor Constants ............................................................................................. 6-120
Setting the V/f Pattern ................................................................................................ 6-122
Torque Control (SPEC: E or Later Only) .................................................................... 6-129
Speed Control (ASR) Structure .................................................................................. 6-136
Increasing the Speed Reference Response (Feed Forward Control)
(SPEC: E or Later Only) ............................................................................................. 6-142
Droop Control Function (SPEC: E or Later Only) ....................................................... 6-143
Zero-servo Function (SPEC: E or Later Only) ............................................................ 6-145
Digital Operator Functions........................................................................ 6-148
Setting Digital Operator Functions ............................................................................. 6-148
Copying Constants ..................................................................................................... 6-151
Prohibiting Writing Constants from the Digital Operator ............................................. 6-155
Setting a Password .................................................................................................... 6-155
Displaying User-set Constants Only........................................................................... 6-156
Options ..................................................................................................... 6-157

Performing Speed Control with PG ............................................................................ 6-157
Using Digital Output Boards ....................................................................................... 6-161
Using an Analog Reference Board (SPEC: E or Later Only) ..................................... 6-163
Using a Digital Reference Board (SPEC: E or Later Only)......................................... 6-164
xiv
Using Inverters for Elevating Machines ....................................................6-169
Brake ON/OFF Sequence...........................................................................................6-169
Stall Prevention during Deceleration...........................................................................6-171
Autotuning...................................................................................................................6-171
Braking Resistor Overheating Protection.................................................................... 6-171
Momentary Power Loss Restart .................................................................................6-171
Torque Limit ................................................................................................................6-171
I/O Open-phase Protection and Overtorque Detection...............................................6-172
External Baseblock Signal ..........................................................................................6-172
Acceleration/Deceleration Time .................................................................................. 6-172
Magnetic Contactor on the Inverter’s Output-side ...................................................... 6-172
Control-related Adjustments .......................................................................................6-173
Reducing Shock during Elevating Machine Start, Stop, Acceleration, and
Deceleration................................................................................................................6-175
Confirming Startup Current and Reducing Carrier Frequency....................................6-178
Overvoltage Inhibit Function (SPEC: E or Later Only)................................................6-179
7 Troubleshooting ..................................................................... 7-1

Protective and Diagnostic Functions ............................................................7-2
Fault Detection................................................................................................................ 7-2
Alarm Detection ............................................................................................................ 7-12
Operation Errors ........................................................................................................... 7-16
Errors During Autotuning .............................................................................................. 7-18
Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function................................................ 7-19
Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................7-21
If Inverter Constants Cannot Be Set ............................................................................. 7-21
If the Motor Does Not Operate...................................................................................... 7-22
If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed ........................................................ 7-25
If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow .................................. 7-25
If the Motor Operates Higher Than the Reference ....................................................... 7-25
If the Slip Compensation Function Has Low Speed Precision...................................... 7-26
If There is Low Speed Control Accuracy at High-speed Rotation in
Open-loop Vector Control Method ................................................................................ 7-26
If Motor Deceleration is Slow ........................................................................................ 7-26
If the Motor Overheats .................................................................................................. 7-27
If There is Noise When the Inverter is Started or From an AM Radio........................... 7-28
If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Inverter is Run.............................. 7-28
If There is Mechanical Oscillation ................................................................................. 7-28
If the Torque Generated for the Motor is Insufficient (Insufficient Power) ..................... 7-29
If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped........................................ 7-30
If OV is Detected When the Fan is Started, or Fan Stalls ............................................. 7-30
If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference ...................................... 7-30
xv
8 Maintenance and Inspection ..................................................8-1
Maintenance and Inspection ........................................................................ 8-2
Outline of Free Warranty ................................................................................................ 8-2
Daily Inspection .............................................................................................................. 8-2
Periodic Inspection ......................................................................................................... 8-2
Periodic Maintenance of Parts ....................................................................................... 8-3
Procedure for Adjusting Constants after Replacement of Control Board ....................... 8-3
Types and Number of Cooling Fans Used in the Drive .................................................. 8-4
Cooling Fan Replacement Outline ................................................................................. 8-6
Circulation Fan Replacement Outline........................................................................... 8-16
Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Board ....................................... 8-21
9 Specifications ..........................................................................9-1
Standard Inverter Specifications................................................................... 9-2
Specifications by Model.................................................................................................. 9-2
Common Specifications.................................................................................................. 9-4
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices........................................ 9-6
10 Appendix ................................................................................10-1
Varispeed F7 Control Methods................................................................... 10-2
Control Methods and Features..................................................................................... 10-2
Control Methods and Applications................................................................................ 10-4
Inverter Application Precautions ................................................................ 10-6
Selection....................................................................................................................... 10-6
Installation .................................................................................................................... 10-7
Settings ........................................................................................................................ 10-7
Handling ....................................................................................................................... 10-7
Motor Application Precautions ................................................................... 10-9

Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor........................................................ 10-9
Using the Inverter for Special Motors ......................................................................... 10-10
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains) ................... 10-10
Conformance to UL Standard................................................................... 10-11
Conformance to CE Markings .................................................................. 10-13
CE Markings............................................................................................................... 10-13
Requirements for Conformance to CE Markings........................................................ 10-13
xvi
Wiring Examples.......................................................................................10-20
Using a Braking Resistor Unit.....................................................................................10-20
Using a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit .........................................................10-21
Using Braking Units in Parallel ...................................................................................10-22
Using a Braking Unit and Three Braking Resistor Units in Parallel ............................10-23
Using a VS Operator...................................................................................................10-24
Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 0-V Common in Sinking Mode with an
Internal Power Supply.................................................................................................10-25
Using Transistors for Input Signals and a +24-V Common in Sourcing Mode............ 10-26
Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 0-V Common in Sinking Mode with an
External Power Supply ...............................................................................................10-27
Using Contact and Open Collector Outputs................................................................10-28
User Constants .........................................................................................10-29
Index
Revision History
xvii
Handling Inverters
This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving or installing an Inverter.
Varispeed F7 Introduction ............................................1-2

Confirmations upon Delivery........................................1-4
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions..............................1-7
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site ...........1-10
Installation Orientation and Space ............................. 1-11
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover ............1-12
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator
and Front Cover.........................................................1-13
Removing and Attaching the Protection Cover ..........1-17
Varispeed F7 Introduction
Varispeed F7 Applications
The Varispeed F7 is ideal for the following applications.
• Fan, blower, and pump applications
• Conveyors, pushers, metal tooling machines, etc.
Settings must be adjusted to the application for optimum operation. Refer to Chapter 4 Trial Operation.
Varispeed F7 Models
The Varispeed-F7 Series of Inverters included two Inverters in two voltage classes: 200 V and 400 V. Maximum motor
capacities vary from 0.4 to 300 kW (41 models).
Table 1.1 Varispeed F7 Models

Specifications
Maximum Varispeed F7
(Always specify through the protective structure when ordering.)
Voltage Motor
Output Open Chassis Enclosed Wall-mounted
Class Capacity
kW Capacity Basic Model Number (IEC IP00) [IEC IP20, NEMA 1 (Type 1)]
kVA CIMR-F7 CIMR-F7A
0.4 1.2 CIMR-F7A20P4 20P41
0.75 1.6 CIMR-F7A20P7 20P71
1.5 2.7 CIMR-F7A21P5 21P51
2.2 3.7 CIMR-F7A22P2 Remove the top and bottom cov- 22P21
3.7 5.7 CIMR-F7A23P7 ers from the Enclosed Wall- 23P71
5.5 8.8 CIMR-F7A25P5 mounted model. 25P51
7.5 12 CIMR-F7A27P5 27P51
11 17 CIMR-F7A2011 20111
15 22 CIMR-F7A2015 20151
200 V Class
18.5 27 CIMR-F7A2018 20181
20220
22 32 CIMR-F7A2022 20221
30 44 CIMR-F7A2030 20300 20301
37 55 CIMR-F7A2037 20370 20371
45 69 CIMR-F7A2045 20450 20451
55 82 CIMR-F7A2055 20550 20551
75 110 CIMR-F7A2075 20750 20751
90 130 CIMR-F7A2090 20900 20901
110 160 CIMR-F7A2110 21100 -
1-2
Varispeed F7 Introduction
Table 1.1 Varispeed F7 Models (Continued)

Specifications
Maximum Varispeed F7
(Always specify through the protective structure when ordering.)
Voltage Motor
Output Open Chassis Enclosed Wall-mounted
Class Capacity
Capacity Basic Model Number (IEC IP00) [IEC IP20, NEMA 1 (Type 1)]
kW
kVA CIMR-F7 CIMR-F7A
0.4 1.4 CIMR-F7A40P4 40P41
0.75 1.6 CIMR-F7A40P7 40P71
1.5 2.8 CIMR-F7A41P5 41P51
2.2 4.0 CIMR-F7A42P2 Remove the top and bottom cov- 42P21
ers from the Enclosed Wall-
3.7 5.8 CIMR-F7A43P7 43P71
mount model.
5.5 9.5 CIMR-F7A45P5 45P51
7.5 13 CIMR-F7A47P5 47P51
11 18 CIMR-F7A4011 40111
15 24 CIMR-F7A4015 40151
18.5 30 CIMR-F7A4018 40181
40220
22 34 CIMR-F7A4022 40221
400 V Class 30 46 CIMR-F7A4030 40300 40301
37 57 CIMR-F7A4037 40370 40371
45 69 CIMR-F7A4045 40450 40451
55 85 CIMR-F7A4055 40550 40551
75 110 CIMR-F7A4075 40750 40751
90 140 CIMR-F7A4090 40900 40901
110 160 CIMR-F7A4110 41100 41101
132 200 CIMR-F7A4132 41320 41321
160 230 CIMR-F7A4160 41600 41601
185 280 CIMR-F7A4185 41850 -
220 390 CIMR-F7A4220 42200 -
300 510 CIMR-F7A4300 43000 -
1-3
Checks
Check the following items as soon as the Inverter is delivered.
Table 1.2 Checks

Item Method
Has the correct model of Inverter been
Check the model number on the nameplate on the side of the Inverter.
delivered?
Inspect the entire exterior of the Inverter to see if there are any scratches or
Is the Inverter damaged in any way?
other damage resulting from shipping.
Are any screws or other components
Use a screwdriver or other tools to check for tightness.
loose?
If you find any irregularities in the above items, contact the agency from which you purchased the Inverter or
your Yaskawa representative immediately.
Nameplate Information
There is a nameplate attached to the side of each Inverter. The nameplate shows the model number, specifica-
tions, lot number, serial number, and other information on the Inverter.
Example Nameplate
The following nameplate is an example for a standard domestic (Japan) Inverter: 3-phase, 200 VAC, 0.4 kW,
IEC IP20 and NEMA 1 (Type 1) standards
Inverter model E Inverter

specifications
Input specifications
Output
specifications
Lot number Mass
Software version
Serial number 1030 number
UL file number FILE NO: E131457
Fig 1.1 Nameplate
1-4
Inverter Model Numbers

The model number of the Inverter on the nameplate indicates the specification, voltage class, and maximum
motor capacity of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
CIMR - F7 A 2 0P4
Inverter
Varispeed F7
No. Specification No. Max. Motor Capacity
A Standard domestic model 0P4 0.4 kW
0P7 0.75 kW
to to
No. Voltage Class 300 300 kW
2 AC input, 3-phase, 200 V "P" indicates the decimal point.
4 AC input, 3-phase, 400 V
Fig 1.2 Inverter Model Numbers
Inverter Specifications
The Inverter specifications (“SPEC”) on the nameplate indicate the voltage class, maximum motor capacity,
the protective structure, and the revision of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
2 0P4 1 E
No. Voltage Class
2 AC input, 3-phase, 200 V Design revision order
4 AC input, 3-phase, 400 V
No. Max. Motor Capacity No. Protective Structure

0P4 0.4 kW 0 Open chassis (IEC IP00)
0P7 0.75 kW 1 Enclosed wall-mounted (IEC IP20,
to to NEMA 1 (Type 1))
300 300 kW
"P" indicates the decimal point.
Fig 1.3 Inverter Specifications
Open Chassis Type (IEC IP00)

Protected so that parts of the human body cannot reach electrically charged parts from the front when the
Inverter is mounted in a control panel.
TERMS Enclosed Wall-mounted Type (IEC IP20, NEMA 1 (Type 1))
The Inverter is structured so that the Inverter is shielded from the exterior, and can thus be mounted to the
interior wall of a standard building (not necessarily enclosed in a control panel). The protective structure con-
forms to the standards of NEMA 1 (Type 1) in the USA. The protective covers (see Fig. 1.4) are required for
an IEC IP20 or NEMA 1 (Type 1) protective structure.
1-5
Component Names
The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 1.4. The Inverter with the ter-
minal cover removed is shown in Fig 1.5.
Top protective cover

Mounting
hole
Inverter cover
Cooling
fan
Front Mounting hole Front cover
cover
Digital Diecast case Digital

Operator
Operator
Terminal
Nameplate Terminal
cover Nameplate
cover
Bottom protective cover
18.5 kW or Less 22 kW or More
Fig 1.4 Inverter Appearance
Charge indicator
E (G) FM AC AM P1 P2 PC SC MP
SC A1 A2 A3 +V AC -V RP R+ R- S+ S- MA MB MC
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 IG M1 M2 E (G)
Control circuit
terminals
R1/L11 S1/L21 T1/L21 1 3
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
Main circuit
terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
18.5 kW or Less 22 kW or More
Fig 1.5 Terminal Arrangement (Examples of Inverters with SPEC: E or later)
1-6
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
Open Chassis Inverters (IP00)

Exterior diagrams of the Open Chassis Inverters are shown below.
W1 W1 4-d
4-d
H1
H
H1
t1
H2
D1
t1 (5) W (5) (5) D
* (10) for 200 V Class Inverters of 37 to 110 kW or 400 V Class Invert-
H2
W D1 ers of 75 to 160 kW.
3 D
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 18.5 kW 200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 110 kW
400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 160 kW
W1
6-d
W2
H1
H
H2
W3 t1
W1 D1
(15) W (15) (5) D
Fig 1.6 Exterior Diagrams of Open Chassis Inverters
1-7
Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters [NEMA1 (Type 1)]
Exterior diagrams of the Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters [NEMA1 (Type 1)] are shown below.
W1 4-d W1 4-d
H1
H0
H
H1
H0
H2
t1
H3
Max.10
t1 D1
(5)* (5)*
H2
H3
W (5) D
W D1
Grommet
3 D * (7.5) for 200 V Class Inverters of 37 to 90 kW or 400 V Class Inverters
of 75 to 160 kW.
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 18.5 kW
Fig 1.7 Exterior Diagrams of Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters
1-8
Table 1.3 Inverter Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg)

Max. Caloric Value
Dimensions (mm)
Appli- (W)
Voltage cable Open Chassis (IP00) Enclosed Wall-mounted [NEMA1 (Type 1)] Total Cool-
ing
Class Motor Heat
Ap- Ap- Mount- Exter Inter- Method
Gen-
Output W H D W1 H1 H2 D1 t1 prox. W H D W1 H0 H1 H2 H3 D1 t1 prox.
ing nal nal
era-
Holes
[kW] Mass Mass d* tion
0.4 20 39 59
0.75 27 42 69 Natu-
157 39 3 157 39 3
1.5 50 50 100 ral
140 280 126 266 7 5 140 280 126 280 266 7 5 M5
2.2 0 70 59 129
3.7 112 74 186
177 59 4 177 59 4
5.5 164 84 248
7.5 6 300 6 219 113 332
200 300 197 186 285 8 65.5 200 197 186 300 285 8 65.5
11 7 310 10 7 374 170 544
200 V 15 350 0 429 183 612
240 350 207 216 335 78 2.3 11 240 207 216 350 335 78 2.3 11 M6
(3-phase) 18.5 380 30 501 211 712
7.5 7.5
22 250 400 195 385 21 254 535 195 400 385 135 24 586 274 860
258 100 258 100 Fan
30 275 450 220 435 24 279 615 220 450 435 165 27 865 352 1217
37 298 100 57 298 100 62 1015 411 1426
375 600 250 575 380 809 250 600 575 209
45 328 63 328 68 1266 505 1771
12.5 3.2 12.5 3.2 M10
55 86 94 1588 619 2207
450 725 348 325 700 130 453 1027 348 325 725 700 302 130
75 87 95 2019 838 2857
90 500 850 358 370 820 108 504 1243 358 370 850 820 15 393 4.5 114 2437 997 3434
15 4.5 M12
110 575 885 378 445 855 140 150 --- 2733 1242 3975
0.4 14 39 53
Natu-
0.75 157 39 3 157 39 3 17 41 58
ral
1.5 36 48 84
140 280 126 266 7 5 140 280 126 280 266 7 5 M5
2.2 59 56 115
3.7 177 59 4 177 59 4 80 68 148
0
5.5 127 82 209
7.5 193 114 307
200 300 197 186 285 8 65.5 6 200 300 197 186 300 285 8 65.5 6
11 252 158 410
15 326 172 498
240 350 207 216 335 78 10 240 350 207 216 350 335 78 10
400 V 18.5 426 208 634
(3-phase) 22 2.3 2.3 M6 466 259 725
275 450 258 220 435 100 21 279 535 258 220 450 435 100 24
30 7.5 7.5 85 678 317 995 Fan
37 635 784 360 1144
45 325 550 283 260 535 105 36 329 283 260 550 535 105 40 901 415 1316
715 165
55 1203 495 1698
75 88 96 1399 575 1974
450 725 348 325 700 12.5 3.2 453 1027 348 325 725 700 12.5 302 3.2 M10
90 89 97 1614 671 2285
130 130
110 102 122 2097 853 2950
500 850 358 370 820 15 504 1243 358 370 850 820 15 393
132 4.5 120 4.5 130 M12 2388 1002 3390
160 575 910 378 445 855 46 140 160 579 1324 378 445 916 855 46 408 140 170 2791 1147 3938
* Same for Open Chassis and Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters.

Table 1.4 400 VAC (185 to 300 kW) Inverter Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg)
Dimensions (mm) Heat Generation (W)
Max.
Appli- Enclosed Wall-mounted [NEMA1 (Type 1)]
Open Chassis (IP00)
Voltage cable Total Cooling
Class Motor Exter- Inter- Heat Method
Ap- Ap- Mount-
nal nal Gener-
Output W H D W1 W2 W3 H1 H2 D1 t1 prox. W H D W1 W2 W3 H1 H2 D1 t1 prox.
ing
ation
[kW] Holes
Mass Mass d*
185 260 3237 1372 4609

710 1305 413 540 240 270 1270 15 125.5 4.5
400 V Natu-
220 280 --- M12 3740 1537 5277
(3-phase) ral
300 916 1475 413 730 365 365 1440 15 125.5 4.5 405 5838 2320 8158
1-9
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site
Install the Inverter in the installation site described below and maintain optimum conditions.
Installation Site
Install the Inverter under the following conditions and a pollution level of 2 or less (UL standard).
Table 1.5 Installation Site

Type Ambient Operating Temperature Humidity
Enclosed wall-mounted -10 to + 40 °C 95% RH or less (no condensation)
Open chassis -10 to + 45 °C 95% RH or less (no condensation)
Protection covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Inverter. Be sure to remove the protection covers
before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18.5 kW or less in a panel. Refer to Page 1-17
on how to remove the protection covers.
Observe the following precautions when mounting the Inverter.
• Install the Inverter in a clean location free from oil mist and dust. It can be installed in a totally enclosed
panel that is completely shielded from floating dust.
• When installing or operating the Inverter, always take special care so that metal powder, oil, water, or other
foreign matter does not get into the Inverter.
• Do not install the Inverter on combustible material, such as wood.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from radioactive materials and combustible materials.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids.
• Install the Inverter in a location without excessive oscillation.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from chlorides.
• Install the Inverter in a location not in direct sunlight.
Controlling the Ambient Temperature

To enhance the reliability of operation, the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme
temperature increases. If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment, such as a box, use a cooling fan
or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 45°C.
Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter

Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal powder produced by drilling.
Always remove the cover from the Inverter after completing installation. Otherwise, ventilation will be
reduced, causing the Inverter to overheat.
1-10
Installation Orientation and Space
Installation Orientation and Space

Install the Inverter vertically so as not to reduce the cooling effect. When installing the Inverter, always
provide the following installation space to allow normal heat dissipation.
A mm min. B mm min.
Air
30 mm min. 30 mm min.
120 mm min.
50 mm min. Air
Horizontal Space Vertical Space
200 V Class Inverters of 110 kW or 400 V Class Inverters of 160 to 220 kW*: A = 120, B = 120
400 V Class Inverters of 300 kW*: A = 300, B = 300
All other Inverters*: A = 50, B = 120
*If, however, there is a fan in the top of the control panel with sufficient exhaust capacity, the following
dimensions may be used: A = 50, B = 120.
Fig 1.8 Inverter Installation Orientation and Space
1. The same space is required horizontally and vertically for both Open Chassis (IP00) and Enclosed Wall-
mounted [IP20, NEMA 1 (Type 1)] Inverters.
2. Always remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18.5
IMPORTANT kW or less in a panel. Refer to Page 1-17 on how to remove the protection covers.
Always provide enough space for suspension eye bolts and the main circuit lines when installing a 200 or
400 V Class Inverter with an output of 22 kW or more in a panel.
1-11
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover
Remove the terminal cover to wire cables to the control circuit and main circuit terminals.
Removing the Terminal Cover
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

Loosen the screws at the bottom of the terminal cover, press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the direc-
tion indicated by arrow 1, and then lift the terminal cover up to an angle of about 30 degrees in the direction
indicated by arrow 2.
Remove the terminal cover in the direction indicated by arrow 3.
2
1 Approx. 30°
Fig 1.9 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-F7A20P4 Shown Above)
Inverters of 22 kW or More
Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover, pull out the terminal cover in the direc-
tion of arrow 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.
1
2
Fig 1.10 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-F7A2022 Shown Above)
Attaching the Terminal Cover

When wiring the terminal block has been completed, attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal proce-
dure.
For Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less, insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the grove on
the Inverter and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it clicks into place.
1-12
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and

Front Cover
The methods of removing and attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover are described in this sec-
tion.
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

To attach optional boards or change the terminal board connector, remove the Digital Operator and front cover
in addition to the terminal cover. Always remove the Digital Operator from the front cover before removing
the terminal cover.
The removal and attachment procedures are given below.
Removing the Digital Operator

Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock the Digital Operator
and lift the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the Digital Operator as shown in the follow-
ing illustration.
2
1
Fig 1.11 Removing the Digital Operator (Model CIMR-F7A40P4 Shown Above)
1-13
Removing the Front Cover
Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the directions of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of the cover in
the direction of arrow 2 to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration.
Fig 1.12 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-F7A40P4 Shown Above)
Mounting the Front Cover

After wiring the terminals, mount the front cover to the Inverter by performing in reverse order to the steps to
remove the front cover.
1. Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover; otherwise, Digital
Operator may malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Inverter and press the lower part of
the front cover onto the Inverter until the front cover snaps shut.
Mounting the Digital Operator

After attaching the terminal cover, mount the Digital Operator onto the Inverting using the following proce-
dure.
1. Hook the Digital Operator at A (two locations) on the front cover in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in
the following illustration.
2. Press the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B (two locations).
1-14
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover
Fig 1.13 Mounting the Digital Operator
1. Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator or mount or remove the front cover using methods other than
those described above, otherwise the Inverter may break or malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Never attach the front cover to the Inverter with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover. Imperfect
IMPORTANT contact can result.
Always attach the front cover to the Inverter by itself first, and then attach the Digital Operator to the front
cover.
1-15
Inverters of 22 kW or More
For Inverter with an output of 22 kW or more, remove the terminal cover and then use the following proce-
dures to remove the Digital Operator and front cover.
Removing the Digital Operator

Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.
Removing the Front Cover

Lift up at the location label 1 at the top of the control circuit terminal board in the direction of arrow 2.
Fig 1.14 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-F7A2022 Shown Above)
Attaching the Front Cover

After completing required work, such as mounting an optional board or setting the control circuit terminal
board, attach the front cover by reversing the procedure to remove it.
1. Confirm that the Digital Operator is not mounted on the front cover. Contact faults can occur if the cover is
attached while the Digital Operator is mounted to it.
2. Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the Inverter and press in on the cover until it
clicks into place on the Inverter.
Attaching the Digital Operator

Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.
1-16
Removing and Attaching the Protection Cover
Removing and Attaching the Protection Cover

Inverters of 18.5 kW or less have protection covers on the top and bottom as shown in Fig. 1.4.Always
remove the protection covers before installing an Inverter of 18.5 kW or less in a panel. Use the following
procedure to remove and attach a protection cover.
Removing the Protection Cover
Top Protection Cover

Insert the tip of the straightedge screwdriver in the slot. Then, lift the cover up in the direction shown by the
arrow to remove it.
Slot
Fig 1.15 Removing the Top Protection Cover (Model CIMR-F7A45P5 Shown Above)
Bottom Protection Cover

1. Remove the terminal cover as described on Page 1-12.
2. Loosen the two screws, and remove the protection cover.
3. Return the screws to their original position and tighten (them).
4. Reattach the terminal cover as described on Page 1-12.
Terminal Cover
Screws
Bottom Protection
Cover
Fig 1.16 Removing the Bottom Protection Cover (Model CIMR-F7A45P5 Shown Above)
1-17
Attaching the Protection Cover
Top Protection Cover

The protection cover has four hooks: two hooks on the bottom and two on the sides. Fit the bottom hooks into
the holes, bend the cover slightly, and press the cover down until the hooks on the side snap.
Holes for bottom hooks
Fig 1.17 Attaching the Top Protection Cover (Model CIMR-F7A45P5 Shown Above)
Bottom Protection Cover

To attach the bottom protection cover, reverse the procedure used to remove it.
1-18
Wiring
This chapter describes wiring terminals, main circuit terminal connections, main circuit termi-
nal wiring specifications, control circuit terminals, and control circuit wiring specifications.
Connections to Peripheral Devices..............................2-2

Connection Diagram ....................................................2-3
Terminal Block Configuration .......................................2-5
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals ......................................2-6
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals ................................2-23
Wiring Check .............................................................2-31
Installing and Wiring Option Boards ..........................2-32
Connections to Peripheral Devices
Examples of connections between the Inverter and typical peripheral devices are shown in Fig 2.1.
Power supply
Molded-case
circuit breaker
or ground fault
interrupter
Magnetic con-
tactor (MC)
AC reactor for power
factor improvement
Zero phase reactor
Braking resistor
Input noise filter
Inverter
Varispeed F7 DC reactor for power
factor improvement
Ground
Output noise filter
Zero phase reactor
Motor
Ground
Fig 2.1 Example Connections to Peripheral Devices
2-2
Connection Diagram
Connection Diagram
The connection diagram of the Inverter is shown in Fig 2.2.
When using the Digital Operator, the motor can be operated by wiring only the main circuits.
Thermal relay
Thermal switch contact trip contact
Braking Unit 3 4 1 2
(optional) + +0 P
Level
detector -0 B
Motor
2MCCB Braking Resistor Unit
FU - (optional)
FU Cooling fan
FV
FW FV IM
+1 +3 -
FW
1MCCB MC
3-phase R R/L1 Inverter U/T1 U
power V
200 to 240 V S S/L2 CIMR-F7A2022 V/T2 IM
50/60 Hz T T/L3 W
W/T3
ON
Forward Run/Stop S1
2MCCB THRX OFF MC (Ground to 100 max.)
MC PG-B2 TA1
SA Reverse Run/Stop S2
Thermal relay trip contact (optional) 1 C
for Braking Resistor Unit Thermal switch contact 2 H
THRX for Braking Unit 3 B
1 2 4 G
Thermal relay trip contact SA External fault 3 4
S3 5 A
PG
for motor cooling fan 6 F
1 2
Fault reset S4 TA3 D
MC TRX Shieded twisted-pair

Multi-step speed reference 1 TA2 wires
1
SA (Main speed switching) g)) S5 Pulse monitor output
2 Pulse A
TRX Multi-step speed 3
30 mA max.
reference 2 S6 4 Pulse B Wiring distance:
d :
MCC MA
Fault contact 30 m max.
Jog frequency
selection S7
Multi-function External
contact inputs baseblock command S8 MP
Factory Pulse train output
settings +24V 8mA 0 to 32 kHz (2.2 kΩ)
AC Default: Output
frequency
Ammeter adjustment
AM 20 kΩ
Multi-function analog output 2
-10 to 10 V 2 mA
Default: Output current
AM 0 to +10 V
CN5 (NPN setting)
Ammeter adjustment
FM 20 kΩ
SC Multi-function analog output 1
AC -10 to 10 V 2 mA
FM Default: Output frequency
0 to +10 V
+24V
E (G) E(G)
Shield wire
connection terminal
Pulse train input Master speed MA Error contact output
RP pulse train
MAA
250 VAC, 10 mA min.
Frequency setting 0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ) MB 1 A max. Min. load
2 k Ω adjustment High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V input
MC 30 VDC, 10 mA min. 5 VDC, 10 mA
MCC
Frequency 1 A max.
setter +V Frequency setting power
3 +15 V, 20 mA
2kΩ
0 to 10 V M1
External A1 Master speed reference Multi-function contact oputput
2
frequency 1 4 to 20 mA P 0 to 10 V (20 kΩ) 250 VAC, 10 mA min. 1 A max. Min. load
M2
references A2 Master speed reference 30 VDC, 10 mA min. 1 A max. 5 VDC, 10 mA
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω) Default: Running
[0 to 10 V (20 kΩ) input] signal
0 to 10 V P
A3 Multi-function anlog input
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ) P1
P AC Open collector 1
Factory setting: Default: Zero-
0V Not used speed
Multi-function
-V (15V 20mA) P2 open-collector outputs
Open collector 2 48 VDC 50 mA max.
Default: Frequency
Terminating agree signal
resistance
PC
R+
R-
MEMOBUS
communications S+
RS-485/422
S-
( IG
Fig 2.2 Connection Diagram (Model CIMR-F7A2022 Shown Above)
2-3
1. Control circuit terminals are arranged as shown below.
Inverters with SPEC: C or earlier
IMPORTANT
Inverters with SPEC: E or later
2. The output current capacity of the +V and −V terminals are 20 mA. Do not short-circuit between the +V, −V,
and AC terminals. Doing so may result in a malfunction or a breakdown of the Inverter.
3. Disable the stall prevention during deceleration (set constant L3-04 to 0) when using a Braking Resistor
Unit. If this user constant is not changed to disable stall prevention, the system may not stop during decel-
eration.
4. Main circuit terminals are indicated with double circles and control circuit terminals are indicated with single
circles.
5. The wiring for a motor with a cooling fan is not required for self-cooling motors.
6. PG circuit wiring (i.e., wiring to the PG-B2 Board) is not required for control without a PG.
7. Sequence input signals S1 to S8 are labeled for sequence connections (0 V common and sinking mode)
for no-voltage contacts or NPN transistors. These are the default settings.
For PNP transistor sequence connections (+24V common and sourcing mode) or to provide a 24-V exter-
nal power supply, refer to Table 2.13.
8. The master speed frequency reference can set to input either a voltage (terminal A1) or current (terminal
A2) by changing the setting of parameter H3-13. The default setting is for a voltage reference input.
9. The multi-function analog output is a dedicated meter output for an analog frequency meter, ammeter, volt-
meter, wattmeter, etc. Do not use this output for feedback control or for any other control purpose.
10.DC reactors to improve the input power factor are built into 200 V Class Inverters for 22 to 110 kW and 400
V Class Inverters for 22 to 300 kW. A DC reactor is thus an option only for Inverters for 18.5 kW or less.
11.Set parameter L8-01 to 1 when using a breaking resistor (ERF). When using a Braking Resistor Unit, a
shutoff sequence for the power supply must be made using a thermal relay trip.
12.The permissible load of a multi-function contact output and an error contact output is 10 mA. Use a multi-
function open-collector output for a load less than 10 mA.
13.Do not ground nor connect the AC terminal on the control circuit to the unit. Doing so may result in a mal-
function or a breakdown of the Inverter.
14.If turning off the power only for the main circuit but leaving the power ON for the control circuit, use a sep-
arate power supply for the control circuit and a specially designed Inverter, which are sold as options.
15. indicates shield wire and P indicates twisted-pair shield wire.
2-4
Terminal Block Configuration
Terminal Block Configuration

The terminal arrangement for 200 V Class Inverters are shown in Fig 2.3 and Fig 2.4.
E (G) FM AC AM P1 P2 PC SC MP
SC A1 A2 A3 +V AC -V RP R+ R- S+ S- MA MB MC
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 IG M1 M2 E (G)
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
Fig 2.3 　Terminal Arrangement (200 V Class Inverter with SPEC: E or later for 0.4 kW Shown Above)
Control circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Main circuit terminals
Ground terminal
Fig 2.4 Terminal Arrangement (200 V Class Inverter with SPEC: E or later for 22 kW Shown Above)
2-5
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors

Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from Table 2.1 to Table 2.3. Refer to instruction manual
TOBPC72060000 for wire sizes for Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units.
Table 2.1 200 V Class Wire Sizes

Recom-
Inverter Termi- Tightening Possible mended
Model Terminal Symbol nal Torque Wire Sizes Wire Size Wire Type
CIMR- Screws
(N•m) mm2(AWG) mm2
(AWG)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
2 to 5.5 2
F7A20P4 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

2 to 5.5 2
F7A20P7 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

2 to 5.5 2
F7A21P5 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

2 to 5.5 2
F7A22P2 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

3.5 to 5.5 3.5
F7A23P7 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(12 to 10) (12)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

5.5 5.5
F7A25P5 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(10) (10)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

8 to 14 8
F7A27P5 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M5 2.5
(8 to 6) (8)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2, Power cables,

14 to 22 14
F7A2011 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M5 2.5 e.g., 600 V vinyl
(6 to 4) (6)
power cables
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2, 30 to 38 30
M6 4.0 to 5.0
W/T3 (4 to 2) (4)
F7A2015 8 to 14
B1, B2 M5 2.5 -
(8 to 6)
22 22
M6 4.0 to 5.0
(4) (4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2, 30 to 38 30
M8 9.0 to 10.0
W/T3 (3 to 2) (3)
F7A2018 8 to 14
B1, B2 M5 2.5 -
(8 to 6)
22 22
M6 4.0 to 5.0
(4) (4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, 30 to 60 30
M8 9.0 to 10.0
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (3 to 1) (3)
F7A2022 8 to 22
3 M6 4.0 to 5.0 -
(8 to 4)
22 to 38 22
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1, 50 to 60 50
M8 9.0 to 10.0
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (1 to 1/0) (1)
F7A2030 8 to 22
3 M6 4.0 to 5.0 -
(8 to 4)
22 to 38 22
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)
2-6
Table 2.1 200 V Class Wire Sizes (Continued)

Recom-
CIMR- Screws
(N•m) mm2(AWG) mm2
(AWG)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1, 60 to 100 60
M10 17.6 to 22.5
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (2/0 to 4/0) (2/0)
5.5 to 22
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
F7A2037 (10 to 4)
30 to 60 30
M10 17.6 to 22.5
(2 to 2/0) (2)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/ 1, / 2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1, 80 to 100 80
M10 17.6 to 22.5
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (3/0 to 4/0) (3/0)
5.5 to 22
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
F7A2045 (10 to 4)
38 to 60 38
M10 17.6 to 22.5
(1 to 2/0) (1)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/ 1, / 2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
50 to 100 50 × 2P
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M10 17.6 to 22.5
(1/0 to 4/0) (1/0 × 2P)
100 100
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 M10 17.6 to 22.5
(4/0) (4/0)
5.5 to 60
F7A2055 3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
(10 to 2/0)
30 to 60 50
M10 17.6 to 22.5
(3 to 4/0) (1/0)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/ 1, / 2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
80 to 125 80 × 2P
, 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(3/0 to 250) (3/0 × 2P)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, 80 to 100 80 × 2P
M10 17.6 to 22.5
S1/L21, T1/L31 (3/0 to 4/0) (3/0 × 2P) Power cables,
5.5 to 60 e.g., 600 V vinyl
F7A2075 3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
(10 to 2/0) power cables
100 to 200 100
M12 31.4 to 39.2
(3/0 to 400) (3/0)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/ 1, / 2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
150 to 200 150 × 2P
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(250 to 400) (250 × 2P)
100 to 150 100 × 2P
(4/0 to 300) (4/0 × 2P)
5.5 to 60
F7A2090 3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
(10 to 2/0)
60 to 150 60 × 2P
M12 31.4 to 39.2
(2/0 to 300) (2/0 × 2P)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/ 1, / 2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
200 × 2P,
or 50 × 4P
200 to 325
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2 (350 × 2P,
(350 to 600)
or 1/0 ×
2P)
150 × 2P,
or 50 × 4P
150 to 325
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 M12 31.4 to 39.2 (300 × 2P,
F7A2110 (300 to 600)
or 1/0 ×
4P)
5.5 to 60
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
(10 to 2/0)
150 150 × 2P
M12 31.4 to 39.2
(300) (300 × 2P)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/ 1, / 2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75°C
2-7
Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes
Recom-
CIMR- Screws
(N•m) mm2 (AWG) mm2
(AWG)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
2 to 5.5 2
F7A40P4 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

2 to 5.5 2
F7A40P7 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

2 to 5.5 2
F7A41P5 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

2 to 5.5 2
F7A42P2 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2, 3.5

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2 to 5.5 (12)
F7A43P7 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) 2
(14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2, 3.5 to 5.5 3.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 (12 to 10) (12)
F7A45P5 M4 1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5 2
(14 to 10) (14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2, 5.5
5.5(10)
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 (10)
F7A47P5 M4 1.8
3.5 to 5.5 3.5
(12 to 10) (12)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2, 8
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 5.5 to 14 (8)
F7A4011 M5 2.5
(10 to 6) 5.5
(10) Power cables,
e.g., 600 V vinyl
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2, 8 to 14 8
M5 2.5 power cables
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 (8 to 6) (8)
F7A4015
M5 2.5 5.5 to 14 5.5
(M6) (4.0 to 5.0) (10 to 6) (10)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2, 8 to 38 8
M6 4.0 to 5.0
W/T3 (8 to 2) (8)
F7A4018 8 8
B1, B2 M5 2.5
(8) (8)
8 to 22 8
M6 4.0 to 5.0
(8 to 4) (8)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1, V/T2, 14 to 22 14
M6 4.0 to 5.0
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (6 to 4) (6)
F7A4022
14 to 38 14
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(6 to 2) (6)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1, V/T2, 22 22
M6 4.0 to 5.0
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (4) (4)
F7A4030
22 to 38 22
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, W/ 22 to 60 38
M8 9.0 to 10.0
T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (4 to 1/0) (2)
F7A4037 8 to 22
3 M6 4.0 to 5.0 -
(8 to 4)
22 to 38 22
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, W/ 38 to 60 38
M8 9.0 to 10.0
T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (2 to 1/0) (2)
F7A4045 8 to 22
3 M6 4.0 to 5.0 -
(8 to 4)
22 to 38 22
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)
2-8

Recom-
CIMR- Screws
(AWG)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, 50 to 60 50
M8 9.0 to 10.0
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (1 to 1/0) (1)
F7A4055 8 to 22
3 M6 4.0 to 5.0 -
(8 to 4)
22 to 38 22
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)
60 to 100 60
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M10 17.6 to 22.5
(2/0 to 4/0) (2/0)
50 to 100 50
(1/0 to 4/0) (1/0)
5.5 to 22
F7A4075 3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
(10 to 4)
38 to 60 38
M10 17.6 to 22.5
(2 to 2/0) (2)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/ 1, 200/ 2200, 400/ 2400 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
80 to 100 100
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M10 17.6 to 22.5
(3/0 to 4/0) (4/0)
80 to 100 100
(3/0 to 4/0) (4/0)
8 to 22
F7A4090 3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
(8 to 4)
50 to 100 50
M10 17.6 to 22.5
(1 to 4/0) (1)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/ 1, 200/ 2200, 400/ 2400 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
50 to 100 50 × 2P Power cables,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M10 17.6 to 22.5
(1/0 to 4/0) (1/0 × 2P) e.g., 600 V vinyl
50 to 100 50 × 2P power cables
(1/0 to 4/0) (1/0 × 2P)
8 to 60
F7A4110 3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
(8 to 2/0)
60 to 150 60
M12 31.4 to 39.2
(2/0 to 300) (2/0)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/ 1, 200/ 2200, 400/ 2400 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
80 to 100 80 × 2P
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M10 17.6 to 22.5
(3/0 to 4/0) (3/0 × 2P)
60 to 100 60 × 2P
(2/0 to 4/0) (2/0 × 2P)
8 to 60
F7A4132 3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
(8 to 2/0)
100 to 150 100
M12 31.4 to 39.2
(4/0 to 300) (4/0)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/ 1, 200/ 2200, 400/ 2400 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
100 to 200 100 × 2P
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(4/0 to 400) (4/0 × 2P)
80 to 200 80 × 2P
(3/0 to 400) (3/0 × 2P)
8 to 60
F7A4160 3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
(8 to 2/0)
50 to 150 50 × 2P
M12 31.4 to 39.2
(1/0 to 300) (1/0 × 2P)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/ 1, 200/ 2200, 400/ 2400 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
2-9
Recom-
CIMR- Screws
(AWG)
100 to 325 150 × 2P
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 M16 78.4 to 98
(4/0 to 600) (300 × 2P)
100 to 325 125 × 2P
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 M16 78.4 to 98
(4/0 to 600) (250 × 2P)
100 to 325 325 × 2P
, 1 M16 78.4 to 98
(4/0 to 600) (600 × 2P)
F7A4185
100 to 325
3 M16 78.4 to 98 -
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325 100 × 2P
M16 78.4 to 98
(4/0 to 600) (3/0 × 2P)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/ 1, 200/ 2200, 400/ 2400 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
100 to 325 250 × 2P
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 M16 78.4 to 98
(4/0 to 600) (500 × 2P)
100 to 325 200 × 2P
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 M16 78.4 to 98
(4/0 to 600) (400 × 2P)
100 to 325 125 × 4P
, 1 M16 78.4 to 98
(4/0 to 600) (250 × 4P)
F7A4220 Power cables,
100 to 325
3 M16 78.4 to 98 - e.g., 600 V vinyl
(4/0 to 600)
power cables
100 to 325 125 × 2P
M16 78.4to 98
(4/0 to 600) (250 × 2P)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/ 1, 200/ 2200, 400/ 2400 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
100 to 325 125 × 4P
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 M16 78.4 to 98
(4/0 to 600) (250 × 4P)
100 to 325 125 × 2P
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 M16 78.4 to 98
(4/0 to 600) (250 × 2P)
100 to 325 125 × 4P
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M16 78.4 to 98
(4/0 to 600) (4/0 × 4P)
100 to 325 200 × 4P
F7A4300 , 1 M16 78.4 to 98
(4/0 to 600) (400 × 4P)
100 to 325
3 M16 78.4 to 98 -
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325 125 × 2P
M16 78.4 to 98
(4/0 to 600) (250 × 2P)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/ 1, 200/ 2200, 400/ 2400 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75°C.
2-10
Table 2.3 Closed-loop Connector Sizes (JIS C2805) (200 V Class and 400 V Class)
Wire Thickness (mm2) Terminal Screws Size

M3.5 1.25 to 3.5
0.5
M4 1.25 to 4
M3.5 1.25 to 3.5
0.75
M4 1.25 to 4
M3.5 1.25 to 3.5
1.25
M4 1.25 to 4
M3.5 2 to 3.5
M4 2 to 4
2 M5 2 to 5
M6 2 to 6
M8 2 to 8
M4 5.5 to 4
M5 5.5 to 5
3.5/5.5
M6 5.5 to 6
M8 5.5 to 8
M5 8 to 5
8 M6 8 to 6
M8 8 to 8
M6 14 to 6
14
M8 14 to 8
M6 22 to 6
22
M8 22 to 8
30/38 M8 38 to 8
M8 60 to 8
50/60
M10 60 to 10
80 80 to 10
M10
100 100 to 10
100 100 to 12
150 M12 150 to 12
200 200 to 12
M12 x 2 325 to 12
325
M16 325 to 16
1. Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2% of the rated voltage. Line
voltage drop is calculated as follows:
Line voltage drop (V) = 3 x wire resistance (W/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10-3
IMPORTANT
2. Use a closed-loop connector (made by J.S.T. Mfg. Co., Ltd. or an equivalent) for the main circuit input and
output terminals of Inverters of 200V 11 kW or more and those of 400V 22 kW or more.
2-11
Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in Table 2.4. Wire the terminals
correctly for the desired purposes.
Table 2.4 Main Circuit Terminal Functions (200 V Class and 400 V Class)
Model: CIMR-F7A □
Purpose Terminal Symbol
200 V Class 400 V Class
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300
Main circuit power input
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 2022 to 2110 4022 to 4300
Inverter outputs U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300
DC power input 1, 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300
Braking Resistor Unit connec-

B1, B2 20P4 to 2018 40P4 to 4018
tion
DC reactor connection 1, 2 20P4 to 2018 40P4 to 4018
Braking Unit connection 3, 2022 to 2110 4022 to 4300
Ground 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300
Note The 1 and input terminals for the DC power do not conform to UL/cUL standards.
2-12
Main Circuit Configurations

The main circuit configurations of the Inverter are shown in Fig 2.5.
Table 2.5 Inverter Main Circuit Configurations
200 V Class 400 V Class
CIMR-F7A20P4 to 2018 CIMR-F7A40P4 to 4018
R/L1 U/T1 R/L1 U/T1

S/L2 V/T2 S/L2 V/T2
T/L3 W/T3 T/L3 W/T3
Power Control Power Control

supply circuits supply circuits
Cooling fan is provided for Cooling fan is provided for
Inverters of 3.7 kW or more. Inverters of 2.2 kW or more.
CIMR-F7A2022, 2030 CIMR-F7A4022 to 4055
Power Control Power Control

supply circuits supply circuits
CIMR-F7A2037 to 2110 CIMR-F7A4075 to 4300
a
a
b
b
Power Control
a supply circuits
Power Control b
a supply circuits
b
Note Consult your Yaskawa representative before using 12-phase rectification.

* These terminals are wired before shipment. When using DC power for the main circuit power supply, remove the wires between R-r/ 1 and S- / 2, then,
for 200 V Class Inverters, input 200 VAC to r/ 1- / 2, or, for 400 V Class Inverters, input either 200 VAC to r/ 1- 200/ 2200 or 400 VAC to r/ 1-
400/ 2400.
2-13
Standard Connection Diagrams
Standard Inverter connection diagrams are shown in Fig 2.5. The connections depend on the Inverter capacity.
CIMR-F7A20P4 to 2018 and 40P4 to 4018 CIMR-F7A2022, 2030, and 4022 to 4055
Braking Resistor
Braking Resistor Unit (optional)
DC reactor Unit (optional)
(optional) Braking Unit
(optional)
3-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
3-phase 200
VAC (200 VAC)
Be sure to remove the short-circuit bar before connecting the DC The DC reactor is built in.
reactor.
When connecting a separately-installed type Braking Unit (model CDBR), connect the B1 terminal of the
Inverter to the + terminal of the Braking Unit and connect the − terminal of the Inverter to the − terminal of the
Braking Unit. The B2 terminal is not used in this case.
IMPORTANT
CIMR-FA2037 to 2110 CIMR-F7A4075 to 4300

Braking Resistor Braking Resistor
Unit (optional) Unit (optional)
Braking Unit Braking Unit
(optional) (optional)
3-phase 3-phase
200 VAC 400 VAC
l l
Control power is supplied internally from the main circuit DC power supply for all Inverter models.
If a Braking Unit or a Braking Resistor Unit is connected to a wrong terminal, the Inverter, Braking Unit, or
Braking Resistor Unit can be damaged.
Refer to FOR VARISPEED-600 SERIES INVERTER BRAKING UNIT BRAKING RESISTOR UNIT
IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS (TOBPC720600000) for connecting the Inverter with a Braking Unit or a Braking Resistor
Unit.
Fig 2.5 Main Circuit Terminal Connections
2-14
Wiring the Main Circuits

This section describes wiring connections for the main circuit inputs and outputs.
Wiring Main Circuit Inputs

Observe the following precautions for wiring the main circuit power supply inputs.
Installing a Molded-case Circuit Breaker

Always connect the power input terminals (R, S, and T) and power supply via a molded-case circuit breaker
(MCCB) suitable for the Inverter.
• Choose an MCCB with a capacity of 1.5 to 2 times the Inverter's rated current.
• For the MCCB's time characteristics, be sure to consider the Inverter's overload protection (one minute at
150% of the rated output current).
• If the same MCCB is to be used for more than one Inverter, or other devices, set up a sequence so that the
power supply will be turned OFF by a fault output, as shown in Fig 2.6.
Inverter
Power
supply
20P4 to 2030: 3-phase,
200 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
2037 to 2110: 3-phase,
200 to 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz
40P4 to 4300: 3-phase,
380 to 460 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Fault output
(NC)
* For 400 V Class Inverters, connect a 400/200 V transformer.
Fig 2.6 MCCB Installation
Installing a Ground Fault Interrupter

Inverter outputs use high-speed switching, so high-frequency leakage current is generated. At the Inverter pri-
mary side, use a ground fault interrupter for Inverters with a countermeasure against high frequency to detect
only the leakage current in the frequency range that is hazardous to humans and to ignore high-frequency leak-
age current. Use one or several ground fault interrupters with a total cumulative sensitivity amperage of at
least 30 mA per Inverter.
Using a ground fault interrupter without a countermeasure against high frequency may result in a malfunction
caused by high-frequency leakage current. If a ground fault interrupter without a countermeasure malfunc-
tions, replace it with a ground fault interrupter with a countermeasure against high frequency or reduce the
carrier frequency of the Inverter. Alternatively, use one or several ground fault interrupters with a total cumu-
lative sensitivity amperage of at least 200 mA per Inverter.
2-15
Installing a Magnetic Contactor
If the power supply for the main circuit is to be shut off during a sequence, a magnetic contactor can be used.
When a magnetic contactor is installed on the primary side of the main circuit to forcibly stop the Inverter,
however, the regenerative braking does not work and the Inverter will coast to a stop.
• The Inverter can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side.
Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor, however, may cause the Inverter to break down.
Start and stop the Inverter at most once every 30 minutes.
• When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator, automatic operation cannot be performed after
recovery from a power interruption.
• If the Braking Resistor Unit is used, program the sequence so that the magnetic contactor is turned OFF by
the contact of the Unit's thermal overload relay.
Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block

Input power supply can be connected to any terminal R, S or T on the terminal block; the phase sequence of
input power supply is irrelevant to the phase sequence.
Installing an AC Reactor or DC Reactor

If the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kW or more) or the phase advancing
capacitor is switched, an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit, causing the con-
verter unit to break down.
To prevent this, install an optional AC Reactor on the input side of the Inverter or a DC reactor to the DC reac-
tor connection terminals.
This also improves the power factor on the power supply side.
Installing a Surge Absorber

Always use a surge absorber or diode for inductive loads near the Inverter. These inductive loads include mag-
netic contactors, electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoids, and magnetic brakes.
Installing a Noise Filter on Power Supply Side

Install a noise filter to eliminate noise transmitted between the power line and the Inverter.
• Correct Noise Filter Installation
Power
MCCB
supply
Noise
Inverter IM
filter
MCCB
Other
controllers
Use a special-purpose noise filter for Inverters.
Fig 2.7 Correct Power supply Noise Filter Installation
2-16
• Incorrect Noise Filter Installation
Power
supply MCCB
Inverter IM
MCCB
General- Other
purpose
noise filter controllers
Power
supply MCCB
General-
purpose Inverter IM
noise filter
MCCB
Other
controllers
Do not use general-purpose noise filters. No general-
purpose noise filter can effectively suppress noise
generated from the Inverter.
Fig 2.8 Incorrect Power supply Noise Filter Installation
Wiring the Output Side of Main Circuit

Observe the following precautions when wiring the main output circuits.
Connecting the Inverter and Motor

Connect output terminals U, V, and W to motor lead wires U, V, and W, respectively.
Check that the motor rotates forward with the Forward Run Command. Switch over any two of the output ter-
minals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the Forward Run Command.
Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals

Never connect a power supply to output terminals U, V, and W. If voltage is applied to the output terminals,
the internal circuits of the Inverter will be damaged.
Never Short or Ground Output Terminals

If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Inverter cas-
ing, an electric shock or grounding will occur. This is extremely hazardous. Do not short the output wires.
Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor or Noise Filter

Never connect a phase advancing capacitor or LC/RC noise filter to an output circuit. The high-frequency
components of the Inverter output may result in overheating or damage to these part or may result in damage
to the Inverter or cause other parts to burn.
Precautions When Using an Magnetic Contactor

Never connect an magnetic contactor between the Inverter and motor and turn it ON or OFF during operation.
If the magnetic contactor is turned ON while the Inverter is operating, a large inrush current will be created
and the overcurrent protection in the Inverter will operate.
2-17
When using an magnetic contactor to switch to a commercial power supply, stop the Inverter and motor before
operating the magnetic contactor. Use the speed search function if the magnetic contactor is operated during
operation. If measures for momentary power interrupts are required, use a delayed release magnetic contactor.
Installing a Thermal Overload Relay

This Inverter has an electronic thermal protection function to protect the motor from overheating. If, however,
more than one motor is operated with one Inverter or a multi-polar motor is used, always install a thermal
relay (THR) between the Inverter and the motor and set L1-01 to 0 (no motor protection). The sequence
should be designed so that the contacts of the thermal overload relay turn OFF the magnetic contactor on the
main circuit inputs.
Installing a Noise Filter on Output Side

Connect a noise filter to the output side of the Inverter to reduce radio noise and inductive noise.
Power
MCCB
supply
Noise
Inverter filter IM
Radio noise
Inductive AM radio
noise
Signal line
Controller
Inductive Noise: Electromagnetic induction generates noise on the signal line, causing the controller to malfunction.
Radio Noise: Electromagnetic waves from the Inverter and cables cause the broadcasting radio receiver to make
noise.
Fig 2.9 Installing a Noise Filter on the Output Side
Countermeasures Against Inductive Noise

As described previously, a noise filter can be used to prevent inductive noise from being generated on the out-
put side. Alternatively, cables can be routed through a grounded metal pipe to prevent inductive noise. Keep-
ing the metal pipe at least 30 cm away from the signal line considerably reduces inductive noise.
Power
MCCB Metal pipe
supply
Inverter IM
30 cm min.
Signal line
Controller
Fig 2.10 Countermeasures Against Inductive Noise
2-18
Countermeasures Against Radio Interference

Radio noise is generated from the Inverter as well as from the input and output lines. To reduce radio noise,
install noise filters on both input and output sides, and also install the Inverter in a totally enclosed steel box.
The cable between the Inverter and the motor should be as short as possible.
Steel box
Power
supply MCCB Metal pipe
Noise Noise
filter Inverter filter IM
Fig 2.11 Countermeasures Against Radio Interference
Cable Length between Inverter and Motor

If the cable between the Inverter and the motor is long, the high-frequency leakage current will increase, caus-
ing the Inverter output current to increase as well. This may affect peripheral devices. To prevent this, adjust
the carrier frequency (set in C6-01, C6-02) as shown in Table 2.6. (For details, refer to Chapter 5 User Con-
stants.)
Table 2.6 Cable Length between Inverter and Motor

Cable length 50 m max. 100 m max. More than 100 m
Carrier frequency 15 kHz max. 10 kHz max. 5 kHz max.
Ground Wiring
Observe the following precautions when wiring the ground line.
• Always use the ground terminal of the 200 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100 Ω and that
of the 400 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10 Ω.
• Do not share the ground wire with other devices, such as welding machines or power tools.
• Always minimize the length of the ground wire.
Leakage current flows through the Inverter. Therefore, if the distance between the ground electrode and the
ground terminal is too long, potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unstable.
• When using more than one Inverter, be careful not to loop the ground wire.
OK NO
Fig 2.12 Ground Wiring
2-19
Connecting the Braking Resistor (ERF)
A Braking Resistor that mounts to the Inverter can be used with 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with outputs
from 0.4 to 3.7 kW.
Connect the braking resistor as shown in Fig 2.13.
Table 2.7
L8-01 (Protect selection for internal DB resistor) 1 (Enables overheat protection)
L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration) 0 (Disables stall prevention function)
(Select either one of them.) 3 (Enables stall prevention function with braking resistor)
Inverter Braking resistor
Fig 2.13 Connecting the Braking Resistor
The braking resistor connection terminals are B1 and B2. Do not connect to any other terminals. Connecting
to any terminals other than B1 or B2 can cause the resistor to overheat, resulting in damage to the equip-
ment.
IMPORTANT
Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit (LKEB) and Braking Unit (CDBR)
Use the following settings if using a Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit.
A Braking Resistor that mounts to the Inverter can also be used with Inverters with outputs from 0.4 to 3.7
kW.
Table 2.8
L8-01 (Protect selection for internal DB resistor) 0 (Disables overheat protection)
L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration) 0 (Disables stall prevention function)
(Select either one of them.) 3 (Enables stall prevention function with braking resistor)
L8-01 is used when a braking resistor without thermal overload relay trip contacts (ERF type mounted to
Inverter) is connected.
The Braking Resistor Unit cannot be used and the deceleration time cannot be shortened by the Inverter if L3-
04 is set to 1 (i.e., if stall prevention is enabled for deceleration).
2-20
To prevent the Unit from overheating, design the sequence to turn OFF the power supply for the thermal over-
load relay trip contacts of the Unit as shown in Fig 2.14.
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 0.4 to 18.5 kW Output
LKEB Braking
Resistor Unit
Thermal overload
Inverter relay trip contact
When connecting a separately-installed type Braking Unit (model CDBR), connect the B1 terminal of the
Inverter to the + terminal of the Braking Unit and connect the − terminal of the Inverter to the − terminal of the
Braking Unit. The B2 terminal is not used in this case.
IMPORTANT
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 22 kW or higher Output
CDBR Braking LKEB Braking

Unit Resistor Unit
Thermal protector
Inverter trip contact
Thermal overload
relay trip contact
Fig 2.14 Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit
Connecting Braking Units in Parallel

When connecting two or more Braking Units in parallel, use the wiring and connectors shown in Fig 2.15.
There are connectors for selecting whether each Braking Unit is to be a Master or Slave. Select “Master” for
the first Braking Unit only, and select “Slave” for all other Braking Units (i.e., from the second Unit onwards).
2-21
Braking resistor overheat- Braking resistor overheat- Braking resistor overheat-
ing contacts (Thermal pro- ing contacts (Thermal pro- ing contacts (Thermal pro-
tector contacts) tector contacts)
tector contacts)
Braking Braking Braking

Resistor Resistor Resistor
Unit Unit Unit
detector
Inverter
Level
Braking Unit #2 Braking Unit #3
Braking Unit #1
Cooling fin overheating con- Cooling fin overheating con- Cooling fin overheating con-
tacts (thermostat contacts) tacts (thermostatic contacts) tacts (thermostatic contacts)
Fig 2.15 Connecting Braking Units in Parallel
Breaking Unit Application Precautions

When using a Braking Resistor Unit, create a sequence to detect overheating of the braking resistor and turn
OFF the power supply to the Inverter.
Three-phase power: MCCB

200 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz or
R/L1
380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz
S/L2
T/L3
Overload relay trip contact

Inverter
of Braking Resistor Unit
MC MA
Fault contacts
* Use a transformer with 200 and 400 V outputs for the power 400 V Inverter.
Fig 2.16 Power Shutoff Sequence
2-22
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors

For remote operation using analog signals, keep the control line length between the Digital Operator or opera-
tion signals and the Inverter to 50 m or less, and separate the lines from high-power lines (main circuits or
relay sequence circuits) to reduce induction from peripheral devices.
When setting frequencies from an external frequency setter (and not from a Digital Operator), use shielded
twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to terminal E (G), as shown in the following diagram.
Shield terminal
E(G)
V Speed setting power
supply +15 V 20 mA
2kΩ
2kΩ A1 Master speed reference 0 to 10 V (-10 to 10 V)
A2 Master speed reference 4 to 20 A
(0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V)
2kΩ
2kΩ
A3 Auxiliary reference 0 to 10 V (-10 to 10 V)
RP Pulse train input 32 kHz max.
P P P P
AC Analog common
-V Speed setting power supply -15 V 20 mA
Fig 2.17
Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in Table 2.9.
Table 2.9 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes (Same for all Models)
Recom-
Termi- Tightening Possible
mended
Terminals nal Torque Wire Sizes Wire Type
Wire Size
Screws (N•m) mm2(AWG)
mm2(AWG)
FM, AC, AM, P1, P2, PC,
SC, A1, A2, A3 , +V, -V ,
S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, M3.5 0.8 to 1.0 0.5 to 2*2 0.75
(20 to 14) (18)
S8 , MA, MB, MC, M1,
M2
• Shielded, twisted-pair wire*1
Single wire*3: • Shielded, polyethylene-cov-
0.14 to 2.5 ered, vinyl sheath cable
MP, RP, R+, R-, S+, S-, Phoenix 0.5 to 0.6 0.75 (KPEV-S by Hitachi Electrical
IG type Stranded wire: (18) Wire or equivalent)
0.14 to 1.5
(26 to 14)
E (G) M3.5 0.8 to 1.0 0.5 to 2*2 1.25

(20 to 14) (12)
* 1. Use shielded twisted-pair cables to input an external frequency reference.
* 2. Refer to Table 2.3 Close-loop Connector Sizes for suitable closed-loop crimp terminal sizes for the wires.
* 3. We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
2-23
Straight Solderless Terminals for Signal Lines
Models and sizes of straight solderless terminal are shown in the following table.
Table 2.10 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes
Wire Size mm2 (AWG) Model d1 d2 L Manufacturer

0.25 (24) AI 0.25 - 8YE 0.8 2 12.5
0.5 (20) AI 0.5 - 8WH 1.1 2.5 14
0.75 (18) AI 0.75 - 8GY 1.3 2.8 14 Phoenix Contact
1.25 (16) AI 1.5 - 8BK 1.8 3.4 14
2 (14) AI 2.5 - 8BU 2.3 4.2 14
d1
d2
Fig 2.18 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes
Wiring Method
Use the following procedure to connect wires to the terminal block.
1. Loosen the terminal screws with a thin-slot screwdriver.
2. Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block.
3. Tighten the terminal screws firmly.
Thin-slot screwdriver Blade of screwdriver
Control circuit
terminal block
Strip the end for

7 mm if no sold-
erless terminal is
used. Solderless terminal or wire 3.5 mm max.
without soldering
Wires Blade thickness: 0.6 mm max.
Fig 2.19 Connecting Wires to Terminal Block
2-24
Control Circuit Terminal Functions

The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in Table 2.11. Use the appropriate terminals for the
correct purposes.
Table 2.11 Control Circuit Terminals

Type No. Signal Name Function Signal Level
S1 Forward Run/Stop Command Forward run when ON; stopped when OFF.
S2 Reverse Run/Stop Command Reverse run when ON; stopped when OFF.
S3 Multi-function input 1*1 Factory setting: External fault when ON.
S4 Multi-function input 2*1 Factory setting: Fault reset when ON.
Factory setting: Multi-speed reference 1

Se-
S5 Multi-function input 3*1 effective when ON.
quence 24 VDC, 8 mA
input
Factory setting: Multi-speed reference 2 Photocoupler isolation
signals
S6 Multi-function input 4*1 effective when ON.
Factory setting: Jog frequency selected when
S7 Multi-function input 5*1 ON.
Factory setting: External baseblock when
S8 Multi-function input 6*1 ON.
SC Sequence input common -
+15 V
+V +15 V power output +15 V power supply for analog references
(Max. current: 20 mA)
-15 V
-V -15 V power output -15 V power supply for analog references
(Max. current: 20 mA)
-10 to +10 V , 0 to +10
Master speed frequency ref- -10 to +10 V/-100 to 100%
A1 V (Input impedance:
erence 0 to +10 V/100%
20 kΩ)
4 to 20 mA (Input imped-
4 to 20 mA/100%, -10 to +10 V/-100 to
Analog
ance: 250 Ω)
+100% , 0 to +10 V/100%
input A2 Multi-function analog input -10 to +10 V , 0 to +10
signals Factory setting: Added to terminal A1
V (Input impedance:
(H3-09 = 0)
20 kΩ)
-10 to +10 V/-100 to +100%, 0 to +10 V/
-10 to +10 V, 0 to +10 V
100%
A3 Multi-function analog input (Input impedance:
Factory setting: Not used
20 kΩ)
(H3-05 = 1F)
AC Analog reference common 0V -
Shield wire, optional ground
E(G) - -
line connection point
Factory setting: Zero-speed
P1 Multi-function PHC output 1
Zero-speed level (b2-01) or below when ON.
Factory setting: Frequency agreement detec-
Photo- tion
coupler P2 Multi-function PHC output 2
Frequency within 2 Hz of set frequency 50 mA max. at 48 VDC*2
outputs
when ON.
Photocoupler output common
PC -
for P1 and P2
2-25
Table 2.11 Control Circuit Terminals (Continued)
Type No. Signal Name Function Signal Level
Fault output signal (NO con-
MA
tact) Fault when CLOSED across MA and MC Dry contacts
Fault output signal (NC con- Fault when OPEN across MB and MC Contact capacity:
MB 10 mA min., 1 A max. at
tact)
Relay 250 VAC
outputs Relay contact output com- 10 mA min., 1 A max. at
MC -
mon 30 VDC
Minimum permissible
M1 Factory setting: Operating
Multi-function contact output load: 5 VDC, 10 mA*4
Operating when CLOSED across M1 and
(NO contact)
M2 M2.
Multi-function analog moni- Factory setting: Output frequency

FM
tor 1 0 to 10 V/100% frequency
Analog
moni- -10 to +10 VDC ±5%
Multi-function analog moni- Factory setting: Current monitor
tor out- AM 2 mA max.
puts tor 2 5 V/Inverter's rated current
AC Analog common -
Factory setting: Frequency reference input
RP Multi-function pulse input*3 (H6-01 = 0)
0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ)
Pulse
I/O Factory setting: Output frequency
MP Multi-function pulse monitor 0 to 32 kHz (2.2 kΩ)
(H6-06 = 2)
R+ MEMOBUS communica- Differential input, photo-
R- tions input coupler isolation
RS- For 2-wire RS-485, short R+ and S+ as well
485/ S+ as R- and S-.
MEMOBUS communica- Differential output, pho-
422 tions output tocoupler isolation
S-
IG Communications shield wire - -
* 1. For a 3-wire sequence, the default settings are a 3-wire sequence for S5, multi-step speed setting 1 for S6, multi-step speed setting 2 for S7, and jog fre-
quency command for S8.
* 2. When driving a reactive load, such as a relay coil, always insert a flywheel diode as shown in Fig 2.20.
* 3. Pulse input specifications are given in the following table.
* 4. Use the photocoupler outputs when the minimum permissible load is 5 VDC or less and 10 mA or less.
Low level voltage 0.0 to 0.8 V

High level voltage 3.5 to 13.2 V
H duty 30% to 70%
Pulse frequency 0 to 32 kHz
Flywheel diode
The rating of the flywheel diode

Coil must be at least as high as the
External power:
48 V max. 50 mA max. circuit voltage.
Fig 2.20 Flywheel Diode Connection
2-26
Shunt Connector CN5 and DIP Switch S1

The shunt connector CN 5 and DIP switch S1 are described in this section.
CN5 S1
O OFF ON Terminating resistance
F 1
F 2 V I Analog input switch
: Factory settings
Note: Refer to Table 2.12 for S1

functions and to Table
2.13 for CN5 functions.
Fig 2.21 　Shunt Connector CN5 and DIP Switch S1
The functions of DIP switch S1 are shown in the following table.
Table 2.12 DIP Switch S1

Name Function Setting
RS-485 and RS-422 terminating resis- OFF: No terminating resistance
S1-1
tance ON: Terminating resistance of 110 Ω
OFF: 0 to 10 V, −10 to 10 V (internal resistance: 20 kΩ)

S1-2 Input method for analog input A2
ON: 4 to 20 mA (internal resistance: 250 Ω)
2-27
Sinking/Sourcing Mode
The input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode (0-V common) and sourcing mode (+24-V
common) if shunt connector CN5 is used. An external 24-V power supply is also supported, providing more
freedom in signal input methods.
Table 2.13 Sinking/Sourcing Mode and Input Signals

Internal Power Supply External Power Supply
CN5 CN5
CN5 (NPN set) Factory setting CN5 (EXT set)
Shunt IP24V (24 V)

position IP24V (24 V) External +24 V
SC SC
Sink-
ing
Mode S1 S1
S2 S2
CN5 CN5
CN5 (PNP set) CN5 (EXT set)
External + 24 V IP24V (24 V)

IP24V (24 V)
SC SC
Sourc-
ing
Mode S1 S1
S2 S2
2-28
Control Circuit Terminal Connections

Connections to Inverter control circuit terminals are shown in Fig 2.22.
Inverter
CIMR-F7A2022
Forward Run/Stop S1
Reverse Run/Stop S2
Thermal switch contact
for Braking Unit
3 4
External fault S3
Fault reset S4
Multi-step command 1
Multi-function (Main speed switching)
contact input S5
Multi-step speed
Defaults
setting 2 S6
Jog frequency
selection S7
External
baseblock command S8 MP
Pulse train output
+24V 8mA
0 to 32 kHz (2.2 kΩ)
AC Default: Output
frequency
Ammeter adjustment
AM 20 kΩ
-10 to 10 V 2 mA
− + Default: Output current
AM 0 to +10 V
CN5 (NPN setting) Ammeter adjustment

FM 20 kΩ
SC Multi-function analog output 1
AC − + -10 to 10 V 2 mA
FM Default: Output current
0 to +10 V
+24V
E(G) E(G)
Shield wire
connection terminal
Pulse train input MA
RP Master speed pulse train MA
Error contact output
Frequency setting 0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ) MB 250 VAC, 10 mA min. 1 A max. Min. load
2 kΩ adjustment High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V
input MC 30 VDC, 10 mA min. 1 A max. 5 VDC, 10 mA
MC
Frequency
setter +V Frequency setting power
3 +15 V 20 mA
0 to 10 V M1
External 2 kΩ A1 Master speed reference Multi-function contact output
2
frequency 1 4 to 20 mA P 0 to 10 V (20 kΩ) 250 VAC, 10 mA min. 1 A max. Min. load
M2
references A2 Master speed reference 30 VDC, 10 mA min. 1 A max. 5 VDC, 10 mA
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω) Default: Running
[0 to 10 V (20 kΩ) input] signal
0 to 10 V P
A3 Multi-function anlog input
P1
P 0 to 10 V (20 kΩ) Open collector 1
AC
0V Factory setting: Default: Zero-
Not used
speed Multi-function
-V (−15V 20mA) P2 open-collector outputs
Open collector 2
Default: 48 VDC, 50 mA
Terminating
resistance
PC Frequency
agree signal
R+
R-
MEMOBUS
communications S+
RS-485/422
S-
IG
Fig 2.22 Control Circuit Terminal Connections
2-29
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions
Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits.
• Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, , 1, 2, and 3) and other high-power lines.
• Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA, MB, MC, M1, and M2 (contact outputs) from wiring to
other control circuit terminals.
• Use shielded twisted-pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults. Process cable ends as
shown in Fig 2.23.
• Connect the shield wire to terminal E (G).
• Insulate the shield with tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment.
• Use a class 2 power supply (UL standard) when connecting to the control terminals.
Shield sheath Armor
Do not connect here.

Connect to shield sheath ter-
minal at Inverter (terminal E Insulate with tape
(G))
Fig 2.23 Processing the Ends of Shielded Twisted-pair Cables
2-30
Wiring Check
Wiring Check
Checks
Check all wiring after wiring has been completed. Do not perform a buzzer check on control circuits. Perform
the following checks on the wiring.
• Is all wiring correct?
• Have any wire clippings, screws, or other foreign material been left?
• Are all screws tight?
• Are any wire ends contacting other terminals?
2-31
Installing and Wiring Option Boards
Option Board Models and Specifications

Up to three option boards can be mounted in the Inverter. You can mount up one board into each of the three
places on the control board (A, C, and D) shown in Fig 2.24.
Table 2.14 lists the type of option boards and their specifications.
Table 2.14 Option Board Specifications

Mounting Loca-
Board Model Specifications
tion
PG-A2 Serial open-collector/complimentary inputs A
PG-B2 Phase A/B complimentary inputs A
PG Speed Control Boards
PG-D2 Single line-driver inputs A
PG-X2 Phase A/B line-driver inputs A
Input signal levels
0 to 10 V DC (20 kΩ), 1 channel
AI-14U C
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω), 1 channel
Input resolution: 14-bit
Input signal levels
Speed Reference Boards 0 to 10 V DC (20 kΩ)
AI-14B C
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω), 3 channels
Input resolution: 13-bit with sign bit
DI-08 8-bit digital speed reference setting C
DI-16H2 16-bit digital speed reference setting C
DeviceNet Communication
SI-N1 DeviceNet communications support C
Board
Profibus-DP Communication
SI-P1 Profibus-DP communications support C
Board
InterBus-S Communication
SI-R InterBus-S communications support C
Board *
CANopen Communication
SI-S1 CANopen communications support C
Board *
CC-Link Communication
SI-C CC-Link communications support C
Board
LONWORKS Communica- SI-J

LONWORKS communications support C
tion Board SI-W1
MECHATROLINK Commu-
SI-T MECHATROLINK communications support C
nication Board
AO-08 8-bit analog outputs, 2 channels D
Analog Monitor Board
AO-12 12-bit analog outputs, 2 channels D
DO-08 Six photocoupler outputs and 2 relay outputs D
Digital Output Board
DO-02C 2 relay outputs D
* Under development
2-32
Installation
Before mounting an option board, remove the terminal cover and be sure that the charge indicator inside the
Inverter is not lit. After confirming that the charge indicator is not lit, remove the Digital Operator and front
cover and then mount the option board.
The side of the front cover of the Inverter for 200/400 V Class 0.4 to 5.5 kW can be cut out as described in Fig
2.25 to make wiring of the option board easy. If the side of the front cover is cut out, the protective structure
will be open chassis (IEC IP00).
Refer to documentation provided with the option board for actual mounting instructions for option slots A, C,
and D.
Preventing C and D option board Connectors from Rising

After installing an option board into slot C or D, insert an option clip to prevent the side with the connector
from rising. The option clip can be easily removed by holding onto the protruding portion of the clip and pull-
ing it out.
Remove the option clip before installing an option board into slot C or D. The option board cannot be installed
completely and may not function property if it is installed with the option clip attached.
A option board mounting spacer hole
4CN
A option board connector
2CN
C option board connector
A option board mounting spacer
(Provided with A option board.)
C option board mounting spacer
C option board
Option clip
(To prevent raising of
C and D option boards)
D option board
3CN
D option board connector D option board mounting spacer
A option board
A option board mounting spacer
Fig 2.24 Mounting option boards
Front Cover
Slit
Fig 2.25 Cutting the Front Cover

Cut out the slits on the front cover with nippers. Be careful to avoid injury.
2-33
PG Speed Control Board Terminals and Specifications
The terminal specifications for the PG Speed Control Boards are given in the following tables.
PG-A2
The terminal specifications for the PG-A2 are given in the following table.
Table 2.15 PG-A2 Terminal Specifications

Terminal No. Contents Specifications
1 12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.
Power supply for pulse generator
2 0 VDC (GND for power supply)
3 Terminal for switching between12 V voltage input

+12 V/open collector switching ter-
and open collector input. For open collector input,
minal
4 short across 3 and 4.
TA1
H: +4 to 12 V; L: +1 V max. (Maximum response fre-
5
Pulse input terminal quency: 30 kHz)
6 Pulse input common
7 12 VDC (±10%), 20 mA max.
Pulse monitor output terminal
8 Pulse monitor output common
TA2 (E) Shield connection terminal -
PG-B2
The terminal specifications for the PG-B2 are given in the following table.
Table 2.16 PG-B2 Terminal Specifications

1 12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.
Power supply for pulse generator
2 0 VDC (GND for power supply)
H: +8 to 12 V
3 L: +1 V max.
A-phase pulse input terminal (Maximum response frequency: 30 kHz)
TA1
H: +8 to 12 V
5 L: +1 V max.
B-phase pulse input terminal (Maximum response frequency: 30 kHz)
1 Open collector output, 24 VDC, 30 mA max.
A-phase monitor output terminal
2 A-phase monitor output common
TA2
3 Open collector output, 24 VDC, 30 mA max.
B-phase monitor output terminal
4 B-phase monitor output common
2-34
PG-D2
The terminal specifications for the PG-D2 are given in the following table.
Table 2.17 PG-D2 Terminal Specifications

1 12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*
2 Power supply for pulse generator 0 VDC (GND for power supply)
3 5 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*
4 Pulse input + terminal Line driver input (RS-422 level input)
TA1
5 Pulse input - terminal Maximum response frequency: 300 kHz
6 Common terminal -
7 Pulse monitor output + terminal
Line driver output (RS-422 level output)
8 Pulse monitor output - terminal
* 5 VDC and 12 VDC cannot be used at the same time.
PG-X2
The terminal specifications for the PG-X2 are given in the following table.
Table 2.18 PG-X2 Terminal Specifications

1 12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*
2 Power supply for pulse generator 0 VDC (GND for power supply)
3 5 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*
4 A-phase + input terminal
5 A-phase - input terminal
TA1
6 B-phase + input terminal Line driver input (RS-422 level input)
7 B-phase - input terminal Maximum response frequency: 300 kHz
8 Z-phase + input terminal

9 Z-phase - input terminal
10 Common terminal 0 VDC (GND for power supply)
1 A-phase + output terminal
2 A-phase - output terminal
3 B-phase + output terminal
Line driver output (RS-422 level output)
TA2 4 B-phase - output terminal
5 Z-phase + output terminal
6 Z-phase - output terminal
7 Control circuit common Control circuit GND
* 5 VDC and 12 VDC cannot be used at the same time.
2-35
Wiring
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the option boards.
Wiring the PG-A2

Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-A2.
Three-phase,
200 VAC (400 VAC) Inverter
R/L1 U/T1
V/T2 V/T2
W/T3 W/T3
PC-A2
+12 V power supply
1
2 0 V power supply
4CN 4CN
3
4
TA1 Pulse input (+)
5
Pulse input (-)
6
E E
7
TA2 (E) Pulse monitor output
8
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.

• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
• For open collector input, short across 3 and 4.
Fig 2.26 PG-A2 Wiring
PG power
supply
+12 V
Pulse input
Short for
open-col-
lector
input
Pulse
monitor
output
Pulse
input
Fig 2.27 I/O Circuit Configuration of the PG-A2
2-36
Wiring the PG-B2

Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-B2.
Inverter
Three-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
Power supply +12 V

Power supply 0 V
A-phase pulse output (+)
A-phase pulse output (-)
B-phase pulse output (+)
B-phase pulse output (-)
A-phase pulse monitor output
B-phase pulse monitor output

• The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user constant F1-05. The factory preset if for forward
rotation, A-phase advancement.
Fig 2.28 PG-B2 Wiring
PG power
supply +12 V
A-phase pulse
monitor output
Division rate circuit
A-phase
A-phase pulse pulses
input
B-phase pulse
monitor output
B-phase
B-phase pulse pulses
input
• When connecting to a voltage-output-type PG (encoder), select a PG that has an output impedance with
a current of at least 12 mA to the input circuit photocoupler (diode).
• The pulse monitor dividing ratio can be changed using constant F1-06 (PG division rate).
A-phase pulses
B-phase pulses
• The pulse monitor emitter is connected to common inside the PG-B2. The emitter common must be used
for external circuits.
Fig 2.29 I/O Circuit Configuration of the PG-B2
2-37
Wiring the PG-D2
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-D2.
Three-phase 200 Inverter

VAC (400 VAC)
Power supply +12 V

Power supply 0 V
Power supply +5 V
Pulse input + (A/B phase)
Pulse input - (A/B phase)
Pulse monitor output

Fig 2.30 PG-D2 Wiring
Wiring the PG-X2

Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-X2.
Three-phase Inverter
200 VAC (400
VAC) R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 V/T2
T/L3 W/T3
Power supply +12 V

Power supply 0 V
Power supply +5 V
A-phase pulse input (+)
A-phase pulse input (-)
B-phase pulse input (+)
B-phase pulse input (-)
A-phase pulse monitor output
B-phase pulse monitor output
Z-phase pulse monitor output

• The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user constant F1-05 (PG Rotation). The factory preset if
for motor forward rotation, A-phase advancement.
Fig 2.31 PG-X2 Wiring
2-38
Wiring Terminal Blocks

Use no more than 100 meters of wiring for PG (encoder) signal lines, and keep them separate from power
lines.
Use shielded, twisted-pair wires for pulse inputs and pulse output monitor wires, and connect the shield to the
shield connection terminal.
Wire Sizes (Same for All Models)

Terminal wire sizes are shown in Table 2.19.
Table 2.19 Wire Sizes

Terminal
Terminal
Screws Wire Thickness (mm2) Wire Type
Pulse generator power supply • Shielded, twisted-pair wire

Stranded wire: 0.5 to 1.25
Pulse input terminal - • Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl
Single wire: 0.5 to 1.25
Pulse monitor output terminal sheath cable
(KPEV-S by Hitachi Electric Wire or
Shield connection terminal M3.5 0.5 to 2 equivalent)
Straight Solderless Terminals for Control Circuit Terminals

We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
Refer to Table 2.10 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes for specifications.
Closed-loop Connector Sizes and Tightening Torque

The closed-loop connectors and tightening torques for various wire sizes are shown in Table 2.20.
Table 2.20 Closed-loop Connectors and Tightening Torques

Terminal
Wire Thickness [mm2] Screws
Crimp Terminal Size Tightening Torque (N • m)
0.5 1.25 - 3.5

0.75 1.25 - 3.5
M3.5 0.8
1.25 1.25 - 3.5
2 2 - 3.5
Wiring Method and Precautions

The wiring method is the same as the one used for straight solderless terminals. Refer to page 2-24. Observe
the following precautions when wiring.
• Separate the control signal lines for the PG Speed Control Board from main circuit lines and power lines.
• Connect the shield when connecting to a PG. The shield must be connected to prevent operational errors
caused by noise. Also, do not use any lines that are more than 100 m long. Refer to Fig 2.23 for details on
connecting the shield.
• Connect the shield to the shield terminal (E).
• Do not solder the ends of wires. Doing so may cause contact faults.
• When not using straight solderless terminals, strip the wires to a length of approximately 5.5 mm.
2-39
Selecting the Number of PG (Encoder) Pulses
The setting for the number of PG pulses depends on the model of PG Speed Control Board being used. Set the
correct number for your model.
PG-A2/PG-B2
The maximum response frequency is 32,767 Hz.
Use a PG that outputs a maximum frequency of approximately 20 kHz for the rotational speed of the motor.
Motor speed at maximum frequency output (min-1)-

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- × PG rating (p/rev) = 20,000 Hz
60
Some examples of PG output frequency (number of pulses) for the maximum frequency output are shown in
Table 2.21.
Table 2.21 PG Pulse Selection Examples

PG Rating PG Output Frequency for Maximum Fre-
Motor's Maximum Speed (min-1) (p/rev) quency Output (Hz)
1800 600 18,000
1500 600 15,000
1200 900 18,000
900 1200 18,000
Note 1. The motor speed at maximum frequency output is expressed as the sync rotation speed.
2. The PG power supply is 12 V.
3. A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply capacity is greater than 200 mA. (If momentary power loss must be handled, use a
backup capacitor or other method.)
PG power supply
Capacitor for momentary

power loss
Signals
Fig 2.32 PG-B2 Connection Example
2-40
PG-D2/PG-X2
There are 5 V and 12 V PG power supplies.
Check the PG power supply specifications before connecting.
The maximum response frequency is 300 kHz.
Use the following equation to computer the output frequency of the PG (fPG).
Motor speed at maximum frequency output (min-1)

f PG (Hz) = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- × PG rating (p/rev)
60
A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply capacity is greater than 200 mA. (If momentary
power loss must be handled, use a backup capacitor or other method.)
PG-X2
PG power
supply
TA1
AC
0V +12V
IP12 1
0V
IG 2
Capacitor for +12 V
IP5 3 momentary
power loss + +
A (+) 4
- PG
A (-) 5
+
B (+) 6
-
B (-) 7
Z (+) 8
Z (-) 9
IG 10
TA3
Fig 2.33 PG-X2 Connection Example (for 12 V PG power supply)
2-41
Digital Operator and Modes
This chapter describes Digital Operator displays and functions, and provides an overview of
operating modes and switching between modes.
Digital Operator............................................................3-2
Modes ..........................................................................3-5
Digital Operator
This section describes the displays and functions of the Digital Operator.
Digital Operator Display

The key names and functions of the Digital Operator are described below.
Drive Mode Indicators (LED)

FWD: Lit when there is a Forward Run Command
input.
REV: Lit when there is a Reverse Run Command
input.
SEQ: Lit when the Run Command from the control
circuit terminal is enabled.
REF: Lit when the frequency reference from control
circuit terminals A1 and A2 is enabled.
ALARM: Lit when error activated.
Blinks when alarm activated.
Data Display
Displays monitor data, constant numbers, and
settings.
Mode Display
DRIVE: Lit in Drive Mode.
QUICK: Lit in Quick Programming Mode.
ADV: Lit in Advanced Programming Mode.
VERIFY: Lit in Verify Mode.
A. TUNE:Lit in Autotuning Mode.
Keys
Execute operations such as setting user con-

stants, monitoring, jogging, and autotuning.
Fig 3.1 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions
Digital Operator Keys

The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1 Key Functions

Key Name Function
Switches between operation via the Digital Operator (LOCAL) and
LOCAL/REMOTE Key control circuit terminal operation (REMOTE).
This Key can be enabled or disabled by setting user constant o2-01.
MENU Key Selects menu items (modes).
ESC Key Returns to the status before the DATA/ENTER Key was pressed.
3-2
Digital Operator
Table 3.1 Key Functions (Continued)

Key Name Function
Enables jog operation when the Inverter is being operated from the
JOG Key
Digital Operator.
Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the Inverter is being
FWD/REV Key
operated from the Digital Operator.
Sets the number of digits for user constant settings.

Shift/RESET Key
Also acts as the Reset Key when a fault has occurred.
Selects menu items, sets user constant numbers, and increments set
Increment Key values.
Used to move to the next item or data.
Selects menu items, sets user constant numbers, and decrements set
Decrement Key values.
Used to move to the previous item or data.
Pressed to enter menu items, user constants, and set values.
DATA/ENTER Key Also used to switch from one screen to another.
Constants cannot be changed when Undervoltage (UV) is detected.
Starts the Inverter operation when the Inverter is being controlled by

RUN Key
the Digital Operator.
Stops Inverter operation.

STOP Key This Key can be enabled or disabled when operating from the control
circuit terminal by setting user constant o2-02.
Note Except in diagrams, Keys are referred to using the Key names listed in the above table.
There are indicators on the upper left of the RUN and STOP Keys on the Digital Operator. These indicators
will light and flash to indicate operating status.
The RUN Key indicator will flash and the STOP Key indicator will light during initial excitation of the
dynamic brake. The relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP Keys and the Inverter status is
shown in the Fig 3.2.
Inverter output frequency

RUN STOP
STOP
Frequency setting
RUN
STOP
Lit Blinking Not lit
Fig 3.2 RUN and STOP Indicators
3-3
The following table shows the relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP Keys and the
Inverter conditions.
The indicators are lit, unlit or blinking reflecting the order of priority.
Table 3.2 Relation of Inverter to RUN and STOP Indicators

RUN STOP Inverter
Priority Conditions
Indicator Indicator Status
1 Stopped Power supply is shut down.
Emergency stop
• Stop Command is sent from the Digital Operator when the control cir-
cuit terminals were used to operate the Inverter.
• Emergency Stop Command is sent from the control circuit terminal.
2 Stopped* Switched from LOCAL (operation using the Digital Operator) to
REMOTE (operation using the control circuit terminals) when the Run
Command is sent from the external terminal.
Switched from the Quick or Advanced Quick programming mode to the
Drive mode when the Run Command is sent from the external terminal.
The Inverter is run at a frequency below the minimum output frequency.
3 Stopped The Run Command is carried out when the External Baseblock Com-
mand using the multi-function contact input terminal is issued.
4 Stopped Stopped
During deceleration to a stop

During DC injection braking when using the multi-function contact input
5 Running terminal.
During initial excitation of DC injection braking while the Inverter is
stopped.
During emergency deceleration
• Stop Command is sent from the Digital Operator when operating the
6 Running
Inverter using the control circuit terminals.
• Emergency Stop Command is sent from the control circuit terminal.
Run Command is issued.
7 Running During initial excitation of DC injection braking when starting the
Inverter.
Note : Lit : Blinking : Not lit

* If planning to run the Inverter again, first turn OFF the Run Command and Emergency Stop Command from the control circuit terminal and send the Run
Command.
3-4
Modes
Modes
This section describes the Inverter's modes and switching between modes.
Inverter Modes
The Inverter's user constants and monitoring functions are organized in groups called modes that make it eas-
ier to read and set user constants.The Inverter is equipped with 5 modes.
The 5 modes and their primary functions are shown in the Table 3.3.
Table 3.3 Modes

Mode Primary function(s)
The Inverter can be run in this mode.
Drive mode Use this mode when monitoring values such as frequency references or output cur-
rent, displaying fault information, or displaying the fault history.
Use this mode to reference and set the minimum user constants to operate the
Quick programming mode
Inverter (e.g., the operating environment of the Inverter and Digital Operator).
Advanced programming mode Use this mode to reference and set all user constants.
Use this mode to read/set user constants that have been changed from their factory-
Verify mode
set values.
Use this mode when running a motor with unknown motor constants in the vector
Autotuning mode* control method. The motor constants are calculated and set automatically.
This mode can also be used to measure only the motor line-to-line resistance.
* Always perform autotuning with the motor before operating using vector control. Autotuning mode will not be displayed during operation or when an error
has occurred. The factory setting of the Inverter is A1-02 = 0 for V/f control.
3-5
Switching Modes
The mode selection display will appear when the MENU Key is pressed from a monitor or setting display.
Press the MENU Key from the mode selection display to switch between the modes.
Press the DATA/ENTER Key from the mode selection key to monitor data and from a monitor display to
access the setting display.
MENU Power ON
Drive Mode DATA

ENTER
(Operation possible)
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
Quick MENU
Programming Mode DATA DATA DATA
ENTER ENTER ENTER
ESC ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
Advanced MENU
Programming Mode DATA DATA DATA
ENTER ENTER ENTER
ESC ESC
MENU
Verify Mode DATA When returning from a setting
ENTER
display, the rightmost digit
of the monitor display will
ESC flash.
Autotuning If a user constant is changed

MENU DATA the number will be dislayed. DATA DATA
Mode ENTER ENTER ENTER
ESC ESC
Mode Selection Displays Monitor Displays Setting Displays
Lit Flashing Not lit
Fig 3.3 Mode Transitions
When running the Inverter after using Digital Operator, press the MENU Key to enter the drive mode (DRIVE
indicator will flash) and then press the DATA/ENTER Key from the drive mode display to bring up the monitor
display (DRIVE indicator will light). Run Commands can't be received from any other display. (Monitor display
IMPORTANT in the drive mode will appear when the power is turned ON.)
3-6
Modes
Drive Mode
Drive mode is the mode in which the Inverter can be operated. The following monitor displays are possible in
drive mode: The frequency reference, output frequency, output current, and output voltage, as well as fault
information and the fault history.
When b1-01 (Reference selection) is set to 0, the frequency can be changed from the frequency setting display.
Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to change the frequency. The user constant will be
written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the
setting.
Example Operations
Key operations in drive mode are shown in the following figure.
Mode Selection Display Monitor Constant Display Detailed Monitor Constant Monitor Display
MENU Power ON
Display
Frequency reference setting/

Drive Mode DATA Frequency reference DATA display unit o1-03
ENTER ENTER
ESC ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
Output frequency
ESC
Output current
ESC
Monitor setting for o1-01
ESC
Status Monitor 㧪 Frequency reference DATA

RESET ENTER
ESC
ESC
DATA
Fan operating time ENTER
ESC
ESC
DATA
ENTER
Error Trace 㧪 Current error

RESET
ESC
ESC
Operating time at error DATA

ENTER
ESC
ESC
Fault History 㧪 DATA

1st previous error ENTER
RESET
ESC
ESC ESC
Operating time at 4th DATA

previous error ENTER
ESC
ESC
Fig 3.4 Operations in Drive Mode
The display for the first monitor constant (frequency reference) will be displayed when power is turned ON.
The monitor item displayed at startup can be set in o1-02 (Monitor Selection after Power Up).
Operation cannot be started from the mode selection display.
IMPORTANT
3-7
Quick Programming Mode
In quick programming mode, the constants required for Inverter trial operation can be monitored and set.
Constants can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to
change the frequency. The user constant will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the
DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting.
Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants for details on the constants displayed in quick programming mode.
Example Operations
Key operations in quick programming mode are shown in the following figure.
Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display

MENU
Quick Programming Mode DATA Control method selection DATA

ENTER ENTER
ESC ESC

Reference selection DATA
ENTER
ESC ESC
Operation method selection DATA

ENTER
ESC ESC
Stopping method selection DATA

ENTER
ESC
C1-01: Acceleration time 1 d1-01: Frequency reference 1 E1-01: Input voltage setting
C1-02: Deceleration time 1 d1-02: Frequency reference 2 E1-03: V/f pattern selection
C6-01: CT/VT selection d1-03: Frequency reference 3 E1-04: Max. output frequency
C6-02: Carrier frequency d1-04: Frequency reference 4 E1-05: Max. voltage
selection d1-17: Jog frequency reference E1-06: Base frequency
E1-09: Min. output frequency
E1-13: Base voltage (VBASE)
E2-01: Motor rated current
AO CH1 output gain DATA
ENTER
ESC ESC
AO CH2 output gain DATA

ENTER
ESC ESC
Motor protection selection DATA

ENTER
ESC ESC
Deceleration stall selection DATA

ENTER
ESC ESC
Fig 3.5 Operations in Quick Programming Mode
3-8
Modes
Advanced Programming Mode

In advanced programming mode, all Inverter constants can be monitored and set.
Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants for details on the constants.
Example Operations
Key operations in advanced programming mode are shown in the following figure.
Mode Selection Display Function Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display
MENU
DATA
ENTER RESET
Advanced Programming Mode Setup settings: A1-xx Language DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC ESC
Access level DATA

ENTER
ESC
ESC
Control mode selection DATA

ENTER
ESC
ESC
RESET
PID control: b5-xx PID control mode selection DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC ESC
Proportional gain DATA

ENTER
ESC
ESC
PID feedback command
loss detection time DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
RESET
Torque limits: L7-xx Forward torque limit DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC ESC
Reverse torque limit DATA

ENTER
ESC
ESC
Reverse regenerative torque limit DATA

ENTER
ESC
ESC
RESET
Copy functions: o3-xx Copy function selection DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC ESC
Read permitted selection DATA

ENTER
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE ESC

ESC
Fig 3.6 Operations in Advanced Programming Mode
3-9
Setting User Constants
Here, the procedure is shown to change C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 10 s to 20 s.
Table 3.4 Setting User Constants in Advanced Programming Mode

Step
Digital Operator Display Description
No.
1 Power supply turned ON.
2 MENU Key pressed to enter drive mode.
MENU Key pressed to enter quick program-

3 ming mode.
MENU Key pressed to enter advanced pro-

4
gramming mode.
DATA/ENTER pressed to access monitor dis-

5
play.
Increment or Decrement Key pressed to dis-

6
play C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
DATA/ENTER Key pressed to access setting

7 display. The setting of C1-01 (10.00) is dis-
played.
Shift/RESET Key pressed to move the flashing

8
digit to the right.
Increment Key pressed to change set value to

9
20.00 s.
DATA/ENTER Key pressed to enter the set

10 data. “END” is displayed for 10 s and then the
entered value is displayed for 0.5 s.
11 The monitor display for C1-01 returns.
3-10
Modes
Verify Mode
Verify mode is used to display any constants that have been changed from their default settings in a program-
ming mode or by autotuning. “None” will be displayed if no settings have been changed.
Of the environment mode settings, only A1-02 will be displayed if it has been changed. Other environment
modes settings will not be displayed even if they have been changed from their default settings.
Even in verify mode, the same procedures can be used to change settings as are used in the programming
modes. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to change the frequency. The user constant will
be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing
the setting.
Example Operations
An example of key operations is given below for when the following settings have been changed from their
default settings: b1-01 (Reference Selection), C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1), E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting), and
E2-01 (Motor Rated Current).
Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display

MENU
Frequency reference Frequency reference

Verify Mode DATA selection DATA selection
ENTER ENTER
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
Acceleration time 1 DATA Acceleration time 1

ENTER DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
Input voltage setting DATA Input voltage setting

ENTER DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
Motor rated current DATA Motor rated current

ENTER
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
Fig 3.7 Operations in Verify Mode
3-11
Autotuning Mode
Autotuning automatically tunes and sets the required motor constants when operating in the vector control
method. Always perform autotuning before starting operation.
When V/f control has been selected, stationary autotuning for only line-to-line resistance can be selected.
When the motor cannot be disconnected from the load, perform stationary autotuning. Contact your Yaskawa
representatives to set motor constants by calculation.
The Inverter's autotuning function automatically determines the motor constants, while a servo system's auto-
tuning function determines the size of a load, so these autotuning functions are fundamentally different.
The factory setting of the Inverter is A1-02 = 0 for V/f control.
Example of Operation
Set the motor output power (in kW), rated voltage, rated current, rated frequency, rated speed, and number of
poles specified on the nameplate on the motor and then press the RUN Key. The motor is automatically run
and the motor constants measured based on these settings and autotuning will be set.
Always set the above items. Autotuning cannot be started otherwise, e.g., it cannot be started from the motor
rated voltage display.
The following example shows autotuning for open-loop vector control while operating the motor without
switching to motor 2.
3-12
Modes
MENU Autotuning Monitor Display Setting Display
Tuning mode:
Autotuning Tuning mode DATA rotational tuning
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
ESC
Motor output power DATA Motor output power

ESC ENTER DATA
ENTER
ESC
Motor rated voltage DATA Motor rated voltage

ESC ENTER DATA
ENTER
ESC
Motor rated current DATA Motor rated current

ESC ENTER DATA
ENTER
ESC
Motor base frequency DATA Motor base frequency

ESC ENTER DATA
ENTER
ESC
No. of motor poles DATA No. of motor poles

ESC ENTER DATA
ENTER
ESC
Motor base speed DATA Motor base speed

ESC ENTER DATA
ENTER
ESC
Autotuning start* Autotuning Stop command input

ESC RUN
ESC
Autotuning completed
* TUn10 will be displayed during rotational autotuning and TUn11 will be displayed during stationary autotuning. The DRIVE indicator will light when
autotuning starts.
Fig 3.8 Operation in Autotuning Mode
If a fault occurs during autotuning, refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting.
IMPORTANT
3-13
Trial Operation
This chapter describes the procedures for trial operation of the Inverter and provides an example
of trial operation.
Overview of Trial Operation Procedure........................4-2

Trial Operation Procedures..........................................4-3
Adjustment Suggestions ............................................4-18
Overview of Trial Operation Procedure
Perform trial operation according to the following flowchart. When setting the basic user constants,
always set C6-01 (CT/VT Selection) according to the application.
START
Installation
Wiring
Set power supply voltage.*1
Turn ON power.
Confirm status.
Select
Basic settings
operating
(Quick programming mode)
method.
NO
Vector control (A1-02=2, 3 )
V/f control? *5
YES YES
㧔A1-02=1㧕
PG?
NO
㧔Default: A1-02=0㧕
Set E1-03. Set E1-03, E2-04, and F1-01.*2
V/f default: 200V/60Hz(400V/60Hz) V/f default: 200V/60Hz
(400V/60Hz)
Settings according
to control mode
Load is
Motor cable over OK to operate *3 NO YES
50 m or heavy load possibly YES connected to motor when
motor during operating motor first time
causing motor to stall or
overload? autotuning? after autotuning?
YES NO
NO Stationary autotuning for *4 Rotational Stationary Stationary
line-to-line resistance only autotuning *6 autotuning 1 *6 autotuning 2 *6
Application settings
(Advanced programming mode) *1‫ޓ‬Set for 400 V Class Inverter for 75 kW or more.
No-load operation *2‫ޓ‬If there is a reduction gear between the motor and PG, set
the reduction ratio in F1-12 and F1-13 in advanced
Loaded operation programming mode.
Optimum adjustments and *3‫ޓ‬Use rotational autotuning to increase autotuning accuracy

constant settings whenever it is okay for the motor to be operated.
Check/record constants. *4‫ޓ‬If the motor cable changes to 50 m or longer for the actual
installation, perform stationary autotuning for the line-to-line
resistance only on-site.
END
*5‫ޓ‬The factory setting of A1-02 (Control method selection) is 0
(V/f control).
*6‫ޓ‬If the maximum output frequency is different from the base

frequency, set the maximum output frequency (E1-04) to the
value of the base frequency after autotuning.
Fig 4.1 Trial Operation Flowchart
4-2
Trial Operation Procedures

The procedure for the trial operate is described in order in this section.
Application Confirmation
First, confirm the application before using the Inverter.
• Fan, blower, pump
• Other equipment
For any Inverter application other than a fan, blower, or pump, set C6-01 (CT/VT Selection) to 0 (CT: low car-
rier, constant torque). The default setting is 1 (VT: high carrier, variable torque) for Inverters with SPEC: C or
earlier and 0 (CT: low carrier, constant torque) for Inverters with SPEC: E or later.
However, only 1(VT) can be set for 200 V Class 110 kW as well as 400 V Class 220 kW and 300 kW Inverters
with any SPEC.
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW

or Higher)
Set the power supply voltage jumper after setting E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting) for 400 V Class Inverters
of 75 kW or higher. Insert the jumper into the power tap nearest to the actual power supply voltage. If the
wrong connector is selected, the Inverter may be damaged.
The jumper is factory-set to 440 V when shipped. If the power supply voltage is not 440 V, use the
following procedure to change the setting.
1. Turn OFF the power supply and wait for at least 5 minutes.
2. Confirm that the CHARGE indicator has gone out.
3. Remove the terminal cover.
4. Insert the jumper at the position for the voltage supplied to the Inverter (see Fig 4.2).
5. Return the terminal cover to its original position.
Power tap
200 V Class power supply Jumper (factory-set position)

400V Class power supply
Power supply input terminals
CHARGE indicator
Fig 4.2 Power Supply Voltage Jumper
Power ON
Confirm all of the following items and then turn ON the power supply.
1. Check that the power supply is of the correct voltage.
200V Class: 3-phase 200 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz
400V Class: 3-phase 380 to 480 VAC 50/60 Hz
For an Inverter of 200 V, 37 kW or more, use one of the following power supplies for the cooling fan.
3-phase 200/208/220 VAC 50 Hz or 3-phase 200/208/220/230 VAC 60 Hz
4-3
2. Make sure that the motor output terminals (U, V, W) and the motor are connected correctly.
3. Make sure that the Inverter control circuit terminal and the control device are wired correctly.
4. Set all Inverter control circuit terminals to turn OFF.
5. When using a PG speed control board, make sure that it is wired correctly.
6. Make sure that the motor is not connected to the mechanical system. (No-load condition)
Checking the Display Status

If the Digital Operator's display at the time the power is connected is normal, it will read as follows:
Display for normal operation The frequency reference monitor is dis-

played in the data display section.
When an fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed instead of the above display. In that case,
refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting. The following display is an example of a display for faulty operation.
The display will differ depending on the

Display for fault operation type of fault.
A low voltage alarm is shown at left.
4-4
Basic Settings
Switch to the quick programming mode (the QUICK indicator on the Digital Operation should be lit) and then
set the following user constants. Refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes for Digital Operator operat-
ing procedures and to Chapter 5 User Constants and Chapter 6 Constant Settings by Function for details on
the user constants.
Constants that must be set are listed in Table 4.1 and those that are set according to the application are listed in
Table 4.2.
Table 4.1 Basic Settings of Constants
Constant Factory
Name Description Setting Range Page
Number Setting
Set the control method for the Inverter.
0 to 2
0: V/f control
Control method
A1-02 1: V/f control with PG 0 5-8
selection
2: Open-loop vector control
0 to 3
3: Flux vector control
Set the frequency reference input method.
0: Digital Operator 5-10
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input) 6-6
b1-01 Reference selection 0 to 4 1
2: MEMOBUS communications 6-79
3: Option board 6-98
4: Pulse train input
Set the Run Command input method.
5-10
0: Digital Operator
Operation method 6-15
b1-02 1: Control circuit terminal (sequence input) 0 to 3 1
selection 6-79
2: MEMOBUS communications
6-98
3: Option board
Set the acceleration time in seconds for the 0.0 to 6000.0 s 5-20
C1-01 Acceleration time 1 10.0 s
output frequency to climb from 0% to 100%. *1 6-25
Set the deceleration time in seconds for the 0.0 to 6000.0 s 5-20
C1-02 Deceleration time 1 10.0 s
output frequency to fall from 100% to 0%. *1 6-25
Set to CT (not low noise, maximum current
overload: 150%) or VT (low noise, maxi- 1*2
5-25
C6-01 CT/VT selection mum current overload:120%). 0 or 1
6-2
0: CT 0*2
1: VT
200 V
Set the Inverter's nominal input voltage in 155 to 255 V (200 V
Input voltage set- volts. (200 V Class) Class) 5-32
E1-01
ting This setting is used as a reference value in 310 to 510 V 400 V 6-122
protection functions. (400 V Class) (400 V
Class)
Setting for
general-
10% to 200% of purpose 5-34
E2-01 Motor rated current Set the motor rated current. Inverter's rated motor of 6-60
current same 6-120
capacity as
Inverter
4-5
Table 4.1 Basic Settings of Constants (Continued)
Constant Factory
Number Setting
Set to enable or disable the motor overload
protection function using the electronic ther-
mal relay.
Motor protection 5-55
L1-01 0: Disabled 0 to 3 1
selection 6-60
1: General motor protection
2: Inverter motor protection
3: Vector motor protection
* 1. The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times will depends on the setting for C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the setting range for acceleration/
deceleration times becomes 0.00 to 600.00 seconds.
* 2. Only 1(VT) can be set for 200 V Class 110 kW as well as 400 V Class 220 kW and 300 kW Inverters.
1
When C6-01 is set to 0 (CT), non-low noise will apply and the Inverter overload withstand ratio will be
150% of the Inverter rating per minute. When C6-01 is set to 1 (VT), low noise will apply and the Inverter
overload withstand ratio will be 120% of the Inverter rating per minute. If C6-01 is set to 1 (VT) when
IMPORTANT overload withstand capability is required by the application, the life of the Inverter may be reduced.
Table 4.2 Constants That Are Set As Required

Constant Factory
Number Setting
Select stopping method when Stop Com-
mand is sent.
Stopping method 0: Deceleration to stop 0 to 3 5-10
b1-03 0
selection 1: Coast to stop *1 6-17
2: DC braking stop
3: Coast to stop with timer
The carrier frequency is set low if the motor 0, 1
0, 1
cable is 50 m or longer or to reduce radio (C6-01=0)
Carrier frequency (C6-01=0) 5-25
C6-02 noise or leakage current. The factory setting
selection
and setting range depends on the setting of
0 to F 6*2 6-2
(C6-01=1) (C6-01=1)
C6-01.
0.00 to 400.00 d1-01 to

Frequency refer-
d1-01 to *3*4 d1-04: 0.00
ences 1 to 4 and Set the required speed references for multi- 5-26
d1-04 and Hz
jog frequency ref- step speed operation or jogging. 0.00 to 300.00 6-10
d1-17 d1-17: 6.00
erence *3*5 Hz
Set the voltage level gain for the multi-func-
H4-02:
tion analog output 1 (H4-02) and 2 (H4-05).
H4-02 and FM and AM termi- 1.00
Set the number of multiples of 10 V to be 0.00 to 2.50 5-52
H4-05 nal output gain H4-05:
output as the 100% output for the monitor
item. 0.50
0: Disabled (Deceleration as set. If

deceleration time is too short, a main
circuit overvoltage may result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is stopped when
the main circuit voltage exceeds the
overvoltage level. Deceleration restarts
when voltage is returned.)
Stall prevention
2: Intelligent deceleration mode 0 to 3 5-59
L3-04 selection during 1
(Deceleration rate is automatically *6 6-32
deceleration
adjusted so that the Inverter can
decelerate in the shortest possible time.
Set deceleration time is disregarded.)
3: Enabled (with Braking Resistor Unit)
When a braking option (Braking Resistor,
Braking Resistor Unit, Braking Unit) is
used, always set to 0 or 3.
4-6
* 1. 0 or 1 for flux vector control.

* 2. The factory setting depends on the capacity of the Inverter.
* 3. The upper limit of the setting range depends on the upper limit set in E1-04.
* 4. When C6-01 = 0, the upper limit is 150.00.
* 6. When using flux vector control, 0 to 2.
Settings for the Control Methods

Autotuning methods depend on the control method set for the Inverter. Make the settings required by the con-
trol method.
Overview of Settings
Make the required settings in quick programming mode and autotuning mode according to the following flow-
chart.
START
NO
Vector control (A1-02 = 2 or 3 )
V/f control?
YES 㧔A1-02=0 or 1)
Control mode selection

PG?
YES
NO 㧔A1-02=1㧕
(Default:
A1-02=0)
Set E1-03. Set E1-03, E2-04, and F1-01. *2
V/f default: 200V/60Hz(400V/60Hz) V/f default: 200V/60Hz(400V/60Hz)
Motor cable over Load is

OK to operate NO YES
50 m or heavy load possibly connected to motor when
causing motor to stall motor during operating motor first time
or overload? YES autotuning? *1 after autotuning?
NO YES
Stationary autotuning for Rotational *3 Stationary *3 Stationary *3

line-to-line resistance only autotuning autotuning 1 autotuning 2
END
Note If the motor cable changes to 50 m or longer for the actual installation, perform stationary autotuning for the line-to-line resistance only on-site.
* 1. Use rotational autotuning to increase autotuning accuracy whenever it is okay for the motor to be operated.
* 2. If there is a reduction gear between the motor and PG, set the reduction ratio in F1-12 and F1-13.
* 3. If the maximum output frequency is different from the base frequency, set the maximum output frequency (E1-04) to the value of the base frequency
after autotuning.
Fig 4.3 Settings According to the Control Method
4-7
Setting the Control Method
Any of the following four control methods can be set.
Constant Set-
Control Method Basic Control Main Applications
ting
Variable speed control, particularly
A1-02 = 0 control of multiple motors with one
V/f control Voltage/frequency ratio fixed control
(factory setting) Inverter and replacing existing Invert-
ers
Applications requiring high-precision
Voltage/frequency ratio fixed control
V/f control with PG A1-02 = 1 speed control using a PG on the
with speed compensation using a PG
machine side
Variable speed control, applications
Open-loop vector
A1-02 = 2 Current vector control without a PG requiring speed and torque accuracy
control
using vector control without a PG
Very high-performance control with a
PG (simple servo drives, high-preci-
Flux vector control A1-02 = 3 Flux vector control
sion speed control, torque control, and
torque limiting)
Note With vector control, the motor and Inverter must be connected 1:1. The motor capacity for which stable control is possible is 50% to 100% of the capac-
ity of the Inverter.
V/f Control (A1-02 = 0)

• Set either one of the fixed patterns (0 to E) in E1-03 (V/f Pattern Selection) or set F in E1-03 to specify a
user-set pattern as required for the motor and load characteristics in E1-04 to E1-13 in advanced program-
ming mode.
Simple operation of a general-purpose
motor at 50 Hz: E1-03 = 0
motor at 60 Hz: E1-03 = F (default) or 1
If E1-03 = F, the default setting in the user setting from
E1-04 to E1-13 are for 60 Hz
• Perform stationary autotuning for the line-to-line resistance only if the motor cable is 50 m or longer for
the actual installation or the load is heavy enough to produce stalling. Refer to the following section on
Autotuning for details on stationary autotuning.
V/f Control with PG (A1-02=1)

• Set either one of the fixed patterns (0 to E) in E1-03 (V/f Pattern Selection) or set F in E1-03 to specify a
user-set pattern as required for the motor and load characteristics in E1-04 to E1-13 in advanced program-
ming mode.
motor at 50 Hz: E1-03 = 0
motor at 60 Hz: E1-03 = F (default) or 1
If E1-03 = F, the default setting in the user setting
from E1-04 to E1-13 are for 60 Hz
• Set the number of motor poles in E2-04 (Number of Motor Poles)
• Set the number of rotations per pulse in F1-01 (PG Constant). If there is a reduction gear between the
motor and PG, set the reduction ratio in F1-12 and F1-13 in advanced programming mode.
• Perform stationary autotuning for the line-to-line resistance only if the motor cable is 50 m or longer for
the actual installation or the load is heavy enough to produce stalling. Refer to the following section on
Autotuning for details on stationary autotuning.
4-8
Open-loop Vector Control (A1-02 = 2)

Perform autotuning. If the motor can be operated, perform rotational autotuning. If the motor cannot be oper-
ated, perform stationary autotuning 1 or 2 . Refer to the following section on Autotuning for details on auto-
tuning.
Flux Vector Control (A1-02 = 3)

Perform autotuning. If the motor can be operated, perform rotational autotuning. If the motor cannot be oper-
ated, perform stationary autotuning 1 or 2. Refer to the following section on Autotuning for details on autotun-
ing.
Autotuning
Use the following procedure to perform autotuning if using the vector control method or the cable length is
long, etc. Motor constants will be set automatically.
If the control method was changed after autotuning, be sure to perform autotuning again.
One of the following four autotuning modes can be set.
• Rotational autotuning
• Stationary autotuning 1
• Stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only
• Stationary autotuning 2
Precautions Before Using Autotuning

Read the following precautions before using autotuning.
• Autotuning the Inverter is fundamentally different from autotuning the servo system. Inverter autotuning
automatically adjusts parameters according to detected motor constants, whereas servo system autotuning
adjusts parameters according to the detected size of the load.
• When speed or torque precision is required at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), use a
motor with a rated voltage that is 20 V less than the input power supply voltage of the Inverter for 200V-
class Inverters and 40 V less for 400V-class Inverters. If the rated voltage of the motor is the same as the
input power supply voltage, the voltage output from the Inverter will be unstable at high speeds and suffi-
cient performance will not be possible.
• Use stationary autotuning 1 or 2 whenever performing autotuning for a motor that is connected to a load.
• Use rotational autotuning whenever performing autotuning for a motor that has fixed output characteris-
tics, when high precision is required, or for a motor that is not connected to a load.
• If rotational autotuning is performed for a motor connected to a load, the motor constants will not be found
accurately and the motor may exhibit abnormal operation. Never perform rotational autotuning for a motor
connected to a load.
• If the wiring between the Inverter and motor changes by 50 m or more between autotuning and motor
installation, perform stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only.
• If the motor cable is long (50 m or longer), perform stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only
even when using V/f control.
• The status of the multi-function inputs and multi-function outputs will be as shown in the following table
during autotuning. When performing autotuning with the motor connected to a load, be sure that the hold-
ing brake is not applied during autotuning, especially for conveyor systems or similar equipment.
4-9
Tuning Mode Multi-function Inputs Multi-function Outputs
Same as during normal
Rotational autotuning Do not function.
operation
Maintain same status as

Stationary autotuning 1 Do not function.
when autotuning is started.
Stationary autotuning for line- Maintain same status as

Do not function.
to-line resistance only when autotuning is started.
Maintain same status as

Stationary autotuning 2 Do not function.
when autotuning is started.
• To cancel autotuning, always use the STOP Key on the Digital Operator.
• Power will be supplied to the motor when stationary autotuning is performed even though the motor will
not turn. Do not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed.
Setting the Autotuning Mode
Rotational Autotuning (T1-01 = 0)

Rotational autotuning is used for open-loop vector control and flux vector control. Set T1-01 to 0, input the
data from the nameplate, and then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operator. The Inverter will stop the
motor for approximately 1 minute and then set the required motor constants automatically while operating the
motor for approximately 1 minute.
1. Always disconnect the motor from the machine and confirm that it is safe to operate the motor before
performing rotational autotuning.
2. If the motor cannot be operated by itself, perform stationary autotuning, but always use rotational
IMPORTANT autotuning whenever it is possible to operate the motor by itself to increase performance.
Stationary Autotuning 1 (T1-01 = 1)

Stationary autotuning1 is used for open-loop vector control and flux vector control. Set T1-01 to 1, input the
data from the nameplate, and then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operator. The Inverter will supply power
to the stationary motor for approximately 1 minute and some of the motor constants will be set automatically.
The remaining motor constants E2-02 (motor rated slip) and E2-03 (motor no-load current) will be set auto-
matically the first time operation is started in drive mode. To perform an operation immediately after station-
ary autotuning1, use the following procedure under the recommended conditions.
1. Check the values of E2-02 and E2-03 in verify mode or advanced programming mode.
2. Run the motor once in drive mode under the following conditions.
• A speed of 30% or more of the base frequency set at E1-06 (default = highest frequency) is maintained at a
constant speed for one second or more.
3. After stopping the motor, check the values of E2-02 and E2-03 again in verify mode or advanced program-
ming mode. If the values of E2-02 and E2-03 differ from the ones before the first operation was carried
out, the settings have been successfully completed. Next, check if the values are suitable or not.
4-10
If the values of E2-02 and E2-03 differed greatly from the reference data of the motor in the test report or the
instruction manual, hunting, motor vibrations, insufficient motor torque, or an overcurrent may occur because
the motor is operated although the aforementioned conditions have not been fulfilled after stationary
autotuning1. For elevators, failure to observe this caution may result in the cage falling or injury. If so, per-
form stationary autotuning1 again and run the motor using the aforementioned procedure under the recom-
mended conditions or perform stationary autotuning 2 or rotational autotuning.
Usually the standard setting for E2-02 is 1 Hz to 3 Hz, and that for E2-03 is 30% to 65% of the rated current
for a general-purpose motor. Generally, the larger the motor capacity is, the smaller the rated slip and the ratio
of the no-load current to the rated current become. Use the data given in Factory Settings that Change with
the Inverter Capacity (o2-04) of Chapter 5 User Constants as a reference.
1. Power will be supplied to the motor when stationary autotuning 1 is performed even though the motor
will not turn. Do not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed.
2. When performing stationary autotuning 1 connected to a conveyor or other machine, ensure that the
IMPORTANT holding brake is not activated during autotuning.
Stationary Autotuning for Line-to-Line Resistance Only (T1-01 = 2)

Stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only can be used in any control method. This is the only auto-
tuning possible for V/f control and V/f control with PG modes.
Autotuning can be used to prevent control errors when the motor cable is long (50 m or longer) or the cable
length has changed since installation or when the motor and Inverter have different capacities.
Set T1-01 to 2, and then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operator. The Inverter will supply power to the sta-
tionary motor for approximately 20 seconds and the Motor Line-to-Line Resistance (E2-05) and cable resis-
tance will be automatically measured.
1. Power will be supplied to the motor when stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance is performed
even though the motor will not turn. Do not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed.
2. When performing stationary autotuning connected to a conveyor or other machine, ensure that the
Stationary Autotuning 2 (T1-01 = 4)

If using Inverters for applications with constant loads such as for elevators, or with a motor load ratio exceed-
ing 30% at startup, and rotational autotuning without loads cannot be performed, perform stationary autotun-
ing 2 (T1-01=4).
Stationary autotuning 2 is used for open-loop vector control and flux vector control. Set T1-04 to 4, and Motor
no-load current (T1-09) will be added as a setting item. Input the data from the nameplate. Be sure to input the
value or motor no-load current (motor exciting current) from motor examination results to T1-09. After auto-
tuning, the value of T1-09 will be written in E2-03. When not setting T1-09, the value of Yaskawa standard
motor’s no-load current will be written in E2-03.
1. Power will be supplied to the motor when stationary autotuning 2 is performed even though the motor
will not turn. Do not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed.
2. When performing stationary autotuning 2 connected to a conveyor or other machine, ensure that the
Precautions for Rotational and Stationary Autotuning

Lower the base voltage based on Fig 4.4 to prevent saturation of the Inverter’s output voltage when the rated
voltage of the motor is higher than the voltage of the power supply to the Inverter. Use the following proce-
dure to perform autotuning.
1. Input the voltage of the input power supply to T1-03 (Motor rated voltage).
2. Input the results of the following formula to T1-05 (Motor base frequency):
(Base frequency from the motor’s nameplate × setting of T1-03)/(Rated voltage from motor’s nameplate)
4-11
3. Perform autotuning.
After having completed autotuning, set E1-04 (Max. output frequency) to the base frequency shown on the
motor nameplate.
Output voltage
Rated voltage from

motor nameplate
T1-03
Output frequency
0 Base frequency
Base frequency from motor nameplate
from motor nameplate ×T1-03
Rated voltage from motor nameplate
Fig 4.4 Motor Base Frequency and Inverter Input Voltage Setting
1. When speed precision is required at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), set T1-03 (Motor
rated voltage) to the input power supply voltage × 0.9.
2. When operating at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), the output current will increase as
IMPORTANT the input power supply voltage is reduced. Be sure to provide sufficient margin in the Inverter current.
Precautions after Using Rotational and Stationary Autotuning

After completing autotuning, set E1-04 (Max. output frequency) to the base frequency from the motor’s name-
plate.
In stationary autotuning1, when the motor is first operated in the drive mode after tuning, the remaining motor
constants E2-02 (Motor rated slip) and E2-03 (Motor no-load current) are set automatically. To perform an
operation immediately after stationary autotuning 1, use the following procedure under the recommended con-
ditions.
1. Check the values of E2-02 and E2-03 in verify mode or advanced programming mode.
2. Run the motor once in drive mode under the following conditions.
• A speed of 30% or more of the base frequency set at E1-06 (default = highest frequency) is main-
tained at a constant speed for one second or more.
3. After stopping the motor, check the values of E2-02 and E2-03 again in verify mode or advanced pro-
gramming mode. If the values of E2-02 and E2-03 differ from the ones before the first operation was
carried out, the settings have been successfully completed. Next, check if the values are suitable or not.
If the values of E2-02 and E2-03 differed greatly from the reference data of the motor in the test report or
the instruction manual, hunting, motor vibrations, insufficient motor torque, or an overcurrent may occur
because the motor is operated although the aforementioned conditions have not been fulfilled after station-
ary autotuning 1. For elevators, failure to observe this caution may result in the cage falling or injury. If
so, perform stationary autotuning 1 again and run the motor using the aforementioned procedure under the
recommended conditions or perform stationary autotuning 2 or rotational autotuning.
Usually the standard setting for E2-02 is 1Hz to 3Hz, and that for E2-03 is 30% to 65% of the rated current
for a general-purpose motor. Generally, the larger the motor capacity is, the smaller the rated slip and the
ratio of the no-load current to the rated current become. Use the data given in Factory Settings that
Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04) of Chapter 5 User Constants as a reference.
4-12
Constant Settings for Autotuning

The following constants must be set before autotuning.
Table 4.3 Constant Settings before Autotuning

Data Displays during
Con- Autotuning
stant Setting Factory
Name Display V/f Open Flux
Num- Range Setting
ber V/f with Loop Vector
PG Vector
When switching to motor 2 is
selected, set the motor for which
Motor 1/2 autotuning is to be performed.
T1-00 (This constant is ignored if 1 or 2 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes
selection*1 motor 2 is not selected.)
1: Motor 1
2: Motor 2
Set the autotuning mode. 0 to 2
0: Rotational autotuning *9
Autotuning 1: Stationary autotuning 1 Yes Yes
T1-01 mode selec- 2: Stationary autotuning for 2 *2 (only (only Yes Yes
tion line-to-line resistance only 0 to 2, 4 for 2) for 2)
*9
4: Stationary autotuning 2
Motor out- Set the output power of the 0.00 to 0.40 kW

T1-02 Yes Yes Yes Yes
put power motor in kilowatts.*3 *5 650.00 kW *6
0.0 to 255.0
V (200 V 200.0 V (200
Motor rated Set the rated voltage of the Class) V Class)
T1-03 - - Yes Yes
voltage motor in volts.*3 *4 0.0 to 510.0 400.0 V (400
V (400 V V Class)
Class)
Motor rated Set the rated current of the 0.32 to 1.90 A

T1-04 Yes Yes Yes Yes
current motor in amps.*3 *5 6.40 A *10 *6
0.0 to
Motor base Set the base frequency of the 400.0 Hz *7
T1-05 60.0 Hz - - Yes Yes
frequency motor in hertz.*3 *4 0.0 to
300.0 Hz *11
Number of
T1-06 Set the number of motor poles. 2 to 48 poles 4 poles - - Yes Yes
motor poles
Motor base Set the base speed of the motor 1750

T1-07 0 to 24000 - - Yes Yes
speed in min-1.*3 min-1
Set the number of pulses for the

Number of
PG (pulse generator or encoder).
PG pulses
T1-08 Set the number of pulses per 0 to 60000 600 - Yes - Yes
when turn-
motor revolution without a mul-
ing
tiplication factor.
Set the current value recorded in
the motor’s test results for a
Motor no- motor without a load. 0.00 to 1.89 1.20A
T1-09 *8 No No No Yes
load current Displayed only when Stationary *6
autotuning 2 is selected (T1-01
= 4).
* 1. Not normally displayed. Displayed only when a motor switch command is set for a multi-function digital input (one of H1-01 to H1-06 set to 16).
* 2. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. The V/f control factory setting is given.
* 3. For a constant-output motor, set the value at the base speed.
4-13
* 4. For an Inverter motor or vector motor, the voltage and frequency may be lower than for a general-purpose motor. Always confirm setting on the name-
plate or in test reports. Also, if you know the no-load values, set the no-load voltage in T1-03 and the no-load frequency in T1-05 to obtain better accu-
racy.
* 5. Stable vector control will be possible when the setting is between 50% and 100% of Inverter rating.
* 6. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The values for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW are given.
* 7. When C6-01=0, the upper limit is 150.00.
* 8. The setting range depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given. The upper limit depends on the setting of
E2-01.
* 9. Set T1-02 and T1-04 when 2 is set for T1-01. Only set value 2 is possible for V/f control or V/f control with PG.
* 10.The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.
* 11.When C6-01=1, the upper limit is 400.00.
Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning

The following displays will appear on the Digital Operator during autotuning.
Table 4.4 Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning

Digital Operator Display Description
Autotuning mode selection: T1-01
Using the same procedures as for the programming
modes check and set the T1 constants according to
information on the previous page.
Be sure that T1-01 (Autotuning Mode Selection) is set
correctly and check safety around the motor and
machine.
Motor base speed: T1-07

(For rotational autotuning)
The autotuning start display will appear when all set-
tings through T1-07 have been completed. The
A.TUNE and DRIVE indicators will be lit.
If using stationary autotuning 2, all settings through
T1-09 are to be set.
Autotuning started: TUn10
Autotuning will start when the RUN Key is pressed

from the autotuning start display.
The digit second from the right in TUn is the
Motor 1/2 Selection (T1-00) and the right digit is the
Autotuning Mode Selection (T1-01).
Autotuning Stop Command input
If the STOP Key is pressed or a measurement error

occurs during autotuning, and error message will be
display and autotuning will be stopped.
Refer to Errors during Autotuning on page 7-18.
Autotuning completed
END will be displayed after approximately 1 to 2 min-

utes, indicating that autotuning has been completed.
4-14
Precautions After Using Autotuning

For a fixed output region, the V/f pattern for the maximum point in the output region must be set after com-
pleting autotuning. To increase the motor’s rated speed by 1 to 1.2 times or when using a fixed output motor,
make the following changes after autotuning. Do not change E1-06 (Base frequency) or E1-13 (Base voltage).
Increasing the Motor’s Rated Speed by 1 to 1.2 Times

To increase the motor’s rated speed by 1 to 1.2 times, use the following formula to change the setting of E1-04
(Maximum output frequency):
E1-04 = (Motor’s rated speed) × (No. of motor poles)/120 (Hz) × (1 to 1.2)
If the motor’s speed is increased beyond the rated speed, fixed output characteristics will be used at high
speeds and motor torque will be reduced.
Applications to Constant Output Motors Such as Motors for Machine Tools

Use the following formula to change the settings of E1-04 (Maximum output frequency) and E1-05 (Maxi-
mum frequency) when using a motor with a fixed output, e.g., a motor for a machine tool:
E1-04 = Frequency (Hz) at maximum speed under no-load conditions (load rate = 0)
E1-05 = Voltage (V) at maximum speed under no-load conditions (load rate = 0)
Do not change the E2 motor constants after performing autotuning.
Precautions for Precision Settings

Settings for autotuning are different when performing autotuning using motor test reports or design data. Use
the following table as reference.
Operator Display Simple Setting Precision Setting

Voltage under no-load con-
T1-03 Motor rated voltage
ditions at motor rated speed
Frequency under no-load

T1-05 Motor base frequency
conditions at rated speed
4-15
Application Settings
User constants are set as required in advanced programming mode (i.e., with the ADV indicator lit on the Dig-
ital Operator). All the constants that can be set in quick programming mode can also be displayed and set in
advanced programming mode.
Setting Examples
The following are examples of settings for applications.
• When using an Inverter-mounted braking resistor (ERF), set L8-01 to 1 to enable ERF braking resistor
overheating protection.
• To prevent the machine from being operated in reverse, set b1-04 to 1 to disable reverse operation.
• To increase the speed of a 60 Hz motor by 10%, set E1-04 to 66.0 Hz.
• To use a 0 to 10-V analog signal for a 60 Hz motor for variable-speed operation between 0 and 54 Hz (0%
to 90% speed deduction), set H3-02 to 90.0%.
• To control speed between 20% and 80% to ensure smooth gear operation and limit the maximum speed of
the machine, set d2-01 to 80.0% and set d2-02 to 20.0%.
No-load Operation
To being no-load operation (without connecting the machine and the motor), press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key
on the Digital Operator to change to LOCAL mode (the SEQ and REF indicators on the Digital Operator
should be OFF).
Always confirm safety around the motor and machine before starting Inverter operation from the Digital
Operator. Confirm that the motor works normally and that no errors are displayed at the Inverter.
Jog Frequency Reference (d1-17, default: 6.00 Hz) can be started and stopped by pressing and releasing the
JOG Key on the Digital Operator. If the external sequence prevent operation from the Digital Operator, con-
firm that emergency stop circuits and machine safety mechanisms are functioning, and then start operation in
REMOTE mode (i.e., with a signal from the control signal terminals). The safety precautions must always be
taken before starting the Inverter with the motor connected to the machine.
Both a Run Command (forward or reverse) and a frequency reference (or multi-step speed reference) must
be provided to start Inverter operation.
Input these commands and reference regardless of the operation method (i.e., LOCAL of REMOTE).
INFO
Loaded Operation
Connect the machine to the motor and then start operation as described for no-load operation (i.e., from the
Digital Operator or by using control circuit terminal signals).
Connecting the Load

• After confirming that the motor has stopped completely, connect the mechanical system.
• Be sure to tighten all the screws when securing the motor shaft to the mechanical system.
4-16
Operation using the Digital Operator

• Use the Digital Operator to start operation in LOCAL mode in the same way as in no-load operation.
• If fault occurs during operation, make sure the STOP Key on the Digital Operator is easily accessible.
• At first, set the frequency reference to a low speed of one tenth the normal operating speed.
Checking Operating Status

• Having checked that the operating direction is correct and that the machine is operating smoothly at slow
speed, increase the frequency reference.
• After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no oscillation or abnor-
mal sound from the motor. Check the monitor display to ensure that U1-03 (Output Current) is not too
high.
• Refer to Adjustment Suggestions on page 4-18 if hunting, vibration, or other problems originating in the
control system occur.
Check and Recording User Constants

Use verify mode (i.e., when the VERIFY indicator on the Digital Operator is lit) to check user constants that
have been changed for trial operation and record them in a user constant table.
Any user constants that have been change by autotuning will also be displayed in verify mode.
If required, the copy function in constants o3-01 and o3-02 displayed in advanced programming mode can be
used to copy the changed settings from the Inverter to a recording area in the Digital Operator. If changed set-
tings are saved in the Digital Operator, they can be easily copied back to the Inverter to speed up system
recovery if for any reason the Inverter has to be replaced.
The following functions can also be used to manage user constants.
• Recording user constants
• Setting access levels for user constants
• Setting a password
Recording User Constants (o2-03)

If o2-03 is set to 1 after completing trial operation, the settings of user constants will be saved in a separate
memory area in the Inverter. Later, after Inverter settings have been changed, the user constants can be initial-
ized to the settings saved in the separate memory area when o2-03 was set to 1 by setting A1-03 (Initialize) to
1110.
User Constant Access Levels (A1-01)

A1-01 can be set to 0 (monitoring-only) to prevent user constants from being changed. A1-01 can also be set
to 1 (User-specified Constants) and used along with A2 constants to display only constants required by the
machine or application in a programming mode.
Password (A1-04 and A1-05)

When the access level is set to monitoring-only (A1-01 = 0), a password can be set so that user constants will
be displayed only when the correct password is input.
4-17
Adjustment Suggestions
If hunting, vibration, or other problems originating in the control system occur during trial operation,
adjust the constants listed in the following table according to the control method. This table lists only the
most commonly used user constants.
Table 4.5 Adjusted User Constants

Recom-
Control Name (Constant Factory
Performance mended Adjustment Method
Method Number) Setting
Setting
• Reduce the setting if
Controlling hunting torque is insufficient for
Hunting-prevention and vibration in mid- heavy loads.
1.00 0.50 to 2.00
gain (N1-02) dle-range speeds (10 to • Increase the setting if hunt-
40 Hz) ing or vibration occurs for
light loads.
1 • Increase the setting if
• Reducing motor (C6-01=0) motor magnetic noise is
Carrier frequency magnetic noise high.
Depends 0 to
selection • Controlling hunting • Reduce the setting if hunt-
on default
(C6-02) and vibration at low ing or vibration occurs at
speeds capacity low to middle-range
(C6-01=1) speeds.
V/f control • Increasing torque
Torque compensation Depends torque or speed response is
(A1-02 = 0 and speed response 200 to 1000
primary delay time on slow.
or 1) • Controlling hunting ms
constant (C4-02) capacity • Increase the setting if hunt-
and vibration
ing or vibration occurs.
• Increase the setting if
• Improving torque at
torque is insufficient at
low speeds (10 Hz
Torque compensation low speeds.
or lower) 1.00 0.50 to 1.50
gain (C4-01) • Reduce the setting if hunt-
• Controlling hunting
ing or vibration occurs for
and vibration
light loads.
Middle output fre-
quency voltage • Improving torque at Depends Default to torque is insufficient at
(E1-08) low speeds on capac- Default + 3 low speeds.
Minimum output fre- • Controlling shock at ity and
quency voltage startup voltage to 5 V* • Reduce the setting if shock
at startup is large.
(E1-10)
• Increasing torque
Speed feedback detec- and speed response
torque or speed response is
tion control (AFR) • Controlling hunting
1.00 0.50 to 2.00 slow.
gain and vibration in mid-
• Increase the setting if hunt-
(N2-01) dle-range speeds (10
to 40 Hz)
• Increasing torque
Torque compensation torque or speed response is
Open-loop and speed response 20 to
primary delay time 20 ms slow.
vector con- • Controlling hunting 100 ms
constant (C4-02) • Increase the setting if hunt-
trol (A1-02 and vibration
= 2)
• Increasing speed • Reduce the setting if speed
Slip compensation pri-
response 100 to response is slow.
mary delay time (C3- 200 ms
• Improving speed sta- 500 ms • Increase the setting if the
02)
bility speed is not stable.
Slip compensation • Improving speed speed response is slow.
1.0 0.5 to 1.5
gain (C3-01) accuracy • Reduce the setting if the
speed is too fast.
4-18
Adjustment Suggestions
Table 4.5 Adjusted User Constants (Continued)

Recom-
Control Name (Constant Factory
Performance mended Adjustment Method
Method Number) Setting
Setting
• Reducing motor 1 • Increase the setting if
magnetic noise (C6-01=0) motor magnetic noise is
Carrier frequency • Controlling hunting Depends 0 to high.
selection (C6-02) and vibration at low on capac- default • Reduce the setting if hunt-
Open-loop speeds (10 Hz or ity ing or vibration occurs at
vector con- less) (C6-01=1) low speeds.
trol (A1-02 Middle output fre-
= 2) • Increase the setting if
quency voltage • Improving torque at Depends Default to torque or speed response is
(E1-08) low speeds on capac- Default + 3 slow.
Minimum output fre- • Controlling shock at ity and
quency voltage startup voltage to 5 V * • Reduce the setting if shock
at startup is large.
(E1-10)
• Increase the setting (by
ASR proportional gain • Torque and speed
increments of 5) if torque
1 (C5-01) and response 10.00 to
20.00 or speed response is slow.
ASR proportional gain • Controlling hunting 50.00
• Reduce the setting if hunt-
2 (C5-03) and vibration
ASR integral time 1 • Reduce the setting if
• Torque and speed
(high-speed) (C5-02) torque or speed response is
response 0.300 to
and 0.500 s slow.
• Controlling hunting 1.000 s
ASR integral time 2 • Increase the setting if hunt-
and vibration
(low-speed) (C5-04) ing or vibration occurs.
Set the output frequency at
Switching the ASR which to change the ASR
proportional gain and 0.0 to max. proportional gain and inte-
ASR switching fre-
integral time accord- 0.0 Hz output fre- gral time when the same val-
quency (C5-07)
Flux vector ing to the output frequency ues cannot be used for both
control quency high-speed and low-speed
(A1-02 = 3) operation.
• Reduce the setting (by
increments of 0.01) if
torque or speed response is
ASR primary delay • Controlling hunting 0.004 to
0.004 s show.
time (C5-06) and vibration 0.020 s
machine rigidity is low and
the system vibrates easily.
1 • Increase the setting if
• Reducing motor (C6-01=0) motor magnetic noise is
magnetic noise high.
Carrier frequency Depends 2.0 kHz to
• Controlling hunting • Reduce the setting if hunt-
selection (C6-02) on the default
and vibration at low ing or vibration occurs at
speeds (3 Hz or less) capacity low to middle-range
(C6-01=1) speeds.
* The setting is given for 200 V Class Inverters. Double the voltage for 400 V Class Inverters.
• Do not change the Torque Compensation Gain (C4-01) from its default setting of 1.00 when using open-
loop vector control.
• If speeds are inaccurate during regeneration in open-loop vector control, enable Slip Compensation During
Regeneration (C3-04 = 1).
• Use slip compensation to improve speed control during V/f control (A1-02 = 0).
Set the Motor Rated Current (E2-01), Motor Rated Slip (E2-02), and Motor No-load Current (E2-03), and
then adjust the Slip Compensation Gain (C3-01) to between 0.5 and 1.5. The default setting for V/f control
is C3-01 = 0.0 (slip compensation disabled).
4-19
• To improve speed response and stability in V/f control with a PG (A1-02 = 1), set the ASR constants (C5-
01 to C5-05) to between 0.5 and 1.5 times the default. (It is not normally necessary to adjust this setting.)
ASR for V/f control with a PG will only control the output frequency; a high gain, such as is possible for
open-loop vector control, cannot be set.
The following user constants will also indirectly affect the control system.
Table 4.6 Constants Indirectly Affecting Control and Applications

Name (Constant Number) Application
CT/VT selection (C6-01) Sets the maximum torque and overload capability to 120% or 150%.
DWELL function (b6-01 to b6-04) Used for heavy loads or large machine backlashes.
Used to soften the torque or to balance the load between two motors. Can
Droop function (b7-01 to b7-02)
be used when the control method (A1-02) is set to 3.
Acceleration/deceleration times
Adjust torque during acceleration and deceleration.
(C1-01 to C1-11)
S-curve characteristics (C2-01 to C2-04) Used to prevent shock when completing acceleration.
Jump frequencies (d3-01 to d3-04) Used to avoid resonance points during operation.
Analog input filter time constant (H3-12) Used to prevent fluctuations in analog input signals caused by noise.
Used to prevent 0 V (overvoltage errors) and motor stalling for heavy
loads or rapid acceleration/deceleration. Stall prevention is enabled by
Stall prevention (L3-01 to L3-06,
default and the setting does not normally need to be changed. When using
L3-11, L3-12 )
a braking resistor, however, disable stall prevention during deceleration
by setting L3-04 to 0.
Set the maximum torque during vector control. If a setting is increased,
Torque limits (L7-01 to L7-04,
use a motor with higher capacity than the Inverter. If a setting is reduced,
L7-06, L7-07 )
stalling can occur under heavy loads.
Used to increase response for acceleration/deceleration or to reduce over-
shooting when there is low machine rigidity and the gain of the speed
Feed forward control (N5-01 to N5-04) controller (ASR) cannot be increased. The inertia ratio between the load
and motor and the acceleration time of the motor running alone must be
set.
4-20
User Constants
This chapter describes all user constants that can be set in the Inverter.
User Constant Descriptions .........................................5-2

Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels ..........5-3
User Constant Tables ..................................................5-8
User Constant Descriptions
This section describes the contents of the user constant tables.
Description of User Constant Tables

User constant tables are structured as shown below. Here, b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) is used as an
example.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Setting Factory during V/f Flux BUS
stant Name Description Range Setting Opera- Loop Regis-
Page
Number V/f with Vec-
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Set the frequency reference

input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
Reference
b1-01 (analog input) 0 to 4 1 No Q Q Q Q 180H 6-6
selection
2: MEMOBUS communica-
tions
3: Option board
• Constant Number: The number of the user constant.

• Name: The name of the user constant.
• Description: Details on the function or settings of the user constant.
• Setting Range: The setting range for the user constant.
• Factory Setting: The factory setting (each control method has its own factory setting.
Therefore the factory setting changes when the control method is
changed.)
Refer to page 5-81 for factory settings by control method.
• Change during Operation: Indicates whether or not the constant can be changed while the
Inverter is in operation.
Yes: Changes possible during operation.
No: Changes not possible during operation.
• Control Methods: Indicates the control methods in which the user constant can be moni-
tored or set.
Q: Items which can be monitored and set in either quick program-
ming mode or advanced programming mode.
A: Items which can be monitored and set only in advanced pro-
gramming mode.
No: Items which cannot be monitored or set for the control method.
• MEMOBUS Register: The register number used for MEMOBUS communications.
• Page: Reference page for more detailed information on the constant.
5-2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels

The following figure shows the Digital Operator display hierarchy for the Inverter.
No. Function Page
MENU Drive Mode U1 Status Monitor Constants 5-74

U2 Fault Trace 5-79
Inverter can be operated and
U3 Fault History 5-80
its status can be displayed.
A1 Initialize Mode 5-8
A2 User-specified Setting Mode 5-9
b1 Operation Mode Selections 5-10
b2 DC Injection Braking 5-12
Quick Programming Mode b3 Speed Search 5-13

b4 Timer Function 5-15
Minimum constants required
b5 PID Control 5-15
for operation can be monitored
or set. b6 Dwell Functions 5-17
b7 Droop Control 5-18
b8 Energy Saving 5-18
b9 Zero-Servo 5-19
C1 Acceleration/Deceleration 5-20
C2 S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration 5-21
Advanced Programming Mode C3 Motor Slip Compensation 5-22
C4 Torque Compensation 5-23
All constants can be monitored
C5 Speed Control (ASR) 5-24
or set.
C6 Carrier Frequency 5-25
d1 Preset Reference 5-26
d2 Reference Limits 5-27
d3 Jump Frequencies 5-28
d4 Reference Frequency Hold 5-28
d5 Torque Control 5-29
Verify Mode d6 Field Weakening 5-31
Constants changed from the E1 V/f Pattern 5-32
default settings can be moni- E2 Motor Setup 5-34
tored or set. E3 Motor 2 V/f Pattern 5-36
E4 Motor 2 Setup 5-37
F1 PG Option Setup 5-38
F2 Analog Reference Board 5-40
F3 Digital Reference Board 5-41
F4 Analog Monitor Boards 5-42
Autotuning Mode
F5 Digital Output Boards 5-43
Automatically sets motor con- F6 Communications Option Boards 5-44
stants if autotuning data (from H1 Multi-function Contact Inputs 5-45
motor nameplate) is input for
H2 Multi-function Contact Outputs 5-47
open-loop vector control or to
measure the line-to-line resis- H3 Analog Inputs 5-49
tance for V/f control. H4 Multi-function Analog Outputs 5-52
H5 MEMOBUS Communications 5-53
H6 Pulse Train 5-54
L1 Motor Overload 5-55
L2 Power Loss Ridethrough 5-57
L3 Stall Prevention 5-58
L4 Reference Detection 5-60
L5 Fault Restart 5-61
L6 Torque Detection 5-62
L7 Torque Limits 5-63
L8 Hardware Protection 5-64
N1 Hunting Prevention Function 5-66
N2 Speed Feedback Protection Control 5-67
N3 High-slip Braking 5-67
N5 Feed Forward 5-68
o1 Monitor Select 5-69
o2 Multi-function Selections 5-70
o3 Copy Function 5-72
T Motor Autotuning 5-73
5-3
User Constants Settable in Quick Programming Mode
The minimum user constants required for Inverter operation can be monitored and set in quick programming
mode. The user constants displayed in quick programming mode are listed in the following table. These, and
all other user constants, are also displayed in advanced programming mode.
Refer to the overview of modes on page 3-5 for an overview of quick programming mode.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Used to select the control method for

the Inverter
0 to 2
0: V/f control
Control 1: V/f with PG
A1-02 method 2: Open loop vector 0 No Q Q Q Q 102H
selection
3: Flux vector
0 to 3
This constant is not initialized by the
initialize operation.
Set the frequency reference input
method.
0: Digital Operator
Reference 1: Control circuit terminal (analog
b1-01 0 to 4 1 No Q Q Q Q 180H
selection input)
3: Option board
Set the Run Command input
method.
Operation 0: Digital Operator
b1-02 method 1: Control circuit terminal 0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q Q 181H
selection (sequence input)
3: Option board
Used to set the stopping method
used when a Stop Command is input.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
Stopping
2: DC injection braking stop (Stops 0 to 3
b1-03 method 0 No Q Q Q Q 182H
faster than coast to stop, no *1
selection
regenerative operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer (Run
Commands are disregarded
during deceleration.)
Sets the acceleration time to acceler-
Accelera-
C1-01 ate from 0 to the maximum output Yes Q Q Q Q 200H
tion time 1 0.0 to
frequency, in 1-second units.
6000.0 10.0 s
Sets the deceleration time to deceler- *2
Decelera-
C1-02 ate from the maximum output fre- Yes Q Q Q Q 201H
tion time 1
quency to 0, in 1-second units.
0: CT (low carrier, constant torque,
1*3
CT/VT 150% per minute)
C6-01 0 or 1 No Q Q Q Q 223H
selection 1: VT (high carrier, variable torque,
120% per minute) 0 *3
5-4
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Select carrier wave fixed pattern.

0: Low-noise PWM
1: 2.0 kHz 0,1 1
2: 5.0 kHz (C6- (C6-
Carrier fre- 01=0)
3: 8.0 kHz 01=0)
C6-02 quency No Q Q Q Q 224H
selection
4: 10.0 kHz 0 to F 6*4
5: 12.5 kHz (C6- (C6-
6: 15.0 kHz 01=1) 01=1)
F: Enables detailed settings using
constants C6-03 to C6-05
Frequency Sets the frequency reference in the 0.00
d1-01 Yes Q Q Q Q 280H
reference 1 units used in o1-03. Hz
0.00 to
The frequency reference when multi- 400.00
Frequency 0.00
d1-02 step speed reference 1 is ON for a *5 *13 Yes Q Q Q Q 281H
reference 2 Hz
multi-function input.
The frequency reference when multi-
Frequency 0.00
d1-03 step speed reference 2 is ON for a Yes Q Q Q Q 282H
reference 3 Hz
The frequency reference when multi-
Frequency 0.00
d1-04 step speed references 1 and 2 are ON Yes Q Q Q Q 283H
reference 4 0.00 to Hz
for multi-function inputs.
300.00
The frequency reference when the *5 *6
Jog
jog frequency reference selection, 6.00
d1-17 frequency Yes Q Q Q Q 292H
FJOG command, or RJOG command Hz
reference
is ON.
Set the Inverter input voltage in 1
155 to
Input volt- volt. 200 V
E1-01 255 No Q Q Q Q 300H
age setting This setting is used as a reference *7
*7
value in protection functions.
0 to E: Select from the 15 preset
patterns.
V/f pattern
E1-03 F: Custom user-set patterns 0 to F F No Q Q No No 302H
selection
(Applicable for settings E1-
04 to E1-10.)
40.0 to
Max. output 400.0 *13 60.0
E1-04 Output voltage (V) Hz No Q Q Q Q 303H
frequency 40.0 to *8
300.0 *6
200.0
Max. 0.0 to
E1-05 V No Q Q Q Q 304H
voltage 255.0*7
*7*8
Frequency (Hz)
0.0 to
To set V/f characteristics in a straight 400.0 *13 60.0
Base line, set the same values for E1-07
E1-06 Hz No Q Q Q Q 305H
frequency and E1-09. In this case, the setting 0.0 to *8
for E1-08 will be disregarded. 300.0 *6
Always ensure that the four frequen-
cies are set in the following manner: 0.0 to
*13
Min. output E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1- 400.0 1.5 Hz
E1-09 07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN) No Q Q Q A 308H
frequency 0.0 to *8
*6
300.0
5-5
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Set only to fine-adjust V/f for the 0.0 to

Base 0.0 V
E1-13 output range. Normally, this setting 255.0 No A A Q Q 30CH
voltage *9
is not required. *7
Sets the motor rated current in 1 A

units.
These set values will become the ref- 0.32 to
Motor rated 1.90 A
E2-01 erence values for motor protection, 6.40 No Q Q Q Q 30EH
current *4
torque limits and torque control. *10
This constant is automatically set
during autotuning.
Sets the number of motor poles.
Number of
E2-04 This constant is automatically set 2 to 48 4 poles No No Q No Q 311H
motor poles
during autotuning.
Set the rated output of the motor in
0.40
Motor rated units of 0.01 kW. 0.00 to
E2-11 kW No Q Q Q Q 318H
output This constant is automatically set 650.00
*4
during autotuning.
Sets the number of PG (pulse gener-
ator or encoder) pulses. 0 to
F1-01 PG constant 600 No No Q No Q 380H
Sets the number of pulses per motor 60000
revolution.
Sets the multi-function analog out-
put 1 voltage level gain.
Sets whether the monitor item output
Gain (termi- will be output in multiples of 10 V. 0.00 to
H4-02 The maximum output from the ter- 1.00 Yes Q Q Q Q 41EH
nal FM) 2.50
minal is 10 V.
A meter calibration function is avail-
able. *12
Set the voltage level gain for multi-
function analog output 2.
Set the number of multiples of 10 V
Gain (termi- to be output as the 100% output for 0.00 to
H4-05 the monitor items. The maximum 0.50 Yes Q Q Q Q 421H
nal AM) 2.50
output from the terminal is 10 V.
A meter calibration function is avail-
able. *12
Sets whether the motor overload
function is enabled or disabled at
electric thermal overload relay.
0: Disabled
1: General-purpose motor
protection
Motor pro- 3: Vector motor protection
L1-01 tection In some applications when the 0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q Q 480H
selection Inverter power supply is turned off,
the thermal value is reset, so even if
this constant is set to 1, protection
may not be effective.
When several motors are connected
to one Inverter, set to 0 and ensure
that each motor is installed with a
protection device.
5-6
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0: Disabled (Deceleration as set. If

deceleration time is too short, a
main circuit overvoltage may
result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is stopped
when the main circuit voltage
exceeds the overvoltage level.
Deceleration restarts when
voltage is returned.)
Stall pre-
2: Intelligent deceleration mode
vention 0 to 3
L3-04 (Deceleration rate is 1 No Q Q Q Q 492H
selection *11
automatically adjusted so that in
during decel
Inverter can decelerate in the
shortest possible time. Set
deceleration time is disregarded.)
3: Enabled (with Braking Resistor
Unit)
When a braking option (Braking
Resistor, Braking Resistor Unit,
Braking Unit) is used, always set to
0 or 3.
* 1. 0 or 1 for flux vector control.

* 2. The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times will depends on the setting for C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the setting range for acceleration/
deceleration times becomes 0.00 to 600.00 seconds.
* 4. The factory settings depend on the capacity of the Inverter. The values for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW are given.
* 6. When C6-01 = 1, the upper limit is 400.00 (d1 constants)/400.0(E1 constants).
* 7. These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
* 8. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. The V/f control factory settings are given.
* 9. E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
* 10.The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
For the motor no-load current, set E2-03 to a value less than that of E2-01.
* 11.When using flux vector control, 0 to 2.
* 12.The CH1 output can be adjusted when the H4-02 or H4-03 setting is displayed in Quick, Advanced, or Verify mode while the motor is stopped.
The CH2 output can be adjusted when the H4-05 or H4-06 setting is displayed in quick, Advance, or Verify mode while the motor is stopped.
For analog output, the value equivalent to 100% of output value of monitored item is multiplied by the gain setting and the set bias is added.
* 13.When C6-01 = 0, the upper limit is 150.00 (d1 constants)/150.0(E1 constants).
5-7
User Constant Tables
A: Setup Settings
The following settings are made with the environment constants (A constants): Language displayed on the
Digital Operator, access level, control method, initialization of constants.
Initialize Mode: A1
User constants for the environment modes are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Used to select the language

displayed on the Digital
Operator (LED).
0: English
Language 1: Japanese
selection for 2: German
A1-00 Digital 3: French 0 to 6 1 Yes A A A A 100H -
Operator 4: Italian
display 5: Spanish
6: Portuguese
This constant is not initial-
ized by the initialize opera-
tion.
Used to set the constant
access level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only
(Monitoring drive mode
and setting A1-01 and
A1-04.)
1: Used to select user
constant
Constant 4-17
A1-01 (Only constants set in 0 to 2 2 Yes A A A A 101H
access level 6-155
A2-01 to A2-32 can be
read and set.)
2: Advanced
(Constants can be read
and set in both quick
programming mode and
advanced programming
(A) mode.)
Used to select the control

method for the Inverter
0: V/f control 0 to 2
Control 1: V/f with PG 4-5
A1-02 method 2: Open loop vector 0 No Q Q Q Q 102H 4-7
selection 3: Flux vector 4-18
This constant is not initial- 0 to 3
ized by the initialize opera-
tion.
5-8
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Used to initialize the con-

stants using the specified
method.
0: No initializing
1110: Initializes using the
6-15
User constants 0 to
A1-03 Initialize 0 No A A A A 103H 6-16
2220: Initializes using a 3330
6-150
two-wire sequence.
(Initializes to the
factory setting.)
3330: Initializes using a
three-wire sequence.
Password input when a pass-
word has been set in A1-05.
This function write-protects
some constants of the initial-
ize mode.
0 to 4-17
A1-04 Password If the password is changed, 0 No A A A A 104H
9999 6-156
A1-01 to A1-03 and A2-01
to A2-32 constants can no
longer be changed. (Pro-
gramming mode constants
can be changed.)
Used to set a four digit num-
ber as the password.
This constant is not usually
displayed. When the Pass-
Password 0 to 4-17
A1-05 word (A1-04) is displayed, 0 No A A A A 105H
setting 9999 6-156
hold down the RESET Key
and press the Menu Key and
the password will be dis-
played.
User-set Constants: A2
The constants set by the user are listed in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Used to set the constant

numbers that can be set/read.
Maximum 32.
A2-01 Effective when the Constant b1-01 106H
User setting
to Access Level (A1-01) is set to - No A A A A to 6-156
constants
A2-32 to User Program (1). Con- o3-02 125H
stants set in constants A2-01
to A2-32 can be set/read in
programming mode.
5-9
Application Constants: b
The following settings are made with the application constants (B constants): Operation method selection, DC
injection braking, speed searching, timer functions, dwell functions, droop control, energy saving control, and
zero-servo control.
Operation Mode Selections: b1

User constants for operation mode selection are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor

input method.
0: Digital Operator
4-5
Reference 6-6
b1-01 (analog input) 0 to 4 1 No Q Q Q Q 180H
selection 6-79
6-98
tions
3: Option board
method.
0: Digital Operator 4-5
Operation
1: Control circuit terminal 6-15
b1-02 method 0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q Q 181H
(sequence input) 6-79
selection
2: MEMOBUS communica- 6-98
tions
3: Option board
Used to set the stopping
method used when a Stop
Command is input.
1: Coast to stop
Stopping 2: DC injection braking stop
4-6
b1-03 method (Stops faster than coast to 0 to 3 * 0 No Q Q Q Q 182H
6-17
selection stop, no regenerative
operation.)
(Run Commands are
disregarded during
deceleration.)
Prohibition
0: Reverse enabled
b1-04 of reverse 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 183H 6-65
1: Reverse disabled
operation
5-10
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Used to set the method of

operation when the fre-
quency reference input is
less than the minimum out-
put frequency (E1-09).
0: Run at frequency refer-
Operation ence (E1-09 not effec-
selection for tive).
b1-05 0 to 3 0 No No No No A 184H 6-17
setting E1- 1: STOP (Frequencies
09 or less below E1-09 in the coast
to stop state.)
2: Run at min. frequency.
(E1-09)
3: Run at zero-speed (Fre-
quencies below E1-09 are
zero)
Used to set the responsive-
ness of the control inputs
(forward/reverse and multi-
function inputs.)
Read
0: Two scans every 2 ms
b1-06 sequence 0 or 1 1 No A A A A 185H -
(Use for fast responses.)
input twice
1: Two scans every 5 ms
(Use for possible
malfunction due to
noise.)
Used to set the operation
mode by switching to the
Remote mode using the
Local/Remote Key.
Operation
0: Run signals that are input
selection
during mode switching
after switch-
b1-07 are disregarded. (Input 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 186H -
ing to
Run signals after
remote
switching the mode.)
mode
1: Run signals become
effective immediately
after switching to the
Remote mode.
Used to set an operation
interlock in programming
modes. 0 to 1
0: Cannot operate.
Run Com-
1: Can operate (Disabled
mand selec-
when Digital Operator is
b1-08 tion in 0 No A A A A 187H -
set to select Run Com-
program-
mand (when b1-02 = 0)).
ming modes
2: Cannot operate. (Cannot 0 to 2
be in programming mode
during operation.)
* 0 or 1 for flux vector control.
5-11
DC Injection Braking: b2
User constants for injection braking are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Used to set the frequency

which starts DC injection
braking in units of Hz when
deceleration to stop is
Zero-speed
selected.
level (DC
When b2-01 is less than E1-
injection 0.0 to 6-17
b2-01 09, E1-09 is used to set the 0.5 Hz No A A A A 189H
braking 10.0 6-145
starting frequency for the
starting fre-
DC injection braking.
quency)
In flux vector control, b2-01
is used to set the starting fre-
quency for the zero-speed
control.
Sets the DC injection brak-
ing current as a percentage
DC injec- of the Inverter rated current.
0 to 6-18
b2-02 tion brak- The DC injection braking 50% No A A A No 18AH
100 6-22
ing current current in flux control is
affected by any change to the
setting of E2-03.
Used to set the time to per-
form DC injection braking at
DC injec- start in units of 1 second.
0.00
tion brak- Used to stop coasting motor 6-18
b2-03 to 0.00 s No A A A A 18BH
ing time at and restart it. When the set 6-22
10.00
start value is 0, DC injection
braking at start is not per-
formed.
Used to set the time to per-
form DC injection braking at
stop (zero-speed control in
DC injec- flux vector control) in units
0.00
tion brak- of 1 second.
b2-04 to 0.50 s No A A A A 18CH 6-18
ing time at Used to prevent coasting
10.00
stop after the Stop Command is
input. When the set value is
0.00, DC injection braking at
stop is not performed.
Magnetic
Sets the magnetic flux com-
flux com- 0 to
b2-08 pensation as a percentage of 0% No No No A A 190H -
pensation 1000
the no-load current.
volume
5-12
Speed Search: b3
User constants for the speed search are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Enables/disables the speed

search function for the Run
Command and sets the speed
search method.
0:Disabled, speed
calculation
1: Enabled, speed
calculation
2: Disabled, current
detection
3: Enabled, current
detection
Speed
search Speed Calculation:
selection When the search is started,
b3-01 (current the motor speed is 0 to 3 2*1 No A A A No 191H 6-68
detection or calculated and acceleration/
speed calcu- deceleration is performed
lation) from the calculated speed to
the specified frequency
(motor direction is also
searched).
Current Detection:
The speed search is started
from the frequency when
power was momentarily
lost and the maximum
frequency, and the speed is
detected at the search
current level.
Sets the speed search opera-
tion current as a percentage, 120%
Speed *1 *2
taking the Inverter rated cur-
search oper-
rent as 100%. 0 to
b3-02 ating cur- No A No A No 192H 6-68
Not usually necessary to set. 200
rent (current
When restarting is not possi- 150%
detection)
ble with the factory settings, *1 *2
reduce the value.
Sets the output frequency
Speed deceleration time during
search speed search in 1-second
decelera- units. 0.1 to
b3-03 2.0 s No A No A No 193H 6-68
tion time Set the time for deceleration 10.0
(current from the maximum output
detection) frequency to the minimum
output frequency.
5-13
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the magnetic contactor

operating delay time when
Speed
there is a magnetic contactor
search wait
on the output side of the
time (cur-
Inverter. When a speed 0.0 to
b3-05 rent detec- 0.2 s No A A A A 195H 6-68
search is performed after 20.0
tion or
recovering from a momen-
speed calcu-
tary power loss, the search
lation)
operation is delayed by the
time set here.
Operation restarts at a speed
Sets the obtained by multiplying the
magnetic speed from the speed search
flux com- by the compensation gain
pensation as (excitation search only.) 1.00 to
b3-10 1.10 No A No A No 19AH 6-68
a percentage Increase this setting if over- 1.20
of the no- voltages occur when a speed
load cur- search is performed after a
rent. long baseblock, for example,
in searches at startup.
0: Disabled (operates with
Rotation specified rotation direc-
direction tion)
b3-14 0 or 1 1 No A A A No 19EH 6-69
search 1: Enabled (operates with
selection rotation direction found
by search)
Speed Sets the current level to retry
search a speed search as a percent- 0 to 150%
b3-17 No A No A No 1F0H 6-69
retrial cur- age, taking the Inverter rated 200 *2
rent level current as 100%.
Speed
search Sets the time for detection in
0.00 to
b3-18 retrial a speed search retrial in units 0.10 s No A No A No 1F1H 6-69
1.00
detection of seconds.
time
Number of
speed Sets the number of times that
b3-19 0 to 10 0 No A No A No 1F2H 6-69
search retri- a speed search can be retried.
als
* 2. C6-01 = 1:120%, C6-01 = 0:150%
5-14
Timer Function: b4
User constants for timer functions are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the timer function out-

put ON-delay time (dead
Timer func- band) for the timer function
0.0 to
b4-01 tion ON- input, in 1-second units. 0.0 s No A A A A 1A3H 6-108
300.0
delay time Enabled when a timer func-
tion is set in H1- or H2-
.
Sets the timer function out-
put OFF-delay time (dead
Timer func- band) for the timer function
0.0 to
b4-02 tion OFF- input, in 1-second units. 0.0 s No A A A A 1A4H 6-108
300.0
delay time Enabled when a timer func-
tion is set in H1- or H2-
.
PID Control: b5
User constants for PID control are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Deviation is D-
controlled.)
2: Enabled (Feedback value
is D-controlled.)
PID control 3: PID control enabled
b5-01 method (frequency reference + 0 to 4 0 No A A A A 1A5H 6-110
selection PID output, D control of
deviation)
4: PID control enabled
(frequency reference +
PID output, D control of
feedback value).
Sets P-control proportional
Propor- 0.00
gain as a percentage.
b5-02 tional gain to 1.00 Yes A A A A 1A6H 6-110
P-control is not performed
(P) 25.00
when the setting is 0.00.
Sets I-control integral time
Integral (I) in 1-second units. 0.0 to
b5-03 1.0 s Yes A A A A 1A7H 6-110
time I-control is not performed 360.0
Sets the I-control limit as a
Integral (I) 0.0 to
b5-04 percentage of the maximum 100.0% Yes A A A A 1A8H 6-110
limit 100.0
output frequency.
Sets D-control derivative
Derivative time in 1-second units. 0.00 to
b5-05 0.00 s Yes A A A A 1A9H 6-110
(D) time D-control is not performed 10.00
5-15
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the limit after PID-con-

0.0 to
b5-06 PID limit trol as a percentage of the 100.0% Yes A A A A 1AAH 6-110
100.0
maximum output frequency.
Sets the offset after PID-con- -100.0
PID offset
b5-07 trol as a percentage of the to 0.0% Yes A A A A 1ABH 6-110
adjustment
maximum output frequency. +100.0
Sets the time constant for
PID primary low pass filter for PID-con-
0.00 to
b5-08 delay time trol outputs in 1-second 0.00 s Yes A A A A 1ACH 6-110
10.00
constant units.
Not usually necessary to set.
Select forward/reverse for
PID output PID output.
characteris- 0: PID output is forward.
b5-09 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 1ADH 6-110
tics selec- 1: PID output is reverse
tion (highlights the output
code)
PID output 0.0 to
b5-10 Sets output gain. 1.0 No A A A A 1AEH 6-110
gain 25.0
0: 0 limit when PID output
is negative.
PID reverse
1: Reverses when PID
b5-11 output 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 1AFH 6-110
output is negative.
selection
0 limit when reverse prohibit
is selected using b1-04.
0: No detection of loss of
PID feedback.
1: Detection of loss of PID
feedback.
Selection of Operation continues
PID feed- during detection, with the
b5-12 back com- malfunctioning contact 0 to 2 0 No A A A A 1B0H 6-111
mand loss not operating.
detection 2: Detection of loss of PID
feedback.
Coasts to stop during
detection, and fault
contact operates.
PID feed-
Sets the PID feedback loss
back com-
detection level as a percent 0 to
b5-13 mand loss 0% No A A A A 1B1H 6-111
units, with the maximum 100
detection
output frequency at 100%.
level
PID feed-
back com-
Sets the PID feedback loss 0.0 to
b5-14 mand loss 1.0 s No A A A A 1B2H 6-111
detection level in s units. 25.5
detection
time
0.0 to
PID sleep 400.0
function Set the PID sleep function *1
b5-15 0.0 Hz No A A A A 1B3H 6-111
operation start level as a frequency. 0.0 to
level 300.0
*2
5-16
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
PID sleep Set the delay time until the

0.0 to
b5-16 operation PID sleep function starts in 0.0 s No A A A A 1B4H 6-111
25.5
delay time seconds.
0.0 to
Accel/decel 25.5
Set the accel/decel time for
b5-17 time for PID 0.0 s No A A A A 1B5H 6-111
PID reference in seconds. 0.0 to
reference
6000.0
Dwell Functions: b6
User constants for dwell functions are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0.0 to
Dwell 400.0
fre- *1 4-20
b6-01 0.0 Hz No A A A A 1B6H
quency at 0.0 to 6-29
start 300.0
*2
Run Command ON
OFF
Dwell
Output frequency 0.0 to 4-20
b6-02 time at 0.0 s No A A A A 1B7H
10.0 6-29
start
b6-01 b6-03 Time 0.0 to
Dwell b6-02 b6-04 400.0
fre- *1 4-20
b6-03 The dwell function is used to output 0.0 Hz No A A A A 1B8H
quency at frequency temporarily when driving a 0.0 to 6-29
stop motor with a heavy load. 300.0
*2
Dwell
0.0 to 4-20
b6-04 time at 0.0 s No A A A A 1B9H
10.0 6-29
stop
5-17
Droop Control: b7
User constants for droop functions are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the slip as a percentage

of maximum frequency
when the maximum output
Droop con- frequency is specified and 0.0 to 4-20
b7-01 0.0 Yes No No No A 1CAH
trol gain the rated torque occurs. 100.0 6-144
Droop-control is not per-
formed when the setting is
0.0.
Droop control responsive-
Droop con-
ness constant 0.03 to 4-20
b7-02 trol delay 0.05 s Yes No No No A 1CBH
When hunting or oscillation 2.00 6-144
time
occurs, increase the value.
Energy Saving: b8
User constants for energy-saving control functions are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Select whether to enable or

Energy-sav- disable energy-saving con-
b8-01 ing mode trol. 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 1CCH 6-118
selection 0: Disable
1: Enable
Set the energy-saving gain
Energy-sav- 0.0 to 0.7
b8-02 with the vector control Yes No No A A 1CDH 6-118
ing gain 10.0 *1
method.
Energy-sav-
Set the energy-saving filter
ing filter 0.00 to 0.50 s
b8-03 time constant with the vector Yes No No A A 1CEH 6-118
time con- 10.00 *2
control method.
stant
Set the maximum motor effi-
ciency value.
Energy-sav- Set the motor rated capacity 288.20
0.00 to
b8-04 ing coeffi- in E2-11, and adjust the *3 No A A No No 1CFH 6-118
655.00
cient value by 5% at a time until *4
output power reaches a mini-
mum value.
Power
detection Set the time constant for out- 0 to
b8-05 20 ms No A A No No 1D0H 6-118
filter time put power detection. 2000
constant
5-18
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Set the limit value of the

voltage control range during
search operation.
Search Perform search operation to
operation optimize operations using 0 to
b8-06 0% No A A No No 1D1H 6-118
voltage lim- minute variations in voltage 100
iter using energy-saving control.
Set to 0 to disable the search
operation. 100% is the motor
base voltage.
* 1. The factory setting is 1.0 when using flux vector control.
* 2. The factory setting is 2.00 s when Inverter capacity is 55 kW min.
The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. The open-loop vector factory setting is given.
* 3. By setting E2-11 (Motor rated output) the appropriate value will be set.
* 4. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
Zero-Servo: b9
User constants for zero-servo functions are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Adjust the strength of the

zero-servo lock.
Enabled when the “zero-
servo command” is set for
the multi-function input.
When the zero-servo com-
mand has been input and the
Zero-servo frequency reference drop 0 to
b9-01 5 No No No No A 1DAH 6-145
gain below excitation level (b2- 100
01), a position control loop
is created and the motor
stops. Increasing the zero-
servo gain in turn increases
the strength of the lock.
Increasing it by too much
will cause oscillation.
Sets the output width of the
zero-servo completion sig-
nal.
Enabled when the “zero-
servo completion (end)” is
set for a multi-function
input. The zero-servo com-
pletion signal is ON when
Zero-servo
the current position is within 0 to
b9-02 completion 10 No No No No A 1DBH 6-145
the range (the zero-servo 16383
width
start position± zero-servo
completion width.)
Set the allowable position
displacement from the zero-
servo start position to 4
times the pulse rate of the
PG (pulse generator,
encoder) in use.
5-19
Autotuning Constants: C
The following settings are made with the autotuning constants (C constants): Acceleration/deceleration times,
s-curve characteristics, slip compensation, torque compensation, speed control, and carrier frequency func-
tions.
Acceleration/Deceleration: C1
User constants for acceleration and deceleration times are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the acceleration time to

4-5
Accelera- accelerate from 0 to the max-
C1-01 Yes Q Q Q Q 200H 4-20
tion time 1 imum output frequency, in 1-
6-25
second units.
Sets the deceleration time to
4-5
Decelera- decelerate from the maxi-
C1-02 Yes Q Q Q Q 201H 4-20
tion time 1 mum output frequency to 0,
6-25
in 1-second units.
The acceleration time when
Accelera- the multi-function input 4-20
C1-03 Yes A A A A 202H
tion time 2 “accel/decel time 1” is set to 6-25
ON.
The deceleration time when
Decelera- the multi-function input 4-20
C1-04 Yes A A A A 203H
ON.
Accelera- the multi-function input 4-20
C1-05 No A A A A 204H
ON. 0.0 to
6000.0 10.0 s
*1
Decelera- the multi-function input 4-20
C1-06 No A A A A 205H
ON.
the multi-function input
Accelera- 4-20
C1-07 “accel/decel time 1” and No A A A A 206H
tion time 4 6-25
“accel/decel time 2” are set
to ON.
Decelera- 4-20
C1-08 “accel/decel time 1” and No A A A A 207H
tion time 4 6-25
“accel/decel time 2” are set
to ON.
“Emergency (fast) stop” is
Emergency 4-20
C1-09 set to ON. No A A A A 208H
stop time 6-24
This function can be used as
a stopping method when a
fault has been detected.
5-20
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Accel/decel 4-20
0: 0.01-second units
C1-10 time setting 0 or 1 1 No A A A A 209H 6-25
1: 0.1-second units
unit 6-26
Sets the frequency for auto-
matic acceleration/decelera- 0.0 to
tion switching. 400.0
Below set frequency: Accel/ *2
Accel/decel
decel time 4
time switch- 4-20
C1-11 Above set frequency: Accel/ 0.0 Hz No A A A A 20AH
ing fre- 6-25
decel time 1
quency
The multi-function input 0.0 to
“accel/decel time 1” or 300.0
“accel/decel time 2” take pri- *3
ority.
* 1. The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times will depend on the setting for C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the setting range for acceleration/
deceleration times become 0.00 to 600.00 seconds.
S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration: C2
User constants for S-curve characteristics are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
S-curve
character-
0.00
istic time 4-20
C2-01 to 0.20 s No A A A A 20BH
at accel- 6-26
2.50
eration
start
All sections of the S-curve character-
S-curve istic time are set in seconds units.
character- When the S-curve characteristic time
0.00
istic time is set, the accel/decel times will 4-20
C2-02 to 0.20 s No A A A A 20CH
at accel- increase by only half of the S-curve 6-26
2.50
eration characteristic times at start and end.
end
Run Command
S-curve OFF
ON
character- Output frequency
C2-02 C2-03 0.00
istic time 4-20
C2-03 to 0.20 s No A A A A 20DH
at decel- C2-01 C2-04 6-26
2.50
eration Time
start
S-curve
character-
0.00
istic time 4-20
C2-04 to 0.00 s No A A A A 20EH
at decel- 6-26
2.50
eration
end
5-21
Motor Slip Compensation: C3
User constants for slip compensation are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Used to improve speed accu-

racy when operating with a
load.
Usually setting is not neces-
sary.
Adjust this constant at the
Slip com-
following times. 0.0 to 4-18
C3-01 pensation 0.0* Yes A No A A 20FH
• When actual speed is low, 2.5 6-43
gain
increase the set value.
• When actual speed is high,
decrease the set value.
Used as the applicable con-
trol gain when using flux
vector control.
Slip compensation primary
delay time is set in ms units.
sary.
Slip com-
Adjust this constant at the 2000
pensation 0 to 4-18
C3-02 following times. ms No A No A No 210H
primary 10000 6-43
• Reduce the setting when *
delay time
slip compensation respon-
sive is slow.
• When speed is not stabi-
lized, increase the setting.
Slip com- Sets the slip compensation
0 to
C3-03 pensation limit as a percentage of 200% No A No A No 211H 6-43
250
limit motor rated slip.
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When the slip compensation
Slip com- during regeneration function
pensation has been activated, as regen-
C3-04 selection eration capacity increases 0 or 1 0 No A No A No 212H 6-43
during momentarily, it may be nec-
regeneration essary to use a braking
option (braking resistor,
Braking Resistor Unit or
Braking Unit.)
0: Disabled.
Output volt- 1: Enabled. (The motor flux
age limit will be lowered automati-
C3-05 0 or 1 0 No No No A A 213H 6-43
operation cally when the output
selection voltage become satu-
rated.)
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. The V/f control factory settings are given.
5-22
Torque Compensation: C4
User constants for are torque compensation shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets torque compensation

gain as a ratio.
sary.
Adjust in the following cir-
cumstances:
• When the cable is long;
• When the motor capacity
is smaller than the Inverter
capacity (Max. applicable
motor capacity), increase
Torque
the set values. 0.00 to 4-18
C4-01 compensa- 1.00 Yes A A A No 215H
• When the motor is oscil- 2.50 6-46
tion gain
lating, decrease the set
values.
Adjust the output current
range at minimum speed
rotation so that it does not
exceed the Inverter rated
output current.
Do not alter the torque com-
pensation gain from its
default (1.00) when using
the open loop vector control
method.
The torque compensation
Torque sary.
compensa- Adjust in the following cir-
tion pri- cumstances: 0 to 200 ms 4-18
C4-02 No A A A No 216H
mary delay • When the motor is oscil- 10000 * 6-46
time con- lating, increase the set val-
stant ues.
• When the responsiveness
of the motor is low,
decrease the set values.
Forward Sets the forward starting
0.0 to
C4-03 starting torque as a percentage of the 0.0% No No No A No 217H -
200.0
torque motor rated torque.
Reverse Sets the reverse starting
C4-04 starting torque as a percentage of the
-200.0 0.0% No No No A No 218H -
to 0.0
torque motor rated torque.
Sets the delay time in ms for
Starting
starting torque. The filter is 0 to
C4-05 torque time 10 ms No No No A No 219H -
disabled if the time is set to 0 200
constant
to 4 ms.
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. The V/f control factory setting is given.
5-23
Speed Control (ASR): C5
User constants for speed control are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Con- Change MEMO
stant Setting Factory during Open BUS
Name Description V/f Flux Page
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop Regis-
V/f with Vec-
ber tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
ASR pro- 1.00 to

Sets the proportional gain of the 20.00 4-19
C5-01 portional 300.00 Yes No A No A 21BH
speed loop (ASR.) *2 6-136
(P) gain 1 *1
ASR inte- 0.000 0.500

Sets the integral time of the speed 4-19
C5-02 gral (I) to s Yes No A No A 21CH
loop (ASR) in 1-second units. 6-136
time 1 10.000 *2
Usually setting is not necessary.

ASR pro- Set to change the rotational speed 1.00 to
gain. 20.00 4-19
C5-03 portional 300.00 Yes No A No A 21DH
*2 6-137
(P) gain 2 P I *1
P=C5-01
I=C5-02
ASR inte- P=C5-03 0.000 0.500

I=C5-04 4-19
C5-04 gral (I) to s Yes No A No A 21EH
6-137
time 2 0 E1-04 Motor speed (Hz)
10.000 *2
Sets the upper limit for the com-

pensation frequency for the speed 0.0 to
C5-05 ASR limit 5.0% No No A No No 21FH 6-137
control loop (ASR) to a percentage 20.0
of the maximum output frequency.
Sets the filter time constant for out-
ASR pri- putting torque references from the 0.000
0.004 4-19
C5-06 mary speed control loop (ASR). It is set to No No No No A 220H
s 6-137
delay time in 1-second units. 0.500
Sets the frequency for switching
between Proportion Gain 1, 2 and
ASR 0.0 to
Integral Time 1, 2 in Hz units. 4-19
C5-07 switching 300.0 0.0 Hz No No No No A 221H
The multi-function input “ASR 6-137
frequency *3
switching proportional gain” has
the priority.
Sets the upper limit for the integral
ASR inte-
(I) amount for the speed control 0 to
C5-08 gral (I) 400% No No No No A 222H 6-137
loop (ASR) to a percentage of the 400
limit
rated load.
* 1. When using V/f with PG control, 0.00 to 300.00. The flux vector setting ranges are given.
* 2. When the control method changes, the factory setting is changed. The flux vector control factory settings are given. Refer to Factory Settings that
Change with the Control Method (A1-02).
5-24
Carrier Frequency: C6
User constants for the carrier frequency are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Con- Change MEMO
V/f with Vec-
ber tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor

1*1 4-5
C6-01 0 or 1 No Q Q Q Q 223H 4-20
selection 1: VT (high carrier, variable
0*1 6-2
torque, 120% per minute)
0: Low-noise PWM
1: 2.0 kHz 0,1 1
2: 5.0 kHz (C6- (C6- 4-6
Carrier 01=0)
3: 8.0 kHz 01=0) 4-18
C6-02 frequency No Q Q Q Q 224H
selection
4: 10.0 kHz 0 to F 6*2 4-19
5: 12.5 kHz (C6- (C6- 6-2
6: 15.0 kHz 01=1) 01=1)
Set the carrier frequency upper 2.0 to 15.0
Carrier limit and lower limit in kHz units. 15.0 kHz
C6-03 frequency The carrier frequency gain is set as *3 *2 No A A A A 225H 6-2
*4 upper follows:
limit 2.0 to 2.0
With the vector control method, the 2.5 kHz
upper limit of the carrier frequency
is fixed in C6-03. 0.4 to 15.0
Carrier 15.0 kHz
C6-04 frequency *3 *2 No A A No A 226H 6-2
*4 lower Carrier frequency
limit 0.4 to 2.0
2.5 kHz
Output frequency x (C6-05) x K

Output
frequency
Carrier (Max. output frequency)
C6-05 frequency 00 to
K is a coefficient that depends on 00 No A A No A 227H 6-2
*4 propor- 99
the setting of C6-03.
tional gain
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K = 3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz: K = 2
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K = 1
* 3. The setting ranges depend on the capacity of the Inverter. The values for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW are given.
* 4. This constant can be monitored or set only when F is set for C6-02.
5-25
Reference Constants: d
The following settings are made with the reference constants (d constants): Frequency references.
Preset Reference: d1
User constants for frequency references are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Frequency Sets the frequency reference 0.00 4-6

reference 1 in the units used in o1-03. Hz 6-10
The frequency reference

Frequency when multi-step speed refer- 0.00 4-6
reference 2 ence 1 is ON for a multi- Hz 6-10
function input.
0.00 to
d1-03 400.00 Yes Q Q Q Q 282H
reference 3 ence 2 is ON for a multi- Hz 6-10
*1 *3
function input.
reference 4 ences 1 and 2 are ON for Hz 6-10
multi-function inputs.
The frequency when multi-
Frequency 0.00
d1-05 step speed reference 3 is ON Yes A A A A 284H 6-10
reference 5 Hz
for a multi-function input.
Frequency when multi-step speed refer- 0.00
d1-06 Yes A A A A 285H 6-10
reference 6 ences 1 and 3 are ON for Hz
d1-07 Yes A A A A 286H 6-10
d1-08 Yes A A A A 287H 6-10
reference 8 ences 1, 2, and 3 are ON for 0.00 to Hz
multi-function inputs. 300.00
*1 *2
d1-09 Yes A A A A 288H -
reference 9 ence 4 is ON for a multi- Hz
function input.
d1-10 Yes A A A A 28BH -
d1-11 Yes A A A A 28CH -
reference 11 ences 2 and 4 are ON for a Hz
5-26
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor

d1-12 Yes A A A A 28DH -
reference 12 ences 1, 2, and 4 are ON for Hz
0.00 to
d1-13 400.00 Yes A A A A 28EH -
*1 *3
d1-14 Yes A A A A 28FH -
d1-15 Yes A A A A 290H -
Frequency when multi-step speed refer- 0.00 to 0.00
d1-16 Yes A A A A 291H -
reference 16 ences 1, 2, 3, and 4 are ON 300.00 Hz
for multi-function inputs. *1 *2

Jog when the jog frequency ref- 4-6
6.00
d1-17 frequency erence selection, FJOG com- Yes Q Q Q Q 292H 6-10
Hz
reference mand, or RJOG command is 6-87
ON.
Note The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor), default: 0.01 Hz.
Reference Limits: d2
User constants for frequency reference limits are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Set the output frequency

Frequency
upper limit as a percent, tak- 0.0 to 6-41
d2-01 reference 100.0% No A A A A 289H
ing the max. output fre- 110.0 6-82
upper limit
quency to be 100%.
Sets the output frequency
Frequency
lower limit as a percentage 0.0 to 6-41
d2-02 reference 0.0% No A A A A 28AH
of the maximum output fre- 110.0 6-82
lower limit
quency.
Master Set the master speed refer-
speed reference lower limit as a percent, 0.0 to 6-41
d2-03 0.0% No A A A A 293H
ence lower taking the max. output fre- 110.0 6-82
limit quency to be 100%.
5-27
Jump Frequencies: d3
User constants for jump frequencies are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Jump fre- Set the center values of the 4-20

d3-01 jump frequencies in Hz. 0.0 to 0.0 Hz No A A A A 294H
quency 1 6-38
This function is disabled by 400.0
setting the jump frequency to *1
0 Hz. Always ensure that the
Jump fre- following applies: 4-20
d3-02 0.0 Hz No A A A A 295H
quency 2 d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03 6-38
Operation in the jump fre-
quency range is prohibited 0.0 to
but during acceleration and 300.0
Jump fre- deceleration, speed changes *2 4-20
d3-03 0.0 Hz No A A A A 296H
quency 3 smoothly without jump. 6-38
Sets the jump frequency

Jump fre-
bandwidth in Hz. 0.0 to 4-20
d3-04 quency 1.0 Hz No A A A A 297H
The jump frequency will be 20.0 6-38
width
the jump frequency ± d3-04.
Reference Frequency Hold: d4

User constants for the reference frequency hold function are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets whether or not frequen-

cies on hold will be
recorded.
0: Disabled (when operation
is stopped or the power is
turned on again starts at
Frequency 0.)
reference 1: Enabled (when operation
d4-01 hold func- is stopped or the power is 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 298H 6-81
tion selec- turned on again starts at
tion the previous hold
frequency.)
This function is available
when the multi-function
inputs “accel/decel Ramp
Hold” or “up/down” com-
mands are set.
5-28
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Set the frequency to be add

to or subtracted from the
analog frequency reference
as a percent, taking the max-
imum output frequency to be
+ - Speed 0 to
d4-02 100%. 10% No A A A A 299H 6-85
limits 100
Enabled when the increase
(+) speed command or
decrease (-) speed command
is set for a multi-function
input.
Torque Control: d5
User constants for the torque control are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0: Speed control (C5-01 to

C5-07)
1: Torque control
This function is only avail-
Torque con- able in flux vector control
d5-01 trol selec- method. To use the function 0 or 1 0 No No No No A 29AH 6-129
tion for switching between speed
and torque control, set to 0
and set the multi-function
input to “speed/torque con-
trol change.”
Set the torque reference
delay time in ms units.
This function can be used to
Torque ref- adjust the noise of the torque
0 to
d5-02 erence delay control signal or the respon- 0 ms No No No No A 29BH 6-129
1000
time siveness with the host con-
troller. When oscillation
occurs during torque control,
Set the speed limit command
method for the torque con-
trol method.
Speed limit 1: The analog input limit
d5-03 1 or 2 1 No No No No A 29CH 6-129
selection from a frequency refer-
ence (see b1-01)
2: Limited by d5-04 con-
stant setting values.
5-29
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Set the speed limit during

torque control as a percent-
age of the maximum output
frequency.
This function is enabled -120 to
d5-04 Speed limit 0% No No No No A 29DH 6-129
when d5-03 is set to 2. +120
Directions are as follows.
+: Run Command direction
-: Run Command opposite
direction
Set the speed limit bias as a
percentage of the maximum
output frequency.
Speed limit 0 to
d5-05 Bias is given to the specified 10% No No No No A 29EH 6-129
bias 120
speed limit. It can be used to
adjust the margin for the
speed limit.
Set the delay time from
inputting the multi-function
input “speed/torque control
change” (from On to OFF or
OFF to ON) until the control
is actually changed, in ms
units.
Speed/ This function is enabled
torque con- when the multi-function 0 to
d5-06 0 ms No No No No A 29FH 6-130
trol switch- input “speed/torque control 1000
ing timer change” is set. In the speed/
torque control switching
timer, the analog inputs hold
the values of when the
“speed/torque control
change” changes. Always be
sure to allow time for this
process to finish completely.
5-30
Field Weakening: d6
User constants for the field weakening command are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Set the Inverter output volt-

age when the field weaken-
ing command is input.
It is enabled when the field
Field weak- 0 to
d6-01 weakening command is set 80% No A A No No 2A0H -
ening level 100
for a multi-function input.
Set the level as a percentage
taking the voltage set in the
V/f pattern as 100%.
Set the lower limit in hertz of 0.0 to
the frequency range where 400.0
field control is valid. *1
The field weakening com-
Field
d6-02 mand is valid only at fre- 0.0 Hz No A A No No 2A1H -
frequency
quencies above this setting 0.0 to
and only when the speed is 300.0
in agreement with the cur- *2
rent speed reference.
Field forc- Set the field forcing func-
ing function.
d6-03 0 or 1 0 No No No A A 2A2H -
tion 0: Disabled
selection 1: Enabled
Set the excitation current ref-
erence’s upper limit for field
forcing. Set the limit as a
percentage, taking the
Field forc- motor’s no-load current as 100 to
d6-06 400% No No No A A 2A5H -
ing limit 100%. Enabled for opera- 400
tion other than DC excita-
tion.
Usually, there is no need to
change this setting

5-31
Motor Constant Constants: E
The following settings are made with the motor constant constants (E constants): V/f characteristics and motor
constants.
V/f Pattern: E1
User constants for V/f characteristics are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Con- Change MEMO
V/f with Vec-
ber tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Set the Inverter input voltage in
1 volt. 155 to
Input volt- 200 V 4-5
E1-01 This setting is used as a refer- 255 No Q Q Q Q 300H
age setting *1 6-122
ence value in protection func- *1
tions.
0 to E: Select from the 15
preset patterns.
V/f pattern
E1-03 F: Custom user-set patterns 0 to F F No Q Q No No 302H 6-122
selection
(Applicable for settings
E1-04 to E1-10.)
40.0 to
400.0
Max. 60.0
*6
E1-04 output Hz No Q Q Q Q 303H 6-123
300.0
*5
0.0 to 200.0
Max.
E1-05 255.0 V No Q Q Q Q 304H 6-123
voltage
*1 *1*2
Output voltage (V) 0.0 to
400.0
60.0
Base *6
E1-06 Hz No Q Q Q Q 305H 6-123
frequency 0.0 to *2
300.0
*5
Frequency (Hz) 0.0 to
400.0
Mid. To set V/f characteristics in a *6 3.0 Hz
E1-07 output straight line, set the same values No A A A No 306H 6-123
0.0 to *2
frequency for E1-07 and E1-09. In this
300.0
case, the setting for E1-08 will *5
be disregarded.
Mid.
Always ensure that the four fre- 4-18
output 0.0 to 15.0 V
E1-08 quencies are set in the following No A A A No 307H 4-19
frequency
manner: 255 *1 *1 *2 6-123
voltage
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) >
E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN) 0.0 to
400.0
Min.
*6 1.5 Hz
E1-09 output No Q Q Q A 308H 6-123
0.0 to *2
frequency
300.0
*5
Min.
0.0 to 4-18
output 9.0 V
E1-10 255.0 No A A A No 309H 4-19
frequency *1 *2
*1 6-123
voltage
5-32
Control Methods
Con- Change MEMO
V/f with Vec-
ber tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0.0 to
Mid. 400.0
output *6 0.0 Hz
E1-11 No A A A A 30AH 6-123
frequency 0.0 to *3
2 300.0
Set only to fine-adjust V/f for *5
Mid. the output range. Normally, this
setting is not required. 0.0 to
output 0.0 V
E1-12 255.0 No A A A A 30BH 6-123
frequency *3
*1
voltage 2
0.0 to
Base 0.0 V
E1-13 255.0 No A A Q Q 30CH 6-123
voltage *4
*1
* 3. E1-11 and E1-12 are disregarded when set to 0.0.
5-33
Motor Setup: E2
User constants for motor 1 are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the motor rated current
in 1 A units.
These set values will become
0.32 to 4-5
Motor rated the reference values for 1.90 A
E2-01 6.40 No Q Q Q Q 30EH 6-60
current motor protection, torque lim- *1
*2 6-120
its and torque control.
This constant is automati-
cally set during autotuning.
Sets the motor rated slip in
Hz units.
These set values will become 2.90
Motor rated 0.00 to 6-118
E2-02 the reference values for slip Hz No A A A A 30FH
slip 20.00 6-120
compensation. *1
Sets the motor no-load cur-
0.00 to
Motor no- rent in 1 A units. 1.20 A
E2-03 1.89 No A A A A 310H 6-120
load current This constant is automati- *1
*3
Sets the number of motor
Number of poles.
E2-04 2 to 48 4 poles No No Q No Q 311H 6-120
motor poles This constant is automati-
Sets the motor phase-to-
Motor line- 0.000 9.842
phase resistance in Ω units.
E2-05 to-line resis- to Ω No A A A A 312H 6-120
tance 65.000 *1
Sets the voltage drop due to
motor leakage inductance as
Motor leak a percentage of the motor 0.0 to 18.2%
E2-06 No No No A A 313H 6-120
inductance rated voltage. 40.0 *1
Sets the motor iron satura-
Motor iron tion coefficient at 50% of
0.00 to
E2-07 saturation magnetic flux. 0.50 No No No A A 314H 6-120
0.50
coefficient 1 This constant is automati-
Sets the motor iron satura-
Motor iron tion coefficient at 75% of 0.50 to
E2-08 saturation magnetic flux. 0.75 0.75 No No No A A 315H 6-120
coefficient 2 This constant is automati- *4
5-34
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets motor mechanical loss
as a percentage of motor
rated output (W).
sary.
Motor Adjust in the following cir-
0.0 to
E2-09 mechanical cumstances: 0.0 No No No No A 316H 6-121
10.0
loss • When torque loss is large
due to motor bearing.
• When the torque loss in
the pump or fan is large.
The set mechanical loss will
compensate for torque.
Motor iron
loss for Sets motor iron loss in W 0 to 14 W
E2-10 No A A No No 317H 6-121
torque com- units. 65535 *1
pensation
Set the rated output of the
0.40
Motor rated motor in units of 0.01 kW. 0.00 to
E2-11 kW No Q Q Q Q 318H 6-118
output This constant is automati- 650.00
*1
* 1. The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity. The values for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW are given.
* 2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
E2-01.
* 4. The lower limit of E2-08 is the setting value of E2-07.
5-35
Motor 2 V/f Pattern: E3
User constants for motor 2 V/f characteristics are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Con- Change MEMO
V/f with Vec-
ber tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Motor 2 0: V/f control 0 to 2

control 1: V/f control with PG
E3-01 2: Open-loop vector control 0 No A A A A 319H -
method
selection 0 to 3
3: Flux vector control
40.0 to
Motor 2 400.0
max. out- *4 60.0
E3-02 put fre- No A A A A 31AH -
40.0 to Hz
quency
(FMAX) 300.0
*3
Motor 2
0.0 to 200.0
max. volt-
E3-03 255.0 V No A A A A 31BH -
age
*1 *2
(VMAX)
0.0 to
Motor 2 Output voltage (V) 400.0
max. volt- *4 60.0
E3-04 age fre- No A A A A 31CH -
0.0 to Hz
quency
(FA) 300.0
*3
0.0 to
Motor 2 400.0
mid. out- *4 3.0 Hz
E3-05 put fre- Frequency (Hz) No A A A No 31DH -
0.0 to *2
quency 1
(FB) 300.0
To set V/f characteristics in a *3
straight line, set the same values
Motor 2 for E3-05 and E3-07.
mid. out- In this case, the setting for E3-06 0.0 to
put fre- will be disregarded. 15.0 V
E3-06 255.0 No A A A No 31EH -
quency Always ensure that the four fre- *1
*1
voltage 1 quencies are set in the following
(VC) manner:
E3-02 (FMAX) ≥ E3-04 (FA) > 0.0 to
Motor 2 E3-05 (FB) > E3-07 (FMIN) 400.0
min. out- *4 1.5 Hz
E3-07 put fre- No A A A A 31FH -
0.0 to *2
quency
(FMIN) 300.0
*3
Motor 2
min. out-
0.0 to
put fre- 9.0 V
E3-08 255.0 No A A A No 320H -
quency *1
*1
voltage
(VMIN)
5-36
Motor 2 Setup: E4
User constants for motor 2 are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the motor rated current

in 1 A units.
These set values will become
Motor 2 0.32
the reference values for 1.90 A
E4-01 rated cur- to 6.40 No A A A A 321H 6-60
motor protection, torque lim- *1
rent *2
its and torque control.
Sets the motor rated slip in
Hz units.
These set values will become 2.90
Motor 2 0.00 to
E4-02 the reference values for slip Hz No A A A A 322H -
rated slip 20.00
compensation. *1
Sets the motor no-load cur-
0.00 to
Motor 2 no- rent in 1 A units. 1.20 A
E4-03 1.89 No A A A A 323H -
load current This constant is automati- *1
*3
Motor 2 Sets the number of motor
number of poles.
E4-04 2 to 48 4 poles No No A No A 324H -
poles (num- This constant is automati-
ber of poles) cally set during autotuning.
Sets the motor phase-to-
Motor 2 0.000 9.842
phase resistance in Ω units.
E4-05 line-to-line to Ω No A A A A 325H -
resistance 65.000 *1
motor leakage inductance as
Motor 2
a percentage of the motor 0.0 to 18.2%
E4-06 leak induc- No No No A A 326H -
rated voltage. 40.0 *1
tance
Set the rated output of the
Motor 2 0.40
motor in units of 0.01 kW. 0.00 to
E4-07 rated capac- kW No A A A A 327H -
This constant is automati- 650.00
ity *1
* 3. If a multi-function input is set for motor 2 (H1- = 16), the setting range will depend upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter
of 0.4 kW is given. The upper limit depends on the setting of E4-01.
5-37
Option Constants: F
The following settings are made with the option constants (F constants): Settings for option boards
PG Option Setup: F1

User constants for the PG Speed Control Board are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the number of PG (pulse

generator or encoder) pulses. 0 to
F1-01 PG constant 600 No No Q No Q 380H 6-157
Sets the number of pulses 60000
per motor revolution.
Sets the PG disconnection
stopping method.
0: Ramp to stop
(Deceleration stop using
Deceleration Time 1, C1-
02.)
Operation
1: Coast to stop
selection at
2: Fast stop (Emergency
F1-02 PG open 0 to 3 1 No No A No A 381H 6-157
stop using the
circuit
deceleration time in C1-
(PGO)
09.)
3: Continue operation (To
protect the motor or
machinery, do not
normally make this
setting.)
Sets the stopping method
when an overspeed (OS)
fault occurs.
0: Ramp to stop
02.)
Operation
1: Coast to stop
selection at
F1-03 2: Fast stop (Emergency 0 to 3 1 No No A No A 382H 6-157
overspeed
stop using the
(OS)
09.)
machinery, do not
normally make this
setting.)
5-38
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the stopping method

when a speed deviation
(DEV) fault occurs.
0: Ramp to stop
Operation 02.)
F1-04 selection at 1: Coast to stop 0 to 3 3 No No A No A 383H 6-157
deviation 2: Fast stop (Emergency
stop using the
09.)
3: Continue operation (DEV
is displayed and
operation continued.)
0: Phase A leads with For-
ward Run Command.
(Phase B leads with
Reverse Run Command.)
F1-05 PG rotation 0 or 1 0 No No A No A 384H 6-158
1: Phase B leads with For-
ward Run Command.
(Phase A leads with
Reverse Run Command.)
Sets the division ratio for the
PG speed control board
pulse output.
Division ratio = (1+ n) /m
PG division (n=0 or 1 m=1 to 32)
rate (PG F1-06 1 to
F1-06 1 No No A No A 385H 6-158
pulse moni- n m 132
tor) This constant is only effec-
tive when a PG-B2 is used.
The possible division ratio
settings are: 1/32 ≤ F1-06 ≤
1.
Sets integral control during
acceleration/deceleration to
either enabled or disabled.
Integral 0: Disabled (The integral
value during function isn't used while
F1-07 accel/decel accelerating or 0 or 1 0 No No A No No 386H 6-158
enable/dis- decelerating; it is used at
able constant speeds.)
1: Enabled (The integral
function is used at all
times.)
Overspeed Sets the overspeed detection
0 to
F1-08 detection method. 115% No No A No A 387H 6-158
120
level Frequencies above that set
for F1-08 (set as a percent-
age of the maximum output
Overspeed frequency) that continue to 0.0 to
F1-09 detection exceed this frequency for the 2.0 0.0 s * No No A No A 388H 6-158
delay time time set in F1-09 are
detected as overspeed faults.
5-39
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Excessive Sets the speed deviation

speed devia- detection method.
F1-10 Any speed deviation above 0 to 50 10% No No A No A 389H 6-158
tion detec-
tion level the F1-10 set level (set as a
percentage of the maximum
output frequency) that con-
tinues for the time set in F1-
Excessive
11 is detected as a speed
speed devia-
deviation. 0.0 to
F1-11 tion detec- 0.5 s No No A No A 38AH 6-158
Speed deviation is the differ- 10.0
tion delay
ence between actual motor
time
speed and the reference com-
mand speed.
Sets the number of teeth on
Number of
the gears if there are gears
F1-12 PG gear 0 No No A No No 38BH 6-158
between the PG and the
teeth 1
motor.
0 to
Input pulses from PG 60 F1-13
1000
Number of F1-01 F1-12
F1-13 PG gear A gear ratio of 1 will be used 0 No No A No No 38CH 6-158
teeth 2 if either of these constants is
set to 0.
Used to set the PG discon-
PG open-
nection detection time. PGO
circuit 0.0 to
F1-14 will be detected if the detec- 2.0 s No No A No A 38DH 6-158
detection 10.0
tion time continues beyond
time
the set time.
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. The flux vector control factory setting is given.
Analog Reference Board: F2

User constants for the Analog Reference Board are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the functions for chan-

nel 1 to 3 which are effective
when the AI-14B Analog
Reference Board is used.
0: 3-channel individual
(Channel 1: terminal A1,
Bi-polar or Channel 2: terminal A2,
uni-polar Channel 3: terminal A3)
F2-01 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 38FH 6-164
input selec- 1: 3-channel addition (Addi-
tion tion values are the fre-
quency reference)
When set to 0, select 1 for
b1-01. In this case the multi-
function input “Option/
Inverter selection” cannot be
used.
5-40
Digital Reference Board: F3

User constants for the Digital Reference Board are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the Digital Reference

Board input method.
0: BCD 1% unit
1: BCD 0.1% unit
2: BCD 0.01% unit
3: BCD 1 Hz unit
4: BCD 0.1 Hz unit
5: BCD 0.01 Hz unit
Digital
F3-01 6: BCD special setting (5- 0 to 7 0 No A A A A 390H 6-164
input option
digit input)
7: Binary input
6 is only effective when the
DI-16H2 is used.
When o1-03 is set to 2 or
higher, the input will be
BCD, and the units will
change to the o1-03 setting.
5-41
Analog Monitor Boards: F4
User constants for the Analog Monitor Board are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Effective when the Analog

Channel 1 Monitor Board is used.
F4-01 monitor Monitor selection: 1 to 99 2 No A A A A 391H 6-92
selection Set the number of the moni-
tor item to be output. (U1-
)
The monitor items that can
Channel 1 be set depends on the control 0.00 to
F4-02 method. 1.00 Yes A A A A 392H 6-92
gain 2.50
Gain:
Set the multiple of 10 V for
outputting monitor items.
Channel 2 4, 10 to 14, 25, 28, 31, 34,
F4-03 monitor 35, 39, 40, 42 cannot be set. 1 to 99 3 No A A A A 393H 6-92
selection 29 to 31 are not used. When
the AO-12 Analog Monitor
Board is used, outputs of ±
10 V are possible. To output
± 10 V, set F4-07 or F4-08 to
1. When the AO-08 Analog
Channel 2 Monitor Board is used, only 0.00 to
F4-04 0.50 Yes A A A A 394H 6-92
gain outputs of 0 to +10 V are 2.50
possible.
A meter calibration function
is available.*
Channel 1 Sets the channel 1 item bias
-10.0 to
F4-05 output mon- to 100%/10 V when the Ana- 0.0% Yes A A A A 395H 6-92
10.0
itor bias log Monitor Board is used.
Channel 2 Sets the channel 2 item bias
-10.0 to
F4-06 output mon- to 100%/10 V when the Ana- 0.0% Yes A A A A 396H 6-92
10.0
itor bias log Monitor Board is used.
Analog out-
put signal 0: 0 to 10 V
F4-07 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 397H 6-92
level for 1: -10 to +10 V
channel 1
Analog out-
F4-08 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 398H 6-92
channel 2
* The CH1 output can be adjusted when the F4-02 or F4-05 setting is displayed in Quick, Advanced, or Verify mode while the motor is stopped.
The CH2 output can be adjusted when the F4-04 or F4-06 setting is displayed in Quick, Advanced, or Verify mode while the motor is stopped.
5-42
Digital Output Boards (DO-02C and DO-08): F5

User constants for the Digital Output Board are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Effective when a Digital

Channel 1 Output Board (DO-02C or
F5-01 output DO-08) is used. 0 to 37 0 No A A A A 399H 6-161
selection Set the number of the multi-
function output to be output.
Effective when a Digital
Channel 2 Output Board (DO-02C or
F5-02 output DO-08) is used. 0 to 37 1 No A A A A 39AH 6-161
Effective when a DO-08
Channel 3 Digital Output Board is
F5-03 output used. 0 to 37 2 No A A A A 39BH 6-161
F5-04 output used. 0 to 37 4 No A A A A 39CH 6-161
F5-05 output used. 0 to 37 6 No A A A A 39DH 6-161
F5-06 output used. 0 to 37 37 No A A A A 39EH 6-161
F5-07 output used. 0 to 37 0F No A A A A 39FH 6-162
F5-08 output used. 0 to 37 0F No A A A A 3A0H 6-162
Digital Output Board is
used.
DO-08 out- Set the output mode.
F5-09 put mode 0: 8-channel individual out- 0 to 2 0 No A A A A 3A1H 6-162
selection puts
1: Binary code output
2: Output according to
F5-01 to F5-08 settings.
5-43
Communications Option Boards: F6
User constants for a Communications Option Board are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Set the stopping method for

communications errors.
0: Deceleration stop using
Operation
selection
02
F6-01 after com- 0 to 3 1 No A A A A 3A2H -
1: Coast to stop
munica-
2: Emergency stop using
tions error
09
3: Continue operation
Input level
of external
fault from
0: Always detect
F6-02 Communi- 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 3A3H -
1: Detect during operation
cations
Option
Board
Stopping 0: Deceleration stop using
method for deceleration time in C1-
external 02
fault from 1: Coast to stop
F6-03 0 to 3 1 No A A A A 3A4H -
Communi- 2: Emergency stop using
cations deceleration time in C1-
Option 09
Board 3: Continue operation
Trace sam-
pling from
Communi- 0 to
F6-04 - 0 No A A A A 3A5H -
cations 60000
Option
Board
Torque ref- 0: Torque reference/torque
erence/ limit from transmission
torque limit disabled.
F6-06 0 or 1 0 No No No No A 3A7H -
selection 1: Torque reference/torque
from opti- limit from transmission
cal option enabled.
SI-T WDT errors (E5).
0: Deceleration stop using
Operation deceleration time in C1-
F6-08 selection 02
0 to 3 1 No A A A A 3B6H -
∗ after SI-T 1: Coast to stop
WDT error 2: Emergency stop using
09
Number of
F6-09 SI-T BUS Set the number which SI-T
∗ 2 to 10 2 No A A A A 3B7H -
error detec- detects BUS errors.
tion
* Refer to MECHATROLINK COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE CARD INSTRUCTIONS (TOBPC73060008) for details.
5-44
Terminal Function Constants: H

The following settings are made with the terminal function constants (H constants): Settings for external ter-
minal functions.
Multi-function Contact Inputs: H1

User constants for multi-function contact inputs are shown in the following tables.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Terminal S3
Multi-function contact input
H1-01 function 0 to 78 24 No A A A A 400H -
1
selection
Terminal S4
Multi-function contact input 0 to
H1-02 function 14 No A A A A 401H -
2 768
selection
Terminal S5
H1-03 function
3
0 to 78 3 (0)* No A A A A 402H -
selection
Terminal S6
H1-04 function
4
0 to 78 4 (3)* No A A A A 403H -
selection
Terminal S7
H1-05 function
5
0 to 78 6 (4)* No A A A A 404H -
selection
Terminal S8
H1-06 function
6
0 to 78 8 (6) * No A A A A 4-5H -
selection
* The values in parentheses indicate factory settings when initialized in 3-wire sequence.
Multi-function Contact Input Functions

Control Methods
Set-
Open
ting Function V/f Flux Page
Loop
V/f with Vec-
Value PG
Vec-
tor
tor
0 3-wire sequence (Forward/Reverse Run Command) Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-16
1 Local/Remote selection (ON: Local, OFF: Remote) Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-79
6-86
2 Option/Inverter selection (ON: Option board) Yes Yes Yes Yes
6-164
Multi-step speed reference 1
3 When H3-09 is set to 2, this function is combined with the master/auxiliary Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-10
speed switch.
4 Multi-step speed reference 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-10
5 Multi-step speed reference 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-10
6 Jog frequency command (higher priority than multi-step speed reference) Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-10
7 Accel/decel time 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-26
8 External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON) Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-80
9 External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF) Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-80
5-45
Control Methods
Set-
Open
Loop
V/f with Vec-
Value PG
Vec-
tor
tor
Acceleration/deceleration ramp hold (ON: Acceleration/deceleration

A Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-81
stopped, frequency on hold)
B OH2 alarm signal input (ON: OH2 will be displayed) Yes Yes Yes Yes -
C Multi-function analog input selection (ON: Enable) Yes Yes Yes Yes -
No V/f control with PG (ON: Speed feedback control disabled,) (normal V/f
D No Yes No No 6-137
control)
E Speed control integral reset (ON: Integral control disabled) No Yes No Yes 6-137
F Not used (Set when a terminal is not used) - - - - -
10 Up command (Always set with the down command) Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-82
11 Down command (Always set with the up command) Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-82
12 FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17) Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-87
13 RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17) Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-87
14 Fault reset (Reset when turned ON) Yes Yes Yes Yes 7-2
Emergency stop. (Normally open condition: Deceleration to stop in decelera-
15 Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-24
tion time set in C1-09 when ON.)
16 Motor switch command (Motor 2 selection) Yes Yes Yes Yes -
Emergency stop (Normally closed condition: Deceleration to stop in deceler-
ation time set in C1-09 when OFF)
Timer function input (Functions are set in b4-01 and b4-02 and the timer 6-108
18 Yes Yes Yes Yes
function outputs are set in H1- and H2-.) 7-21
19 PID control disable (ON: PID control disabled) Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-112
1A Accel/Decel time 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-26
Constants write enable (ON: All constants can be written-in. OFF: All con-
1B Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-155
stants other than frequency monitor are write protected.)
Trim control increase (ON: d4-02 frequency is added to analog frequency
1C Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-85
reference.)
Trim control decrease (ON: d4-02 frequency is subtracted from analog fre-
1D Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-85
quency reference.)
1E Analog frequency reference sample/hold Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-86
External fault (Desired settings possible)
20 to
Input mode: NO contact/NC contact, Detection mode: Normal/during opera- Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-88
2F
tion
PID control integral reset (reset when reset command is input or when
stopped during PID control)
31 PID control integral hold (ON: Hold) Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-112
32 Multi-step speed reference 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes -
34 PID soft starter ON/OFF Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-112
35 PID input characteristics switch Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-112
60 DC injection braking command (ON: Performs DC injection braking) Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-23
External search command 1 (ON: Speed search from maximum output fre-
61 Yes No Yes No 6-69
quency)
62 External search command 2 (ON: Speed search from set frequency) Yes No Yes No 6-69
5-46
Control Methods
Set-
Open
Loop
V/f with Vec-
Value PG
Vec-
tor
tor
Field weakening command (ON: Field weakening control set for d6-01 and
63 Yes Yes No No -
d6-02)
64 External speed search command 3 (NC contact) Yes Yes Yes Yes -
65 KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NC contact) Yes Yes Yes Yes -
66 KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NO contact) Yes Yes Yes Yes -
Communications test mode (“Pass” is displayed when the communication
test is passed.)
68 High-slip braking (HSB) Yes Yes No No -
6-131
71 Speed/torque control change (ON: Torque control) No No No Yes
6-135
72 Zero-servo command (ON: Zero-servo) No No No Yes 6-145
77 Speed control (ASR) proportional gain switch (ON: C5-03) No No No Yes 6-137
78 Polarity reversing command for external torque reference No No No Yes 6-131
Multi-function Contact Outputs: H2

User constants for multi-function outputs are shown in the following tables.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Terminal
M1-M2
Multi-function contact out-
H2-01 function 0 to 3D 0 No A A A A 40BH -
put
selection
(contact)
Terminal P1
function
H2-02 selection 0 to 3D 1 No A A A A 40CH -
put 1
(open col-
lector)
Terminal P2
function
H2-03 selection 0 to 3D 2 No A A A A 40DH -
put 2
(open col-
lector)
Multi-function Contact Output Functions

Control Methods
Set-
Open
Loop
V/f with Vec-
Value PG
Vec-
tor
tor
0 During run (ON: Run Command is ON or voltage is being output) Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-89
1 Zero-speed Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-89
2 Frequency agree 1 (L4-02 used.) Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-54
Desired frequency agree 1 (ON: Output frequency = ±L4-01, L4-02 used and
during frequency agree)
5-47
Control Methods
Set-
Open
Loop
V/f with Vec-
Value PG
Vec-
tor
tor
Frequency (FOUT) detection 1 (ON: +L4-01 ≥ output frequency ≥ -L4-01,

L4-02 used)
Frequency (FOUT) detection 2 (ON: Output frequency ≥ +L4-01 or output
frequency ≤ -L4-01, L4-02 used)
Inverter operation ready
6 Yes Yes Yes Yes -
READY: After initialization, no faults
7 During DC bus undervoltage (UV) detection Yes Yes Yes Yes -
8 During baseblock (ON: during baseblock) Yes Yes Yes Yes -
9 Frequency reference selection (ON: Frequency reference from Operator) Yes Yes Yes Yes -
A Run Command selection status (ON: Run Command from Operator) Yes Yes Yes Yes -
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO (NO contact: Overtorque/under-
B Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-57
torque detection at ON)
C Loss of frequency reference (Effective when 1 is set for L4-05) Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-74
D Braking resistor fault (ON: Resistor overheat or braking transistor fault) Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-77
Fault (ON: Digital Operator communications error or fault other than CPF00
E Yes Yes Yes Yes -
and CPF01 has occurred.)
F Not used. (Set when the terminals are not used.) - - - - -
10 Minor fault (ON: Alarm displayed) Yes Yes Yes Yes -
11 Fault reset command active Yes Yes Yes Yes -
12 Timer function output Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-108
13 Frequency agree 2 (L4-04 used) Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-54
Desired frequency agree 2 (ON: Output frequency = L4-03, L4-04 used, and
during frequency agree)
15 Frequency detection 3 (ON: Output frequency ≤ L4-03, L4-04 used) Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-54
16 Frequency detection 4 (ON: Output frequency ≥ L4-03, L4-04 used) Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-54
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at
OFF)
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NO (NO Contact: Torque detection at
ON)
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at
OFF)
1A During reverse run (ON: During reverse run) Yes Yes Yes Yes -
1B During baseblock 2 (OFF: During baseblock) Yes Yes Yes Yes -
1C Motor selection (Motor 2 selected) Yes Yes Yes Yes -
1D During regeneration (ON: During regeneration) No No No Yes -
1E Restart enabled (ON: Restart enabled) Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-75
Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the 6-61
1F Yes Yes Yes Yes
detection level) 6-90
20 Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm (ON: Temperature exceeds L8-02 setting) Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-90
30 During torque limit (current limit) (ON: During torque limit) No No Yes Yes -
31 During speed limit (ON: During speed limit) No No No Yes 6-90
5-48
Control Methods
Set-
Open
Loop
V/f with Vec-
Value PG
Vec-
tor
tor
Speed control circuit operating for torque control (except when stopped).
The external torque reference will be limited if torque control is selected
32 No No No Yes 6-131
(internal torque reference < external torque reference).
Output when the motor is rotating at the speed limit.
6-90
33 Zero-servo end (ON: Zero-servo function completed) No No No Yes
6-146
36∗1 Frequency (FOUT) detection 5 Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-53
During run 2 (ON: Frequency output, OFF: Base block, DC injection brak-
ing, initial excitation, operation stop)
3D∗2 Inverter's Cooling Fan Fault detected Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-76
* 1. Applicable for F7-series Inverters with software versions PRG:1032 or later.
* 2. Applicable for F7-series Inverters with software versions PRG:1031 or later.
Analog Inputs: H3
User constants for analog inputs are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Signal level
selection 0: 0 to 10 V
H3-01 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 410H 6-35
(terminal 1: −10 to 10 V
A1)
Sets the frequency when 10
Gain (termi- V is input, as a percentage of 0.0 to
H3-02 100.0% Yes A A A A 411H 6-35
nal A1) the maximum output fre- 1000.0
quency.
Sets the frequency when 0 V -100.0
Bias (termi-
H3-03 is input, as a percentage of to 0.0% Yes A A A A 412H 6-35
nal A1)
the maximum frequency. +100.0
Signal level
selection 0: 0 to 10 V 6-35
H3-04 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 413H
(terminal 1:−10 to 10 V 6-130
A3)
Multi-func-
tion analog
Select from the functions
input (ter- 6-35
H3-05 listed in the following table. 0 to 1F 1F No A A A A 414H
minal A3) 6-130
Refer to the next page.
function
selection
Sets the input gain (level)
Gain (termi- when 10V is input. 0.0 to 6-35
H3-06 100.0% Yes A A A A 415H
nal A3) Set according to the 100% 1000.0 6-130
value selected from H3-05.
Bias (termi- when 0V is input.
-100.0 6-35
H3-07 to 0.0% Yes A A A A 416H
nal A3) Set according to the 100% 6-130
+100.0
value selected from H3-05.
5-49
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0: 0 to +10V, with lower

limit
Signal level 1: −10 to 10 V, without
selection lower limit 6-35
H3-08 0 to 2 2 No A A A A 417H
(terminal 2: 4 to 20 mA. 6-130
A2) Switch current and voltage
input using the switch on the
control panel.
Multi-func-
tion analog
input Select multi-function analog
6-35
H3-09 (terminal input function for terminal 0 to 1F 0 No A A A A 418H
6-130
A2) func- A2. Refer to the next table.
tion selec-
tion
Gain when 10 V (20 mA) is input.
0.0 to 6-35
H3-10 (terminal Set according to the 100% 100.0% Yes A A A A 419H
1000.0 6-130
A2) value for the function set for
H3-09.
Bias when 0 V (4 mA) is input. -100.0
6-35
H3-11 (terminal Set according to the 100% to 0.0% Yes A A A A 41AH
6-130
A2) value for the function set for +100.0
H3-09.
Sets primary delay filter time 0.00
Analog
constant in seconds for the s
input filter 0.00 to 4-20
H3-12 analog input terminal. No A A A A 41BH
time con- 2.00 0.03 6-36
Effective for noise control
stant s
etc.
0: Use terminal A1 analog
input as main speed fre-
quency reference.
Terminal 1: Use terminal A2 analog
H3-13 A1/A2 input as main speed fre- 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 41CH -
switching quency reference.
Effective when H3-09 is set
to 2 and H3-05 is not set to 0
or 2.
5-50
H3-05 and H3-09 Settings

Control Methods
Set-
Open
ting Function Contents (100%) V/f Flux Page
Loop
V/f with Vec-
Value PG
Vec-
tor
tor
6-37
0 Add to terminal A1 Maximum output frequency Yes Yes Yes Yes
6-131
Frequency reference (voltage) com-
1 Frequency gain Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-36
mand value
Auxiliary frequency reference 1
2 Maximum output frequency Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-11
(2nd step analog)
Auxiliary frequency reference 2
(3rd step analog)
4 Voltage bias 200V (200V-class), 400V (400V-class) Yes Yes No No -
Accel/decel change (reduction Set acceleration and deceleration times
coefficient) (C1-01 to C1-08)
6 DC injection braking current Inverter rated output current Yes Yes Yes No 6-23
Motor rated torque for vector control
Overtorque/undertorque detection
7 Inverter rated output current for V/f Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-59
level
control
8 Stall prevention level during run Inverter rated output current Yes Yes No No 6-53
Frequency reference lower limit
level
A Jump frequency Maximum output frequency Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-39
B PID feedback Maximum output frequency Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-112
C PID target value Maximum output frequency Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-112
D Frequency bias 2 Maximum output frequency Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-37
E Motor temperature input 10 V = 100% Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-64
10 Positive torque limit Motor's rated torque No No Yes Yes 6-50
11 Negative torque limit Motor's rated torque No No Yes Yes 6-50
12 Regenerative torque limit Motor's rated torque No No Yes Yes 6-50
Torque reference/torque limit at
13 Motor’s rated torque No No No Yes 6-131
speed control
14 Torque compensation Motor’s rated torque No No Yes Yes 6-131
15 Positive/negative torque limit Motor's rated torque No No Yes Yes 6-50
1F Analog input not used. - Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-11
16 to 1E Not used - - - - - -
5-51
Multi-function Analog Outputs: H4
User constants for multi-function analog outputs are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the number of the moni-

tor item to be output (U1-
Monitor ) from terminal FM. The
selection monitor items that can be set
H4-01 1 to 99 2 No A A A A 41DH 6-91
(terminal depends on the control
FM) method.
4, 10 to 14, 25, 28 to 31, 34,
35, 39 to 43 cannot be set.
Sets the multi-function ana-
log output 1 voltage level
gain.
Sets whether the monitor
Gain (termi- item output will be output in 0.00 to 4-6
H4-02 multiples of 10 V. 1.00 Yes Q Q Q Q 41EH
nal FM) 2.50 6-91
The maximum output from
the terminal is 10 V.
is available. *
bias.
Sets output characteristic up/
Bias (termi- down parallel movement as a -10.0 to
H4-03 percentage of 10 V. 0.0% Yes A A A A 41FH 6-91
nal FM) +10.0
is available. *
Sets the number of the moni-
tor item to be output (U1-
Monitor ) from terminal AM.
selection The monitor items that can
H4-04 1 to 99 3 No A A A A 420H 6-91
(terminal be set depends on the control
AM) method.
4, 10 to 14, 25, 28 to 31, 34,
35, 39 to 43 cannot be set.
Set the voltage level gain for
multi-function analog out-
put 2.
Set the number of multiples
Gain (termi- of 10 V to be output as the 0.00 to 4-6
H4-05 100% output for the monitor 0.50 Yes Q Q Q Q 421H
nal AM) 2.50 6-91
items. The maximum output
from the terminal is 10 V.
is available.*
bias.
Bias (termi- down parallel movement as a -10.0 to
H4-06 percentage of 10 V. 0.0% Yes A A A A 422H 6-92
nal AM) +10.0
is available.*
5-52
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the signal output level

Analog out-
for multi-function output 1
put 1 signal
H4-07 (terminal FM) 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 423H 6-92
level selec-
0: 0 to +10 V output
tion
1: −10 to 10 V output
Sets the signal output level
Analog out-
for multi-function output 2
put 2 signal
H4-08 (terminal AM) 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 424H -
level selec-
tion
* The CH1 output can be adjusted when the H4-02 or H4-03 setting is displayed in Quick, Advanced, or Verify mode while the motor is stopped.
The CH2 output can be adjusted when the H4-05 or H4-06 setting is displayed in Quick, Advanced, or Verify mode while the motor is stopped.
MEMOBUS Communications: H5
User constants for MEMOBUS communications are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Slave Set the Inverter's slave 0 to 20

H5-01 1FH No A A A A 425H 6-98
address address. *1
Set the baud rate for

MEMOBUS communica-
tions of communications
Communi- connection terminals.
H5-02 cation speed 0: 1200 bps 0 to 4 3 No A A A A 426H 6-98
selection 1: 2400 bps
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
Set the parity for MEMO-
BUS communications of
Communi- communications connection
H5-03 cation parity terminals. 0 to 2 0 No A A A A 427H 6-98
selection 0: No parity
1: Even parity
2: Odd parity
Stopping
using deceleration time in
method
C1-02
H5-04 after com- 0 to 3 3 No A A A A 428H 6-98
1: Coast to stop
munication
2: Emergency stop using
error
09
5-53
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Set whether or not a commu-

Communi- nications timeout is to be
cation error detected as a communica-
H5-05 0 or 1 1 No A A A A 429H 6-98
detection tions error.
selection 0: Do not detect.
1: Detect
Set the time from the
Send wait Inverter receiving data to
H5-06 5 to 65 5 ms No A A A A 42AH 6-98
time when the Inverter starts to
send.
Select to enable or disable
RTS control.
RTS con-
0: Disabled (RTS is always
H5-07 trol ON/ 0 or 1 1 No A A A A 42BH 6-98
ON)
OFF
1: Enabled (RTS turns ON
only when sending)
Selects the units used for
Unit Selec-
MEMOBUS registry 0025H
tion for
H5-10 (monitors the output voltage
MEMO- 0, 1 0 No A A A A 436H 6-98
*2 reference).
BUS Regis-
0: 0.1 V units
ter 0025H
1: 1 V units
* 1. Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications.
* 2. Applicable for F7-series Inverters with software versions PRG: 1032 or later.
Pulse Train I/O: H6

User constants for pulse I/O are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Pulse train
0: Frequency reference 6-6
input func-
H6-01 1: PID feedback value 0 to 2 0 No A A A A 42CH 6-40
tion selec-
2: PID target value 6-111
tion
Pulse train Set the number of pulses in
1000 to 1440 6-6
H6-02 input scal- hertz, taking the reference to Yes A A A A 42DH
32000 Hz 6-40
ing be 100%.
Set the input gain level as a
Pulse train 0.0 to
H6-03 percent when the pulse train 100.0% Yes A A A A 42EH 6-40
input gain 1000.0
set in H6-02 is input.
-100.0
Pulse train Set the input bias when the
H6-04 to 0.0% Yes A A A A 42FH 6-40
input bias pulse train is 0.
100.0
Pulse train Set the pulse train input pri-
0.00 to
H6-05 input filter mary delay filter time con- 0.10 s Yes A A A A 430H 6-40
2.00
time stant in seconds.
5-54
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Select the pulse train moni-

tor output items (value of the
Pulse train 1, 2, 5,
part of U1-).
H6-06 monitor 20, 24, 2 Yes A A A A 431H 6-94
There are two types of moni-
selection 36
tor items: Speed-related
items and PID-related items.
Set the number of pulses out-
put when speed is 100% in
hertz.
Pulse train
Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to 0 to 1440
H6-07 monitor Yes A A A A 432H 6-94
0, to make the pulse train 32000 Hz
scaling
monitor output synchro-
nously to the output fre-
quency.
Protection Function Constants: L

The following settings are made with the protection function constants (L constants): Motor selection func-
tion, power loss ridethrough function, stall prevention function, frequency detection, torque limits, and hard-
ware protection.
Motor Overload: L1
User constants for motor overloads are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets whether the motor over-

load function is enabled or
disabled at electric thermal
overload relay.
0: Disabled
protection
Motor pro- In some applications when
4-6
L1-01 tection the Inverter power supply is 0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q Q 480H
6-60
selection turned off, the thermal value
is reset, so even if this
constant is set to 1,
protection may not be
effective.
When several motors are
connected to one Inverter,
set to 0 and ensure that each
motor is installed with a pro-
tection device.
5-55
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the electric thermal

detection time in seconds
units.
sary.
Motor pro-
The factory setting is 150% 0.1 to
L1-02 tection time 1.0 min No A A A A 481H 6-60
overload for one minute. 5.0
constant
When the motor's overload
resistance is known, also set
the overload resistance pro-
tection time for when the
motor is hot started.
Set Multi-function input ter-
minal A3 (H3-05) or A2
(H3-09) to E and select the
operation when the input
motor temperature (ther-
Alarm oper- mistor) input exceeds the
ation selec- alarm detection level [1.17 V
L1-03 tion during (±5%)]. 0 to 3 3 No A A A A 482H 6-63
motor over- 0: Decelerate to stop
heating 1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the
09.
3: Continue operation (H3
on the Operator flashes).
(H3-09) to E and select the
operation when the motor
temperature (thermistor)
Motor over-
input exceeds the operation
heating
L1-04 detection level [2.34V 0 to 2 1 No A A A A 483H 6-63
operation
selection (±5%)].
0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop
09.
Motor tem-
perature
(H3-09) to E and set the pri- 0.00 to
L1-05 input filter 0.20 s No A A A A 484H 6-63
mary delay time constant for 10.00
time con-
stant motor temperature (ther-
mistor) inputs in seconds.
5-56
Power Loss Ridethrough: L2

User constants for power loss ridethroughs are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0: Disabled [main circuit

undervoltage (UV1)
detection]
1: Enabled [Restarted when
the power returns within
the time for L2-02. When
Momentary L2-02 is exceeded, main
L2-01 power loss circuit undervoltage 0 to 2 0 No A A A A 485H 6-66
detection (UV1) is detected.]
2: Enabled while CPU is
operating. [Restarts when
power returns during
control operations. Does
not detect main circuit
undervoltage. (UV1)]
Momentary Ridethrough time, when
power loss Momentary Power Loss 0 to 0.1 s
L2-02 No A A A A 486H 6-66
ridethru Selection (L2-01) is set to 1, 25.5 *1
time in units of seconds.
Sets the Inverter's minimum
baseblock time in units of
one second, when the
Inverter is restarted after
power loss ridethrough.
Sets the time to approxi-
Min. base- mately 0.7 times the motor 0.1 to 0.2 s 6-66
L2-03 No A A A A 487H
block time secondary circuit time con- 5.0 *1 6-69
stant.
When an overcurrent or
overvoltage occurs when
starting a speed search or DC
injection braking, increase
the set values.
Sets the time required to
return the Inverter output
voltage to normal voltage at
Voltage the completion of a speed
0.0 to 0.3 s 6-67
L2-04 recovery search, in units of one sec- No A A A A 488H
5.0 *1 6-69
time ond.
Sets the time required to
recover from 0 V to the max-
imum voltage.
Sets the main circuit under-
voltage (UV) detection level
(main circuit DC voltage) in
V units.
Undervolt- 150 to
Usually setting is not neces- 190 V
L2-05 age detec- 210 No A A A A 489H 6-67
sary. *2
tion level *2
Insert an AC reactor in the
Inverter input side to lower
the main circuit undervolt-
age detection level.
5-57
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets in seconds the time

required to decelerate from
KEB decel- the speed where the deceler- 0.0 to
L2-06 0.0 s No A A A A 48AH -
eration time ation at momentary power 200.0
loss command (KEB) is
input to zero-speed.
Set in seconds the time to
Momentary
accelerate to the set speed 0.0 to 0.0 s
L2-07 recovery No A A A A 48BH -
after recovery from a 25.5 *3
time
momentary power loss.
Sets as a percent the about to
reduce the output frequency
Frequency
at the beginning of decelera-
reduction
tion at momentary power 0 to
L2-08 gain at KEB 100% No A A A A 48CH -
loss (KEB). 300
start
Reduction = slip frequency
before KEB operation × L2-
08 × 2
Note Attach a Backup Capacitor Unit for Momentary Power Loss if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200 V/400 V
Class Inverters with outputs of 0.4 to 11 kW.
* 3. If the setting is 0, the axis will accelerate to the specified speed over the specified acceleration time (C1-01 to C1-08).
Stall Prevention: L3
User constants for the stall prevention function are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0: Disabled (Acceleration as
set. With a heavy load,
the motor may stall.)
1: Enabled (Acceleration
stopped when L3-02 level
is exceeded. Acceleration
Stall pre-
starts again when the
vention 4-20
L3-01 current is returned.) 0 to 2 1 No A A A No 48FH
selection 6-30
2: Intelligent acceleration
during accel
mode (Using the L3-02
level as a basis,
acceleration is
automatically adjusted.
Set acceleration time is
disregarded.)
Effective when L3-01 is set

to 1 or 2. 120%
Stall pre- Set as a percentage of *1
vention Inverter rated current. 0 to 4-20
L3-02 No A A A No 490H
level during Usually setting is not neces- 200 6-30
accel sary. The factory setting 150%
reduces the set values when *1
the motor stalls.
5-58
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the lower limit for stall

prevention during accelera-
Stall pre- tion, as a percentage of the
vention Inverter rated current, when 0 to 4-20
L3-03 50% No A A A No 491H
limit during operation is in the frequency 100 6-30
accel range above E1-06.
sary.
0: Disabled (Deceleration as
set. If deceleration time is
too short, a main circuit
overvoltage may result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is
stopped when the main
circuit voltage exceeds
the overvoltage level.
Deceleration restarts
when voltage is returned.)
Stall pre- 2: Intelligent deceleration
4-6
vention mode (Deceleration rate 0 to 3
L3-04 1 No Q Q Q Q 492H 4-20
selection is automatically adjusted *2
6-32
during decel so that in Inverter can
decelerate in the shortest
possible time. Set
deceleration time is
disregarded.)
3: Enabled (with Braking
Resistor Unit)
When a braking option
(Braking Resistor, Braking
Resistor Unit, Braking Unit)
is used, always set to 0 or 3.
0: Disabled (Runs as set.
With a heavy load, the
motor may stall.)
Stall pre- 1: Deceleration time 1 (the
vention deceleration time for the
4-20
L3-05 selection stall prevention function 0 to 2 1 No A A No No 493H
6-52
during run- is C1-02.)
ning 2: Deceleration time 2 (the
deceleration time for the
stall prevention function
is C1-04.)
Effective when L3-05 is 1 or
2. 120%
Set as a percentage of the *1
Stall pre-
Inverter rated output current.
vention 30 to 4-20
L3-06 Usually setting is not neces- No A A No No 494H
level during 200 6-52
sary.
running 150%
The factory setting reduces
the set values when the *1
motor stalls.
5-59
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Used to enable or disable the
function for inhibiting main
circuit overvoltages by
reducing the regenerative
Overvolt- torque limit according to the 4-20
L3-11 age inhibit main circuit overvoltage 0 or 1 0 No No No A A 4C7H 6-34
selection level. 7-2
If this function is enabled,
when the main circuit volt-
age rises, operation will be
performed with the regenera-
tive torque less than the set
value.
Sets the main circuit voltage
level for which the regenera-
tive torque limit is restricted
Overvolt- to 0.
350 to
age inhibit Usually, there is no need to 380V 4-20
L3-12 390 No No No A A 4C8H
voltage change this setting. *3 6-34
*3
level If main circuit overvoltages
occur even with the over-
voltage inhibit function
enabled, reduce this setting.
* 1. C6-01 = 1:120%, C6-01 = 0:150%
* 2. When using flux vector control, 0 to 2.
Reference Detection: L4
User constants for the reference detection function are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Effective when “Desired fre- 0.0 to

quency (ref/setting) agree 400.0
Speed 1,” “Frequency detection 1,” *1
agreement or “Frequency detection 2"
L4-01 0.0 Hz No A A A A 499H 6-53
detection is set for a multi-function
level output. 0.0 to
Frequencies to be detected 300.0
*2
are set in Hz units.
Effective when “Frequency

(speed) agree 1,” “Desired
frequency (speed) agree 1,”
Speed
or “Frequency (FOUT)
agreement 0.0 to
L4-02 detection 1,” Frequency 2.0 Hz No A A A A 49AH 6-53
detection 20.0
(FOUT) detection 2 is set for
width
a multi-function output.
Sets the frequency detection
width in Hz units.
5-60
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Effective when “Desired fre- -400.0

quency (speed) agree 2,” to
Speed “Frequency (FOUT) detec- +400.0
agreement tion 3,” or “Frequency *3
L4-03 0.0 Hz No A A A A 49BH 6-54
detection (FOUT) detection 4" is set -300.0
level (+/-) for a multi-function output. to
Frequency that should be +300.0
detected is set in Hz units. *4

(speed) agree 2,” “Desired
frequency (speed) agree 2,”
Speed
Frequency (FOUT) detection
agreement 0.0 to
L4-04 3 or “Frequency detection 4" 2.0 Hz No A A A A 49CH 6-54
detection 20.0
is set for a multi-function
width (+/-)
output.
Frequency detection width is
set in Hz units.
0: Stop (Operation follows
the frequency reference.)
1: Operation at 80% speed
Operation continues. (At 80% of
when fre- speed before the
L4-05 quency ref- frequency reference was 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 49DH 6-74
erence is lost)
missing Frequency reference is lost:
Frequency reference
dropped over 90% in 400
ms.

* 3. When C6-01 = 0, -150.0 to +150.0.
* 4. When C6-01 = 1, -400.0 to +400.0.
Fault Restart: L5
User constants for restarting faults are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the number of auto

restart attempts.
Number of
Automatically restarts after a
L5-01 auto restart 0 to 10 0 No A A A A 49EH 6-75
fault and conducts a speed
attempts
search from the run fre-
quency.
Sets whether a fault contact
output is activated during
Auto restart fault restart.
L5-02 operation 0: Not output (Fault contact 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 49FH 6-75
selection is not activated.)
1: Output (Fault contact is
activated.)
5-61
Torque Detection: L6
User constants for the torque detection function are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0: Overtorque/undertorque
detection disabled.
1: Overtorque detection
only with speed agree-
ment; operation continues
after overtorque
(warning).
2: Overtorque detected
continuously during
operation; operation
continues after
overtorque (warning).
3: Overtorque detection
ment; output stopped
upon detection (protected
operation).
continuously during
operation; output stopped
Torque
L6-01 detection 0 to 8 0 No A A A A 4A1H 6-56
operation).
selection 1
5: Undertorque detection
ment; operation continues
after overtorque
(warning).
6: Undertorque detected
continuously during
continues after
7: Undertorque detection
ment; output stopped
operation).
continuously during
operation).
Open loop vector control:
Torque Motor rated torque is set as
0 to
L6-02 detection 100%. 150% No A A A A 4A2H 6-56
300
level 1 V/f control: Inverter rated
current is set as 100%.
Torque Sets the overtorque/under-
0.0 to
L6-03 detection torque detection time in 1- 0.1 s No A A A A 4A3H 6-57
10.0
time 1 second units.
5-62
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Torque
L6-04 detection 0 to 8 0 No A A A A 4A4H 6-57
selection 2 Output of torque detection 1
is enabled by setting B or 17
Torque
for H2- and output of 0 to
L6-05 detection 150% No A A A A 4A5H 6-57
torque detection 1 is enabled 300
level 2
by setting 18 or 18 for H2-
Torque .
0.0 to
L6-06 detection 0.1 s No A A A A 4A6H 6-57
10.0
time 2
Torque Limits: L7
User constants for torque limits are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Con- Change MEMO
V/f with Vec-
ber tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Forward
drive 0 to 4-20
L7-01 200% No No No A A 4A7H
torque 300 6-49
limit Sets the torque limit value as a per-
centage of the motor rated torque.
Reverse
Four individual regions can be set.
drive 0 to 4-20
L7-02 200% No No No A A 4A8H
torque Output torque 300 6-49
limit Positive torque
Forward No. of
Regenerative motor
regenera- Reverse state rotations 0 to 4-20
L7-03 200% No No No A A 4A9H
tive torque Regenerative Forward 300 6-49
state
limit
Negative torque
Reverse
regenera- 0 to 4-20
L7-04 200% No No No A A 4AAH
tive torque 300 6-49
limit
Integral Set the integral time for the torque
time set- limit. When integral control is set
5 to 200 4-20
L7-06 ting for for the torque limit, reduce this set- No No No A No 4ACH
10000 ms 6-49
torque ting to increase the change in fre-
limit quency for the torque limit.
5-63
Control Methods
Con- Change MEMO
V/f with Vec-
ber tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Select the control method for the

torque limit during acceleration
and deceleration.
0: Proportional control (integral
control during constant speed)
Control
1: Integral control
method
Usually, this constant does not
selection
need to be set.
for torque
For applications in which the 4-20
L7-07 limit dur- 0 or 1 0 No No No A No 4C9H
torque limit will be reached during 6-49
ing accel-
acceleration and deceleration,
eration
torque control can be given priority
and decel-
by selecting integral control.
eration
When the torque is limited, the
acceleration and deceleration times
may increase or the motor speed
may not agree with the speed refer-
ence value.
Hardware Protection: L8
User constants for hardware protection functions are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Protect
0: Disabled (no overheating
selection for
protection)
L8-01 internal DB 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 4ADH 6-77
1: Enabled (overheating
resistor
protection)
(Type ERF)
Sets the detection tempera-
ture for the Inverter overheat
Overheat
detection pre-alarm in °C. 50 to 95 °C
L8-02 pre-alarm No A A A A 4AEH 6-78
The pre-alarm detects when 130 *1
level
the cooling fin temperature
reaches the set value.
Sets the operation for when
the Inverter overheat pre-
alarm goes ON.
0: Decelerate to stop in
Operation deceleration time C1-02.
selection 1: Coast to stop
L8-03 after over- 2: Fast stop in fast-stop time 0 to 3 3 No A A A A 4AFH 6-78
heat pre- C1-09.
alarm 3: Continue operation
(Monitor display only.)
A fault will be given in set-
ting 0 to 2 and a minor fault
will be given in setting 3.
5-64
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Detects if input
current open-phase,
power supply voltage
Input open-
imbalance or main circuit
phase pro-
L8-05 electrostatic capacitor 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 4B1H -
tection
deterioration occurs.)
selection
This fault is detected if a
load is greater than approxi-
mately 80% of the maximum
motor capacity.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Detects one out-
put open-phase.)
2: Enabled (Detects more 0 to 1
than one output open-
phases)
Output Output open-phase is
open-phase detected at less than 5% of
L8-07 0 No A A A A 4B3H -
protection Inverter rated current.
selection When applied motor capac-
ity is small for Inverter
capacity, output open-phase 0 to 2
may be detected inadvert-
ently or open-phase may not
be detected. In this case, set
to 0.
Ground pro-
0: Disabled
L8-09 tection 0 or 1 1 No A A A A 4B5H -
1: Enabled
selection
Set the ON/OFF control for
the cooling fan.
Cooling fan
0: ON only when Inverter is
L8-10 control 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 4B6H -
ON
selection
1: ON whenever power is
ON
Set the time in seconds to
Cooling fan
delay turning OFF the cool- 0 to
L8-11 control 60 s No A A A A 4B7H -
ing fan after the cooling fan 300
delay time
OFF command is received.
Set the ambient temperature.
Ambient If set to 60 °C, the Inverter 45 to
L8-12 45 °C No A A A A 4B8H -
temperature overload protection function 60
(OL2) will start 20% earlier.
OL2 charac- 0: OL2 characteristics at
teristics low speeds disabled.
L8-15 0 or 1 1 No A A A A 4BBH -
selection at 1: OL2 characteristics at
low speeds low speeds enabled.
Soft CLA 0: Disable 1
L8-18 0 or 1 No A A A A 4BEH -
selection 1: Enable *2
OH1 detec- 0: Disabled (FAN minor
L8-32 tion of fault detection)
0 or 1 1 No A A A A 4E2H 6-76
*3 Inverter’ s 1: Enabled (OH1 major
cooling fan fault detection)
* 2. When the control method is changed, the factory setting will change. The V/f control factory setting is given.
* 3. Applicable for F7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG:1031 or later.
5-65
N: Special Adjustments
The following settings are made with the special adjustments constants (N constants): Hunting prevention,
speed feedback detection control, high-slip braking, and feed forward control.
Hunting Prevention Function: N1

User constants for hunting prevention are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0: Hunting-prevention
function disabled
1: Hunting-prevention
function enabled
The hunting-prevention
Hunting- function suppresses hunting
prevention when the motor is operating
N1-01 0 or 1 1 No A A No No 580H 6-47
function with a light load.
selection This function is enabled in
V/f control method only.
If high response is to be
given priority over vibration
suppression, disable the
hunting-prevention function.
Set the hunting-prevention
gain multiplication factor.
Normally, there is no need to
make this setting.
Make the adjustments as fol-
lows:
Hunting- • If vibration occurs with
0.00 to 4-18
N1-02 prevention light load, increase the set- 1.00 No A A No No 581H
2.50 6-47
gain ting.
• If the motor stalls, reduce
the setting.
If the setting is too large, the
voltage will be too sup-
pressed and the motor may
stall.
5-66
Speed Feedback Protection Control Functions: N2

User constants for speed feedback protection control functions are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Set the internal speed feed-

back detection control gain
using the multiplication
function.
make this setting.
Speed feed-
Adjust this constant as fol-
back detec- 0.00 to 4-18
N2-01 lows: 1.00 No No No A No 584H
tion control 10.00 6-48
• If hunting occurs, increase
(AFR) gain
the set value.
• If response is low,
Adjust the setting by 0.05 at
a time, while checking the
response.
Speed feed-
Set the time constant to
back detec-
decide the rate of change in 0 to
N2-02 tion control 50 ms No No No A No 585H 6-48
the speed feedback detec- 2000
(AFR) time
tion control.
constant
Speed feed-
back detec- Set the time constant to
0 to
N2-03 tion control decide the amount of change 750 ms No No No A No 586H 6-48
2000
(AFR) time in the speed.
constant 2
High-slip Braking: N3
User constants for high-slip braking are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
High-slip
Sets the frequency width for
braking
deceleration during high-slip
decelera-
N3-01 braking as a percent, taking 1 to 20 5% No A A No No 588H -
tion fre-
the Maximum Frequency
quency
(E1-04) as 100%.
width
Sets the current limit for
deceleration during high-slip
High-slip braking as a percent, taking
100 to
N3-02 braking cur- the motor rated current as 150% No A A No No 589H -
200
rent limit 100%. The resulting limit
must be 150% of the Inverter
rated current or less.
5-67
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Set in seconds the dwell time

for the output frequency for
High-slip
FMIN (1.5 Hz) during V/f 0.0 to
N3-03 braking stop 1.0 s No A A No No 58AH -
control. 10.0
dwell time
Effective only during decel-
eration for high-slip braking.
Set the OL time when the
High-slip output frequency does not
30 to
N3-04 braking OL change for some reason dur- 40 s No A A No No 58BH -
1200
time ing deceleration for high-slip
braking.
Feed Forward: N5
User constants for the feed forward control are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Feed for- Select the feed forward con-

ward control. 4-20
N5-01 0 or 1 0 No No No No A 5B0H
trol 0: Disabled 6-142
selection 1: Enabled
Set the time required to
accelerate the motor at the
rated torque (T100) to the
rated speed (Nr).
Motor J: GD2/4, P: Motor rated out- 0.001
4-20
0.178 s
N5-02 accelera- put to No No No No A 5B1H
* 6-142
tion time 2π x J [kgm2] x Nr [min-1] 10.000
ta = [s]
60 x T100 [N x m]
However,
60 P [kW]
T100 = x × 103 [N x m]
2π Nr [min-1]
Set the proportional gain for

Feed for-
feed forward control.
ward pro- 0.00 to 4-20
N5-03 Speed reference response 1.0 No No No No A 5B2H
portional 100.00 6-142
will increase as the setting of
gain
N5-03 is increased.
Sets the response frequency
to a speed command in units
Response of 0.01 Hz.
frequency Used when the machine 0.00 to 40.00 4-20
N5-04 No No No No A 5B3H
for speed rigidity is high and the N5- 50.00 Hz 6-142
command 03 is correctly adjusted.
Usually, setting is not
required.
* The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.
5-68
Digital Operator Constants: o

The following settings are made with the Digital Operator constants (o constants): Multi-function selections
and the copy function.
Monitor Select: o1
User constants for Digital Operator Displays are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Set the number of the moni-

tor item to be displayed in
the earliest 4 monitor items.
Monitor
o1-01 (U1-) 4 to 99 6 Yes A A A A 500H -
selection
The output monitor voltage
(factory setting) can be
changed.
Sets the monitor item to be
displayed when the power is
Monitor turned on.
selection 1: Frequency reference
o1-02 1 to 4 1 Yes A A A A 501H 6-148
after power 2: Output frequency
up 3: Output current
4: The monitor item set for
o1-01
Sets the units that will be set
and displayed for the fre-
quency reference and fre-
quency monitor.
0: 0.01 Hz units
1: 0.01% units
(Maximum output
frequency is 100%)
2 to 39:
min-1 units (Sets the motor
Frequency poles.)
units of ref- 40 to 39999:
User desired display 0 to 6-148
o1-03 erence set- 0 No A A A A 502H
Set the desired values for 39999 6-165
ting and
monitor setting and display for the
max. output frequency.
Set 4-digit number

excluding the decimal
point.
Set the number of digits
below the decimal point
to display.
Example: When the max.
output frequency value is
200.0, set 12000
5-69
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Setting unit
for fre-
Set the setting unit for frequency
quency con- reference-related constants.
o1-04 stants 0: Hz 0 or 1 0 No No No No A 503H 6-148
related to V/
1: min−1
f character-
istics
LCD bright-
ness adjust- Set a smaller value to lighten
the LCD and a larger value
o1-05 ment 0 to 5 3 Yes A A A A 504H -
to darken the LCD (standard:
LCD Con- 3).
trast
Multi-function Selections: o2
User constants for Digital Operator key functions are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the Digital Operator

Local/Remote Key
LOCAL/
0: Disabled
REMOTE
o2-01 1: Enabled (Switches 0 or 1 1 No A A A A 505H 6-148
key enable/
between the Digital
disable
Operator and the constant
settings.)
Sets the Stop Key in the run
mode.
STOP key
0: Disabled (When the Run
during con-
Command is issued from
o2-02 trol circuit 0 or 1 1 No A A A A 506H 6-149
and external terminal, the
terminal
Stop Key is disabled.)
operation
1: Enabled (Effective even
during run.)
Clears or stores user initial
values.
0: Stores/not set
1: Begins storing (Records
the set constants as user
User con- initial values.)
4-17
o2-03 stant initial 2: All clear (Clears all 0 to 2 0 No A A A A 507H
6-149
value recorded user initial
values)
When the set constants are
recorded as user initial val-
ues, 1110 will be set in A1-
03.
Do not set unless using a
kVA selec- control board from an
o2-04
tion Inverter with a different
0 to FF 0*1 No A A A A 508H -
capacity.
5-70
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
When the frequency refer-

ence is set on the Digital
Operator frequency refer-
Frequency ence monitor, sets whether
reference the Enter Key is necessary.
o2-05 setting 0: Enter Key needed 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 509H 6-149
method 1: Enter Key not needed
selection When set to 1, the Inverter
accepts the frequency refer-
ence without Enter Key
operation.
Sets the operation when the
Digital Operator is discon-
nected.
Operation 0: Disabled (Operation
selection continues even if the
when digi- Digital Operator is
o2-06 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 50AH -
tal operator disconnected.)
is discon- 1: Enabled (OPR is detected
nected at Digital Operator
disconnection. Inverter
output is cut off, and fault
contact is operated.)
Sets the cumulative opera-
Cumulative
tion time in hour units. 0 to
o2-07 operation 0 hr No A A A A 50BH 6-149
Operation time is calculated 65535
time setting
from the set values.
0: Cumulative time when
the Inverter power is on.
(All time while the
Cumulative
Inverter power is on is
operation
o2-08 accumulated.) 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 50CH -
time selec-
1: Cumulative Inverter run
tion
time. (Only Inverter
output time is
accumulated.)
o2-09 For factory For adjustment at factory
0, 3 0 No A A A A 50DH -
*2 adjustment Do not set this constant.
Set the initial value of the
Fan opera- fan operation time using
0 to
o2-10 tion time time units. 0 hr No A A A A 50EH 6-149
65535
setting The operation time accumu-
lates from the set value.
Fault trace/ 0: Disabled (U2 and U3
fault his- constants are on hold.)
o2-12 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 510H -
tory clear 1: Enabled (Initializes U2
function and U3 constants.)
Output 0: Holds output power mon-
power monitor.
o2-14 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 512H 5-77
itor clear 1: Initializes output power
selection monitor. (Returns to 0.)
5-71
Copy Function: o3
User constants for the copy function are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0: Normal operation
1: READ (Inverter to
Copy func-
Operator)
o3-01 tion selec- 0 to 3 0 No A A A A 515H 6-151
2: COPY (Operator to
tion
Inverter)
3: Verify (compare)
Read per-
0: Read prohibited
o3-02 mitted 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 516H 6-151
1: Read permitted
selection
5-72
T: Motor Autotuning
The following settings are made with the motor autotuning constants (T constants): Settings for autotuning.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
Page
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Set the location where the

autotuned motor constants
T1-00 Motor 1/2 are to be stored. 1 or 2 1 No Yes Yes Yes Yes 700H 4-13
selection 1: E1 to E2 (motor 1)
2: E3 to E4 (motor 2)
Set the autotuning mode.
0: Rotational autotuning 0 to 2
*1
Autotuning 1: Stationary autotuning 1
2 4-10
T1-01 mode selec- 2: Stationary autotuning for No Yes Yes Yes Yes 701H
line-to-line resistance *8 4-13
tion 0 to 2,
only
4: Stationary autotuning 2 4 *1
0.40
T1-02 Motor out- Set the output power of the 0.00 to
kW No Yes Yes Yes Yes 702H 4-13
put power motor in kilowatts. 650.00 *4
0.0 to 200.0 V
T1-03 Motor rated Set the rated voltage of the No No No Yes Yes 703H 4-13
voltage motor in volts. 255.0*2 *2
0.32 to
T1-04 Motor rated Set the rated current of the 1.90 A No Yes Yes Yes Yes 704H 4-13
current motor in amps. 6.40 *3 *4
0.0 to
400.0 *7
T1-05 Motor base Set the base frequency of the 60.0
frequency motor in hertz. No No No Yes Yes 705H 4-13
0.0 to Hz
300.0*5
T1-06 Number of Set the number of motor 2 to 48 4 poles No No No Yes Yes 706H 4-13
motor poles poles. poles
Set the base speed of the 1750

T1-07 Motor base 0 to No No No Yes Yes 707H 4-13
speed motor in min-1. 24000 min-1
Set the number of pulses per

Number of revolution for the PG being
T1-08 PG pulses 0 to
used (pulse generator or 600 No No No No Yes 708H 4-13
when turn- 60000
encoder) without any multi-
ing plication factor.
Set the current value
recorded in the motor’s test
results for a motor without a 0.00 to
Motor no- 1.20A
T1-09 load current load. No No No Yes Yes 709H 4-13
Displayed only when Sta- 1.89 *6 *4
tionary autotuning 2 is
selected (T1-01 = 4).
* 1.
Set T1-02 and T1-04 when 2 is set for T1-01. Only set value 2 is possible for V/f control or V/f control with PG.
* 2.
These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
* 3.
The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.
* 4.
The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The values for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW are given.
* 5.
When C6-01 = 1, the upper limit is 400.00.
* 6.
The setting range depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given. The upper limit depends on the setting of
E2-01.
* 8. When the control method is changed, the factory setting will change. The V/f control factory setting is given.
5-73
U: Monitor Constants
The following settings are made with the monitor constants (U constants): Setting constants for monitoring in
drive mode.
Status Monitor Constants: U1

The constants used for monitoring status are listed in the following table.
Control Methods
Con- Output Signal Level Dur- MEMO
Min. V/f
Open
Flux BUS
stant Name Description ing Multi-Function Analog Loop Regis-
Number Unit V/f with Vec-
Output PG
Vec-
tor ter
tor
Frequency Monitors/sets the fre- 10 V: Max. frequency 0.01

U1-01 A A A A 40H
reference quency reference value.* (−10 to 10 V possible) Hz
Output fre- Monitors the output fre- 10 V: Max. frequency 0.01
U1-02 A A A A 41H
quency quency.* (−10 to 10 V possible) Hz
10 V: Inverter rated output
Output cur- current 0.01
U1-03 Monitors the output current. A A A A 42H
rent (0 to +10 V, absolute value A
output)
Control Checks the current control

U1-04 (Cannot be output.) - A A A A 43H
method method.
Monitors the detected motor 10 V: Max. frequency 0.01

U1-05 Motor speed No A A A 44H
speed.* (−10 to 10 V possible) Hz
Monitors the output voltage
Output volt- 10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC) 0.1
U1-06 reference value in the A A A A 45H
age (0 to +10 V output) V
Inverter.
DC bus Monitors the main DC volt- 10 V: 400 VDC (800 VDC)
U1-07 1V A A A A 46H
voltage age in the Inverter. (0 to +10 V output)
10 V: Inverter capacity
Output Monitors the output power (max. applicable motor 0.1
U1-08 A A A A 47H
power (internally detected value). capacity) kW
(−10 to 10 V possible)
Monitor in internal torque
Torque ref- 10 V: Motor rated torque
U1-09 reference value for vector 0.1% No No A A 48H
erence (−10 to 10 V possible)
control.
* The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor).
5-74
Control Methods
Min. V/f
Open
Flux BUS
stant Name Description ing Multi-Function Analog Loop
Number Unit V/f with Vec- Regis-
Output PG
Vec-
tor ter
tor
Shows input ON/OFF status

U1-10=
1: FWD command
(S1) is ON.
1: REV command
(S2) is ON.
1: Multi input 1
(S3) is ON.
Input termi-
U1-10 1: Multi input 2 (Cannot be output.) - A A A A 49H
nal status (S4) is ON.
1: Multi input 3
(S5) is ON.
1: Multi input 4
(S6) is ON.
1: Multi input 5
(S7) is ON.
1: Multi input 6
(S8) is ON.
Shows output ON/OFF sta-

tus.
U1-11=
1: Multi-function
contact output
(M1-M2) is ON.
Output ter-
U1-11 1: Multi-funtion
(Cannot be output.) - A A A A 4AH
minal status contact output 1
(P1) is ON.
1: Multi-funtion
contact output 2
(P2) is ON.
Not used (always 0).
1: Error output
(MA/AB-MC) is ON.
Inverter operating status.

U1-12=
1: Run
1: Zero speed
1: Reverse
Operation 1: Reset signal

U1-12 input (Cannot be output.) - A A A A 4BH
status 1: Speed agree
1: Inverter
ready
1: Minor fault
1: Major fault
Monitors the total operat-

ing time of the Inverter.
Cumulative
The initial value and the 1
U1-13 operation (Cannot be output.) A A A A 4CH
operating time/power ON hr
time
time selection can be set in
o2-07 and o2-08.
Software
(Manufacturer’s ID num-
U1-14 No. (flash (Cannot be output.) - A A A A 4DH
ber)
memory)
Monitors the input voltage
Terminal
of the voltage frequency 10 V: 100% (10 V)
U1-15 A1 input 0.1% A A A A 4EH
reference. An input of 10 V (−10 to 10 V possible)
voltage
corresponds to 100%.
Monitors the input current
Terminal
of the multi-function analog 20 mA: 100% (4 to 20 mA)
A2 input
U1-16 input. (0 to 10 V, −10 to 10 V pos- 0.1% A A A A 4FH
current
An input of 20 mA corre- sible)
(voltage)
sponds to 100%.
5-75
Control Methods
Min. V/f
Open
Flux BUS
Output PG
Vec-
tor ter
tor
Monitors the input voltage

Terminal of the multi-function analog
10 V: 100% (10 V)
U1-17 A3 input input. 0.1% A A A A 050H
(−10 to 10 V possible)
voltage An input of 10 V corre-
sponds to 100%.
Monitors the calculated
value of the motor second-
Motor sec- 10 V:Motor rated secondary
ary current.
U1-18 ondary cur- current) 0.1% A A A A 51H
The motor rated secondary
rent (Iq) (−10 to 10 V output)
current corresponds to
100%.
Monitors the calculated
value of the motor excita-
Motor excit- 10 V:Motor rated secondary
tion current.
U1-19 ing current current) 0.1% No No A A 52H
The motor rated secondary
(Id) (−10 to 10 V output)
current corresponds to
100%.
Monitors the output fre-
quency after a soft start.
Output fre-
The frequency given does 10 V: Max. frequency 0.01
U1-20 quency after A A A A 53H
not include compensations, (−10 to 10 V possible) Hz
soft-start
such as slip compensation.
The unit is set in o1-03.
Monitors the input to the
speed control loop. 10 V: Max. frequency 0.01
U1-21 ASR input No A No A 54H
The maximum frequency (−10 to 10 V possible) %
corresponds to 100%.
Monitors the output from
the speed control loop. 10 V:Motor rated secondary
0.01
U1-22 ASR output The motor rated secondary current) No A No A 55H
%
current corresponds to (−10 to 10 V possible)
100%.
Monitors the feedback
value when PID control is
PID feed- used. 10 V: Max. frequency 0.01
U1-24 A A A A 57H
back value The input for the max. fre- (−10 to 10 V possible) %
quency corresponds to
100%.
Monitors the Inverter inter-
Output volt-
nal voltage reference for 10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC) 0.1
U1-26 age refer- No No A A 59H
motor secondary current (−10 to 10 V possible) V
ence (Vq)
control.
Monitors the Inverter inter-
Output volt-
nal voltage reference for 10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC) 0.1
U1-27 age refer- No No A A 5AH
motor excitation current (−10 to 10 V possible) V
ence (Vd)
control.
Software (Manufacturer’s CPU soft-
U1-28 (Cannot be output.) - A A A A 5BH
No. (CPU) ware No.)
5-76
Control Methods
Min. V/f
Open
Flux BUS
Output PG
Vec-
tor ter
tor
Output Monitors the Inverter’s out-

U1-29 power lower put power. The display is kWH A A A A 05CH
4 digits split into upper digits and
lower digits in the following
way.
. kWH
U1-30 U1-29
(Cannot be output.)
Output Example: If the output MW
U1-30 power upper power is 12345678.9 kWh, A A A A 05DH
H
5 digits the display will be as fol-
lows:
U1-29: 678.9 kWH
U1-30: 12345 MWH
Range: 0.0 to 32767999.9
Lights all LEDs on the Dig-
U1-31 LED check (Cannot be output.) - A A A A 3CH
ital Operator JVOP-161.
Monitors the current control
ACR out- 10 V: 100% 0.1
U1-32 output value for the motor No No A A 5FH
put of q axis (−10 to 10 V possible) %
secondary current.
Monitors the current control
ACR out- 10 V: 100% 0.1
U1-33 output value for the motor No No A A 60H
put of d axis (−10 to 10 V possible) %
excitation current.
Shows the first constant
OPE fault
U1-34 number where an OPE fault (Cannot be output.) - A A A A 61H
constant
was detected.
Shows the number of PG
Zero-servo
pulses times 4 for the move-
U1-35 movement (Cannot be output.) 1 No No No A 62H
ment range when stopped at
pulses
zero.
PID feedback volume
PID input 10 V: Max. frequency 0.01
U1-36 Given as maximum fre- A A A A 63H
volume (−10 to 10 V possible) %
quency/100%
PID control output
PID output 10 V: Max. frequency 0.01
U1-37 Given as maximum fre- A A A A 64H
quency/100%
PID target value
PID target 0.01
U1-38 Given as maximum fre- 10 V: Max. frequency A A A A 65H
value %
quency/100%
Shows MEMOBUS errors.
U1-39=
1: CRC error
MEMO- 1: Data length error
BUS 1: Parity
U1-39 communica- error (Cannot be output.) - A A A A 66H
tions error 1: Overrun
code error
1: Framing
error
1: Timeout
5-77
Control Methods
Min. V/f
Open
Flux BUS
Output PG
Vec-
tor ter
tor
Monitors the total operat-

Cooling fan
ing time of the cooling fan.
U1-40 operating (Cannot be output.) 1 hr A A A A 68H
The time can be set in 02-
time
10.
the speed control loop (i.e.,
ASR output 10 V: Rated secondary cur-
the primary filter input 0.01
U1-44 without fil- rent of motor No No No A 6BH
value). 100% is displayed %
ter (-10 V to 10 V)
for rated secondary current
of the motor.
Feed for- 10 V: Rated secondary cur-
feed forward control. 100% 0.01
U1-45 ward con- rent of motor No No No A 6CH
is displayed for rated sec- %
trol output (-10 V to 10 V)
ondary current of the motor.
5-78
Fault Trace: U2
User constants for error tracing are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Con- Output Signal Level MEMO
Min. V/f
Open
Flux BUS
stant Name Description During Multi-Function Loop Regis-
Analog Output PG
Vec-
tor ter
tor
Current The contents of the current

U2-01 - A A A A 80H
fault fault.
The contents of the error that

Previous
U2-02 occurred just prior to the cur- - A A A A 81H
fault
rent fault.
Reference
The reference frequency when 0.01
U2-03 frequency at A A A A 82H
the previous fault occurred. Hz
fault
Output fre-
The output frequency when the 0.01
U2-04 quency at A A A A 83H
previous fault occurred. Hz
fault
Output cur- The output current when the 0.1

U2-05 A A A A 84H
rent at fault previous fault occurred. A
Motor speed The motor speed when the pre- 0.01

U2-06 No A A A 85H
at fault vious fault occurred. Hz
Output volt- The output reference voltage

0.1
U2-07 age refer- when the previous fault A A A A 86H
V
ence at fault occurred.
DC bus The main current DC voltage
U2-08 voltage at when the previous fault 1V A A A A 87H
(Cannot be output.)
fault occurred.
Output
The output power when the pre- 0.1
U2-09 power at A A A A 88H
vious fault occurred. kW
fault
The reference torque when the
Torque ref-
previous fault occurred. The
U2-10 erence at 0.1% No No A A 89H
motor rated torque corresponds
fault
to 100%.
The input terminal status when
Input termi-
the previous fault occurred.
U2-11 nal status at - A A A A 8AH
The format is the same as for
fault
U1-10.
Output ter- The output terminal status when
U2-12 minal status the previous fault occurred. The - A A A A 8BH
at fault format is the same as for U1-11.
Operation The operating status when the
U2-13 status at previous fault occurred. The - A A A A 8CH
fault format is the same as for U1-12.
Cumulative
The operating time when the 1
U2-14 operation A A A A 8DH
previous fault occurred. hr
time at fault
Note 1. The following faults are not included in the fault trace: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
2. If the PUF fault is already indicated in U2-xx or U3-xx, even if the PUF fault is detected again, the fault trace is not updated. (SPEC: E or later only)
5-79
Fault History: U3
User constants for the error log are shown in the following table.
Control Methods
Min. V/f
Open
Flux BUS
Output PG
Vec-
tor ter
tor
Most recent The error contents of 1st

U3-01 - A A A A 90H
fault previous fault.
Second
The error contents of 2nd
U3-02 most recent - A A A A 91H
previous fault.
fault
Third most The error contents of 3rd
U3-03 - A A A A 92H
recent fault previous fault.
Fourth most The error contents of 4th
U3-04 - A A A A 93H
recent fault previous fault.
Cumulative The total operating time
(Cannot be output.) 1
U3-05 operation when the 1st previous fault A A A A 94H
hr
time at fault occurred.
Accumu- The total operating time
1
U3-06 lated time of when the 2nd previous fault A A A A 95H
hr
second fault occurred.
1
U3-07 lated time of when the 3rd previous fault A A A A 96H
hr
third fault occurred.
1
U3-08 lated time of when the 4th previous fault A A A A 97H
hr
fourth fault occurred.
Note 1. The following errors are not recorded in the error log: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
2. If the PUF fault is already indicated in U2-xx or U3-xx, even if the PUF fault is detected again, the fault trace is not updated. (SPEC: E or later only)
5-80
Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02)

The factory settings of the following user constants will change if the control method (A1-02) is changed.
Factory Setting
Con- Open
stant Name Setting Range Unit V/f Con- V/F with Flux
Loop
Number trol PG Vector
Vector
A1-02=0 A1-02=1 A1-02=3
A1-02=2
b3-01 Speed search selection 0 to 3 1 2 3 2 -
120*6 - 100 -
b3-02 Speed search operating current 0 to 200 1%
150*6
b8-02 Energy-saving gain 0.0 to 10.0 0.1 - - 0.7 1.0
b8-03 Energy-saving filter time constant 0.00 to 10.00 0.01 s - - 0.50*1 0.01*1
C3-01 Slip compensation gain 0.0 to 2.5 0.1 0.0 - 1.0 1.0
Slip compensation primary delay time
C3-02 0 to 10000 1 ms 2000 - 200 -
constant
Torque compensation primary delay time
C4-02
constant
0 to 10000 1 ms 200*7 200*7 20 -
C5-01 ASR proportional (P) gain 1 0 to 300.00 0.01 - 0.20 - 20.00

C5-02 ASR integral (I) time 1 0.000 to 10.000 0.001 s - 0.200 - 0.500
C5-03 ASR proportional (P) gain 2 0.00 to 300.00 0.01 - 0.02 - 20.00
C5-04 ASR integral (I) time 2 0.000 to 10.000 0.001 s - 0.050 - 0.500
E1-04 40.0 to 400.0 *2 60.0 60.0

Max. output frequency (FMAX) 0.1 Hz 60.0 60.0
E3-02 *5 *3 *3
40.0 to 300.0
E1-05 *4 0.0 to 255.0 200.0 200.0
0.1 V 200.0 200.0
E3-03 Max. voltage (VMAX) (0.0 to 510.0) *3 *3
E1-06 0.0 to 400.0*2 60.0 60.0

Base frequency (FA) 0.1 Hz 60.0 60.0
E3-04 *5 *3 *3
0.0 to 300.0
E1-07 0.0 to 400.0*2 3.0 3.0

Mid. output frequency (FB) 0.1 Hz 3.0 0.0
E3-05 *3 *3
0.0 to 300.0*5
E1-08 *4 0.0 to 255.0 15.0 15.0
0.1 V 11.0 0.0
E3-06 Mid. output frequency voltage (VC) (0.0 to 510.0) *3 *3
E1-09 0.0 to 400.0*2 1.5 1.5

Min. output frequency (FMIN) 0.1 Hz 0.5 0.0
E3-07 *3 *3
0.0 to 300.0*5
E1-10 *4 0.0 to 255.0 9.0 9.0
0.1 V 2.0 0.0
E3-08 Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN) (0.0 to 510.0) *3 *3
F1-09 Overspeed detection delay time 0.0 to 2.0 0.1 s - 1.0 - 0.0
L8-18 Soft CLA selection 0, 1 1 1 1 1 0
* 1. For Inverters with a capacity of 55 kW or more, the factory setting is 2.00 for open-loop vector control and 0.05 for flux vector control.
* 3. Settings vary as shown in the following tables depending on the Inverter capacity and E1-03.
* 4. The settings shown are for 200 V Class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V Class Inverters.
* 6. C6-01 = 1:120%, C6-01 = 0:150%
* 7. 1000 ms for Inverters of 200 V Class 30 to 110 kW and 400 V Class 55 to 300 kW.
5-81
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 1.5 kW
Con-
stant
Num-
Unit Factory Setting Open
Loop
Flux
Vector
Vector
ber Control
Control
E1-03 - 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
E1-04 Hz 50.0 60.0 60.0 72.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 90.0 120.0 180.0 60.0 60.0 60.0
E1-05
V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
*
E1-06 Hz 50.0 60.0 50.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0
E1-07 Hz 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 25.0 25.0 30.0 30.0 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 0.0
E1-08
V 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 35.0 50.0 35.0 50.0 19.0 24.0 19.0 24.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 11.0 0.0
*
E1-09 Hz 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.5 0.0
E1-10
V 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 8.0 9.0 8.0 9.0 11.0 13.0 11.0 15.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 2.0 0.0
*
* The settings shown are for 200 V Class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V Class Inverters.
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 2.2 to 45 kW
Con-
stant
Num-
Loop
Flux
vector
Vector
ber Control
control
E1-03 - 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
E1-04 Hz 50.0 60.0 60.0 72.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 90.0 120.0 180.0 60.0 60.0 60.0
E1-05
V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
*
E1-06 Hz 50.0 60.0 50.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0
E1-07
Hz 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 25.0 25.0 30.0 30.0 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 0.0
*
E1-08
V 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 35.0 50.0 35.0 50.0 18.0 23.0 18.0 23.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 11.0 0.0
*
E1-09 Hz 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.5 0.0
E1-10
V 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 6.0 7.0 6.0 7.0 9.0 11.0 9.0 13.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 2.0 0.0
*
200 V Class Inverters of 55 to 110 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 55 to 300 kW
Con-
stant
Num-
Loop
Flux
vector
Vector
ber Control
control
E1-03 - 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
E1-04 Hz 50.0 60.0 60.0 72.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 90.0 120.0 180.0 60.0 60.0 60.0
E1-05
V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
*
E1-06 Hz 50.0 60.0 50.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0
E1-07 Hz 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 25.0 25.0 30.0 30.0 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 0.0
E1-08
V 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 35.0 50.0 35.0 50.0 15.0 20.0 15.0 20.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 11.0 0.0
*
E1-09 Hz 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.5 0.0
E1-10
V 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 5.0 6.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 9.0 7.0 11.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 2.0 0.0
*
5-82
Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)

The factory settings of the following user constants will change if the Inverter capacity (o2-04) is changed.
200 V Class Inverters

Con-
stant Name Unit Factory Setting
Number
- Inverter Capacity kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15
o2-04 kVA selection - 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Energy-saving filter time
b8-03 s 0.50 (Open loop vector control)
constant
Energy-saving coeffi-
b8-04 - 288.20 223.70 169.40 156.80 122.90 94.75 72.69 70.44 63.13
cient
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
C6-01 CT/VT selection -
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Carrier frequency selec-
C6-02 tion (when VT is - 6 *2 6 *2 6 *2 6*2 6*2 6 *2 6 *2 6 *2 6 *2
selected) *1 *4
- tion upper limit (when - 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
VT is selected)*1
E2-01
Motor rated current A 1.90 3.30 6.20 8.50 14.00 19.60 26.60 39.7 53.0
(E4-01)
E2-02
Motor rated slip Hz 2.90 2.50 2.60 2.90 2.73 1.50 1.30 1.70 1.60
(E4-02)
E2-03
Motor no-load current A 1.20 1.80 2.80 3.00 4.50 5.10 8.00 11.2 15.2
(E4-03)
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resis-
Ω 9.842 5.156 1.997 1.601 0.771 0.399 0.288 0.230 0.138
(E4-05) tance
E2-06
Motor leak inductance % 18.2 13.8 18.5 18.4 19.6 18.2 15.5 19.5 17.2
(E4-06)
Motor iron loss for
E2-10 W 14 26 53 77 112 172 262 245 272
torque compensation
Momentary power loss
L2-02 s 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.0
ridethru time
Min. baseblock (BB)
L2-03 s 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
time
L2-04 Voltage recovery time s 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Frequency reduction
L2-08 °C 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95
gain at KEB start
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level °C 95 95 95 100 95 95 95 95 90
N5-02 Motor acceleration time s 0.178 0.142 0.166 0.145 0.154 0.168 0.175 0.265 0.244
5-83
Con-
Number
- Inverter Capacity kW 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110
o2-04 kVA selection - 9 A B C D E F 10 11
b8-03 s 0.50 (Open loop vector control) 2.00 (Open loop vector control)
constant
b8-04 - 57.87 51.79 46.27 38.16 35.78 31.35 23.10 20.65 18.12
cient
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
C6-01 CT/VT selection - 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C6-02 tion (when VT is - 6 *2 6*2 4 *2 3 *2 3 *2 3 *2 2 *2 2 *2 1 *2
selected) *1 *4
- tion upper limit (when - 6 6 6 4 4 4 4 4 1
VT is selected)*1
E2-01
Motor rated current A 65.8 77.2 105.0 131.0 160.0 190.0 260.0 260.0 260.0
(E4-01)
E2-02
Motor rated slip Hz 1.67 1.70 1.80 1.33 1.60 1.43 1.39 1.39 1.39
(E4-02)
E2-03
Motor no-load current A 15.7 18.5 21.9 38.2 44.0 45.6 72.0 72.0 72.0
(E4-03)
Ω 0.101 0.079 0.064 0.039 0.030 0.022 0.023 0.023 0.023
(E4-05) tance
E2-06
Motor leak inductance % 20.1 19.5 20.8 18.8 20.2 20.5 20.0 20.0 20.0
(E4-06)
Motor iron loss for
E2-10 W 505 538 699 823 852 960 1200 1200 1200
torque compensation
L2-02 s 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
ridethru time
Min. baseblock (BB)
L2-03 s 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.7
time
L2-04 Voltage recovery time s 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Frequency reduction
L2-08 °C 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95
gain at KEB start
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level °C 100 90 90 95 100 105 110 100 110*3
N5-02 Motor acceleration time s 0.317 0.355 0.323 0.320 0.387 0.317 0.533 0.592 0.646
Note Attach a Backup Capacitor Unit for Momentary Power Loss if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200 V Class
Inverters with outputs of 0.4 to 11 kW.
* 1. The factory settings when VT is selected are given.
When CT is selected, the factory settings are as follows for Inverters of any capacity:
Carrier frequency selection: 1 (2.0 kHz)
Carrier frequency selection upper limit: 2.5 kHz
* 2. The setting of C6-02 changes the carrier frequency selection as follows:
0: Low-noise PWM, 1: 2.0 kHz, 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 8.0 kHz, 4: 10.0 kHz, 5: 12.5 kHz, 6: 15.0 kHz
* 3. 95 for Inverter SPEC Type A.
* 4. When setting the carrier frequency of 200 V Class Inverters of 30 kW or more to a value larger than the factory setting, reduce the value of the Inverter
rated output current.
5-84
400 V Class Inverters

Con-
Number
- Inverter Capacity kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15
o2-04 kVA selection - 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
b8-03 s 0.50 (Open loop vector control)
constant
b8-04 - 576.40 447.40 338.80 313.60 245.80 236.44 189.50 145.38 140.88 126.26
cient
1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

C6-02 tion (when VT is - 6 *2 6*2 6 *2 6 *2 6 *2 6*2 6 *2 6 *2 6 *2 6 *2
selected)*1 *3
- tion upper limit (when - 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
VT is selected)*1
E2-01
Motor rated current A 1.00 1.60 3.10 4.20 7.00 7.00 9.80 13.30 19.9 26.5
(E4-01)
E2-02
Motor rated slip Hz 2.90 2.60 2.50 3.00 2.70 2.70 1.50 1.30 1.70 1.60
(E4-02)
E2-03
Motor no-load current A 0.60 0.80 1.40 1.50 2.30 2.30 2.60 4.00 5.6 7.6
(E4-03)
W 38.198 22.459 10.100 6.495 3.333 3.333 1.595 1.152 0.922 0.550
(E4-05) tance
E2-06
Motor leak inductance % 18.2 14.3 18.3 18.7 19.3 19.3 18.2 15.5 19.6 17.2
(E4-06)
Motor iron loss for
E2-10 W 14 26 53 77 130 130 193 263 385 440
torque compensation
L2-02 s 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0 2.0
ridethru time
Min. baseblock (BB)
L2-03 s 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
time
L2-04 Voltage recovery time s 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level °C 95 95 95 90 95 95 95 90 95 95
N5-02 Motor acceleration time s 0.178 0.142 0.166 0.145 0.154 0.154 0.168 0.175 0.265 0.244
5-85
Con-
Number
- Inverter Capacity kW 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132
o2-04 kVA selection - 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33
b8-03 s 0.50 (Open loop vector control) 2.00 (Open loop vector control)
constant
b8-04 - 115.74 103.58 92.54 76.32 71.56 67.20 46.20 38.91 36.23 32.79
cient
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C6-02 tion (when VT is - 6 *2 6 *2 4 *2 4 *2 4 *2 4 *2 3 *2 3 *2 3 *2 2 *2
selected)*1 *3
- tion upper limit (when - 6 6 6 6 6 6 4 4 4 4
VT is selected)*1
E2-01
Motor rated current A 32.9 38.6 52.3 65.6 79.7 95.0 130.0 156.0 190.0 223.0
(E4-01)
E2-02
Motor rated slip Hz 1.67 1.70 1.80 1.33 1.60 1.46 1.39 1.40 1.40 1.38
(E4-02)
E2-03
Motor no-load current A 7.8 9.2 10.9 19.1 22.0 24.0 36.0 40.0 49.0 58.0
(E4-03)
Ω 0.403 0.316 0.269 0.155 0.122 0.088 0.092 0.056 0.046 0.035
(E4-05) tance
E2-06
Motor leak inductance % 20.1 23.5 20.7 18.8 19.9 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0
(E4-06)
Motor iron loss for
E2-10 W 508 586 750 925 1125 1260 1600 1760 2150 2350
torque compensation
L2-02 s 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
ridethru time
Min. baseblock (BB)
L2-03 s 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.7 1.7
time
L2-04 Voltage recovery time s 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level °C 98 78 85 85 90 90 98 108 100 110
N5-02 Motor acceleration time s 0.317 0.355 0.323 0.320 0.387 0.317 0.533 0.592 0.646 0.673
5-86
Con-
Number
- Inverter Capacity kW 160 185 220 300
o2-04 kVA selection - 34 35 36 37
Energy-saving filter time 2.00 (Open loop vector con-
b8-03 s
constant trol)
b8-04 - 30.13 30.57 27.13 21.76
cient
1 1
C6-01 CT/VT selection - 1 1
0 0
C6-02 tion (when VT is - 2 *2 2 *2 1 *2 1 *2
selected)*1 *3
- tion upper limit (when - 4 2 1 1
VT is selected)*1
E2-01
Motor rated current A 270.0 310.0 370.0 500.0
(E4-01)
E2-02
Motor rated slip Hz 1.35 1.30 1.30 1.25
(E4-02)
E2-03
Motor no-load current A 70.0 81.0 96.0 130.0
(E4-03)
Ω 0.029 0.025 0.020 0.014
(E4-05) tance
E2-06
Motor leak inductance % 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0
(E4-06)
Motor iron loss for
E2-10 W 2850 3200 3700 4700
torque compensation
L2-02 s 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
ridethru time
Min. baseblock (BB)
L2-03 s 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.1
time
L2-04 Voltage recovery time s 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level °C 108 95 100 108
N5-02 Motor acceleration time s 0.777 0.864 0.910 1.392
Note Attach a Backup Capacitor Unit for Momentary Power Loss if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200 V Class
* 1. The factory settings when VT is selected are given.
When CT is selected, the factory settings are as follows for Inverters of any capacity:
Carrier frequency selection: 1 (2.0 kHz)
Carrier frequency selection upper limit: 2.5 kHz
* 2. The setting of C6-02 changes the carrier frequency selection as follows:
0: Low-noise PWM, 1: 2.0 kHz, 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 8.0 kHz, 4: 10.0 kHz, 5: 12.5 kHz, 6: 15.0 kHz
* 3. When setting the carrier frequency of 400 V Class Inverters of 30 kW or more to a value larger than the factory setting, reduce the value of the Inverter
rated output current.
5-87
Constant Settings by
Function
Application and Overload Selections ........................... 6-2
Frequency Reference ..................................................6-6
Run Command...........................................................6-15
Stopping Methods ......................................................6-17
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics ..........6-25
Adjusting Frequency References...............................6-35
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function)...6-41
Improved Operating Efficiency...................................6-43
Machine Protection ....................................................6-49
Continuing Operation.................................................6-66
Inverter Protection .....................................................6-77
Input Terminal Functions............................................6-79
Output Terminal Functions.........................................6-89
Monitor Constants......................................................6-91
Individual Functions ...................................................6-96
Digital Operator Functions .......................................6-148
Options ....................................................................6-157
Using Inverters for Elevating Machines ...................6-169
Application and Overload Selections
Select the Overload to Suit the Application

Set C6-01 (CT: Low carrier constant torque, VT: High carrier variable torque) depending on the application
for which the Inverter is used. The setting ranges for the Inverter carrier frequency, overload tolerance, and
maximum output frequency depend on the setting in C6-01.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Con- Change MEMO
Name Description V/f Flux
V/f with Vec-
ber tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
1*1
C6-01 0 or 1 No Q Q Q Q 223H
selection 1: VT (high carrier, variable torque,
120% per minute) 0*1

0: Low-noise PWM
1: 2.0 kHz 0, 1 1
2: 5.0 kHz (C6- (C6-
Carrier fre-
3: 8.0 kHz 01=0) 01=0)
C6-02 quency No Q Q Q Q 224H
4: 10.0 kHz 0 to F 6*2
selection
5: 12.5 kHz (C6- (C6-
6: 15.0 kHz 01=1) 01=1)
Set the carrier frequency upper limit and 2.0 to 15.0

Carrier lower limit in kHz units. 15.0 kHz
C6-03 The carrier frequency gain is set as fol- *3 *2
frequency No A A A A 225H
*4 lows:
upper limit 2.0 to
With the vector control method, the 2.0 kHz
2.5
upper limit of the carrier frequency is
fixed in C6-03. 0.4 to 15.0
Carrier 15.0 kHz
C6-04 *3 *2
frequency No A A No A 226H
*4
lower limit Carrier frequency
0.4 to
2.0 kHz
2.5
Output frequency x (C6-05) x K

Output
frequency
Carrier fre- (Max. output frequency)
C6-05 quency pro- 00 to
K is a coefficient that depends on the 00 No A A No A 227H
*4 portional 99
gain setting of C6-03.
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K = 3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz: K = 2
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K = 1
* 3. The setting ranges depend on the capacity of the Inverter. The values for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW are given.
* 4. This constant can be monitored or set only when F is set for C6-02.
6-2
Difference Between CT and VT

The characteristics of CT (low carrier, constant torque) and VT (high carrier, variable torque) are shown
below.
CT: Low Carrier, Constant Torque VT: High Carrier, Variable Torque
Constant Torque Variable Torque
Torque Torque
0 Motor speed Motor speed
Constant torque means a constant load torque for all Variable torque means that the load torque will decrease
motor speed, and it requires overload resistance capabil- as the speed decreases. Normally, overload resistance
ity. Applications include pushers, conveyors, cranes, and capability is not required. Applications include fans and
other friction or heavy loads. pumps.
Low carrier: Electromagnetic noise is present. High carrier: Electromagnetic noise is not present.
Setting Precautions
C6-01 (CT/VT Selection)

When setting C6-01, observe the following precautions.
• Depending on the set value in C6-01, the setting range of the related constants is limited as follows:
0 (Low Carrier, Constant 1 (High Carrier, Variable

C6-01 Set Value
Torque) Torque)
150% Inverter rated current/1 120% Inverter rated current/1
Inverter Overload Protection Level
min. min.
0: Low carrier low noise
1: Carrier 2.0 kHz
2: Carrier 5.0 kHz
0: Low carrier, low noise 3: Carrier 8.0 kHz
C6-02 (Carrier Frequency Selection)
1: Carrier 2.0 kHz 4: Carrier 10.0 kHz
5: Carrier 12.5 kHz
6: Carrier 15.0 kHz
F: User-set*
E1-04 and E3-02 (Max. Output Fre-
150Hz, 300 Hz 400 Hz
quency)
L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level During
150% 120%
Acceleration)
L3-06 (Stall Prevention Level During
150% 120%
Operation)
* Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity.
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters for 0.4 to 22 kW: 6 (15 kHz)
200 V Class Inverters for 30 kW, or 400 V Class Inverters for 30 to 55 kW: 4 (10 kHz)
200 V Class Inverters for 37 to 55 kW, or 400 V Class Inverters for 75 to 110 kW: 3 (8 kHz)
200 V Class Inverters for 75 to 90 kW, or 400 V Class Inverters for 132 to 185 kW: 2 (5 kHz)
200 V Class Inverter for 110 kW, or 400 V Class Inverters for 220 to 300 kW: 1 (2 kHz)
• When the setting in E1-04 or E3-02 is greater than 150 Hz (SPEC: C or earlier), 300 Hz (SPEC: E
or later) , if C6-01 is set to 0, an OPE02 (Invalid constant setting range) error will occur.
6-3
Carrier Frequency
When selecting the carrier frequency, observe the following precautions items.
• When using a device with C6-01 set to 1 (VT), adjust the carrier frequency according to the cases shown
below.
If the wiring distance between Inverter and motor is long: Set the carrier frequency low. (Use the following
values as guidelines.
Wiring Length 50 m or less 100 m or less Over 100 m
C6-02 (carrier frequency)
0 to 6 (15 kHz) 0 to 4 (10 kHz) 0 to 2 (5 kHz)
setting
If speed and torque are inconsistent at low speeds: Set the carrier frequency low.
If Inverter noise is affecting peripheral devices: Set the carrier frequency low.
If leakage current from the Inverter is large: Set the carrier frequency low.
If metallic noise from the motor is large: Set the carrier frequency high.
Carrier frequency upper limit depends on the Inverter capacity. Refer to Factory Settings that Change with the
Inverter Capacity (o2-04) on page 5-83.
• When using V/f control or V/f control with PG, you can vary the carrier frequency to match the output fre-
quency, as shown in the following diagram, by setting C6-03 (Carrier Frequency Upper Limit), C6-04
(Carrier Frequency Lower Limit), and C6-05 (Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain).
Carrier Frequency
C6-03
Output frequency × C6-05

C6-04
× K*
Output frequency
E1-04
Max. Output Frequency
*K is the coefficient determined by the set value in C6-03.
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K=3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz: K=2
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K=1
Fig 6.1
• With vector control, the carrier frequency is fixed by the Carrier Frequency Upper Limit in C6-03 if user-
set, or by the carrier frequency set in C6-02.
• To fix the carrier frequency, set C6-03 and C6-04 to the same value, or set C6-05 to 0.
• If the settings are as shown below, OPE11 (Data setting error) will occur.
If Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain (C6-05) > 6 and C6-03 < C6-04.
If C6-01 = 0 and Carrier Frequency Selection C6-02 is set from 2 to E.
If C6-01 = 1 and Carrier Frequency Selection C6-02 is set from 7 to E.
6-4
Carrier Frequency and Inverter Overload Current Level

When C6-01 is set to 1, the Inverter overload level will be reduced. Even when the overload current falls to
below 120% constant 1 min, OL2 (Inverter overload) will be detected. The Inverter overload current reduction
level is shown below.
Overload current reduction level 200 V Class 37 to 90 kW 200 V Class 22 kW or less

400 V Class 75 to 110 kW 400 V Class 22 kW or less
100%
80%
75% 400 V Class 132 kW 200 V Class 30 kW
400 V Class 30 to 55 kW
400 V Class 160 kW
50%
Carrier frequency
0 5 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz 15 kHz
Fig 6.2 Overload Current Reduction Level
6-5
Frequency Reference
This section explains how to input the frequency reference.
Selecting the Frequency Reference Source

Set constant b1-01 to select the frequency reference source.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
input method.
0: Digital Operator
Reference
selection
tions
3: Option board
Pulse train 0: Frequency reference
H6-01 input function 1: PID feedback value 0 to 2 0 No A A A A 42CH
selection 2: PID target value
Set the number of pulses in
Pulse train 1000 to
H6-02 hertz, taking the reference to be 1440 Hz Yes A A A A 42DH
input scaling 32000
100%.
Input the Reference Frequency from the Digital Operator

When b1-01 is set to 0, you can input the reference frequency from the Digital Operator.
Input the reference frequency from the Digital Operator's reference frequency setting display.
For details on setting the reference frequency, refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes.
Fig 6.3 Frequency Setting Display
6-6
Frequency Reference
Inputting the Frequency Reference Using Control Circuit Terminal (Analog Setting)
When b1-01 is set to 1, you can input the frequency reference from control circuit terminal A1 (voltage input),
control circuit terminal A2 (voltage or current input) or control circuit terminal A3 (voltage input).
Inputting Master Speed Frequency Reference Only (Voltage Input)

When inputting a voltage for the master speed frequency reference, input the voltage to control circuit termi-
nal A1.
Inverter
+V Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA
2 kΩ A1 Master speed frequency
reference
(voltage input)
A2 Master speed frequency
reference
(current input)
A3 Not used
AC Analog common
Fig 6.4 Voltage Input for Master Speed Frequency Reference
Inputting Master Speed Frequency Reference Only (Current Input)

When inputting a current for the master speed frequency reference, input the current to control circuit terminal
A2, input 0 V to terminal A1, and make either of the following settings.
• Set H3-08 (Multi-function analog input terminal A2 signal level selection) to 2 (current input), and set H3-
09 (Multi-function analog input terminal A2 function selection) to 0 ( Add to terminal A1).
• Set H3-09 (Multi-function analog input terminal A2 function selection) to 2 (Auxiliary frequency refer-
ence 1), and set H3-13 (Terminal A1/A2 switching) to 1 (Use terminal A2 analog input as the main speed
frequency reference).
Inverter
+V Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA
Master speed frequency
A1
reference
4 to 20-mA input (voltage input)
A2 Master speed frequency
reference
(current input)
A3 Not used
AC Analog common
1
DIP switch
2 S1
V I
Fig 6.5 Current Input for Master Speed Frequency Reference
Turn ON pin 2 of DIP switch S1 (toward I), the voltage/current switch, when inputting a current to terminal A2.
Turn OFF pin 2 of DIP switch S1 (toward V), the voltage/current switch, when inputting a voltage to terminal
A2. Set H3-08 to the correct setting for the type of input signal being used.
IMPORTANT
6-7
Switch between 2 Step Speeds: Master/Auxiliary Speeds
When switching between the master and auxiliary speeds, input the master speed frequency reference to con-
trol circuit terminal A1 and the auxiliary speed frequency reference to control circuit terminal A2 or A3 . The
master speed frequency reference input to terminal A1 will be used for the Inverter frequency reference when
the master speed reference 1 allocated to multi-function input terminal (factory setting: S5) is OFF, and the
auxiliary speed frequency reference input to terminal A2 or A3 will be used for the Inverter frequency refer-
ence when the multi-speed reference 1 allocated to multi-function input terminal is ON.
When using terminal A2 as the input terminal of auxiliary speed frequency reference, set H3-09 (Multi-func-
tion analog input terminal A2 function selection) to 2 [Auxiliary speed reference frequency 1 (2nd speed ana-
log)].
When using terminal A3 as the input terminal of auxiliary speed frequency reference, set H3-05 (Multi-func-
tion analog input terminal A3 function selection) to 2 [Auxiliary speed frequency reference 1 (2ndspeed
analog)].
Inverter
+V (Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA)
A1 (Auxiliary speed
frequency refrence)
1 to 20 mA input
A2 (A3) (Master speed
frequency refrence)
AC (Analog common)
DIP switch S1
Fig 6.6 Switching between Master and Auxiliary Frequencies
Precautions on Setting DIP Switches and Constants

• When inputting voltage signals to terminal A2, set the pin 2 of the current/voltage switching DIP switch
S1-2 to OFF side (factory setting: ON).
• When inputting current signals to terminal A2, set the pin 2 of the current/voltage switching DIP switch
S1-2 to ON side (factory setting: ON).
• When setting terminal A2 as the master speed frequency input terminal and terminal A1 as the auxiliary
speed frequency input terminal, set the H3-09 (Multi-function analog input terminal A2 function selection)
to 2 and H3-05 (Multi-function analog input terminal A3 function selection) to a number other than 0 and
H3-05 (Multi-function analog input terminal A3 function selection) to a number other than 0 and 2.
And then, set H3-13 (Terminal A1/A2 switching) to 1.
• H3-09 and H3-05 cannot be set to 2 at the same time.
6-8
Frequency Reference
Setting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Signals

When b1-01 is set to 4, the pulse train input to control circuit terminal RP is used as the frequency reference.
Set H6-01 (Pulse Train Input Function Selection) to 0 (frequency reference), and then set the 100% reference
pulse frequency to H6-02 (Pulse Train Input Scaling).
Pulse Input Specifications Inverter
Low level voltage 0.0 to 0.8 V
High level voltage 3.5 to 13.2 V

32 kHz max.
Heavy duty 30 to 70% 3.5 to 13.2 V
RP(Pulse train input termi-
Pulse frequency 0 to 32 kHz Pulse input nal)
AC (Analog common)
Fig 6.7 Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Input
6-9
Using Multi-Step Speed Operation
With Varispeed-F7 series Inverters, you can change the speed to a maximum of 17 steps, using 16 frequency
references, and one jog frequency reference.
The following example of a multi-function input terminal function shows a 9-step operation using multi-step
references 1 to 3 and jog frequency selection functions.
Related Constants
To switch frequency references, set multi-step speed references 1 to 3 and the jog reference selection in the
multi-function contact inputs (any of the terminals S3 to S8). Setting examples are shown below. The unused
terminals need not be set.
Multi-function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-06)

Constant
Terminal Set Value Details
Number
Multi-step speed reference 1 [Also used for master speed/auxiliary speed switching when
S5 H1-03 3
multi-function analog input H3-09 or H3-05 is set to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference).]

S6 H1-04 4 [Also used for auxiliary frequency reference 2 when multi-function analog input H3-09 or
H3-05 is set to 3 (auxiliary frequency reference 2).]
S7 H1-05 5 Multi-step speed reference 3
S8 H1-06 6 Jog frequency selection (given priority over multi-step speed reference)
Combination of Multi-Function References and Multi-Function Contact Inputs. In the Above

Setting Example
You can change the selected frequency reference by combining the ON/OFF status of S5 to S8 (multi-function
contact input terminals) to set multi-step speed references 1 to 3 and the jog frequency selection. The follow-
ing table shows the possible combinations.
TerminalS5 TerminalS6 TerminalS7 TerminalS8
Speed Multi-step Multi-step Multi-step Jog Fre- Selected Frequency
Speed Refer- Speed Refer- Speed Refer- quency Selec-
ence 1 ence 2 ence 3 tion
1 OFF OFF OFF OFF Frequency reference 1 d1-01, master speed frequency
2 ON OFF OFF OFF Frequency reference 2 d1-02, auxiliary frequency 1
3 OFF ON OFF OFF Frequency reference 3 d1-03, auxiliary frequency 2
4 ON ON OFF OFF Frequency reference 4 d1-04
5 OFF OFF ON OFF Frequency reference 5 d1-05
6 ON OFF ON OFF Frequency reference 6 d1-06
7 OFF ON ON OFF Frequency reference 7 d1-07
8 ON ON ON OFF Frequency reference 8 d1-08
9 - - - * Jog frequency d1-17

ON
* Terminal S8's jog frequency selection is given priority over multi-step speed references.
6-10
Frequency Reference
Setting Precautions
Refer to the following to set step 1 to step 3 to analog inputs.
• Step 1
When setting terminal A1's analog input to step 1, set b1-01 to 1, and when setting d1-01 (Frequency Ref-
erence 1) to step 1, set b1-01 to 0.
• Step 2
When setting terminal A2's (or A3's) analog input to step 2, set H3-09 (H3-05 when A3 is used) to 2 (aux-
iliary frequency reference 1). When setting d1-02 (Frequency Reference 2) to step 2, do not set H3-09
(H3-05 when A3 is used) to 2.
• Step 3
When setting terminal A3's (or A2's) analog input to step 3, set H3-05 (H3-09 when A2 is used) to 3 (aux-
iliary frequency reference 2). When setting d1-03(Frequency Reference 3) to step 3, do not set H3-05 (H3-
09 when A2 is used) to 3.
Connection Example and Time Chart

The following diagram shows a time chart and control circuit terminal connection example during a 9-step
operation.
Inverter
S1 Forward/stop
S2 Reverse/stop
S3 External fault
S4 Fault reset
S5 Multi-step speed reference 1
S7 Jog frequency
SC Sequence common
+V Frequency setting power (+15 V)
A1 Master speed referennce (0 to 10 V)

[Master speed frequency (b1-01=1)]
A2 Master speed referennce (4 to 20 mA)
[Auxiliary speed frequency 1 (H3-09=2)]
A3 Auxiliary speed frequency (0 to 10 V)
[Auxiliary speed frequency 2 (H3-05=3)]
AC Analog common 0 V
Fig 6.8 Control Circuit Terminal During 9-step Operation
6-11
Frequency
reference 8
Frequency
reference 7
Frequency
reference 6
Frequency
reference 5
Frequency
reference 4
Frequency
Frequency Frequency refer- reference 3
reference
ence 2: Auxiliary Auxiliary speed
speed frequency 1 frequency 2
Frequency ref-
erence 1: Mas- Jog frequency
ter speed
frequency
Forward/stop
Multi-step speed
reference 1
Multi-step speed
reference 2
Multi-step speed
reference 3
Jog frequency
selection
Fig 6.9 Multi-step speed reference/Jog Frequency Selection Time Chart
6-12
B1-01
C option board Pulse train input =4 d2-03

other than A1-14B Master frequency
L4-05 lower limit
F2-01 Process when
A1-14B frequency =1
refrence is Option
lost. =3 Remote
±13 bits Muluti-step speed reference
+ + H3-02 =1 =0 Local Inverter
Ch1 A/D H3-03 =0
=2 Multi-function
+ + Memobus Frequency analog input is invalid. Jog frequency
0V 10V =0 command (d1-17
communication reference 1 When 2nd speed
±13 bits =1
(d1-01) analog is selected
=1
A/D Multi-function When FJOG, RJOG (Jog
Ch2 1/10 Frequency analog input is invalid.
reference 2 When 3rd speed frequency command) of
L4-05 =0 multi-function contact
d1-01
(d1-02) analog is selected =2
Process when input is input.
±13 bits frequency Frequency Multi-function
analog input is invalid.
refrence is =1 reference 3
Ch3 A/D X 1/10 lost. (d1-03)
Frequency
Inverters with SPEC: E or later.
=0 Frequency =3 reference
reference 4
(d1-04)
H3-05 (Terminal A3) function
H3-09 (Terminal A2) function Frequency =4
reference 5
(d1-05)
Varispeed F7 Function Block
AI input See fig6.11 Set- V/f Open Flux Frequency =5

ting Function V/f with Loop
Vec- Vec- Input Level reference 6
Value PG tor tor (d1-06)
+10 bits =0
±11 bits Frequency =6
00 Add to terminal A1 Yes Yes Yes Yes ±100%/±10 V !reference
! ! ! 7
1 A
A/D 01 Frequency gain Yes Yes Yes Yes 100%/10 V (d1-07)
A1 =1
Auxiliary frequency Frequency =7
+10 bits 02 reference 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes ±100%/±10 V reference 8
=0 (2nd step analog)
±11 bits (d1-08)
2 B Auxiliary frequency
A/D 03 reference 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes ±100%/±10 V Frequency =8
A2 =1 reference 9
(3rd step analog)
(d1-09)
04 Voltage bias Yes Yes No No 100%/10 V
±11 bits =0 Accel/decel change Frequency =9
05 (reduction coefficient) Yes Yes Yes Yes 100%/1 V reference 10
3 C (d1-10)
A/D =1 DC injection
A3 06 Yes Yes Yes No 100%/10 V
braking current Frequency = 10
Overtorque/undertorque reference 11
07 detection level Yes Yes Yes Yes 100%/10 V (d1-11)
08 Stall prevention level Yes Yes No No 100%/10 V Frequency = 11
during run reference 12
F2-01 Frequency reference (d1-12)
09 lower limit level Yes Yes Yes Yes 100%/10 V
Note: If A1-14B is not mounted, Frequency = 12
0A Jump frequency Yes Yes Yes Yes 100%/10 V reference 13
the same operation as when (d1-13)
F2-01=1 will be performed 0B PID feedback Yes Yes Yes Yes ±100%/±10 V
regardless of the F2-01 setting. Frequency = 13
0C PID target value Yes Yes Yes Yes ±100%/±10 V
reference 14
0D Frequency baias 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes ±100%/±10 V (d1-14)
0E Motor temperature input Yes Yes Yes Yes ±100%/±10 V Frequency = 14
reference 15
10 Positive toraue limit No No Yes Yes 100%/10 V (d1-15)
11 Negative torque limit No No Yes Yes 100%/10 V Frequency = 15
Regenerative torque reference 16
12 No No Yes Yes 100%/10 V
limit (d1-16)
13 Torque refrence/torque No No No Yes ±100%/±10 V
limit at speed control
14 Torque compensation No No Yes Yes ±100%/±10 V
15 Positive/negative torque No
limit No Yes Yes 100%/10 V
1F Analog input not used. Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fig 6.10 Varispeed F7 Function Block

The following diagram shows the function block diagram of Varispeed F7. The shaded sections apply only to
Frequency Reference
6-13
Primary
delay filter
Primary
delay filter
≠
* 2 is current input.
Primary
delay filter
≠
* The same value can not be set in H3-05 and H3-09.

Fig 6.11 AI Input Detailed Diagram
6-14
Run Command
Run Command
This section explains input methods for the Run Command.
Selecting the Run Command Source

Set constant b1-02 to select the source for the Run Command.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
method.
0: Digital Operator
Operation
b1-02 method selec- 0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q Q 181H
(sequence input)
tion
tions
3: Option board
Performing Operations Using a Digital Operator

When b1-02 is set to 0, you can perform Inverter operations using the Digital Operator keys (RUN, STOP,
JOG, and FWD/REV). For details on the Digital Operator, refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes.
Performing Operations Using Control Circuit Terminals

When b1-02 is set to 1, you can perform Inverter operations using the control circuit terminals.
Performing Operations Using a 2-wire Sequence

The factory setting is set to a 2-wire sequence. When control circuit terminal S1 is set to ON, forward opera-
tion will be performed, and when S1 is turned OFF, the Inverter will stop. In the same way, when control cir-
cuit terminal S2 is set to ON, reverse operation will be performed, and when S2 is turned OFF, the Inverter
will stop.
Inverter
Forward/stop
Reverse/stop
Sequence common
Fig 6.12 2-wire Sequence Wiring Example
6-15
Performing Operations Using a 3-wire Sequence
When any constant from H1-01 to H1-6 (multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S8) is set to 0, terminals
S1 and S2 are used for a 3-wire sequence, and the multi-function input terminal that has been set functions as
a Forward/Reverse Run Command terminal.
When the Inverter is initialized for 3-wire sequence control with A1-03, multi-function input 3 (terminal S5)
becomes the input terminal for the Forward/Reverse Run Command.
Stop switch Operation switch

(NC contact) (NO contact)
Run Command (operates when ON)
Stop Command (stopped when ON)
Forward/Reverse Command (multi-function input)
Sequence input common
Fig 6.13 3-wire Sequence Wiring Example
50 ms min.
Run Command Can be either ON or OFF

OFF
Stop Command (stopped)
Forward/Reverse OFF (forward) ON (reverse)
Command
Motor speed
Stop Forward Reverse Stop Forward
Fig 6.14 Three-wire Sequence Time Chart
1. Use a sequence that turns ON terminal S1 for 50 ms or longer for the Run Command. This will make the
Run Command self-holding in the Inverter.
2. When the 3-wire sequence is set, do not make the wiring for the control circuit unless the multi-function
input terminal constant is set. Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
INFO
6-16
Stopping Methods
Stopping Methods
This section explains methods of stopping the Inverter.
Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Sent

There are four methods of stopping the Inverter when a Stop Command is sent:
• Deceleration to stop
• Coast to stop
• DC braking stop
• Coast to stop with timer
Set constant b1-03 to select the Inverter stopping method. A DC braking stop and coasting to a stop with a
timer cannot be set for flux vector control.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Used to set the stopping method
used when a Stop Command is
input.
1: Coast to stop
Stopping 2: DC injection braking stop
b1-03 method selec- (Stops faster than coast to 0 to 3 * 0 No Q Q Q Q 182H
tion stop, no regenerative
operation.)
(Run Commands are
disregarded during
deceleration.)
Used to set the method of opera-
tion when the frequency refer-
ence input is less than the
minimum output frequency (E1-
09).
Operation 0: Run at frequency reference
selection for (E1-09 not effective).
b1-05 0 to 3 0 No No No No A 184H
setting E1-09 1: STOP (Frequencies below
or less E1-09 in the coast to stop
state.)
2: Run at min. frequency.
(E1-09)
3: Run at zero-speed (Frequen-
cies below E1-09 are zero)
Used to set the frequency which

starts DC injection braking in
units of Hz when deceleration to
Zero-speed
stop is selected.
level (DC
When b2-01 is less than E1-09,
injection 0.0 to
b2-01 E1-09 is used to set the starting 0.5 Hz No A A A A 189H
braking start- 10.0
frequency for the DC injection
ing fre-
braking.
quency)
In flux vector control, b2-01 is
used to set the starting frequency
for the zero-speed control.
6-17
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the DC injection braking
current as a percentage of the
DC injection Inverter rated current.
0 to
b2-02 braking cur- The DC injection braking cur- 50% No A A A No 18AH
100
rent rent in flux control is affected by
any change to the setting of E2-
03.
Used to set the time to perform

DC injection braking at start in
DC injection units of 1 second. 0.00
b2-03 braking time Used to stop coasting motor and to 0.00 s No A A A A 18BH
at start restart it. When the set value is 10.00
0, DC injection braking at start
is not performed.

DC injection braking at stop
(zero-speed control in flux vec-
DC injection tor control) in units of 1 second. 0.00
b2-04 braking time Used to prevent coasting after to 0.50 s No A A A A 18CH
at stop the Stop Command is input. 10.00
When the set value is 0.00, DC
injection braking at stop is not
performed.
* 0 or 1 for flux vector control.
6-18
Stopping Methods
Deceleration to Stop
If the Stop Command is input (i.e., the Run Command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 0, the motor decel-
erates to a stop according to the deceleration time that has been set. (Factory setting: C1-02 (Deceleration
Time 1))
If the output frequency when decelerating to a stop falls below b2-01, the DC injection brake will be applied
using the DC current set in b2-02 only for the time set in b2-04.
For deceleration time settings, refer to page 6-25 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times.
Run Command
ON OFF
Output frequency
Decelerates to stop at
deceleration time
DC injection brake
DC injection brake time

when stopping (b2-04)
Fig 6.15 Deceleration to Stop
6-19
The following only applies to Inverters with SPEC: E or later.
The operation after starting or stopping depends on the setting of b1-05 when flux vector control is selected
(A1-02 = 3).
Run Command OFF ON OFF
Frequency reference
via analog input E1-09
Run Command turns OFF

and zero-speed control starts
when motor speed drops to b2-01.
b1-05=0
(frequency reference) Zero-speed
Injection brake
time at start control
Baseblock b2-03 Baseblock

b2-04
Frequency reference drops to less
than E1-09 and zero-speed control
b1-05=1 Injection brake Zero-speed starts when motor speed drops to
(Coast) time at start control b2-01.
Baseblock b2-03 Baseblock

b2-04 Run Command turns OFF
b1-05=2 and zero-speed control starts
when motor speed drops to b2-01.
(Run on E1-09) Injection brake
time at start Zero speed control
Baseblock Baseblock
b2-03 b2-04
Run Command turns OFF
b1-05=3 and zero-speed control starts
(Zero-speed) Injection brake when motor speed drops to b2-01.
time at start Zero-speed control
Baseblock b2-03 b2-04 Baseblock
Fig 6.16 Deceleration to Stop (for Flux Vector Control)
Setting Precautions
• When using flux vector control, the zero-speed control starts when motor speed drops to b2-01 during
deceleration. Also, the setting b2-01 < E1-09 is possible.
• The current level during injection brake time at start is the value of E2-03 (motor no-load current). Accord-
ingly, b2-02 is invalid in flux vector control.
6-20
Stopping Methods
Coast to Stop
If the Stop Command is input (i.e., the Run Command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 1, the Inverter out-
put voltage is interrupted. The motor coasts to a stop at the deceleration rate that counterbalances damage to
the machine and inertia including the load.
Run Command
ON OFF
Output frequency
Inverter output freqeuencty interrupted.
Fig 6.17 Coast to Stop
After the Stop Command is input, Run Commands are ignored until the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03) has
elapsed.
INFO
DC Braking Stop

If the Stop Command is input (i.e., the Run Command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 2, a wait is made
for the time set in L2-03 (Minimum Baseblock (BB) Time) and then the DC injection brake current set in b2-
02 is sent to the motor to apply a DC injection brake to stop the motor. The DC injection brake time is deter-
mined by the set value in b2-04 and the output frequency when the Stop Command is input.
DC injection brake time

Run Command
ON OFF
b2-04 10
Output frequency
Inverter output voltage interrupted
DC injection brake
b2-04
Minimum baseblock DC injection brake time
time (L2-03) Output frequency at
Stop Command input
10 100% (maximum output frequency)
Fig 6.18 DC Injection Braking (DB) Stop
Lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03) when an overcurrent (OC) occurs during stopping.
INFO
6-21
Coast to Stop with Timer
If the Stop Command is input (i.e., the Run Command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 3, the Inverter out-
put is interrupted to coast the motor to a stop. After the Stop Command is input, Run Commands are ignored
until the time T has elapsed. The time T depends upon the output frequency when the Stop Command is input
and the deceleration time.
Run Command Operation wait time T

ON OFF ON OFF ON
Output Deceleration time

frequency (e.g., C1-02)
Inverter output voltage interrupted
Operation wait time T Minimum baseblock

time (L2-03)
Output frequency at
Stop Command input
Minimum output frequency 100% (Maximum output frequency)
Fig 6.19 Coast to Stop with Timer
Using the DC Injection Brake

Set constant b2-03 to apply the DC injection braking current to the motor while it is coasting to a stop, to stop
the motor and then restart it.
Set b2-03 to 0 to disable the DC injection brake at start.
Set the DC injection brake current using b2-02. DC injection braking is used at startup for flux vector control
with the current set in E2-03 (Motor no-load current).
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the DC injection braking
current as a percentage of the
DC injection Inverter rated current.
0 to
b2-02 braking cur- The DC injection braking cur- 50% No A A A No 18AH
100
rent rent in flux control is affected by
any change to the setting of E2-
03.

DC injection braking at start in
DC injection units of 1 second. 0.00
b2-03 braking time Used to stop coasting motor and to 0.00 s No A A A A 18BH
at start restart it. When the set value is 10.00
0, DC injection braking at start
is not performed.
6-22
Stopping Methods
Inputting the DC Injection Brake Command from Control Circuit Terminals

If you set a multi-function contact input terminal (H1-) to 60 (DC injection brake command), you can
apply the DC injection brake to the motor by turning ON the terminal for which the DC injection brake com-
mand has been set when the Inverter is being stopped. DC injection braking is used at startup for flux vector
control.
The time chart for the DC injection brake is shown below.
DC injection brake command
FRUN
Output frequency
DC injection brake b2-01 DC injection brake

E1-09
(DC injection braking at (DC injection braking at
startup is used for flux startup is used for flux
vector control.) vector control.)
If you input the DC injection brake command from an external terminal, or if the Run Com-
mand and jog command are input, the DC injection brake will be disabled, and operation will
resume.
Fig 6.20 DC Injection Brake Time Chart
Changing the DC Injection Brake Current Using an Analog Input

If you set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05(Multi-function
Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 6 (DC injection brake current), you can change the DC
injection brake current level using the analog input.
At 10 V input (voltage) or 20 mA input (current), 100% of the Inverter rated current will be applied.
DC injection brake voltage level
Inverter rated current
Fig 6.21 DC Injection Brake Current Using an Analog Input
6-23
Using an Emergency Stop
Set a multi-function input terminal (H1-) to 15 or 17 (emergency stop) to decelerate to a stop at the decel-
eration time set in C1-09. If inputting the emergency stop with an NO contact, set the multi-function input ter-
minal (H1-) to 15, and if inputting the emergency stop with an NC contact, set the multi-function input
terminal (H1-) to 17.
After the emergency Stop Command has been input, operation cannot be restarted until the Inverter has
stopped. To cancel the emergency stop, turn OFF the Run Command and emergency Stop Command.
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
The deceleration time when the
multi-function input “Emer-
Emergency gency (fast) stop” is set to ON. 0.0 to
C1-09 10.0 s No A A A A 208H
stop time This function can be used as a 6000.0*
stopping method when a fault
has been detected.
* The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times will depends on the setting for C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the setting range for
acceleration/deceleration times becomes 0.00 to 600.00 seconds.
6-24
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics

This section explains the acceleration and deceleration characteristics of the Inverter.
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times

Acceleration time indicates the time taken for the output frequency to climb from 0% to 100%. Deceleration
time indicates the time taken for the output frequency to reduce to 0%. The factory setting of the acceleration
time is C1-01, and the factory setting of the deceleration time is C1-02.
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the acceleration time to accelerate
Accelera-
C1-01 from 0 to the maximum output frequency, Yes Q Q Q Q 200H
tion time 1
in 1-second units.
Sets the deceleration time to decelerate
Decelera-
C1-02 from the maximum output frequency to 0, Yes Q Q Q Q 201H
tion time 1
in 1-second units.
The acceleration time when the multi-

Accelera-
C1-03 function input “accel/decel time 1” is set Yes A A A A 202H
tion time 2
to ON.
The deceleration time when the multi-

Decelera-
C1-04 function input “accel/decel time 1” is set Yes A A A A 203H
tion time 2 0.0 to
to ON.
6000.0 10.0 s
The acceleration time when the multi- *1
Accelera-
C1-05 function input “accel/decel time 2” is set No A A A A 204H
tion time 3
to ON.

Decelera-
C1-06 function input “accel/decel time 2” is set No A A A A 205H
tion time 3
to ON.
The acceleration time when the multi-

Accelera-
C1-07 function input “accel/decel time 1” and No A A A A 206H
tion time 4
“accel/decel time 2” are set to ON.

Decelera-
C1-08 function input “accel/decel time 1” and No A A A A 207H
tion time 4
“accel/decel time 2” are set to ON.
Accel/
0: 0.01-second units
C1-10 decel time 0 or 1 1 No A A A A 209H
1: 0.1-second units
setting unit
Sets the frequency for automatic accelera- 0.0 to

tion/deceleration switching. 400.0
Accel/
Below set frequency: Accel/decel time 4 *2
decel time
C1-11 Above set frequency: Accel/decel time 1 0.0 Hz No A A A A 20AH
switching 0.0 to
The multi-function input “accel/decel
frequency
time 1” or “accel/decel time 2” take prior- 300.0
ity. *3
6-25
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
S-curve
character- 0.00
C2-01 istic time to 0.20 s No A A A A 20BH
at accelera- All sections of the S-curve characteristic 2.50
tion start time are set in seconds units.
S-curve When the S-curve characteristic time is
character- set, the accel/decel times will increase by 0.00
C2-02 istic time only half of the S-curve characteristic to 0.20 s No A A A A 20CH
at accelera- times at start and end. 2.50
tion end
Run Command
OFF
S-curve Output frequency
ON
character- 0.00
C2-02 C2-03
C2-03 istic time to 0.20 s No A A A A 20DH
at deceler- C2-01 2.50
C2-04
ation start
Time
S-curve
character- 0.00
C2-04 istic time to 0.00 s No A A A A 20EH
at deceler- 2.50
ation end
* 1. The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times will depend on the setting for C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the setting range for
acceleration/deceleration times become 0.00 to 600.00 seconds.
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Units

Set the acceleration/deceleration time units using C1-10. Constant C1-10 is set to 1 at the factory.
Set value Details
0 The acceleration/deceleration time settings range is 0.00 to 600.00 in units of 0.01 s.
1 The acceleration/deceleration time settings range is 0.00 to 6000.0 in units of 0.1 s.
Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using Multi-Function Input Terminal

Commands
Using the Inverter, you can set four acceleration times and four deceleration times. When the multi-function
input terminals (H1-) are set to 7 (acceleration/deceleration time selection 1) and 1A (acceleration/decel-
eration time selection 2), you can switch the acceleration/deceleration time even during operation by combin-
ing the ON/OFF status of the terminals.
The following table shows the acceleration/deceleration time switching combinations.
Acceleration/Decelera- Acceleration/Decelera-
tion Time Selection 1 Ter- tion Time Selection 2 Ter- Acceleration Time Deceleration Time
minal minal
OFF OFF C1-01 C1-02
ON OFF C1-03 C1-04
OFF ON C1-05 C1-06
ON ON C1-07 C1-08
6-26
Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Automatically

Use this setting when you want to switch acceleration/deceleration time automatically using the set frequency.
When the output frequency reaches the set value in C1-11, the Inverter switches the acceleration/deceleration
time automatically as shown in the following diagram.
Set C1-11 to a value other than 0.0 Hz. If C1-11 is set to 0.0 Hz, the function will be disabled.
Output frequency
Acceleration/
deceleration time
switching frequency
(C1-11)
C1-07 rate C1-01 rate C1-02 rate C1-08 rate

When output frequency ≥ C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using
Acceleration/deceleration Time 1 (C1-01, C1-02).
When output frequency < C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using
Acceleration/deceleration Time 4 (C1-07, C1-08).
Fig 6.22 Acceleration/deceleration Time Switching Frequency
Adjusting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using an Analog Input

If you set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function
Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 5 (acceleration/deceleration time gain), you can adjust the
acceleration/deceleration time using terminal A2's or A3's input voltage.
The Inverter's acceleration time when the acceleration time has been set in C1-01 is as follows:
Acceleration time = C1-01 set value x acceleration/deceleration time gain
Acceleration/deceleration time gain (set value: 5)
(Acceleration/deceleration gain from 1 to

10 V) = 10 V/Input voltage (V) x 10 (%)
Fig 6.23 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Gain Using an Analog Input
6-27
Entering S-curve Characteristics in the Acceleration and Deceleration Time
By performing acceleration and deceleration using an S-curve pattern, you can reduce shock when starting and
stopping the machine.
Using the Inverter, you can set an S-curve characteristic time for each of the following: Acceleration start
time, deceleration start time, acceleration end time, and deceleration end time.
Set the S-curve characteristic time to lengthen acceleration/deceleration time as follows:

Acceleration time = Selected acceleration time + (Acceleration start time S-curve characteristic time +
Acceleration end time S-curve characteristic time) / 2
Deceleration time = Selected deceleration time + (Deceleration start time S-curve characteristic time +
INFO
Deceleration end time S-curve characteristic time) / 2
Setting Example
The S-curve characteristic when switching operation (forward/reverse) is shown in the following diagram.
Forward
Reverse
C2-02 C2-03 C2-04
Output frequency
C2-01
C2-04
C2-01
C2-02 C2-03
Fig 6.24 S-curve Characteristic during Operation Switching
6-28
Accelerating and Decelerating Heavy Loads (Dwell Function)

The dwell function stores the output frequency when starting or stopping heavy loads. By temporarily storing
the output frequency, you can prevent the motor from stalling. When using the dwell function, you must select
a deceleration stop. Set b1-03 (Stopping Method Selection) to 0.
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0.0 to
400.0
Dwell fre- *1
b6-01 quency at 0.0 Hz No A A A A 1B6H
start 0.0 to
300.0
Run Command ON
OFF
*2
Output frequency
Dwell time 0.0 to
b6-02 0.0 s No A A A A 1B7H
at start 10.0
b6-01 b6-03 Time 0.0 to
b6-02 b6-04 400.0
Dwell fre- *1
The dwell function is used to output
b6-03 quency at 0.0 Hz No A A A A 1B8H
frequency temporarily when driving a 0.0 to
stop
motor with a heavy load. 300.0
*2
Dwell time 0.0 to

b6-04 0.0 s No A A A A 1B9H
at stop 10.0
6-29
Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration (Stall Prevention
During Acceleration Function)
The Stall Prevention During Acceleration function prevents the motor from stalling if a heavy load is placed
on the motor, or sudden rapid acceleration is performed.
If you set L3-01 to 1 (enabled) and the Inverter output current exceeds the -15% level of the set value in L3-
02, the acceleration rate will begin to slow down. When L3-02 is exceeded, acceleration will stop.
If you set L3-01 to 2 (optimum adjustment), the motor current accelerates to the value set in L3-02. With this
setting, the acceleration time setting is ignored.
Related Parameters
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0: Disabled (Acceleration as
set. With a heavy load, the
motor may stall.)
1: Enabled (Acceleration
stopped when L3-02 level is
exceeded. Acceleration starts
Stall preven-
again when the current is
L3-01 tion selection 0 to 2 1 No A A A No 48FH
returned.)
during accel
2: Intelligent acceleration mode
(Using the L3-02 level as a
basis, acceleration is
automatically adjusted. Set
acceleration time is
disregarded.)
Effective when L3-01 is set to 1

120%
or 2. *
Stall preven- Set as a percentage of Inverter
L3-02 tion level dur- rated current. 0 to 200 No A A A No 490H
ing accel Usually setting is not necessary. 150%
The factory setting reduces the *
set values when the motor stalls.
Sets the lower limit for stall pre-

vention during acceleration, as a
Stall preven-
percentage of the Inverter rated
L3-03 tion limit dur- 0 to 100 50% No A A A No 491H
current, when operation is in the
ing accel
frequency range above E1-06.
* C6-01=1: 120%, C6-01=0: 150%
6-30
Time Chart
The following figure shows the frequency characteristics when L3-01 is set to 1.
Output current
Stall level during

acceleration
Time
Output frequency
Output frequency is controlled

to prevent the motor stalling.
Time
Fig 6.25 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration
Setting Precautions
• If the motor capacity is small compared to the Inverter capacity, or if the motor is operated using the fac-
tory settings, resulting in the motor stalling, lower the set value of L3-02.
• If using the motor in the constant output range, L3-02 will be automatically lowered to prevent stalling.
L3-03 is the limit value to prevent the stall prevention level in the constant output range from being
reduced more than necessary.
• Set the constants as a percent taking the Inverter rated voltage to be 100%.
Stall prevention level during

acceleration
L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during Accelera-

tion)
L3-02 x L3-03 (Stall Prevention Limit during Ac-

celeration)
Output frequency
E1-06
Base Frequency (FA)
Fig 6.26 Stall Prevention Level and Limit During Acceleration
6-31
Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration (Stall Prevention During
Deceleration Function)
The Stall Prevention During Deceleration function makes the rate of deceleration more gentle to suppress
increases in DC bus voltage when the DC bus voltage exceeds the set value during motor deceleration.
This function automatically lengthens the deceleration time with respect to the bus voltage, even if the decel-
eration time has been set to a considerably small value.
If L3-04 is set to 1 or 2, when the main circuit DC voltage approaches the stall prevention level during decel-
eration, deceleration stops, and when deceleration falls below the level, is restarted. Using this operation,
deceleration time is automatically lengthened. If L3-04 is set to 1, deceleration time returns to the set value,
and if L3-04 is set to 2, deceleration is automatically adjusted to a faster deceleration time within the range of
the stall prevention level during deceleration.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0: Disabled (Deceleration as
set. If deceleration time is
too short, a main circuit
overvoltage may result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is
stopped when the main
circuit voltage exceeds the
overvoltage level.
Deceleration restarts when
voltage is returned.)
2: Intelligent deceleration
Stall preven-
mode (Deceleration rate is
L3-04 tion selection
automatically adjusted so 0 to 3 * 1 No Q Q Q Q 492H
during decel
that in Inverter can
decelerate in the shortest
possible time. Set
deceleration time is
disregarded.)
3: Enabled (with Braking
Resistor Unit)
When a braking option (Braking
Resistor, Braking Resistor Unit,
Braking Unit) is used, always
set to 0 or 3.
* When using flux vector control, 0 to 2.
6-32
Setting Example
An example of stall prevention during deceleration when L3-04 is set to 1 as shown below.
Output frequency Deceleration time controlled to

prevent overvoltage
Time
Deceleration time
(set value)
Fig 6.27 Stall Prevention During Deceleration Operation
Setting Precautions
• The stall prevention level during deceleration differs depending on the Inverter capacity. Refer to the fol-
lowing table for details.
Inverter Capacity Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration (V)
200 V Class 380
E1-01 ≥ 400 V 760
400 V Class
E1-01 < 400 V 660
• When using the braking option (braking resistor, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units), be sure to set
constant L3-04 to 0 or 3.
• To decelerate at a shorter time than the deceleration time set when L3-04 is set to 0 with the braking option
enabled, set L3-04 to 3.
• The setting of L3-04 is ignored for flux vector control.
Preventing Overvoltage by Automatically Reducing the Regenerative

Torque Limit (Overvoltage Inhibit Function, SPEC: E or later only)
The overvoltage inhibit function is a function that, by reducing the regenerative torque limit to a value less
than its set value according to the main circuit voltage level, suppresses voltage rises with regenerative torque.
Using this function means that if, for example, the main circuit voltage rises during deceleration, the regener-
ative torque limit will be reduced and so the deceleration rate will be reduced automatically, suppressing rises
in the main circuit voltage.
This function is effective for suppressing overvoltages that occur during stabilization after an overshoot fol-
lowing sudden acceleration. This function differs from the stall prevention during deceleration function in this
respect.
This function is enabled during vector control.
6-33
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Used to enable or disable the
function for inhibiting main cir-
cuit overvoltages by reducing
Overvoltage the regenerative torque limit
L3-11 inhibit selec- according to the main circuit 0 or 1 0 No No No A A 4C7H
tion overvoltage level.
If this function is enabled, when
the main circuit voltage rises,
operation will be performed
with the regenerative torque less
than the set value.
Sets the main circuit voltage

level for which the regenerative
torque limit is restricted to 0.
Overvoltage Usually, there is no need to 350 to
L3-12 inhibit volt- change this setting. 380V* No No No A A 4C8H
age level If main circuit overvoltages 390*
occur even with the overvoltage
inhibit function enabled, reduce
this setting.
* These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
Setting Precautions
When this function is enabled, if the main circuit voltage rises, the regenerative torque limit will decrease to a
value less than its set value and so the motor will not rotate at the speed specified by the speed reference.
Therefore, in applications where it is necessary to rotate the motor at the speed specified by the speed refer-
ence, disable this function and use a converter, a dynamic braking resistor, or a power regenerative unit to sup-
press rises in the main circuit voltage.
6-34
Adjusting Frequency References

This section explains methods of adjusting frequency references.
Adjusting Analog Frequency References

Gain and bias are among the constants used to adjust analog inputs.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Signal level
0: 0 to 10 V
H3-01 selection (ter- 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 410H
1: −10 to 10 V
minal A1)
Sets the frequency when 10 V is

Gain (termi- 0.0 to
H3-02 input. as a percentage of the 100.0% Yes A A A A 411H
nal A1) 1000.0
Sets the frequency when 0 V is -100.0

Bias (termi-
H3-03 input, as a percentage of the to 0.0% Yes A A A A 412H
nal A1)
maximum frequency. +100.0
Signal level
0: 0 to 10 V
1: −10 to 10 V
minal A3)
Multi-func-
tion analog Select from the functions listed
H3-05 input (termi- in the following table. Refer to 0 to 1F 1F No A A A A 414H
nal A3) func- the next page.
tion selection
Sets the input gain (level) when

Gain (termi- 10V is input. 0.0 to
H3-06 100.0% Yes A A A A 415H
nal A3) Set according to the 100% value 1000.0
selected from H3-05.
-100.0
Bias (termi- 0 V is input.
H3-07 to 0.0% Yes A A A A 416H
nal A3) Set according to the 100% value
+100.0
0: 0 to +10V, with lower limit

1: −10 to 10 V without lower
Signal level limit
H3-08 selection 2: 4 to 20 mA 0 to 2 2 No A A A A 417H
(terminal A2) Switch current and voltage
input using the switch on the
control panel.
Multi-func-
tion analog Select multi-function analog
H3-09 input (termi- input function for terminal A2. 0 to 1F 0 No A A A A 418H
nal A2) func- Refer to the next table.
tion selection

Gain (termi- 10 V (20 mA) is input. 0.0 to
H3-10 100.0% Yes A A A A 419H
for the function set for H3-09.

-100.0
Bias (termi- 0 V (4 mA) is input.
H3-11 to 0.0% Yes A A A A 41AH
+100.0
6-35
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets primary delay filter time 0.00 s
Analog input
constant in seconds for the ana- 0.00 to
H3-12 filter time No A A A A 41BH
log input terminal. 2.00
constant 0.03 s
Effective for noise control etc.
Adjusting Analog Frequency Reference Using Constants

The frequency reference is input from the control circuit terminals using analog voltage and current.
If using frequency reference terminal A1 as an input terminal, perform adjustments using constants H3-02 and
H3-03. If using multi-function analog input terminal A2 as a frequency reference terminal, perform adjust-
ments using H3-10 and H3-11.
Adjustment can be made using H3-06 and H3-07 when multi-function analog input terminal A3 is used as a
frequency reference terminal.
Frequency reference Frequency reference
(H3-06)
Terminal A1(A3)
(A3) Terminal A2 input
(H3-07) input voltage voltage (current)
Terminal A1, A3 input Terminal A2 input

Note: ( ) is for when terminal A3 is used.
Fig 6.28 Terminals A1 and A2 Inputs
Adjusting Frequency Gain Using an Analog Input

When H3-09 or H3-05 is set to 1 (frequency gain), you can adjust the frequency gain using the analog input
terminal A2 or A3 .
Frequency gain
Multi-function analog input

terminal A2 input level
Fig 6.29 Frequency Gain Adjustment (Terminal A2 Input)
6-36
The frequency gain for terminal A1 is the product of H3-02 and terminal A2 gain. For example, when H3-02
is set to 100% and terminal A2 is set to 5 V, the terminal A1 frequency reference will be 50%.
Frequency reference
100% H3-02
50% H3-02 0.5
Terminal A1 input voltage

0 10 V
Adjusting Frequency Bias Using an Analog Input

When constant H3-09 or H3-05 is set to 0 (add to terminal A1), the frequency equivalent to the terminal A2
or A3 input voltage is added to A1 as a bias.
Frequency bias
terminal A2 or A3 input

terminal A2 or A3 input level
Fig 6.30 Frequency Bias Adjustment (Terminal A2 or A3 or A3 Input)
For example, if H3-02 is 100%, H3-03 is 0%, and terminal A2 is set to 1 V, the frequency reference from ter-
minal A1 when 0 V is input to A1 will be 10%.
Frequency reference
H3-02
10%
Bias
Terminal A1 input voltage
0V 10 V
When constant H3-09 or H3-05 is set to D (frequency bias 2), the frequency equivalent to the terminal A2 or
A3 input voltage is added to A1 as a bias.
6-37
Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Frequency Function)
The jump frequency function operates the motor while avoiding resonance caused by characteristic frequen-
cies in the machinery.
This function is effective in creating a frequency reference dead band.
During constant-speed operation, operation within the jump frequency range is prohibited. Smooth operation
still used during acceleration and deceleration, i.e., jumps are not performed.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Jump fre- Set the center values of the jump

d3-01 frequencies in Hz. 0.0 Hz No A A A A 294H
quency 1
This function is disabled by set- 0.0 to
ting the jump frequency to 0 Hz. 400.0*1
Always ensure that the follow-
Jump fre- ing applies:
d3-02 0.0 Hz No A A A A 295H
quency 2 d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03
Operation in the jump frequency
range is prohibited but during 0.0 to
acceleration and deceleration, 300.0*2
Jump fre- speed changes smoothly without
d3-03 0.0 Hz No A A A A 296H
quency 3 jump.
Sets the jump frequency band-

Jump fre- width in Hz. 0.0 to
d3-04 1.0 Hz No A A A A 297H
quency width The jump frequency will be the 20.0
jump frequency ± d3-04.
The relationship between the output frequency and the jump frequency reference is as follows:
Output frequency
Frequency reference descending
Jump frequency width d3-04
Frequency
reference
ascending
Jump
frequency
Jump width d3-04
frequency
width d3-04
Jump frequency reference

Jump Jump Jump
frequency frequency frequency
3 (d3-03) 2 (d3-02) 1 (d3-01)
Fig 6.31 Jump Frequency
6-38
Setting Jump Frequency Reference Using an Analog Input

When constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-func-
tion Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) is set to A (jump frequency), you can change the jump
frequency using the terminal A2 or A3 input level.
Jump frequency
Max. output frequency

E1-04

0V 10 V terminal A2 or A3 input level
(4 mA) (20 mA)
Fig 6.32 Jump Frequency Setting Using an Analog Input
Setting Precautions
• Set the jump frequency according to the following formula: d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03 > Analog input.
• When constants d3-01 to d3-03 are set to 0 Hz, the jump frequency function is disabled.
6-39
Adjusting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Inputs
The frequency reference can be adjusted when b1-01 (Reference Selection) is set to 4 (Pulse Train Input). Set
the pulse frequency in constant H6-02 to 100% reference, and then adjust the gain and bias accordingly using
H6-03 and H6-04.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Set the number of pulses in

Pulse train 1000 to
H6-02 hertz, taking the reference to be 1440 Hz Yes A A A A 42DH
input scaling 32000
100%.
Set the input gain level as a per-

Pulse train 0.0 to
H6-03 cent when the pulse train set in 100.0% Yes A A A A 42EH
input gain 1000.0
H6-02 is input.
Pulse train Set the input bias when the pulse -100.0
H6-04 0.0% Yes A A A A 42FH
input bias train is 0. to 100.0
Pulse train Set the pulse train input primary
0.00 to
H6-05 input filter delay filter time constant in sec- 0.10 s Yes A A A A 430H
2.00
time onds.
The following diagram shows the method for adjusting the frequency reference using pulse inputs.
Gain and bias

Filter =0 Master speed
H6-03
RP frequency
Cycle 1 =1
PID feedback
measurement 1+sT H6-04
Pulse 0 100 PID target value
H6-05 =2
H6-01
Scaling using H6-02
Fig 6.33 Frequency Reference Adjustments Using Pulse Train Inputs
6-40
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function)
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Func-

tion)
This section explains how to limit the motor speed.
Limiting Maximum Output Frequency

If you do not want the motor to rotate above a given frequency, use constant d2-01.
Set the upper limit value of the Inverter output frequency as a percent, taking E1-04 (Maximum Output Fre-
quency) to be 100%.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Set the output frequency upper
Frequency
limit as a percent, taking the 0.0 to
max. output frequency to be 110.0
upper limit
100%.
Limiting Minimum Frequency

If you do not want the motor to rotate at below a given frequency, use constants d2-02 or d2-03.
There are two methods of limiting the minimum frequency, as follows:
• Adjust the minimum level for all frequencies.
• Adjust the minimum level for the master speed frequency (i.e., the lower levels of the jog frequency, multi-
step speed frequency, and auxiliary frequency will not be adjusted).
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Frequency Sets the output frequency lower
0.0 to
d2-02 reference limit as a percentage of the max- 0.0% No A A A A 28AH
110.0
lower limit imum output frequency.
Set the master speed reference

Master speed
lower limit as a percent, taking 0.0 to
the max. output frequency to be 110.0
lower limit
100%.
6-41
Adjusting Frequency Lower Limit Using an Analog Input
If you set constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-
function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 9 (output frequency lower level), you can adjust
the frequency lower level using the terminal A2 or A3 input level.
Output frequency lower level
Max. output frequency

E1-04

0V 10 V terminal A2 or A3 input level
(4 mA) (20 mA)
Fig 6.34 Output Frequency Lower Level for Multi-function Analog Input
If constant d2-02 and terminal A2 output frequency lower level have been set at the same time, the larger set
value will become the frequency lower limit.
INFO
6-42
Improved Operating Efficiency

This section explains functions for improving motor operating efficiency.
Reducing Motor Speed Fluctuation (Slip Compensation Function)

When the load is large, the amount of motor slip also grows large and the motor speed decreases. The slip
compensation function controls the motor at a constant speed, regardless of changes in load. When the motor
is operating at the rated load, constant E2-02 (Motor Rated Slip) × the frequency in constant C3-01 is added to
the output frequency.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Used to improve speed accuracy
when operating with a load.
Adjust this constant at the fol-
lowing times.
Slip compen- • When actual speed is low, 0.0 to
C3-01 0.0* Yes A No A A 20FH
sation gain increase the set value. 2.5
• When actual speed is high,
Used as the applicable control
gain when using flux vector con-
trol.
Slip compensation primary
Slip compen- Adjust this constant at the fol-
sation pri- lowing times. 0 to 2000 ms
C3-02 No A No A No 210H
mary delay • Reduce the setting when slip 10000 *
time compensation responsive is
slow.
• When speed is not stabilized,
increase the setting.
Sets the slip compensation limit

Slip compen- 0 to
C3-03 as a percentage of motor rated 200% No A No A No 211H
sation limit 250
slip.
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When the slip compensation
Slip compen- during regeneration function has
sation selec- been activated, as regeneration
C3-04 0 or 1 0 No A No A No 212H
tion during capacity increases momentarily,
regeneration it may be necessary to use a
braking option (braking resistor,
Braking Resistor Unit or Brak-
ing Unit.)
0: Disabled.
Output volt-
1: Enabled. (The motor flux
age limit
C3-05 will be lowered automati- 0 or 1 0 No No No A A 213H
operation
cally when the output volt-
selection
age become saturated.)
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. The V/f control factory settings are given.
6-43
Adjusting Slip Compensation Gain
You can switch the C3-01 constant settings as shown below by changing the control method.
• V/f control: 0.0
• Open-loop vector control: 1.0
• Flux vector control: 1.0
Set C3-01 to 1.0 to compensate the rated slip set using the rated torque output status.
Adjust the slip compensation gain using the following procedure.
1. Set E2-02 (Motor Rated Slip) and E2-03 (Motor No-load Current) correctly.
You can calculate the motor rated slip from the values on the motor nameplate using the following for-
mula.
Amount of motor rated slip (Hz) = Motor rated frequency (Hz) - No. of rated rotations (min−1.) × No. of
motor poles / 120
Set the values for rated voltage, rated frequency, and no-load current in the motor unladen current. The
motor rated slip is set automatically in the vector control using autotuning.
2. In V/f control, set C3-01 to 1.0. Setting this constant to 0.0 disables slip compensation.
3. Apply a load, and measure the speed to adjust the slip compensation gain. Adjust the slip compensation
gain by 0.1 at a time. If the speed is less than the target value, increase the slip compensation gain, and if
the speed is greater than the target value, reduce the slip compensation gain.
For flux vector control, the slip compensation gain is used as the motor temperature compensation gain. When
the motor temperate increases, the motor’s internal constant increases, resulting in an increase in slip. If C3-01
is set, the amount of slip is adjusted as the temperature rises. Set C3-01 if the amount of torque varies with the
temperature when using torque control or a torque limit. The larger the value of C3-01, the larger the compen-
sation.
Adjusting Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant

Set the slip compensation primary delay time constant in ms.
You can switch the factory settings as follows by changing the control method.
• V/f control: 2000 ms
• Open-loop vector control: 200 ms
Normally, there is no need to make these settings. When the slip compensation response is low, lower the set
value. When the speed is unstable, increase the set value.
Adjusting Slip Compensation Limit

The upper limit for the slip compensation amount can be set in C3-03 as a percent, taking the motor rated slip
amount as 100%.
If the speed is lower than the target value but does not change even when you adjust the slip compensation
gain, the motor may have reached the slip compensation limit. Increase the limit, and check the speed again.
Make the settings, however, to make sure that the value of the slip compensation limit and reference frequency
does not exceed the tolerance of the machine.
The following diagram shows the slip compensation limit for the constant torque range and fixed output range.
6-44
Slip compensation limit
Output frequency
E1-06: Base frequency

E1-04: Maximum output frequency
Fig 6.35 Slip Compensation Limit
Selecting Slip Compensation Function During Regeneration

Whether to enable or disable the slip compensation function during regeneration can be set in C3-04.
If the slip compensation function operates during regeneration, you might have to use the braking option
(braking resistor, Braking Resistor Unit, and Braking Unit) to momentarily increase the regenerative amount.
Selecting Output Voltage Limit Operation

If output voltage saturation occurs while the output voltage limit operation is disabled, the output current will
not change, but torque control accuracy will be lost. If torque control accuracy is required, set C3-05 to 1 to
enable the output voltage limit operation.
If the output voltage limit operation is enabled, motor magnetic flux current is controlled automatically, and
torque control accuracy is maintained to limit the output voltage references. Consequently, the output current
will increase by approximately 10% maximum (with rated load) compared with when the output voltage limit
operation is disabled, so check the Inverter current margin.
Setting Precautions
• If using the device at medium to low speed only, if the power supply voltage is 10% or more higher than
the motor rated voltage, or if the torque control accuracy at high speeds is insufficient, it is not necessary to
change the output voltage limit operation.
• If the power supply voltage is too low compared with the motor rated voltage, torque control accuracy may
be lost even if the output voltage limit operation is enabled.
Compensating for Insufficient Torque at Startup and Low-speed Opera-

tion (Torque Compensation)
The torque compensation function detects that the motor load has increased, and increases the output torque.
V/f control calculates and adjusts the motor primary loss voltage according to the output voltage (V), and
compensates for insufficient torque at startup and during low-speed operation. Calculate the compensation
voltage as follows: Motor primary voltage loss × constant C4-01.
Vector control separates the motor excitation current and the torque current by calculating the motor primary
current, and controlling each of the two separately.
Calculate the torque current as follows: Calculated torque reference × C4-01
6-45
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets torque compensation gain
as a ratio.
Adjust in the following circum-
stances:
• When the cable is long;
• When the motor capacity is
smaller than the Inverter
capacity (Max. applicable
Torque com-
motor capacity), increase the 0.00 to
C4-01 pensation 1.00 Yes A A A No 215H
set values. 2.50
gain
• When the motor is oscillating,
decrease the set values.
Adjust the output current range
at minimum speed rotation so
that it does not exceed the
Inverter rated output current.
Do not alter the torque compen-
sation gain from its default
(1.00) when using the open loop
vector control method.
The torque compensation delay

time is set in ms units.
Torque com- Adjust in the following circum-
pensation pri- stances: 0 to 200 ms
C4-02 No A A A No 216H
mary delay • When the motor is oscillating, 10000 *
time constant increase the set values.
• When the responsiveness of
the motor is low, decrease the
set values.
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. The V/f control factory setting is given.
Adjusting Torque Compensation Gain

Normally, there is no need to make this adjustment. Do not adjust the torque compensation gain when using
open-loop vector control.
Adjust the torque compensation gain using V/f control in the following circumstances.
• If the cable is very long, increase the set value.
• If the (maximum applicable) motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity, increase the set value.
• If the motor is vibrating, reduce the set value.
Adjust this constant so that the output current during low-speed rotation does not exceed the Inverter rated
output current range.
Adjusting the Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant

Set the torque compensation function primary delay in ms.
You can switch the factory settings as follows by changing the control method settings:
• V/f control: 200 ms
• V/f control with PG: 200 ms
• Open-loop vector control: 20 ms
6-46
Normally, there is no need to make this setting. Adjust the constant as shown below.
• If the motor is vibrating, increase the set value.
• If the motor response is low, decrease the set value.
Hunting-prevention Function
The hunting-prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load. This func-
tion can be used in V/f and V/f with PG.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0: Hunting-prevention function
disabled
1: Hunting-prevention function
enabled
The hunting-prevention function
suppresses hunting when the
Hunting-pre-
motor is operating with a light
N1-01 vention func- 0 or 1 1 No A A No No 580H
load.
tion selection
This function is enabled in V/f
control method only.
If high response is to be given
priority over vibration suppres-
sion, disable the hunting-pre-
vention function.
Set the hunting-prevention gain

multiplication factor.
make this setting.
Make the adjustments as fol-
lows:
Hunting-pre- 0.00 to
N1-02 • If vibration occurs with light 1.00 No A A No No 581H
vention gain 2.50
load, increase the setting.
• If the motor stalls, reduce the
setting.
If the setting is too large, the
voltage will be too suppressed
and the motor may stall.
6-47
Stabilizing Speed (Speed Feedback Detection Function)
The speed feedback detection control (AFR) function measures the stability of the speed when a load is sud-
denly applied, by calculating the amount of fluctuation of the torque current feedback value, and compensat-
ing the output frequency with the amount of fluctuation.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Set the internal speed feedback
detection control gain using the
multiplication function.
make this setting.
Speed feed-
Adjust this constant as follows:
back detec- 0.00 to
N2-01 • If hunting occurs, increase the 1.00 No No No A No 584H
tion control 10.00
set value.
(AFR) gain
• If response is low, decrease
the set value.
Adjust the setting by 0.05 at a
time, while checking the
response.
Speed feed-
back detec- Set the time constant to decide
0 to
N2-02 tion control the rate of change in the speed 50 ms No No No A No 585H
2000
(AFR) time feedback detection control.
constant
Speed feed-
back detec- Set the time constant to decide
0 to
N2-03 tion control the amount of change in the 750 ms No No No A No 586H
2000
(AFR) time speed.
constant 2
6-48
Machine Protection
Machine Protection
This section explains functions for protecting the machine.
Limiting Motor Torque (Torque Limit Function)

The motor torque limit function is enabled with flux vector control and open-loop vector control.
In the open-loop vector control and flux vector control, the user-set value is applied to the torque limit by cal-
culating internally the torque output by the motor. Enable this function if you do not want a torque above a
specified amount to be applied to the load, or if you do not want a regeneration value above a specified
amount to occur.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Con- Change MEMO
V/f with Vec-
ber tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Forward
0 to
L7-01 drive torque 200% No No No A A 4A7H
Sets the torque limit value as a percent- 300
limit
age of the motor rated torque.
Reverse Four individual regions can be set.
0 to
L7-02 drive torque 200% No No No A A 4A8H
Output torque 300
limit
Positive torque
Forward No. of
regenera- Regenerative motor 0 to
L7-03 Reverse state rotations 200% No No No A A 4A9H
tive torque 300
Forward
limit Regenerative
state
Reverse Negative torque

regenera- 0 to
L7-04 200% No No No A A 4AAH
tive torque 300
limit
Set the integral time for the torque

Integral
limit. When integral control is set for
time setting 5 to
L7-06 the torque limit, reduce this setting to 200 ms No No No A No 4ACH
for torque 10000
increase the change in frequency for the
limit
torque limit.
Select the control method for the torque

limit during acceleration and decelera-
tion.
0: Proportional control (integral
control during constant speed)
Control
1: Integral control
method
Usually, this constant does not need to
selection
be set.
for torque
L7-07 For applications in which the torque 0 or 1 0 No No No A No 4C9H
limit dur-
limit will be reached during accelera-
ing acceler-
tion and deceleration, torque control
ation and
can be given priority by selecting inte-
deceleration
gral control.
When the torque is limited, the acceler-
ation and deceleration times may
increase or the motor speed may not
agree with the speed reference value.
6-49
Multi-function Analog Input ( H3-05,H3-09)
Control Methods
Set-
Open
ting Function Contents (100%) V/f Flux
Loop
V/f with Vec-
Value PG
Vec-
tor
tor
10 Positive torque limit Motor's rated torque No No Yes Yes
11 Negative torque limit Motor's rated torque No No Yes Yes
12 Regenerative torque limit Motor's rated torque No No Yes Yes
15 Positive/negative torque limit Motor's rated torque No No Yes Yes

Note The forward torque limit is the limit value when the analog input signal generates forward torque. This torque limit setting is enabled even when the
analog input signal generates forward torque while the motor is operating (regeneration).
Setting the Torque Limit in Constants

Using L7-01 to L7-04, you can set individually four torque limits in the following directions: Forward drive,
reverse drive, forward regeneration, and reverse regeneration.
Set the Torque Limit Value Using an Analog Input

You can change the analog input level torque limit value by setting the torque limit in multi-function analog
input terminals A2 and A3.
The analog input terminal signal level is factory-set as follows:
Multi-function analog input terminal A2: 4 to 20 mA
Multi-function analog input terminal A3: 0 to 10
The following diagram shows the relationship between the torque limits.
Output torque
Positive
Positive/negative torque limits
Forward torque limit
Regenerative torque limit

No. of motor rotations
Reverse operation Forward operation

Negative torque limit
Positive/negative torque limits
Negative
Fig 6.36 Torque Limit by Analog Input
6-50
Machine Protection
Setting Torque Limits Using Constants and an Analog Input

The following block diagram shows the relationship between torque limit using constants and torque limit
using an analog input.
The lowest torque limit set from among the following is enabled: Torque limit using constants, torque limit
using an analog input, 150% of Inverter rating (when set to CT), or 120% of Inverter rating (when set to VT)
set in C6-01.
Multi-function analog input Positive forward drive

Reverse positive regenerative torque
Terminal Forward torque limit torque
A2 or A3 (set value = 10)
Forward negative regenerative torque
Negative torque limit
(set value = 11) Min: Minimum value priority circuit
(set value = 12) Reverse
Positive/negative torque limit drive
(set value = 15) reverse
torque
Forward torque limit
(L7-01) Forward torque limit
Reverse torque limit Reverse torque limit

(L7-02)
Constants Forward regenerative torque Forward regenerative
limit (L7-03) torque limit
Reverse regenerative torque Reverse regenerative
limit (L7-04) torque limit
150% (when set to CT) or 120% (when set
to VT) of Inverter rated current
Fig 6.37 Torque Limit Using Constants and an Analog Input
Selecting the Control Method for Torque Limit during Acceleration and Deceleration
(SPEC: E or later only)
L7-07 is used to select the control method for the torque limit during acceleration and deceleration. The selec-
tions are proportional control and integral control. For applications, in which the torque limit will be reached
during acceleration and deceleration, torque control can be given priority by selecting integral control. To
increase the change in frequency for the torque limit when integral control is selected, decrease the value set
for L7-06 (Integral Time Setting for Torque Limit).
Setting Precautions
• When the torque limit function is operating, control and compensation of the motor speed is disabled
because torque control is given priority. Therefore, the acceleration and deceleration times may increase or
the number of motor rotations may decrease.
• When using the torque limit to raise and lower loads, do not carelessly lower the torque limit value, as this
may result in the motor falling or slipping.
• Torque limits using an analog input are the upper limit value (during 10 V or 20 mA input) of 100% of the
motor rated torque. To make the torque limit value during 10 V or 20 mA input 150% of the rated torque,
set the input terminal gain to 150.0 (%). Adjust the gain for multi-function analog input terminal A2 using
H3-10 and for multi-function analog input terminal A3 using H3-06.
• The torque limit accuracy is ±5% at the output frequency of 10 Hz or above. When output frequency is less
than 10 Hz, accuracy is lowered.
• When the torque is limited while L7-07 is set to 1 (integral control), the acceleration and deceleration
times may increase or the motor speed may not agree with the speed reference value.
6-51
Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation
Stall prevention during operation prevents the motor from stalling by automatically lowering the Inverter's
output frequency when a transient overload occurs while the motor is operating at a constant speed.
Stall prevention during operation is enabled only during V/f control. If the Inverter output current continues to
exceed the setting in constant L3-06 for 100 ms or longer, the motor speed is reduced. Set whether to enable or
disable deceleration time using constant L3-05. Set the deceleration time using C1-02 (Acceleration time 1) or
C1-04 (Acceleration Time 2).
If the Inverter output current reaches the set value in L3-06 - 2% (Inverter Rated Output Current), the motor
will accelerate again at the frequency set or the acceleration time set.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0: Disabled (Runs as set. With
a heavy load, the motor may
stall.)
1: Deceleration time 1 (the
Stall preven-
deceleration time for the stall
tion selection
L3-05 prevention function is C1- 0 to 2 1 No A A No No 493H
during run-
02.)
ning
2: Deceleration time 2 (the
deceleration time for the stall
prevention function is C1-
04.)
Effective when L3-05 is 1 or 2.

Set as a percentage of the 120%
Stall preven- *
Inverter rated output current. 30 to
L3-06 tion level dur- No A A No No 494H
Usually setting is not necessary. 200
ing running
The factory setting reduces the 150%
set values when the motor stalls. *
* C6-01= 1: 120%, C6-01= 0: 150%
6-52
Machine Protection
Changing Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input

If you set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function
Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 8 (stall prevention level during run), you can change the
stall level during operation by setting H3-10 [Gain (Terminal A2)] and H3-11 [Bias (Terminal A2)]
or H3-06 [Gain (Terminal A3)] and H3-07 [Bias (Terminal A3)].
The stall prevention level during operation enabled is the multi-function analog input terminal A2 or A3 input
level or the set value in constant L3-06, whichever is the smaller.
Stall prevention level during operation

terminal A2, A3 input level
(4 mA) (8.8 mA) (20 mA)
Fig 6.38 Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input
If the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity or the motor stalls when operating at the factory set-
tings, lower the stall prevention level during operation.
INFO
Using Frequency Detection

Set these constants when outputting one of the frequency agree or frequency detection signals from a multi-
function output. When using flux vector control, the motor speed is detected.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Effective when “Desired fre-
0.0 to
quency (ref/setting) agree 1,”
Speed agree- “Frequency detection 1,” or 400.0*1
L4-01 ment detec- “Frequency detection 2" is set 0.0 Hz No A A A A 499H
tion level for a multi-function output. 0.0 to
Frequencies to be detected are
300.0*2
set in Hz units.
(speed) agree 1,” “Desired fre-
quency (speed) agree 1,” or
Speed agree- “Frequency (FOUT) detection
0.0 to
L4-02 ment detec- 1,” Frequency (FOUT) detection 2.0 Hz No A A A A 49AH
20.0
tion width 2 is set for a multi-function out-
put.
Sets the frequency detection
width in Hz units.
6-53
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Effective when “Desired fre- -400.0

quency (speed) agree 2,” “Fre- to
Speed agree- quency (FOUT) detection 3,” or +400.0
ment detec- “Frequency (FOUT) detection *3
L4-03 0.0 Hz No A A A A 49BH
tion level (+/ 4" is set for a multi-function out- -300.0
-) put. to
Frequency that should be +300.0
detected is set in Hz units. *4

(speed) agree 2,” “Desired fre-
Speed agree- quency (speed) agree 2,” Fre-
ment detec- quency (FOUT) detection 3 or 0.0 to
L4-04 2.0 Hz No A A A A 49CH
tion width (+/ “Frequency detection 4" is set 20.0
-) for a multi-function output.
Frequency detection width is set
in Hz units.

* 3. When C6-01 = 0, -150.0 to +150.0.
* 4. When C6-01 = 1, -400.0 to +400.0
Constants and Output Signals

User Constant Number Name Function
Fref/Set Agree 1
Frequency Detection 1
L4-01 Speed agree detection level
Fref/Fout Agree 1
Fref/Set Agree 1
L4-02 Speed agree detection width Frequency Detection 1
Fref/Set Agree 2
L4-03 Speed agree detection level (+/-) Frequency Detection 3
Fref/Fout Agree 2
Fref/Set Agree 2
L4-04 Speed agree detection width (+/-)
Set the corresponding setting in the multi-function output (H2-01 to H2-03) to output the desired Fref/Fout
Agree signal, Fref/Set Agree signal, or Frequency Detection signal.
Function Setting
Fref/Fout Agree 1 2
Fref/Set Agree 1 3
Frequency Detection 1 4
Fref/Fout Agree 2 13
Fref/Set Agree 2 14
6-54
Machine Protection
Timing Chart for Frequency Detection Operation

Related L4-01: Speed Agree Level L4-03: Speed Agree Level +/−
constant L4-02: Speed Agree Width L4-04: Speed Agree Width +/−
Fref/Fout Agree 1 Fref/Fout Agree 2
Frequency L4-02 Frequency L4-04

reference reference
Output frequency Output frequency

Fref/Fout or motor speed or motor speed
Agree
L4-02
Fref/Fout Agree 1 OFF ON Fref/Fout Agree 2 OFF ON
(Multi-function output setting = 2) (Multi-function output setting = 13)
Fref/Set Agree 1 Fref/Set Agree 2

(ON at the following conditions during frequency (ON at the following conditions during frequency
agree) agree)
L4-02 L4-04
L4-01
Fref/Set Output frequency
L4-03
Output frequency
Agree or motor speed or motor speed
L4-01
L4-02
Fref/Set Agree 1 OFF ON Fref/Set Agree 2 OFF ON
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 1 Frequency (FOUT) Detection 3

(L4-01 > | Output frequency |) (L4-03 > Output frequency)
L4-02 L4-04
L4-01 L4-03
Output frequency Output frequency

or motor speed or motor speed
L4-01
L4-02
Freq. Detection 1 ON OFF Freq. Detection 3 ON OFF
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 2 Frequency (FOUT) Detection 4

(L4-01 < | Output frequency |) (L4-01 < Output frequency)
L4-02 L4-04
L4-01 L4-03
Fre- Output frequency
Output frequency
quency or motor speed or motor speed
Detection
L4-01
L4-02
Freq. Detection 2 OFF ON Freq. Detection 4 OFF ON
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 5

(L4-01 < | Output frequency |)
L4-02
L4-01
Output frequency
or motor speed
L4-01
L4-02
Freq. Detection 5 OFF ON
(Multi-function output setting = 36) OFF during baseblock
6-55
Detecting Motor Torque
If an excessive load is placed on the machinery (overtorque) or the load is suddenly lightened (undertorque),
you can output an alarm signal to multi-function output terminal M1-M2, P1-PC, or P2-PC.
To use the overtorque/undertorque detection function, set B, 17, 18, 19 (overtorque/undertorque detection NO/
NC) in one of the following constants: H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, P1-PC, and
P2-PC function selection).
The overtorque/undertorque detection level is the current level (Inverter rated output current 100%) in V/f
control, and the motor torque (motor rated torque 100%) in vector control.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0: Overtorque/undertorque
detection disabled.
1: Overtorque detection only
with speed agreement;
operation continues after
continuously during
continues after overtorque
(warning).
3: Overtorque detection only
output stopped upon
detection (protected
operation).
continuously during
Torque detec-
L6-01 tion selection 0 to 8 0 No A A A A 4A1H
operation).
1
5: Undertorque detection only
operation continues after
continuously during
continues after overtorque
(warning).
7: Undertorque detection only
output stopped upon
detection (protected
operation).
continuously during
operation).
Open loop vector control: Motor

Torque detec- rated torque is set as 100%.
L6-02 0 to 300 150% No A A A A 4A2H
tion level 1 V/f control: Inverter rated cur-
rent is set as 100%.
6-56
Machine Protection
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Torque detec- Sets the overtorque/undertorque 0.0 to
L6-03 0.1 s No A A A A 4A3H
tion time 1 detection time in 1-second units. 10.0
Torque detec-
L6-04 tion selection 0 to 8 0 No A A A A 4A4H
Output of torque detection 1 is
2
enabled by setting B or 17 for
Torque detec- H2- and output of torque 0 to
L6-05 150% No A A A A 4A5H
tion level 2 detection 1 is enabled by setting 300
18 or 18 for H2-.
Torque detec- 0.0 to
L6-06 0.1 s No A A A A 4A6H
tion time 2 10.0
Multi-function Output (H2-01 to H2-03)
Control Methods
Set-
Open
ting Function V/f Flux
Loop
V/f with Vec-
Value PG
Vec-
tor
tor
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO (NO contact: Overtorque/undertorque detec-
B Yes Yes Yes Yes
tion at ON)
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC (NC Contact: Overtorque/undertorque detec-

17 Yes Yes Yes Yes
tion at OFF)
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NO (NO Contact: Overtorque/undertorque detec-

18 Yes Yes Yes Yes
tion at ON)
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NC (NC Contact: Overtorque/undertorque detec-
19 Yes Yes Yes Yes
tion at OFF)
6-57
L6-01 and L6-04 Set Values and LED Indications
The relationship between alarms displayed by the Digital Operator when overtorque or undertorque is
detected, and the set values in L6-01 and L6-04, is shown in the following table.
LED Indications
Set Overtorque/ Overtorque/
Function
Value Undertorque Undertorque
Detection 1 Detection 2
0 Overtorque/undertorque detection disabled. - -
Overtorque detection only with speed matching; operation continues after
1 OL3 flashes OL4 flashes
Overtorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues
2 OL3 flashes OL4 flashes
after overtorque (warning).
Overtorque detection only with speed matching; output stopped upon detec-
3 OL3 lit OL4 lit
tion (protected operation).
Overtorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon
4 OL3 lit OL4 lit
detection (protected operation).
Undertorque detection only with speed matching; operation continues after
5 UL3 flashes UL4 flashes
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues
6 UL3 flashes UL4 flashes
after overtorque (warning).
Undertorque detection only with speed matching; output stopped upon
7 UL3 lit UL4 lit
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon
8 UL3 lit UL4 lit
Setting Example
The following diagram shows the time chart for overtorque and undertorque detection.
• Overtorque Detection
Motor current (output torque)
* *
L6-02 or L6-05
Overtorque detection 1 NO L6-03 or L6-03 or

or overtorque detection 2 NO L6-06 L6-06
ON ON
* Overtorque detection disabled band is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output
current (or motor rated torque).
6-58
Machine Protection
• Undertorque Detection
Motor current (output torque)
*
L6-02 or L6-05
L6-03 L6-03
Undertorque detection 1 NO
or or
or Undertorque detection 2 NO
L6-06 ON L6-06 ON
The undertorque detection disabled margin is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output
current (or motor rated torque)
Changing Overtorque and Undertorque Detection Levels Using an Ana-

log Input
If you set constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-
function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 7 (overtorque/undertorque detection level), you
can change the overtorque/undertorque detection level.
If you change the overtorque/undertorque detection level using the multi-function analog input, only over-
torque/undertorque detection level 1 will be enabled.
The following diagram shows the overtorque/undertorque detection level using an analog input.
Detection level

terminal A2, A3 input level
(4 mA) (20 mA)
Fig 6.39 Overtorque/Undertorque Detection Level Using an Analog Input
Multi-Function Analog Input ( H3-05, H3-09)
Control Methods
Set-
Open
Loop
V/f with Vec-
Value PG
Vec-
tor
tor
Overtorque/undertorque detection Motor rated torque for vector control
7 Yes Yes Yes Yes
level Inverter rated output current for V/f control
6-59
Motor Overload Protection
You can protect the motor from overload using the Inverter's built-in electronic thermal overload relay.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the motor rated current in 1
A units.
These set values will become the
0.32 to
Motor rated reference values for motor pro- 1.90 A
E2-01 6.40 No Q Q Q Q 30EH
current tection, torque limits and torque *1
*2
control.
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
A units.
0.32
Motor 2 rated reference values for motor pro- 1.90 A
E4-01 to 6.40 No A A A A 321H
*2
control.
Sets whether the motor overload
function is enabled or disabled
at electric thermal overload
relay.
0: Disabled
protection
Motor protec- In some applications when the
L1-01 0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q Q 480H
tion selection Inverter power supply is turned
off, the thermal value is reset,
so even if this constant is set to
1, protection may not be
effective.
When several motors are con-
nected to one Inverter, set to 0
and ensure that each motor is
installed with a protection
device.
Sets the electric thermal detec-
tion time in seconds units.
The factory setting is 150%
Motor protec-
overload for one minute. 0.1 to
L1-02 tion time con- 1.0 min No A A A A 481H
When the motor's overload 5.0
stant
resistance is known, also set the
overload resistance protection
time for when the motor is hot
started.
6-60
Machine Protection
Multi-Function Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
Control Methods
Set-
Open
Loop
V/f with Vec-
Value PG
Vec-
tor
tor
Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection
1F Yes Yes Yes Yes
level)
Setting Motor Rated Current

Set the rated current value on the motor nameplate in constants E2-01 (for motor 1) and E4-01 (for motor 2).
This set value is the electronic thermal base current.
Setting Motor Overload Protection Characteristics

Set the overload protection function in L1-01 according to the applicable motor.
The induction motor's cooling abilities differ according to the speed control range. Consequently, you must
select the electronic thermal protection characteristics to match the applicable motor's tolerance load charac-
teristics.
The following table shows the motor type and tolerance load characteristics.
L1-01 Electronic Thermal
Set Motor Type Tolerance Load Characteristics Cooling Ability Operation (at 100%
Value Motor Load)
Rated rotation speed

= 100% speed
Short time 60 s.
Use this motor for

When operating continu-
operations using a
Torque (%)
ously at 50/60 Hz or less,

commercial power
General-purpose motor overload detection
supply. This motor
1 motor (standard (OL1) is detected. The
construction yields
motor) Continuous Inverter outputs the error
best cooling effect
Frame
number
Max. contact, and the motor
speed Frame number Max. speed
when operating at 50/
of 200 of 160 MJ to 160 LJ min.
coasts to a stop.
60 Hz.
LJ min. Frame number Max.
speed of 132 MJ
Rotation speed (%)

Short time 60 = 100% speed
Torque (%)
This motor yields a

Inverter motor cooling effect even
Operates continuously at 6
2 (constant torque) when operating at
to 50/60 Hz.
(1:10) Continuous
Frame number Max.
low speeds (approx.
speed of 200 LJ min.
Frame number Max. speed
6 Hz).
of 160 MJ to 180 LJ
Frame number Max.
speed of 132 MJ
Rotation speed (%)
6-61
L1-01 Electronic Thermal
Set Motor Type Tolerance Load Characteristics Cooling Ability Operation (at 100%
Value Motor Load)

Short time 60 s. = 100% speed
Torque (%)
This motor yields a
cooling effect even
Vector motor Operates continuously at
3 Continuous
when operating at
(1:100) Frame number
0.6 to 60 Hz.
Max. speed of
200 LJ min. extremely low speeds
Frame number Max. speed (approx. 0.6 Hz).
of 160 MJ to 180 LJ
Frame number Max.
speed of 132 MJ
Rotation speed (%)
Setting Motor Protection Operation Time

Set the motor protection operation time in L1-02.
If, after operating the motor continuously at the rated current, a 150% overload is experienced, set the (hot
start) electronic thermal protection operation time. The factory setting is resistance to 150% for 60 seconds.
The following diagram shows an example of the characteristics of the electronic thermal protection operation
time (L1-02 = 1.0 min., operation at 60 Hz, general-purpose motor characteristics, when L1-01 is set to 1)
Operating time (min.)
Cold start
Hot start
Motor current (%)

E2-01 is set to 100%
Fig 6.40 Motor Protection Operation Time
Setting Precautions
• If multiple motors are connected to one Inverter, set constant L1-01 to 0 (disabled). To protect the motor,
install a thermal relay in the motor power cable, and perform overload protection on each motor.
• With applications where the power supply is often turned ON and OFF, there is a risk that the circuit cannot be pro-
tected even if this constant has been set to 1 (enabled), because the thermal value will be reset.
• To detect overloads in good time, set the set value in constant L1-02 to a low setting.
• When using a general-purpose motor (standard motor), the cooling ability will be lowered by f1/4 (fre-
quency). Consequently, the frequency may cause motor overload protection (OL1) to occur, even below
the rated current. If operating using the rated current at a low frequency, use a special motor.
6-62
Machine Protection
Setting the Motor Overload Pre-Alarm

If the motor overload protection function is enabled (i.e., L1-01 is set to other than 0) and you set H2-01 to
H2-03 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, P1-PC, and P2-PC function selection) to 1F (motor overload
OL1 pre-alarm), the motor overload pre-alarm will be enabled. If the electronic thermal value reaches mini-
mum 90% of the overload detection level, the output terminal that has been set will be turned ON.
Motor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs

Perform motor overheating protection using the thermistor temperature resistance characteristics of the PTC
(Positive Temperature Coefficient) built into the windings of each motor phase.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Set Multi-function input termi-
nal A3 (H3-05) or A2 (H3-09)
to E and select the operation
when the input motor tempera-
Alarm opera- ture (thermistor) input exceeds
tion selection the alarm detection level [1.17 V
L1-03 (±5%)]. 0 to 3 3 No A A A A 482H
during motor
overheating 0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop
deceleration time in C1-09.
3: Continue operation (H3 on
the Operator flashes).

nal A3 (H3-05) or A2 (H3-09)
to E and select the operation
Motor over- when the motor temperature
heating oper- (thermistor) input exceeds the
L1-04 operation detection level [2.34V 0 to 2 1 No A A A A 483H
ation
selection (±5%)].
0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop
deceleration time in C1-09.

Motor tem- nal A3 (H3-05) or A2 (H3-09)
perature input to E and set the primary delay 0.00 to
L1-05 0.20 s No A A A A 484H
filter time time constant for motor temper- 10.00
constant ature (thermistor) inputs in sec-
onds.
6-63
PTC Thermistor Characteristics
The following diagram shows the characteristics of the PTC thermistor temperature to the resistance value.
Class F Class H
Resistance (ohms) 180°C
150°C
1330
Tr: Temperature threshold value

550
Temperature
Tr
Tr 5 Tr Tr+5
Fig 6.41 PTC Thermistor Temperature-Resistance Value Characteristics
Operation during Motor Overheating

Set the operation if the motor overheats in constants L1-03 and L1-04. Set the motor temperature input filter
time constant in L1-05. If the motor overheats, the OH3 and OH4 error codes will be displayed on the Digital
Operator.
Error Codes If the Motor Overheats

Error Code Details
OH3 Inverter stops or continues to operate, according to the setting in L1-03.
OH4 Inverter stops according to the setting in L1-04.
By setting H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function
Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to E (Motor temperature input), you can detect alarm OH3
or OH4 using the PTC temperature-resistance characteristics, and protect the motor. The terminal connections
are shown in the following diagram. Set H3-08〔Signal level selection (terminal A2)〕(H3-04 when A3 is
used) to 0 (0 to + 10 V).
Inverter
Multi-function Multi-function
contact input contact output
Fault contact
output
Branch resistance
18 kΩ
A2, A3
(0-10 V) *
PTC thermistor Multi-function

PHC output
* When using terminal A2, set DIP switch S1-2 to OFF (0 to 10 V).
Fig 6.42 Mutual Connections During Motor Overheating Protection
6-64
Machine Protection
Limiting Motor Rotation Direction

If you set motor reverse rotation prohibited, a Reverse Run Command will not be accepted even if it is input.
Use this setting for applications in which reverse motor rotation can cause problems (e.g., fans, pumps, etc.)
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Prohibition of
0: Reverse enabled
b1-04 reverse oper- 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 183H
1: Reverse disabled
ation
6-65
Continuing Operation
This section explains functions for continuing or automatically restarting Inverter operation using speed
search even if an error occurs.
Restarting Automatically After Power Is Restored

Even if a temporary power loss occurs, you can perform estimated/current detection speed search using the
speed search function (b3-01) and restart the Inverter automatically after power is restored to continue motor
operation. To restart the Inverter after power has been restored, set L2-01 to 1 or 2. Make settings of L2-01 to
L2-05 and b3-01 for related details of restarting.
• If L2-01 is set to 1:
when power is restored within the time set in L2-02, the Inverter will restart. If the time set in L2-02 is
exceeded, alarm UV1 (main circuit undervoltage) will be detected.
• If L2-01 is set to 2:
when the main power supply is restored while the control power supply (i.e., power supply to the control
panel) is backed up, the Inverter will restart. Consequently, alarm UV1 (main circuit undervoltage) will not
be detected.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0: Disabled [main circuit
undervoltage (UV1)
detection]
1: Enabled [Restarted when the
power returns within the
time for L2-02. When L2-02
Momentary is exceeded, main circuit
L2-01 power loss undervoltage (UV1) 0 to 2 0 No A A A A 485H
detection detection.]
2: Enabled while CPU is
operating. [Restarts when
power returns during control
operations. Does not detect
main circuit undervoltage
(UV1).]
Ridethrough time, when

Momentary
Momentary Power Loss Selec- 0.1 s
L2-02 power loss 0 to 25.5 No A A A A 486H
tion (L2-01) is set to 1, in units *1
ridethru time
of seconds.
baseblock time in units of one
second, when the Inverter is
restarted after power loss ride-
through.
Min. base- Sets the time to approximately 0.1 to 0.2 s
L2-03 No A A A A 487H
block time 0.7 times the motor secondary 5.0 *1
circuit time constant.
When an overcurrent or over-
voltage occurs when starting a
speed search or DC injection
braking, increase the set values.
6-66
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the time required to return
the Inverter output voltage to
normal voltage at the comple-
Voltage tion of a speed search, in units of 0.0 to 0.3 s
L2-04 No A A A A 488H
recovery time one second. 5.0 *1
Sets the time required to recover
from 0 V to the maximum volt-
age.
Sets the main circuit undervolt-
age (UV) detection level (main
circuit DC voltage) in V units.
Undervolt- 150 to
Usually setting is not necessary. 190 V
L2-05 age detection 210 No A A A A 489H
Insert an AC reactor in the *2
level *2
Inverter input side to lower the
main circuit undervoltage detec-
tion level.
Note Attach a Backup Capacitor Unit for Momentary Power Loss if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200 V/400 V
Class Inverters with outputs of 0.4 to 11 kW.
Setting Precautions
• Error output signals are not output during momentary power loss recovery.
• To continue Inverter operation after power has been restored, make settings so that Run Commands from
the control main circuit terminal are stored even while power is suspended.
• If the momentary power loss operation selection is set to 0 (Disabled), when the momentary power loss
exceeds 15 ms during operation, alarm UV1 (main circuit undervoltage) will be detected.
Speed Search
The speed search function finds the actual speed of the motor that is rotating on inertia, and then starts
smoothly from that speed. When restoring power after a temporary power loss, the speed search function
switches the connection from the commercial power supply, and then restarts the fan that is rotating on inertia.
Speed search will be performed in the following cases.

• When Momentary power loss detection (L2-01) is set to 1 or 2 (Enabled) and power is restored after
a momentary power loss.
IMPORTANT
• When Number of auto restart attempts (L5-01) is set from 1 to 10 and the auto restart is performed
after a fault.
• Multi-function contact inputs (H1-) are set to External search command (61, 62, or 64) and the
command is sent.
• Multi-function contact inputs (H1-) are set to External baseblock (8 or 9) and the release com-
mand is sent.
The selected speed search type in b1-01, speed calculation or current detection, will be performed.
6-67
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Enables/disables the speed
search function for the Run
Command and sets the speed
search method.
0: Disabled, speed calculation
1: Enabled, speed calculation
2: Disabled, current detection
3: Enabled, current detection
Speed Calculation:
Speed search
When the search is started, the
selection
motor speed is calculated and
(current
b3-01
detection or
acceleration/deceleration is 0 to 3 2 *1 No A A A No 191H
performed from the calculated
speed calcu-
speed to the specified
lation)
frequency (motor direction is
also searched).
Current Detection:
The speed search is started
from the frequency when
power was momentarily lost
and the maximum frequency,
and the speed is detected at the
search current level.
Sets the speed search operation

current as a percentage, taking 120%
Speed search the Inverter rated current as *1 *3
operating cur- 100%. 0 to

b3-02 No A No A No 192H
rent (current Not usually necessary to set. 200
detection) When restarting is not possible 150%
with the factory settings, reduce *1 *3
the value.
Sets the output frequency decel-
eration time during speed search
Speed search
in 1-second units.
deceleration 0.1 to
b3-03 Set the time for deceleration 2.0 s No A No A No 193H
time (current 10.0
from the maximum output fre-
detection)
quency to the minimum output
frequency.
Sets the magnetic contactor

operating delay time when there
Speed search
is a magnetic contactor on the
wait time
output side of the Inverter.
(current 0.0 to
b3-05 When a speed search is per- 0.2 s No A A A A 195H
detection or 20.0
formed after recovering from a
speed calcu-
momentary power loss, the
lation)
search operation is delayed by
the time set here.
Operation restarts at a speed
obtained by multiplying the
Sets the mag-
speed from the speed search by
netic flux
the compensation gain (excita-
compensa-
tion search only.) 1.00 to
b3-10 tion as a per- 1.10 No A No A No 19AH
Increase this setting if overvolt- 1.20
centage of the
ages occur when a speed search
no-load cur-
is performed after a long base-
rent.
block, for example, in searches
at startup.
6-68
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0: Disabled (operates with
Rotation
specified rotation direction)
direction
b3-14 1: Enabled (operates with rota- 0 or 1 1 No A A A No 19EH
search selec-
tion direction found by
tion
search)
Sets the current level to retry a
Speed search 150%
speed search as a percentage,
b3-17 retrial cur- 0 to 200 No A No A No 1F0H
rent level
taking the Inverter rated current *3
as 100%.
Speed search Sets the time for detection in a

0.00 to
b3-18 retrial detec- speed search retrial in units of 0.10 s No A No A No 1F1H
1.00
tion time seconds.
Number of
Sets the number of times that a
b3-19 speed search 0 to 10 0 No A No A No 1F2H
speed search can be retried.
retrials

baseblock time in units of one
second, when the Inverter is
restarted after power loss ride-
through.
Min. base- Sets the time to approximately 0.1 to 0.2 s
L2-03 No A A A A 487H
block time 0.7 times the motor secondary 5.0 *2
circuit time constant.
When an overcurrent or over-
voltage occurs when starting a
speed search or DC injection
braking, increase the set values.
Sets the time required to return

the Inverter output voltage to
normal voltage at the comple-
Voltage tion of a speed search, in units of 0.0 to 0.3 s
L2-04 No A A A A 488H
recovery time one second. 5.0 *2
Sets the time required to recover
from 0 V to the maximum volt-
age.
* 2. The factory settings depend upon the Inverter capacity. The values for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW are given.
* 3. C6-01 = 1:120%, C6-01 = 0:150%
Control Methods
Set-
Open
Loop
V/f with Vec-
Value PG
Vec-
tor
tor
External search command 1
OFF: Speed search disabled (Start from lowest output frequency)
61 ON: Speed estimation (Estimate the motor speed, and start search from estimated speed)
Yes No Yes No
Current detection (Start speed search from maximum output frequency)
External search command 2

OFF: Speed search disabled (Start from lowest output frequency)
ON: Speed estimation (Estimate the motor speed, and start search from estimated speed) (Same
62 operation as external search command 1)
Yes No Yes No
Current detection: Start speed search from set frequency (reference frequency when search
command was input).
6-69
Setting Precautions
• When both external search commands 1 and 2 are set for the multi-function contact terminals, an OPE03
(invalid multi-function input selection) operation error may occur. Set either external search command 1 or
external search command 2.
• If speed search during startup is selected when using V/f control with PG, the Unit will start from the fre-
quency detected by PG.
• If performing speed search using external search commands, add an external sequence so that the period
when the Run Command and external search command are both ON is at the very least the Minimum
Baseblock Time (L2-03).
• If the Inverter output is equipped with a contact, set the contact operation delay time in the Speed Search
Wait Time (b3-05). The factory setting is 0.2 s. When not using the contact, you can reduce the search time
by making the setting 0.0 s. After waiting for the speed search wait time, the Inverter starts the speed
search.
• Constant b3-02 is a current detection speed search (current detection level for search completion). When
the current falls below the detection level, the speed search is viewed as completed, and the motor acceler-
ates or decelerates to the set frequency. If a motor overload (OL1) or an Inverter overload (OL2) occurs
and the motor cannot restart, lower the set value.
• If an overcurrent (OC) is detected when using speed search after recovery following a power loss, lengthen
the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03).
• If a main circuit over voltage (OV) is detected when using a current detection speed search after a momen-
tary power loss, lengthen the Speed Search Detection Time (b3-03).
Application Precautions for Speed Searches Using Estimated Speed

• When using V/f control with or without a PG, always perform stationary autotuning for only line-to-line
resistance before using speed searches based on estimated speeds.
• When using vector control, always perform rotational or stationary autotuning (not stationary autotuning
for line-to-line resistance only) before using speed searches based on estimated speeds.
• If the cable length between the motor and Inverter is changed after autotuning has been performed, per-
form stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only again.
The motor will not operate when stationary autotuning or stationary autotuning for line-to-line
resistance only is performed.
IMPORTANT
6-70
Speed Search Selection

Set whether to enable or disable speed search at startup, and set the type of speed search (estimated speed or
current detection) using setting b3-01. To perform speed search when inputting the Run Command, set b3-01
to 1 or 3.
Search Name Estimated Speed (b3-01 = 0 or 1) Current Detection (b3-01 = 2 or 3)

Estimates the motor speed when the search
Starts speed search from the frequency when
starts, and accelerates and decelerates from the
the temporary power loss was detected, or from
Search Method estimated speed to the set frequency. You can
the highest frequency, and performs speed
also search including direction of motor rota-
detection at the current level during the search.
tion.
External speed search command 1:
External search command 1 and external Starts speed search from the maximum output
External Speed Search search command 2 become the same operation, frequency.
Command estimating the motor speed and starting the External speed search command 2:
search from the estimated speed. Starts speed search from the frequency refer-
ence set before the search command.
Cannot be used multi-motor drives, motors two
Application Precau- In control method without PG, the motor may
or more frames smaller than the Inverter capac-
tions accelerate suddenly with light loads.
ity, and high-speed motors (130 Hz min.)
Estimated Speed Search (b3-01=0 or 1)

The time chart for estimated speed searches is shown below.
Search at Startup (b3-01=1)

The time chart when speed search at startup or external speed search command of multi-function inputs has
been selected is shown below.
OFF ON
Run Command Set frequency
reference
Start using
speed detected
Output frequency
b3-02
Output current
1.0 s
* Lower limit set using Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05).
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) × 0.7*
Note: If the stopping method is set to coast to stop, and the Run Command turns ON in a short time,
the operation may be the same as the search in case 2.
Fig 6.43 Speed Search at Startup (Estimated Speed)
6-71
Speed Search after Short Baseblock (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.) (b3-01=0)
The time chart when the Inverter operation is restarted after power has been restored is shown below.
• Loss Time Shorter Than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)
AC power supply ON OFF Set frequency

Start using
reference
speed detected
Output frequency
Output current
10 ms
*1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency

*2 immediately before the baseblock.
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.75*1 *2 After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for the
minimum Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05).
Fig 6.44 Speed Search after Baseblock (When Estimated Speed: Loss Time Is Set in L2-03)
• Loss Time Longer Than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)
AC power supply ON OFF Start using speed detected

Set frequency
reference
Output frequency
Output current
10 ms
Minimum baseblock time Speed Search Wait Time

(L2-03) (b3-05)
Note: If the frequency immediately before the baseblock is low or the power supply break time is long,
operation may be the same as the search in case 1.
Fig 6.45 Speed Search After Baseblock (Estimated Speed: Loss Time > L2-03)
6-72
Current Detection Speed Search (b3-01=2 or 3)

The time charts for current detection speed search is shown below.
Speed Search at Startup (b3-01=3)

The time chart when speed search at startup or external speed search command of multi-function inputs has
been selected is shown below.
OFF ON Deceleration time set in b3-03

Run Command
Maximum output Set frequency
frequency or reference
set frequency
Output frequency
b3-02
Output current
* * Lower limit is set using Speed Search Time (b3-05).
Minimum baseblock time
(L2-03)
Fig 6.46 Speed Search at Startup (Using Current Detection)
Speed Search after Short Baseblock (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.) (b3-01=2)
The time chart when the Inverter operation is restarted after power has been restored is shown below.
• Loss Time Shorter Than Minimum Baseblock Time
AC power supply ON OFF Output frequency before power loss

Set frequency
Deceleration reference
time set in b3-03
Output frequency
b3-02
speed search operating current
Output current
*1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency
immediately before baseblock.
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) *1 *2 After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for the minimum
Speed Search Wait Time (b2-03).
*2
Fig 6.47 Speed Search After Baseblock (Current Detection: Loss Time < L2-03)
• Loss Time Longer Than Minimum Baseblock Time
AC power supply ON OFF Output frequency before power loss

Set frequency
Deceleration speed set in b3-03 reference
Output frequency
b3-02
Speed search operating time
Output current
Speed search wait time (b3-05)
Minimum baseblock time

(L2-03)
Fig 6.48 Speed Search After Baseblock (Current Detection: Loss Time > L2-03)
6-73
Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is
Lost
The frequency reference loss detection function continues operation using 80% speed of the frequency reference
before loss when the frequency reference using an master speed analog input* is reduced 90% or more in 400 ms.
When the error signal during frequency reference loss is output externally, set H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function
contact output terminal M1-M2, P1-PC, and P2-PC function selection) to C (frequency reference lost).
* Frequency references using the following master speed analog inputs are used to detect a frequency loss.
• Analog input using terminal A1
• Analog input using terminal A2 when H3-09 (Multi-function analog input terminal A2 function selection) is set
to 0 (Add to terminal A1).
• Analog input using terminal A2 when H3-09 (Multi-function analog input terminal A2 function selection) is set
to 2 (Auxiliary frequency reference 1) and H3-13 (Terminal A1/A2 switching) is set to 1 (Use terminal A2 ana-
log input as the main speed frequency reference).
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0: Stop (Operation follows the
frequency reference.)
Operation 1: Operation at 80% speed
when fre- continues. (At 80% of speed
L4-05 quency refer- before the frequency 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 49DH
ence is reference was lost)
missing Frequency reference is lost: Fre-
quency reference dropped over
90% in 400 ms.
6-74
Restarting Operation After Transient Fault (Auto Restart Function)

If an Inverter fault occurs during operation, the Inverter will perform self-diagnosis. If no fault is detected, the
Inverter will automatically restart using the speed search function (b3-01). This is called the auto restart func-
tion.
Set the number of auto restarts in constant L5-01. A fault reset is attempted every 5 ms after a fault occurs and
minimum baseblock time has passed. The number of auto restarts is counted when the Inverter attempts a fault
reset and restarts operation. The protection function will operate if a fault continues to occur after auto restart-
ing the number of times set in L5-01.
The auto restart function can be applied to the following faults. If a fault not listed below occurs, the protec-
tion function will operate and the auto restart function will not.
• OC (Overcurrent) • RH (Braking resistor overheated)
• GF (Ground fault) • RR (Braking transistor error)
• PUF (Fuse blown) • OL1 (Motor overload)
• OV (Main circuit overvoltage) • OL2 (Inverter overload)
• UV1 (Main Circuit Undervoltage, Main Circuit Magnetic Contactor Operation • OH1 (Motor overheat)
Failure)*
• PF (Main circuit voltage fault) • OL3 (Overtorque)
• LF (Output phase failure) • OL4 (Overtorque)
* When L2-01 is set to 1 or 2 (continue operation during momentary power loss)
Auto Restart External Outputs

To output auto restart signals externally, set H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function contact output terminals M1-M2,
P1-PC, and P2-PC function selection) to 1E (auto restart).
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the number of auto restart
Number of attempts.
L5-01 auto restart Automatically restarts after a 0 to 10 0 No A A A A 49EH
attempts fault and conducts a speed
search from the run frequency.
Sets whether a fault contact out-
put is activated during fault
Auto restart restart.
L5-02 operation 0: Not output (Fault contact is 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 49FH
selection not activated.)
1: Output (Fault contact is
activated.)
Application Precautions
• The number of auto restarts count is reset under the following conditions:
After auto restart, normal operation has continued for 10 minutes.
After the protection operation has been performed, and the fault has been verified, and an fault reset
has been input.
After the power supply is turned OFF, and then ON again.
• Do not use the auto restart function with variable loads.
6-75
Operation Selection After Cooling Fan Fault (SPEC: E or Later Only)
Use the constant setting to select the operation of the motor after a cooling fan fault occurs. This function can
be used for times when a motor should not be stopped quickly (with an emergency stop.)
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
OH1 detec- 0: Disabled (FAN minor fault
tion of detection)
L8-32* 0 or 1 1 No A A A A 4E2H
Inverter’ s 1: Enabled (OH1 major fault
cooling fan detection)
* Applicable for F7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG:1031 or later.
The following table describes the operation of the motor and the display of the Digital Operator in accordance
with the settings of the L8-32 if a cooling fan fault occurred.
Setting Multi-function Con-
Fault Digital Operator Motor Operation
Value tact Output
Cooling Fin Overheating OH1 (lit) Coast to a stop Fault
0
Inverter’s Cooling Fan Fault FAN (blink) Continue operation* Minor fault
Cooling Fin Overheating OH (lit) Coast to a stop Fault

1
Inverter’s Cooling Fan Fault OH1 (lit) Coast to a stop Fault
* If L8-32 is set to 0, the motor will continue running even if a cooling fan fault occurred. However, the Inverter rated output current and the
overload capacity will be reduced. The rated output current will be reduced to 80% if the normal rated output current is 100%, and the overload
capacity will be reduced to the values as follows.
When CT is selected: 100% per every 3 minutes, 150% per every 15 seconds
When VT is selected: 100% per every 30 seconds, 120% per every 10 seconds
If L8-32 is set to 0, be sure to set H2-01 to H2-03 multi-function contact outputs to 10 (minor fault) or to 3D
(Inverter’s cooling fan fault.) If a cooling fan fault occurs, stop the Inverter immediately and replace the cool-
ing fan. If the Inverter continues to run while a cooling fan fault occurs, the Inverter’s cooling ability will be
IMPORTANT affected and the Inverter’s internal temperature will increase and shorten the Inverter’s life.
During a cooling fan fault, the cooling fan stops for about 3 seconds every minute (interval operation.)
6-76
Inverter Protection
Inverter Protection
This section explains the functions for protecting the Inverter and the braking resistor.
Performing Overheating Protection on Mounted Braking Resistors

Perform overheating protection on Inverter-mounted braking resistors (Model: ERF-150WJ ).
When overheating in a mounted braking resistor is detected, an alarm RH (Mounted braking resistor overheat-
ing) is displayed on the Digital Operator, and the motor coasts to a stop.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Protect selec-
0: Disabled (no overheating
tion for inter-
protection)
L8-01 nal DB 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 4ADH
1: Enabled (overheating
resistor (Type
protection)
ERF)
Multi-function Contact Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
Control Methods
Set-
Open
Loop
V/f with Vec-
Value PG
Vec-
tor
tor
D Braking resistor fault (ON: Resistor overheat or braking transistor fault) Yes Yes Yes Yes
The most likely causes of RH (Mounted braking resistor overheating) being detected are that the deceleration
time is too short or that the motor regeneration energy is too large. In these cases, lengthen the deceleration
time or replace the Braking Resistor Unit with one with a higher breaking capacity.
INFO
6-77
Reducing Inverter Overheating Pre-Alarm Warning Levels
The Inverter detects the temperature of the cooling fins using the thermistor, and protects the Inverter from
overheating. You can receive Inverter overheating pre-alarms in units of 1°C.
The following overheating pre-alarm warnings are available: Stopping the Inverter as error protection, and
continuing operation, with the alarm OH (Radiation fins overheating) on the Digital Operator flashing.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the detection temperature
for the Inverter overheat detec-
Overheat pre- tion pre-alarm in °C. 50 to
L8-02 95 °C* No A A A A 4AEH
alarm level The pre-alarm detects when the 130
cooling fin temperature reaches
the set value.
Sets the operation for when the

Inverter overheat pre-alarm goes
ON.
0: Decelerate to stop in
deceleration time C1-02.
Operation
1: Coast to stop
selection after
L8-03 2: Fast stop in fast-stop time 0 to 3 3 No A A A A 4AFH
overheat pre-
C1-09.
alarm
3: Continue operation (Monitor
display only.)
A fault will be given in setting 0
to 2 and a minor fault will be
given in setting 3.
* The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
6-78
Input Terminal Functions

This section explains input terminal functions, which set operating methods by switching functions for the
multi-function contact input terminals (S3 to S8).
Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and Control

Circuit Terminals
You can switch the Inverter Run Command inputs and frequency reference inputs between local (i.e., Digital
Operator) and remote (input method using b1-01 and b1-02).
You can switch between local and remote by turning ON and OFF the terminals if an output from H1-01 to
H1-06 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S8 function selection) has been set to 1 (local/remote selec-
tion).
To set the control circuit terminals to remote, set b1-01 and b1-02 to 1 (Control circuit terminals).
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
input method.
0: Digital Operator
Reference
selection
tions
3: Option board

method.
0: Digital Operator
Operation
(sequence input)
tion
tions
3: Option board
You can also perform local/remote switching using the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator. When
the local/remote function has been set in the external terminals, the LOCAL/REMOTE Key function on the
Digital Operator will be disabled.
INFO
6-79
Blocking Inverter Outputs (Baseblock Commands)
Set 8 or 9 (Baseblock command NO/NC) in one of the constants H1-01 to H1-06 (multi-function contact input
terminal S3 to S8 function selection) to perform baseblock commands using the terminal's ON/OFF operation,
and prohibit Inverter output using the baseblock commands. At this time, the motor will be coasting and “BB”
will blink on the Digital Operator.
Clear the baseblock command to restart the operating using speed search from frequency references from the
previous baseblock command input.
Control Methods
Set-
Open
Loop
V/f with Vec-
Value PG
Vec-
tor
tor
8 External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON) Yes Yes Yes Yes
9 External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Time Chart
The time chart when using baseblock commands is shown below.
Forward operation/Stop
Input Cleared
Baseblock command
Frequency reference
Search from stored frequency reference
?Output frequency
Hold
Fig 6.49 Baseblock Commands
If using baseblock commands with a variable load, do not frequently input baseblock commands during oper-
ation, as this may cause the motor to suddenly start coasting, and may result in the motor falling or slipping.
IMPORTANT
6-80
Stopping Acceleration and Deceleration (Acceleration/Deceleration

Ramp Hold)
The acceleration/deceleration ramp hold function stops acceleration and deceleration, stores the output fre-
quency at that point in time, and then continues operation.
Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-06 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S8 function selection) to
A (acceleration/deceleration ramp hold) to stop acceleration and deceleration when the terminal is turned ON
and to store the output frequency at that point in time. Acceleration and deceleration will restart when the ter-
minal is turned OFF.
If d4-01 is set to 1 and the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command is input, the output frequency is
still stored even after the power supply is turned OFF.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets whether or not frequencies
on hold will be recorded.
0: Disabled (when operation is
stopped or the power is
turned on again starts at 0.)
Frequency
1: Enabled (when operation is
reference
d4-01 stopped or the power is 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 298H
hold function
turned on again starts at the
selection
previous hold frequency.)
This function is available when
the multi-function inputs “accel/
decel Ramp Hold” or “up/down”
commands are set.
Time Chart
The time chart when using Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold commands is given below.
Power supply
Forward/Stop
Acceleration/Deceleration
Ramp Hold
Frequency reference
Output frequency
Hold Hold
Fig 6.50 Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold
6-81
• When d4-01 is set to 1, the output frequency on hold is stored even after the power supply is turned OFF. If
performing operations using this frequency after the Inverter has also been turned OFF, input the Run
Command with the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold turned ON.
• When d4-01 is set to 0 and a Run Command is input while the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold is
turned ON, the output frequency will be set to zero.
• If you input an Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command by error when decelerating during posi-
tioning, deceleration may be canceled.
Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Contact Signals (UP/

DOWN)
The UP and DOWN commands raise and lower Inverter frequency references by turning ON and OFF a multi-
function contact input terminal S3 to S8.
To use this function, set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-06 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S8
function selection) to 10 (UP command) and 11 (DOWN command). Be sure to allocate two terminals so that
the UP and DOWN commands can be used as a pair.
The output frequency depends on the acceleration and deceleration time. Be sure to set b1-02 (Run Command
selection) to 1 (Control circuit terminal).
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Set the output frequency upper
Frequency
limit as a percent, taking the 0.0 to
max. output frequency to be 110.0
upper limit
100%.
Frequency Sets the output frequency lower

0.0 to
d2-02 reference limit as a percentage of the max- 0.0% No A A A A 28AH
110.0
lower limit imum output frequency.
Set the master speed reference

Master speed
lower limit as a percent, taking 0.0 to
the max. output frequency to be 110.0
lower limit
100%.
Precautions
When setting and using UP and DOWN commands, observe the following precautions.
Setting Precautions
If multi-function input terminals S3 to S8 are set as follows, operation error OPE03 (Invalid multi-function
input selection) will occur:
• Only either the UP command or DOWN command has been set.
• UP/DOWN commands and Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold have been allocated at the same time.
6-82
• Frequency outputs using UP/DOWN commands are limited by the frequency reference upper and lower
limits set in constants d2-01 to d2-03. Here, frequency references from analog frequency reference termi-
nal A1 becomes the frequency reference lower limit. If using a combination of the frequency reference
from terminal A1 and the frequency reference lower limit set in either constant d2-02 or d2-03, the larger
lower limit will become the frequency reference lower limit.
• If inputting the Run Command when using UP/DOWN commands, the output frequency accelerates to the
frequency reference lower limit.
• When using UP/DOWN commands, multi-step operations are disabled.
• When d4-01 (Frequency Reference Hold Function Selection) is set to 1, the frequency reference held using
the UP/DOWN functions is stored even after the power supply is turned OFF. When the power supply is
turned ON and the Run Command is input, the motor accelerates to the frequency reference that has been
stored. To reset (i.e., to 0 Hz) the stored frequency reference, turn ON the UP or DOWN command while
the Run Command is OFF.
Connection Example and Time Chart

The time chart and settings example when the UP command is allocated to the multi-function contact input
terminal S3, and the DOWN command is allocated to terminal S4, are shown below.
Constant Name Set Value
H1-01 Multi-function input (terminal S3) 10
H1-02 Multi-function input (terminal S4) 11
Inverter
Forward
operation/Stop
Reverse
operation/Stop
Up command
Down command
Sequence
0 to 10 V analog common
signal Frequency
reference lower limit
Fig 6.51 Connection Example when UP/DOWN Commands Are Allocated
6-83
Output frequency
Upper limit
Accelerates to
lower limit Same
frequency
Lower limit
Forward operation/stop
UP command
Reference
frequency reset
DOWN command
Frequency
matching signal*
Power supply
* The frequency matching signal turns ON when the motor is not accelerating/
decelerating while the Run Command is ON.
Fig 6.52 UP/DOWN Commands Time Chart
6-84
Accelerating and Decelerating Constant Frequencies in the Analog Refer-

ences (+/- Speed)
The +/- speed function increments or decrements the frequency set in analog frequency reference d4-02 (+/-
Speed Limit) using two contact signal inputs.
To use this function, set One of the constants H1-01 to H1-06 (multi-function contact terminal inputs S3 to S8
function selection) to 1C (Trim Control Increase command) and 1D (Trim Control Decrease command). Be
sure to allocate two terminals so that the Trim Control Increase command and Trim Control Decrease com-
mand can be used as a pair.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Set the frequency to be add to or
subtracted from the analog fre-
quency reference as a percent,
taking the maximum output fre-
+ - Speed
d4-02 quency to be 100%. 0 to 100 10% No A A A A 299H
limits
Enabled when the increase (+)
speed command or decrease (-)
speed command is set for a
Trim Control Increase/Decrease Command and Frequency Reference

The frequency references using Trim Control Increase/Decrease command ON/OFF operations are shown
below.
Set Frequency Set Frequency
Frequency Reference Reference Reference Set Frequency Command
+ d4-02 - d4-02
Trim Control Increase
ON OFF ON OFF
Command Terminal
Trim Control Decrease
OFF ON ON OFF
Command Terminal
• Trim Control Increase/Decrease command is enabled when speed reference > 0 and the speed reference is
from an analog input.
• When the analog frequency reference value - d4-02 < 0, the frequency reference is set to 0.
• If only the Trim Control Increase command or Trim Control Decrease command has been set for a multi-
function contact input terminal S3 to S8, operation error OPE03 (invalid multi-function input selected)
will occur.
6-85
Hold Analog Frequency Using User-set Timing
When one of H1-01 to H1-06 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S8 function selection) is set to 1E
(sample/hold analog frequency command), the analog frequency reference will be held from 100 ms after the
terminal is turned ON, and operation will continue thereafter at that frequency.
The analog value 100 ms after the command is turned ON is used as the frequency reference.
Sample/hold
command
Analog input
Frequency reference
Fig 6.53 Sample/Hold Analog Frequency
Precautions
When setting and executing sample and hold for analog frequency references, observe the following precau-
tions.
Setting Precautions
When using sample/hold of analog frequency reference, you cannot use the following commands at the same
time. If these commands are used at the same time, operation error OPE03 (invalid multi-function input selec-
tion) will occur.
• Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command
• UP/DOWN command
• Trim Control Increase/Decrease command
• When performing sample/hold of analog frequency references, be sure to store references of 100 ms mini-
mum. If the reference time is less than 100 ms, the frequency reference will not be held.
• The analog frequency reference that is held will be deleted when the power supply is turned OFF.
Switching Operations between a Communications Option Board and

Control Circuit Terminals
You can switch reference input between the Communications Option Board and the control circuit terminals.
Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-06 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S8 function selection) to
2 (Option/Inverter selection) to enable switching reference input using the terminal ON/OFF status when the
Inverter is stopped.
6-86
Setting Precautions
To switch command inputs between the Communications Option Board and the control circuit terminals, set
the following constants.
• Set b1-01 (Reference Selection) to 1 (Control circuit terminal [analog input])
• Set b1-02 (Operation Method Selection to 1 (Control circuit terminal (sequence inputs])
• Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-06 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S8 function selection)
to 2 (Option/Inverter selection).
Terminal Status Frequency Reference and Run Command Selection
Inverter
OFF (Can be operated from frequency reference or control circuit terminal from analog input termi-
nal.)
Communications Option Board
ON
(Frequency reference and Run Command are enabled from Communications Option Board.)
Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands

(FJOG/RJOG)
The FJOG/RJOG command functions operate the Inverter using jog frequencies by using the terminal ON/
OFF operation. When using the FJOG/RJOG commands, there is no need to input the Run Command.
To use this function, set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-06 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S8
function selection) to 12 (FJOG command) or 13 (RJOG command).
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0.00 to
The frequency reference when 400.00
Jog frequency the jog frequency reference *1 *3
d1-17 6.00 Hz Yes Q Q Q Q 292H
reference selection, FJOG command, or 0.00 to
RJOG command is ON. 300.00
*1 *2
Multi-Function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-06)
Control Methods
Set-
Open
Loop
V/f with Vec-
Value PG
Vec-
tor
tor
12 FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17) Yes Yes Yes Yes
13 RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17) Yes Yes Yes Yes
6-87
• Jog frequencies using FJOG and RJOG commands are given priority over other frequency references.
• When both FJOG command and RJOG commands are ON for 500 ms or longer at the same time, the
Inverter stops according to the setting in b1-03 (stopping method selection).
Stopping the Inverter by Notifying Programming Device Errors to the

Inverter (External Fault Function)
The external fault function performs the error contact output, and stops the Inverter operation if the Inverter
peripheral devices break down or an error occurs. The digital operator will display EFx (External fault [input
terminal Sx]). The x in EFx shows the terminal number of the terminal that input the external fault signal. For
example, if an external fault signal is input to terminal S3, EF3 will be displayed.
To use the external fault function, set one of the values 20 to 2F in one of the constants H1-01 to H1-06 (multi-
function contact input terminal S3 to S8 function selection).
Select the value to be set in H1-01 to H1-06 from a combination of any of the following three conditions.
• Signal input level from peripheral devices
• External fault detection method
• Operation during external fault detection
The following table shows the relationship between the combinations of conditions and the set value in H1-
.
Input Level Error Detection Method
Operation During Error Detection
(See Note 1.) (See Note 2.)
Set
Detection Deceler- Coast to Emer- Continue
Value NO Con- NC Con- Constant
During ate to Stop Stop gency Stop Operation
tact tact Detection
Operation (Error) (Error) (Error) (Warning)
20 Yes Yes Yes
21 Yes Yes Yes
22 Yes Yes Yes
23 Yes Yes Yes
24 Yes Yes Yes
25 Yes Yes Yes
26 Yes Yes Yes
27 Yes Yes Yes
28 Yes Yes Yes
29 Yes Yes Yes
2A Yes Yes Yes
2B Yes Yes Yes
2C Yes Yes Yes
2D Yes Yes Yes
2E Yes Yes Yes
2F Yes Yes Yes
Note 1. Set the input level to detect errors using either signal ON or signal OFF. (NO contact: External fault when ON; NC contact: External fault when
OFF).
2. Set the detection method to detect errors using either constant detection or detection during operation.
Constant detection: Detects while power is supplied to the Inverter.
Detection during operation: Detects only during Inverter operation.
6-88
Output Terminal Functions
Output Terminal Functions

The output terminal function, which sets the output methods by switching the settings of H2-01 to H2-03
(Multi-function contact output terminals M1-M2, P1-PC, and P2-PC), is described here.
During Run (Setting: 0)

OFF The Run Command is OFF and there is not output voltage.
ON The Run Command is ON or a voltage is being output.
During Run 2 (Setting: 37)

The Inverter is not outputting a frequency. (Baseblock, DC injection braking, initial excitation, or
OFF
stopped)
ON The Inverter is outputting a frequency.
• These outputs can be used to indicate the Inverter's operating status.
Run Command OFF ON
Baseblock command OFF ON
Output frequency
During run 1 output OFF ON
OFF ON
During run 2 output
Fig 6.54 Timing Chart for “During RUN” Output
Zero-speed (Setting: 1)
The output frequency is greater than the minimum output frequency (E1-09).
OFF
[With flux vector control, is greater than the zero-speed level (b2-01).]
The output frequency is less than the minimum output frequency (E1-09).
ON
[With flux vector control, is less than the zero-speed level (b2-01).]
Minimum output frequency (E1-09)

[Zero-speed level (b2-01) when flux vector control is
Output frequency
being used.]
OFF ON
Zero-speed output
Fig 6.55 Timing Chart for Zero-speed
6-89
Motor Overload (OL1) Pre-alarm (Setting: 1F)
OFF The motor protection function's electronic thermal value is less than 90% of the detection level.
ON The motor protection function's electronic thermal value is greater than 90% of the detection level.
• This output function is valid when the motor overload protection function is enabled (L1-01 =1).
• This output can be used to warn of overheating before the protection function itself operates.
Inverter Overheat (OH) Pre-alarm (Setting: 20)

OFF The cooling fin temperature is less than the "OH Pre-Alarm Level" set in L8-02.
ON The cooling fin temperature exceeds the "OH Pre-Alarm Level" set in L8-02.
• This output function indicates that the temperature of the cooling fins reaches the temperature set in L8-02
(the Inverter overheating alarm detection level).
Speed reference limit (Setting: 31) (SPEC: E or later only)

OFF Other than ON condition
Enables the speed reference limit in the following conditions (During flux vector control method):
1. Frequency reference ≥ Frequency reference upper limit (d2-01)
Frequency reference ≤ Frequency reference lower limit (d2-02)
ON Frequency reference ≥ Output frequency lower limit of the multi-function analog input
(Setting: 9)
2. The frequency reference is less than the Min. output frequency (E1-09), and b1-05 is set to 1,
2, or 3.
Zero-servo End (Setting: 33) (SPEC: E or later only)

OFF The zero-servo command isn't being input or zero-servo position control hasn't been completed.
The position has been brought within the zero-servo completion width (b9-02) after the zero-servo
ON
command was input.
• This output function indicates that zero-servo position control has been completed.
• The output is turned ON after the zero-servo command is input and the difference between the zero-servo
operation starting position and the current position is within the zero-servo completion width (b9-02).
6-90
Monitor Constants
Monitor Constants
This section explains the analog monitor and pulse monitor constants.
Using the Analog Monitor Constants

This section explains the analog monitor constants.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the number of the monitor
item to be output (U1-)
Monitor from terminal FM. The monitor
H4-01 selection (ter- items that can be set depends on 1 to 99 2 No A A A A 41DH
minal FM) the control method.
4, 10 to 14, 25, 28 to 31, 34, 35,
39 to 43 cannot be set.
Sets the multi-function analog

output 1 voltage level gain.
Sets whether the monitor item
output will be output in multi-
Gain (termi- 0.00 to
H4-02 ples of 10 V. 1.00 Yes Q Q Q Q 41EH
nal FM) 2.50
The maximum output from the
terminal is 10 V.
A meter calibration function is
available.

output 1 voltage level bias.
down parallel movement as a
Bias (termi- -10.0 to
H4-03 percentage of 10 V. 0.0% Yes A A A A 41FH
nal FM) +10.0
terminal is 10 V.
available.
Sets the number of the monitor

item to be output (U1-)
from terminal AM.
Monitor
The monitor items that can be
H4-04 selection (ter- 1 to 99 3 No A A A A 420H
set depends on the control
minal AM)
method.
4, 10 to 14, 25, 28 to 31, 34, 35,
39 to 43 cannot be set.
Set the voltage level gain for
multi-function analog output 2.
Set the number of multiples of
10 V to be output as the 100%
Gain (termi- 0.00 to
H4-05 output for the monitor items. 0.50 Yes Q Q Q Q 421H
nal AM) 2.50
terminal is 10 V.
available.
6-91
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
output 2 voltage level bias.
down parallel movement as a
Bias (termi- -10.0 to
H4-06 percentage of 10 V. 0.0% Yes A A A A 422H
nal AM) +10.0
terminal is 10 V.
available.
Sets the signal output level for

Analog out-
multi-function output 1 (termi-
put 1 signal
H4-07 nal FM) 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 423H
level selec-
tion
Channel 1 Effective when the Analog

F4-01 monitor Monitor Board is used. 1 to 99 2 No A A A A 391H
selection Monitor selection:
Set the number of the monitor
Channel 1 0.00 to
F4-02 item to be output. (U1-) 1.00 Yes A A A A 392H
gain The monitor items that can be 2.50
Channel 2 set depends on the control
F4-03 monitor method. 1 to 99 3 No A A A A 393H
selection Gain:
Set the multiple of 10 V for out-
putting monitor items.
4, 10 to 14, 25, 28, 31, 34, 35,
39, 40, 42 cannot be set. 29 to 31
are not used. When the AO-12
Analog Monitor Board is used,
outputs of ± 10 V are possible.
Channel 2 0.00 to
F4-04 To output ± 10 V, set F4-07 or 0.50 Yes A A A A 394H
gain 2.50
F4-08 to 1. When the AO-08
Analog Monitor Board is used,
only outputs of 0 to +10 V are
possible.
available.
Channel 1 Sets the channel 1 item bias to

-10.0 to
F4-05 output moni- 100%/10 V when the Analog 0.0% Yes A A A A 395H
10.0
tor bias Monitor Board is used.
Channel 2 Sets the channel 2 item bias to

-10.0 to
F4-06 output moni- 100%/10 V when the Analog 0.0% Yes A A A A 396H
10.0
tor bias Monitor Board is used.
Analog out-
F4-07 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 397H
channel 1
Analog out-
F4-08 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 398H
channel 2
6-92
Monitor Constants
Selecting Analog Monitor Items

The digital operator monitor items (U1- [status monitor]) are output from multi-function analog output
terminals FM-AC and AM-AC. Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants, and set the values for the part of U1-
(status monitor).
Alternatively, you can output monitor items (U1- [status monitor]) from analog output option terminal
channels 1 and 2 on analog monitor boards AO-08 and AO-12. Refer to the table of constants, and set the val-
ues.
Adjusting the Analog Monitor Items

Adjust the output voltage for multi-function analog output terminals FM-AC and AM-AC using the gain and
bias in H4-02, H4-03, H4-05, and H4-06. Also, adjust the output voltage for output channels 1 and 2 of Ana-
log Output option boards AO-08 and AO-12 using the gain and bias in F4-02, F4-04, F4-05, and F4-06.
Adjusting the Meter

The output voltage for terminals FM-AC and AM-AC and output channels 1 and 2 of the AO option board can
be adjusted while the Inverter is stopped. For example, just pressing the Enter Key and displaying the data set-
ting display for H4-02 or H4-03 will cause the following voltage to be output by the FM-AC terminals.
10 V/100% monitor output × output gain (H4-02) + output bias (H4-03)
Just pressing the Enter Key and displaying the data setting display for F4-02 or F4-05 will cause the following
voltage to be output to channel 1 of the AO option board.
10 V/100% monitor output × output gain (F4-02) + output bias (F4-05)
Output voltage
Gain x 10 V
Bias x 10/100 V
Monitor item
Fig 6.56 Monitor Output Adjustment
Switching Analog Monitor Signal Levels

Monitor items corresponding to −10 to 10 V output 0 to 10 V signals when the monitor value is positive (+),
and 0 to -10 V signals when the monitor value is negative (-). For monitor items corresponding to −10 to 10 V,
refer to Chapter 5 User Constants.
You can select the signal levels separately for multi-function analog output terminals and analog output option
terminals.
INFO
6-93
Using Pulse Train Monitor Contents
This section explains pulse monitor constants.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Select the pulse train monitor
output items (value of the
Pulse train 1, 2, 5,
part of U1-).
H6-06 monitor 20, 24, 2 Yes A A A A 431H
There are two types of monitor
selection 36
items: Speed-related items and
PID-related items.
Set the number of pulses output

when speed is 100% in hertz.
Pulse train
Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to 0, 0 to
H6-07 monitor scal- 1440 Hz Yes A A A A 432H
to make the pulse train monitor 32000
ing
output synchronously to the out-
put frequency.
Selecting Pulse Monitor Items

Output digital operator monitor items (U1- [status monitor]) from pulse monitor terminal MP-AC. Refer
to Chapter 5 User Constants, and set the part of U1- (Status monitor). The possible monitor selec-
tions are limited as follows: U1-01, 02, 05, 20, 24, 36.
Adjusting the Pulse Monitor Items

Adjust the pulse frequency output from pulse monitor terminal MP-AC. Set the pulse frequency output when
100% frequency is output to H6-07.
Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to 0, to output the frequency synchronous with the Inverter's U-phase output.
When using a pulse monitor constant, connect a peripheral device according to the following load conditions.
If the load conditions are different, there is a risk of characteristic insufficiency or damage to the machinery.
Using a Sourcing Output

Load impedance
Output Voltage MP
(Isolated) Load Impedance (kΩ)
VRL (V)
VRL
+5 V min. 1.5 kΩ min. AC
+8 V min. 3.5 kΩ min.
+10 V min. 10 kΩ min.
6-94
Monitor Constants
External power supply

Using a Sinking Input
External Power 12 VDC±10%, Load impedance
Supply (V) 15 VDC±10% MP
Sink Current (mA) 16 mA Max Sinking current
AC
6-95
Individual Functions
This section explains the individual functions used in special applications.
Using MEMOBUS Communications

You can perform serial communications with MEMOCON-series Programmable Controllers (PLCs) or simi-
lar devices using the MEMOBUS protocol.
MEMOBUS Communications Configuration

MEMOBUS communications are configured using 1 master (PLC) and a maximum of 31 slaves. Serial com-
munications between master and slave are normally started by the master, and the slave responds.
The master performs signal communications with one slave at a time. Consequently, you must set the address
of each slave beforehand, so the master can perform signal communications using that address. Slaves receiv-
ing commands from the master perform the specified function, and send a response to the master.
MEMOCON-series PLC
Inverter Inverter Inverter
RS-485 connections
example
Fig 6.57 Example of Connections between PLC and Inverter
Communications Specifications
The MEMOBUS communications specifications are shown in the following table.
Item Specifications
Interface RS-422, RS-485
Communications Cycle Asynchronous (Start-stop synchronization)
Baud rate: Select from 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600, and 19,200 bps.
Data length: 8 bits fixed
Communications Parameters
Parity: Select from even, odd, or none.
Stop bits: 1 bit fixed
Communications Protocol MEMOBUS (RTU mode only)
Number of Connectable Units 31 units max. (when using RS-485)
6-96
Communications Connection Terminal

MEMOBUS communications use the following terminals: S+, S-, R+, and R-. Set the terminating resistance
by turning ON pin 1 of switch S1 for the last Inverter only, as seen from the PLC.
S+ +
-
S- S1 Terminating
O OFF ON resistance
RS-422A 1
or RS-485 R+ F
F 2
Switch
R- 1
Terminating resistance (1/2 W, 110 Ohms)
Fig 6.58 Communications Connection Terminal
1. Separate the communication cables from the main circuit cables and other wiring and power cables.
2. Use shielded cables for the communication cables, connect the shield cover to the Inverter earth terminal,
and arrange the terminals so that the other end is not connected to prevent operating errors due to noise.
IMPORTANT 3. When using RS-485 communications, connect S+ to R+, and S- to R-, on the Inverter exterior.
R+ R S+ S
Procedure for Communicating with the PLC

Use the following procedure to perform communications with the PLC.
1. Turn OFF the power supply turned and connect the communication cable between the PLC and the
Inverter.
2. Turn ON the power supply.
3. Set the required communications constants (H5-01 to H5-07) using the Digital Operator.
4. Turn OFF the power supply, and check that the Digital Operator display has completely disappeared.
5. Turn ON the power supply once again.
6. Perform communications with the PLC.
Set the timer on the master to monitor response time from the slave. Set the master so that if the slave does
not respond to the master within the set time, the same command message will be sent from the master
again.
INFO
6-97
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
input method.
0: Digital Operator
Reference 1: Control circuit terminal
selection 2: MEMOBUS communica-
tions
3: Option board

method.
Operation 0: Digital Operator
(sequence input)
tion 2: MEMOBUS communica-
tions
3: Option board
H5-01 Slave address Set the Inverter's slave address. 0 to 20*1 1FH No A A A A 425H
Set the baud rate for MEMO-

BUS communications of com-
munications connection
Communica- terminals.
H5-02 tion speed 0: 1200 bps 0 to 4 3 No A A A A 426H
selection 1: 2400 bps
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
Set the parity for MEMOBUS

Communica- communications of communica-
tions connection terminals.
H5-03 tion parity 0 to 2 0 No A A A A 427H
0: No parity
selection 1: Even parity
2: Odd parity

Stopping 0: Deceleration to stop using
method after deceleration time in C1-02
H5-04 0 to 3 3 No A A A A 428H
communica- 1: Coast to stop
tion error 2: Emergency stop using
deceleration time in C1-09
Communica- Set whether or not a communi-

tion error cations timeout is to be detected
H5-05 as a communications error. 0 or 1 1 No A A A A 429H
detection 0: Do not detect.
selection 1: Detect
Send wait Set the time from the Inverter

H5-06 receiving data to when the 5 to 65 5 ms No A A A A 42AH
time Inverter starts to send.
Select to enable or disable RTS

control.
RTS control 0: Disabled (RTS is always
H5-07 0 or 1 1 No A A A A 42BH
ON/OFF ON)
1: Enabled (RTS turns ON only
when sending)
Unit Selec- Selects the units used for

tion for MEMOBUS registry 0025H
H5-10 (monitors the output voltage ref-
MEMOBUS 0, 1 0 No A A A A 436H
*2 erence).
Register 0: 0.1 V units
0025H 1: 1 V units
* 1. Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications.
6-98
MEMOBUS communications can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in b1-01 and b1-
02.
• Monitoring operation status from the PLC
• Setting and reading constants
• Resetting errors
• Inputting multi-function commands
An OR operation is performed between the multi-function commands input from the PLC and commands
input from multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S8.
Message Format
In MEMOBUS communications, the master sends commands to the slave, and the slave responds. The mes-
sage format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below, and the length of data packets is
changed by the command (function) contents.
Slave address
Function code
Data
Error check
The space between messages must support the following.
PLC to Inverter Inverter to PLC PLC to Inverter
Command message Response message Command message

Time (Seconds)
24 bits long H5-06 24 bits long 5 ms min.

setting
Fig 6.59 Message Spacing
Slave Address
Set the Inverter address from 0 to 20 Hex. If you set 0, commands from the master will be broadcast (i.e., the
Inverter will not return responses).
Function Code
The function code specifies commands. There are three function codes, as shown below.
Command Message Response Message
Function Code
Function Min. Max. Min. Max.
(Hexadecimal)
(Bytes) (Bytes) (Bytes) (Bytes)
03H Read storage register contents 8 8 7 37
08H Loopback test 8 8 8 8
10H Write multiple storage registers 11 41 8 8
Data
Configure consecutive data by combining the storage register address (test code for a loopback address) and
the data the register contains. The data length changes depending on the command details.
6-99
Error Check
Errors are detected during communications using CRC-16. Perform calculations using the following method.
1. The factory setting for CRC-16 communications is usually 0, but when using the MEMOBUS system, set
the factory setting to 1 (i.e., set all 16 bits to 1).
2. Calculate CRC-16 using MSB as slave address LSB, and LSB as the MSB of the final data.
3. Also calculate CRC-16 for response messages from the slaves, and compare them to the CRC-16 in the
response messages.
MEMOBUS Message Example

An example of MEMOBUS command/response messages is given below.
Reading Storage Register Contents

Read the contents of the storage register only for specified quantities whose addresses are consecutive, starting
from a specified address. The contents of the storage register are separated into higher place 8 bits and lower
place 8 bits, and comprise the data within response messages in address order.
The following table shows message examples when reading status signals, error details, data link status, and
frequency references from the slave 2 Inverter.
Response Message Response Message

Command Message
(During Normal Operation) (During Error)
Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H
Function Code 03H Function Code 03H Function Code 83H
Higher
00H Data quantity 08H Error code 03H
Start place
Address Lower Higher Higher
20H 00H F1H
place Lead stor- place place
CRC-16
Higher age register Lower Lower
00H 65H 31H
place place place
Quantity
Lower Higher
04H 00H
place Next stor- place
Higher age register Lower
45H 00H
place place
CRC-16
Lower Higher
F0H 00H
place Next stor- place
age register Lower
00H
place
Higher
01H
Next stor- place
age register Lower
F4H
place
Higher
AFH
place
CRC-16
Lower
82H
place
6-100
Loopback Test
The loopback test returns command messages directly as response messages without changing the contents to
check the communications between the master and slave. You can set user-defined test code and data values.
The following table shows a message example when performing a loopback test with the slave 1 Inverter.
Command Message
Slave address 01H Slave address 01H Slave address 01H
Function code 08H Function code 08H Function code 89H
Higher Higher
00H 00H Error Code 01H
place place
Test Code Test Code
Lower Lower Higher
00H 00H 86H
place place place
CRC-16
Higher Higher Lower
A5H A5H 50H
place place place
Data Data
Lower Lower
37H 37H
place place
Higher Higher
DAH DAH
place place
CRC-16 CRC-16
Lower Lower
8DH 8DH
place place
Writing to Multiple Storage Registers

Write the specified data to each specified storage register from the specified addresses. The written data must
be in the following order in the command message: Higher place 8 bits, then lower place 8 bits, in storage reg-
ister address order.
The following table shows an example of a message when forward operation has been set at a frequency refer-
ence of 60.0 Hz in the slave 1 Inverter by the PLC.
Command Message
Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H
Function Code 10H Function Code 10H Function Code 90H
Higher Higher
00H 00H Error code 02H
Start place Start place
Address Lower Address Lower Higher
01H 01H CDH
place place place
CRC-16
Higher Higher Lower
00H 00H C1H
place place place
Quantity Quantity
Lower Lower
02H 02H
place place
Higher
No. of data 04H 10H
place
CRC-16
Higher Lower
00H 08H
place place
Lead data
Lower
01H
place
Higher
02H
place
Next data
Lower
58H
place
Higher
63H
place
CRC-16
Lower
39H
place
6-101
Set the number of data specified using command messages as quantity of specified messages x 2. Handle
response messages in the same way.
INFO
Data Tables
The data tables are shown below. The types of data are as follows: Reference data, monitor data, and broadcast
data.
Reference Data
The reference data table is shown below. You can both read and write reference data.
Register No. Contents
0000H Not used
Frequency reference
Bit 0 Forward Run/Stop Command 1: Forward run 0: Stop
Bit 1 Reverse Run/Stop Command 1: Reverse run 0: Stop
Bit 2 External fault 1: Error (EFO)
Bit 3 Fault reset 1: Reset command
Bit 4 ComNet
0001H Bit 5 ComCtrl
Bit 6 Multi-function input command 3
Bit A Multi-function input command 7
Bit B Multi-function input command 8
Bit C to F Not used
0002H Frequency reference (Set units using constant o1-03)
0003H Not used
0004H Not used
0005H Not used
0006H PID target value
0007H Analog output 1 setting (-11 V/-1540 to 11 V/1540)
0008H Analog output 2 setting (-11 V/-1540 to 11 V/1540)
Multi-function contact output setting
Bit 0 Contact output (Terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1 PHC1(Contact P1-PC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2 PHC2(Contact P2-PC) 1: ON 0: OFF
0009H
Bit 3 to 5 Not used
Bit 6 Set error contact (terminal MA-MC) output using bit 7. 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 7 Error contact (terminal MA-MC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 8 to F Not used
000AH to 000EH Not used
Reference selection settings
Bit 0 Not used
Bit 1 Use MEMOBUS 0006H PID target value 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Bits 2 to B Not used
000FH
C Broadcast data terminal S5 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
D Broadcast data terminal S6 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
E Broadcast data terminal S7 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
F Broadcast data terminal S8 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Note Write 0 to all unused bits. Also, do not write data to reserved registers.
6-102
Monitor Data
The following table shows the monitor data. Monitor data can only be read.
Inverter status
Bit 0 Operation 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Bit 1 Reverse operation 1: Reverse operation 0: Forward operation
Bit 2 Inverter startup complete 1: Completed 2: Not completed
Bit 3 Error 1: Error
0020H
Bit 4 Data setting error 1: Error
Bit 5 Multi-function contact output (terminal M1 - M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 6 Multi-function PHC output 1 (terminal P1 - PC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Error details
Bit 0 Overcurrent (OC) Ground fault (GF)
Bit 1 Main circuit overvoltage (OV)
Bit 2 Inverter overload (OL2)
Bit 3 Inverter overheat (OH1, OH2)
Bit 4 Injection brake transistor resistance overheat (rr, rH)
Bit 5 Fuse blown (PUF)
Bit 6 PID feedback reference lost (FbL)
Bit 7 External fault (EF, EFO)
0021H
Bit 8 Hardware error (CPF)
Bit 9 Motor overload (OL1), overtorque 1 (OL3) detected, or overtorque 2 (OL4) detected
Bit A PG broken wire detected (PGO), Overspeed (OS), Speed deviation (DEV)
Bit B Main circuit undervoltage (UV) detected
Main circuit undervoltage (UV1), control power supply error (UV2), inrush preven-
Bit C
tion circuit error (UV3), power loss
Bit D Main Circuit Voltage Fault (PF), Output Open-phase (LF)
Bit E MEMOBUS communications error (CE)
Bit F Operator disconnected (OPR)
Data link status
Bit 0 Writing data
Bit 1 Not used
0022H Bit 2 Not used
Bit 3 Upper and lower limit errors
Bit 4 Data integrity error
0023H Frequency reference (U1-01)
0024H Output frequency (U1-02)
0025H Output voltage reference (U1-06)
0026H Output current (U1-03) (Unit: 1/0.1A)
0027H Output power (U1-08)
0028H Torque reference (U1-09)
0029H Not used
002AH Not used
Sequence input status
Bit 0 Multi-function contact input terminal S1 1: ON, 0: OFF
002BH
6-103
Inverter status
Bit 0 Operation 1: Operating
Bit 1 Zero-speed 1: Zero-speed
Bit 2 Frequency matching 1: Matched
Bit 3 User-defined speed matching 1: Matched
Bit 4 Frequency detection 1 1: Output frequency ≤ L4-01
Bit 5 Frequency detection 2 1: Output frequency ≥ L4-01
Bit 6 Inverter startup completed 1: Startup completed
002CH Bit 7 Low voltage detection 1: Detected
Bit 8 Baseblock 1: Inverter output baseblock
Bit 9 Frequency reference mode 1: Not communications 0: Communications
Bit A Run Command mode 1: Not communications 0: Communications
Bit B Overtorque detection 1: Detected
Bit C Frequency reference lost 1: Lost
Bit D Retrying error 1: Retrying
Bit E Error (including MEMOBUS communications time-out) 1:Error occurred
Bit F MEMOBUS communications time-out 1: Timed out
Multi-function contact output status
Bit 0 Multi-function contact output (terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
002DH Bit 1 Multi-function PHC output 1 (terminal P1 - PC) 1: ON 0: OFF
002EH - 0030H Not used
0031H Main circuit DC voltage
0032H Torque monitor (Unit: 1/0.1%)
0033H Output power (U1-08)
0034H - 0037H Not used
0038H PID feedback quantity (Input equivalent to 100%/Max. output frequency; 10/1%; without sign)
0039H PID input quantity (±100%/±Max. output frequency; 10/1%; with sign)
003AH PID output quantity (±100%/±Max. output frequency; 10/1%; with sign)
003BH CPU software number
003CH Flash software number
Communications error details
Bit 0 CRC error
Bit 1 Invalid data length
Bit 2 Not used
003DH Bit 3 Parity error
Bit 4 Overrun error
Bit 5 Framing error
Bit 6 Time-out
003EH kVA setting
003FH Control method
Note Communications error details are stored until an fault reset is input (you can also reset while the Unit is operating).
6-104
Broadcast Data
The following table shows the broadcast data. You can also write this data.
Register
Contents
Address
Operation signal
Bit 0 Run Command 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Bit 1 Reverse operation command 1: Reverse 0: Forward
Bits 2 and 3 Not used
Bit 4 External fault 1: Error (set using H1-01)
0001H Bit 5 Fault reset 1: Reset command (set using H1-02)
Bit C Multi-function contact input terminal S5 input
Bit D Multi-function contact input terminal S6 input
Bit E Multi-function contact input terminal S7 input
Bit F Multi-function contact input terminal S8 input
Frequency
0002H 30000/100%
reference
Note Bit signals not defined in the broadcast operation signals use local node data signals continuously.
ENTER Command
When writing constants to the Inverter from the PLC using MEMOBUS communications, the constants are
temporarily stored in the constant data area in the Inverter. To enable these constants in the constant data area,
use the ENTER command.
There are two types of ENTER commands: ENTER commands that enable constant data in RAM, and
ENTER commands that write data to EEPROM (non-volatile memory) in the Inverter at the same time as
enabling data in RAM.
The following table shows the ENTER command data. ENTER command data can only be written.
The ENTER command is enabled by writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0901H.
0900H Write constant data to EEPROM
0910H Constant data is not written to EEPROM, but refreshed in RAM only.
The maximum number of times you can write to EEPROM using the Inverter is 100 thousand. Do not fre-
quently execute ENTER commands (0900H) written to EEPROM.
The ENTER command registers are write-only. Consequently, if reading these registers, the register address
will become invalid (Error code: 02H).
INFO
6-105
Error Codes
The following table shows MEMOBUS communications error codes.
Error Code Contents
Function code error
01H
A function code other than 03H, 08H, or 10H has been set by the PLC.
Invalid register number error
02H • The register address you are attempting to access is not recorded anywhere.
• With broadcast sending, a start address other than 0000H, 0001H, or 0002H has been set.
Invalid quantity error
03H • The number of data packets being read or written is outside the range 1 to 16.
• In write mode, the number of data packets in the message is not No. of packets x 2.
Data setting error
• A simple upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing con-
21H
stants.
• When writing constants, the constant setting is invalid.
Write mode error
• Attempting to write constants from the PLC during operation.
• Attempting to write via ENTER commands from the PLC during operation.
22H
• Attempting to write constants other than A1-00 to A1-05, E1-03, or 02-04 when warning alarm
CPF03 (defective EEPROM) has occurred.
• Attempting to write read-only data.
Writing during main circuit undervoltage (UV) error
23H • Writing constants from the PLC during UV (main circuit undervoltage) alarm.
• Writing via ENTER commands from the PLC during UV (main circuit undervoltage) alarm.
Writing error during constants processing
24H
Attempting to write constants from the PLC while processing constants in the Inverter.
Slave Not Responding

In the following cases, the slave will ignore the write function. If the slave address specified in the command
message is 0, all slaves execute the write function, but do not return response messages to the master.
• When a communications error (overrun, framing, parity, or CRC-16) is detected in the command message.
• When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the Inverter do not agree.
• When the data that configures the message and the data time length exceeds 24 bits.
• When the command message data length is invalid.
Set a timer in the master to monitor response time from the slaves. Make the setting so that if no response is
sent to the master from the slave within the set time, the same command message is sent again from the mas-
ter.
6-106
Self-Diagnosis
The Inverter has a built-in function for self-diagnosing the operations of serial communications interface cir-
cuits. This function is called the self-diagnosis function. The self-diagnosis function connects the communica-
tions parts of the send and receive terminals, receives the data sent by the Inverter, and checks if
communications are being performed normally.
Perform the self-diagnosis function using the following procedure.
1. Turn ON the power supply to the Inverter, and set 67 (communications test mode) in constant H1-05 (Ter-
minal S7 Function Selection).
2. Turn OFF the power supply to the Inverter.
3. Perform wiring according to the following diagram while the power supply is turned OFF.
4. Turn ON the terminating resistance. (Turn ON pin 1 on DIP switch 1.)
5. Turn ON the power supply to the Inverter again.
Fig 6.60 Details of Communications Terminals
“Pass” will be displayed if self-diagnosis is completed without an error occurring.

If an error occurs, a CE (MEMOBUS communications error) alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator,
the error contact output will be turned ON, and the Inverter operation ready signal will be turned OFF.
6-107
Using the Timer Function
Multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S8 can be designated as timer function input terminals, and multi-
function output terminals M1-M2, P1-PC, and P2-PC can be designated as timer function output terminals. By
setting the delay time, you can erase chattering from the sensors and switches.
• Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-06 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S8) to 18 (timer func-
tion input).
• Set H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, P1-PC, and P2-PC function selection) to 12
(timer function output).
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the timer function output
ON-delay time (dead band) for
Timer func-
the timer function input, in 1- 0.0 to
b4-01 tion ON- 0.0 s No A A A A 1A3H
second units. 300.0
delay time
Enabled when a timer function
is set in H1- or H2-.
Sets the timer function output

OFF-delay time (dead band) for
Timer func-
the timer function input, in 1- 0.0 to
b4-02 tion OFF- 0.0 s No A A A A 1A4H
second units. 300.0
delay time
Enabled when a timer function
is set in H1- or H2-.
Setting Example
When the timer function input ON time is longer than the value set in b4-01, the timer output function is
turned ON. When the timer function input OFF time is longer than the value set in b4-02, the timer output
function is turned OFF. An example of timer function operation is given in the following diagram.
Timer function input
Timer function output
Fig 6.61 Timer Function Operation Example
6-108
Using PID Control

PID control is a method of making the feedback value (detection value) match the set target value. By combin-
ing proportional control (P), integral control (I), and derivative control (D), you can even control targets
(machinery) with play time.
The characteristics of the PID control operations are given below.
P control Outputs the amount of operation proportional to the deviation. You cannot, however, set the
deviation to zero using P control alone.
I control Outputs the amount of operation that integrates the deviation. Used for matching feedback
value to the target value. I control is not suited, however, to rapid variations.
D control Outputs the amount of operation derived from the deviation. Can respond promptly to rapid
variations.
PID Control Operation

To understand the differences between each PID control operation (P, I, and D, the variation in the amount of
operation (output frequency) is as shown in the following diagram when the deviation (i.e., the difference
between the target value and feedback value) is fixed.
Deviation
Time
PID control
Amount of operation I control
D control
P control
Time
Fig 6.62 PID Control Operation
PID Control Applications

The following table shows examples of PID control applications using the Inverter.
Applica- Example of Sen-
Control Details
tion sor Used
• Feeds back machinery speed information, and matches speed to the target value.
Speed Con- Tachometer genera-
• Inputs speed information from other machinery as the target value, and performs
trol tor
synchronous control using the actual speed feedback.
Pressure
Feeds back pressure information, and performs constant pressure control. Pressure sensor
Control
Flow Rate
Feeds back flow rate information, and controls the flow rate highly accurately. Flow rate sensor
Control
Tempera-
Feeds back temperature information, and performs temperature adjustment control • Thermocouple
ture Con-
by rotating the fan. • Thermistor
trol
6-109
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Deviation is D-
controlled.)
2: Enabled (Feedback value is
D-controlled.)
PID control 3: PID control enabled
b5-01 method selec- (frequency reference + PID 0 to 4 0 No A A A A 1A5H
tion output, D control of
deviation)
4: PID control enabled
(frequency reference + PID
output, D control of
feedback value).
Sets P-control proportional gain

0.00
Proportional as a percentage.
b5-02 to 1.00 Yes A A A A 1A6H
gain (P) P-control is not performed when
25.00
the setting is 0.00.
Sets I-control integral time in 1-

Integral (I) second units. 0.0 to
b5-03 1.0 s Yes A A A A 1A7H
time I-control is not performed when 360.0
the setting is 0.0.
Sets the I-control limit as a per-

Integral (I) 0.0 to
b5-04 centage of the maximum output 100.0% Yes A A A A 1A8H
limit 100.0
frequency.
Sets D-control derivative time in

Derivative 1-second units. 0.00 to
b5-05 0.00 s Yes A A A A 1A9H
(D) time D-control is not performed when 10.00
the setting is 0.00.
Sets the limit after PID-control

0.0 to
b5-06 PID limit as a percentage of the maximum 100.0% Yes A A A A 1AAH
100.0
output frequency.
Sets the offset after PID-control -100.0

PID offset
b5-07 as a percentage of the maximum to 0.0% Yes A A A A 1ABH
adjustment
output frequency. +100.0
Sets the time constant for low

PID primary
pass filter for PID-control out- 0.00 to
b5-08 delay time 0.00 s Yes A A A A 1ACH
puts in 1-second units. 10.00
constant
Not usually necessary to set.
Select forward/reverse for PID

PID output output.
b5-09 characteris- 0: PID output is forward. 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 1ADH
tics selection 1: PID output is reverse
(highlights the output code)
PID output 0.0 to

b5-10 Sets output gain. 1.0 No A A A A 1AEH
gain 25.0
0: 0 limit when PID output is

negative.
PID reverse
1: Reverses when PID output is
b5-11 output selec- 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 1AFH
negative.
tion
0 limit when reverse prohibit is
selected using b1-04.
6-110
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0: No detection of loss of PID
feedback.
1: Detection of loss of PID
feedback.
Selection of Operation continues during
PID feed- detection, with the
b5-12 back com- malfunctioning contact not 0 to 2 0 No A A A A 1B0H
mand loss operating.
detection 2: Detection of loss of PID
feedback.
Coasts to stop during
detection, and fault contact
operates.
PID feed-
Sets the PID feedback loss
back com-
detection level as a percent
b5-13 mand loss 0 to 100 0% No A A A A 1B1H
units, with the maximum output
detection
frequency at 100%.
level
PID feed-
back com-
Sets the PID feedback loss 0.0 to
b5-14 mand loss 1.0 s No A A A A 1B2H
detection level in s units. 25.5
detection
time
PID sleep 0.0 to

function Set the PID sleep function start 400.0 *1
b5-15 0.0 Hz No A A A A 1B3H
operation level as a frequency. 0.0 to
level 300.0 *2
PID sleep
Set the delay time until the PID 0.0 to
b5-16 operation 0.0 s No A A A A 1B4H
sleep function starts in seconds. 25.5
delay time
0.0 to
Accel/decel 25.5
Set the accel/decel time for PID
b5-17 time for PID 0.0 s No A A A A 1B5H
reference in seconds. 0.0 to
reference
6000.0

Monitor Functions
Control Methods
Min. V/f
Open
Flux BUS
Output PG
Vec-
tor ter
tor
Monitors the feedback value
PID feed- when PID control is used. 10 V: Max. frequency 0.01
U1-24 A A A A 57H
back value The input for the max. fre- (−10 to 10 V possible) %
quency corresponds to 100%.
PID feedback volume

PID input 10 V: Max. frequency 0.01
U1-36 Given as maximum frequency/ A A A A 63H
100%
PID control output

PID output 10 V: Max. frequency 0.01
U1-37 Given as maximum frequency/ A A A A 64H
100%
6-111
Control Methods
Min. V/f
Open
Flux BUS
Output PG
Vec-
tor ter
tor
PID command + PID command
PID com- bias 0.01
U1-38 10 V: Max. frequency A A A A 65H
mand Given as maximum frequency/ %
100%
Multi-Function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-06)
Control Methods
Set-
Open
Loop
V/f with Vec-
Value PG
Vec-
tor
tor
19 PID control disable (ON: PID control disabled) Yes Yes Yes Yes
PID control integral reset (reset when reset command is input or when stopped during
30 Yes Yes Yes Yes
PID control)
31 PID control integral hold (ON: Hold) Yes Yes Yes Yes
34 PID soft starter ON/OFF Yes Yes Yes Yes

35 PID input characteristics switch Yes Yes Yes Yes
Multi-Function Analog Input (H3-05, H3-09)
Control Methods
Set-
Open
Loop
V/f with Vec-
Value PG
Vec-
tor
tor
B PID feedback Maximum output frequency Yes Yes Yes Yes
C PID target value Maximum output frequency Yes Yes Yes Yes
PID Control Methods

There are four PID control methods. Select the method by setting constant b5-01.
Set Value Control Method
PID output becomes the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the difference between PID
1
target value and feedback value.
2 PID output becomes the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the PID feedback value.
PID output is added as compensation value of the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the
3
difference between PID target value and feedback value.
PID output is added as compensation value of the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the
4
PID feedback value.
6-112
PID Input Methods

Enable PID control using constant b5-01, and set the PID target value and PID feedback value.
PID Target Value Input Methods

Select the PID control target value input method according to the setting in b1-01 (Reference Selection).
Normally, the frequency reference selected in b1-01 is the PID target value, but you can also set the PID target
value as shown in the following table.
PID Target Input Method Setting Conditions
Multi-Function Analog Ter- Set H3-05 or H3-09 to C (PID target value). Also, be sure to set H6-01 (pulse train input
function selection) to 1 (PID feedback value).
minal A2, or A3 Input The negative inputs cannot be used for target values.
Set MEMOBUS bit 1 in register address 000FH to 1 (enable/disable PID target value
MEMOBUS register 0006H
from communications) to be able to use register number 0006H as the PID target value.
Pulse train input Set H6-01 to 2 (PID target value).
PID Feedback Input Methods

Select one of the following PID control feedback input methods.
Input Method Setting Conditions
Set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-func-

tion Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to B (PID feedback).
Pulse train input Set H6-01 to 1 (PID feedback).
Adjust PID target value and PID feedback value using the following items.
• Analog input: Adjust using the analog input terminal gain and bias.
• Pulse train input: Adjust using pulse train scaling, pulse train input gain, and pulse train input bias.
INFO
PID Adjustment Methods

Use the following procedure to adjust PID while performing PID control and measuring the response wave-
form.
1. Set b5-01 (PID Control Method Selection) to 1 or 2 (PID control enabled).
2. Increase b5-02 (Proportional Gain (P)) to within a range that does not vibrate.
3. Reduce b5-03 (Integral (I) time) to within a range that does not vibrate.
4. Increase b5-05 (Derivative (D) time) to within a range that does not vibrate.
6-113
PID Fine Adjustment Methods
This section explains the fine adjustment of PID after setting the PID control constants.
Suppressing Overshoot
If overshoot occurs, reduce derivative time (D), and increase integral time (I).
Response Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Set a Rapidly Stabilizing Control Condition

To rapidly stabilize the control even if overshoot occurs, reduce integral time (I), and lengthen derivative time
(D).
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Suppressing Long-cycle Vibration

If vibration occurs with a longer cycle than the integral time (I) set value, the integral operation is too strong.
Lengthen the integral time (I) to suppress the vibration.
After adjustment
Time
6-114
Suppressing Short Cycle Vibration

If vibration occurs when the vibration cycle is short, and the cycle is almost identical to the derivative time (D)
set value, the differential operation is too strong. Shorten the derivative time (D) to suppress the vibration.
If vibration continues even when the derivative time (D) is set to 0.00 (D control disabled), reduce the propor-
tional gain (P), or increase the PID primary delay time constant.
After adjustment
Time
Setting Precautions
• In PID control, the b5-04 constant is used to prevent the calculated integral control value from exceeding a
specified amount. If the load changes rapidly, the machine may be damaged or the motor may stall because
of unpredictable response from the Inverter. In this case, reduce the set value.
• The b5-06 constant is used to prevent the arithmetic operation following the PID control calculation from
exceeding a specified amount. Set taking the maximum output frequency to be 100%.
• The b5-07 constant is used to adjust PID control offset. Set in increments of 0.1%, taking the maximum
output frequency to be 100%.
• Set the low pass filter time constant for the PID control output in b5-08. Enable this constant to prevent
machinery resonance from occurring when machinery adhesive abrasion is great, or rigidity is poor. In this
case, set the constant to be greater than the resonance frequency cycle. Increase this time constant to
reduce Inverter responsiveness.
• Using b5-09, you can invert the PID output polarity. Consequently, if you increase the PID target value,
you can apply this constant to applications to lower the Inverter output frequency.
• Using b5-10, you can apply gain to the PID control output. Enable this constant to adjust the amount of
compensation if adding PID control output to the frequency reference as compensation.
• When PID control output is negative, you can use constant b5-11 to invert the Inverter. When b1-04 (Pro-
hibition of Reverse Operation) is set to 1 (enabled), however, PID output limit is 0.
• With the Inverter, by setting an independent acceleration/deceleration time in constant b5-17, you can
increase or decrease the PID target value using the acceleration/deceleration time. The acceleration/
deceleration function (constant C1) used normally, however, is allocated after PID control, so depending
on the settings, resonance with PID control and hunting in the machinery may occur. If this happens,
reduce constant C1 until hunting does not occur, and maintain the acceleration/deceleration time using b5-
17. Also, you can disable the set value in b5-17 from the external terminals during operation using multi-
function input set value 34 (PID soft starter).
6-115
6-116
b1-01
Pulse train input

4
Option Card 3
Frequency reference
using multi-step command
Serial Com b5-01=0 Enable/disable reverse operation
2 Frequency reference when PI output is negative
b5-01=3,4 Upper limit
(U1-01)
1 Fmax x109%
Terminal A1 PID OFF +
1 b5-11=0
Output frequency
b5-17 + (U1-02)
PID Control Block
0 b5-01=1,2
d1-01 Lower limit 0
0 PID ON b5-11=1
PID SFS Cancel Multi-function input PID control cancel
signal is ON. PID is OFF under the Upper limit
d1-02 Fmax x109%
following conditions:
b5-01 = 0
During JDG command input
Lower limit
d1-16 -(Fmaxx109%)
Pulse input terminal RP

H6-01=2 PID output monitor
PID target value (U1-37)
MEMOBUS communications (U1-38)
register 06 H PID target value
Set bit 1 of MEMOBUS
Terminal A2 or A3 PID register 0FH to 1
target value
Set PID target value in
multi-function analog input
Fig 6.63 PID Control Block

Terminal A2 or A3 PID
The following diagram shows the PID control block in the Inverter.
feedback H3-05 or
H3-09=B
Pulse input terminal RP PID input volume PID output
H6-01=1 (U1-36) gain (b5-10)
+
+ Store integral using Integral rset using
P multi-function inputs multi-function inputs
+
b5-01=2,4 Proportional -1 Integral Integral (I)
+ time PID primary delay
gain (P) (I) time
b5-05 b5-04 time constant 0
b5-02 b5-03 PID Limit
Derivative (D) + b5-08 1
time + + + + +
Z -1 1 1
b5-01=1,3 T T
Select multi-function inputs
+ + + -1 +
PID input characteristics
PID feed-back Z -1 1
Z -1 PID limit
value b5-06 PID offset
b5-01=1,3 adjustment (b5-07)
+
b5-05 Select PID output
characteristics selection
Z-1 Derivative (b5-09)
b5-01=2,4
time
PID Feedback Loss Detection

When performing PID control, be sure to use the PID feedback loss detection function. If PID feedback is lost,
the Inverter output frequency may accelerate to the maximum output frequency.
When setting b5-12 to 1 and the status of the PID feedback value detection level in b5-13 is insufficient and
continues for the time set in b5-14, an FbL (PID feedback reference lost) alarm will be displayed on the Digi-
tal Operator and Inverter operation will continue.
When b5-12 is set to 2, an FbL (PID feedback reference lost) error alarm will be displayed on the Digital
Operator, the error contact will operate, and Inverter operation will be stopped.
The time chart for PID feedback loss detection (set b5-12 to 2) is shown below.
PID feedback value
Loss detection
level
(b5-13)
Time
No FbL
detection
FbL detection
Loss detection time Loss detection time
(b5-14) (b5-14)
Fig 6.64 PID Feedback Loss Detection Time Chart
PID Sleep
The PID sleep function stops the Inverter when the PID sleep function delay time continues while the PID
control target value is at an insufficient level to operate the PID sleep function. When the PID sleep delay time
continues and the PID control target value is above the PID sleep function operation level, Inverter operation
will automatically resume.
When PID control is disabled, the PID sleep function is also disabled. When using the PID sleep function,
select decelerate to stop or coast to stop as the stopping method.
The PID sleep time chart is shown below.
PID target value

Sleep operation
level b5-15
Sleep operation Sleep operation
delay time delay time
b5-16 b5-16
Internal Run Command
Operation Stopped
Run Command has been input
External Run Command
Operation status output
Operating
Fig 6.65 PID Sleep Time Chart
6-117
Energy-saving
To perform energy saving, set b8-01 (Energy Saving Mode Selection) to 1. Energy-saving control can be per-
formed using both V/f control and vector control. The constants to be adjusted are different for each. In V/f
control, adjust b8-04 to b8-06, and in vector control, adjust b8-02 and b8-03.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Select whether to enable or dis-
Energy-sav-
able energy-saving control.
b8-01 ing mode 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 1CCH
0: Disable
selection
1: Enable
Energy-sav- Set the energy-saving gain with 0.0 to 0.7

b8-02 Yes No No A A 1CDH
ing gain the vector control method. 10.0 *1
Energy-sav- Set the energy-saving filter time

0.00 to 0.50 s
b8-03 ing filter time constant with the vector control Yes No No A A 1CEH
10.00 *2
constant method.
Set the maximum motor effi-

ciency value.
Energy-sav- 288.20
Set the motor rated capacity in 0.00 to
b8-04 ing coeffi- *3 No A A No No 1CFH
E2-11, and adjust the value by 655.00
cient *4
5% at a time until output power
reaches a minimum value.
Power detec-
Set the time constant for output 0 to
b8-05 tion filter 20 ms No A A No No 1D0H
power detection. 2000
time constant
Set the limit value of the voltage

control range during search
operation.
Perform search operation to
Search opera-
optimize operations using
b8-06 tion voltage 0 to 100 0% No A A No No 1D1H
minute variations in voltage
limiter
using energy-saving control. Set
to 0 to disable the search opera-
tion. 100% is the motor base
voltage.
Sets the motor rated slip in Hz

units.
Motor rated 0.00 to 2.90 Hz
E2-02 reference values for slip com- No A A A A 30FH
slip 20.00 *4
pensation.
Set the rated output of the motor

Motor rated in units of 0.01 kW. 0.00 to 0.40 kW
E2-11 No Q Q Q Q 318H
output This constant is automatically 650.00 *4
The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. The open-loop vector factory setting is given.
6-118
Adjusting Energy-saving Control

The method of adjustment during energy-saving control operations differs depending on the control method.
Refer to the following when making adjustments.
V/f Control
In V/f control method, the voltage for optimum motor efficiency is calculated and becomes the output voltage
reference.
• b8-04 (Energy-saving Coefficient) is set at the factory for motor use applied to the Inverter. If the motor
capacity differs from the motor applied to the Inverter, set the motor capacity in E2-11 (Motor Rated Out-
put). Also, adjust the output voltage in steps of 5 until it reaches minimum. The larger the energy-saving
coefficient, the greater the output voltage.
• To improve response when the load fluctuates, reduce the power detection filter time constant b8-05. If b8-
05 is set too small, however, motor rotations when the load is light may become unstable.
• Motor efficiency varies due to temperature fluctuations and differences in motor characteristics. Conse-
quently, control motor efficiency online to optimize efficiency by causing minute variations in voltage
using the search operation. Constant b8-06 (Search Operation Voltage Limiter) controls the range that con-
trol the voltage using the search operation. For 200 V Class Inverters, set the range to 100%/200 V, and for
400 V Class Inverters, set the range to 100%/400 V. Set to 0 to disable the search operation.
Vector Control
In vector control method, control the slip frequency so that motor efficiency is maximized.
• Taking the motor rated slip for the base frequency as optimum slip, calculate the optimum slip for motor
efficiency for each frequency. In vector control, be sure to perform autotuning, and set the motor rated slip.
• If the motor performs hunting when using energy-saving control in vector control, reduce the set value in
b8-02 (Energy-saving Gain), or increase the set value in b8-03 (Energy-saving Filter Time Constant).
6-119
Setting Motor Constants
In vector control method, the motor constants are set automatically using autotuning. If autotuning does not
complete normally, set them manually.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
A units.
0.32 to
Motor rated reference values for motor pro- 1.90 A
E2-01 6.40 No Q Q Q Q 30EH
*2
control.
Sets the motor rated slip in Hz
units.
Motor rated 0.00 to 2.90 Hz
E2-02 reference values for slip com- No A A A A 30FH
slip 20.00 *1
pensation.
Sets the motor no-load current in
0.00 to
Motor no- 1 A units. 1.20 A
E2-03 1.89 No A A A A 310H
load current This constant is automatically *1
*3
Sets the number of motor poles.
Number of
E2-04 This constant is automatically 2 to 48 4 poles No No Q No Q 311H
motor poles
Sets the motor phase-to-phase
Motor line- 0.000
resistance in Ω units. 9.842 Ω
E2-05 to-line resis- to No A A A A 312H
This constant is automatically *1
tance 65.000
motor leakage inductance as a
Motor leak percentage of the motor rated 0.0 to 18.2%
E2-06 No No No A A 313H
inductance voltage. 40.0 *1
Sets the motor iron saturation
Motor iron coefficient at 50% of magnetic
0.00 to
E2-07 saturation flux. 0.50 No No No A A 314H
0.50
coefficient 1 This constant is automatically
Sets the motor iron saturation
Motor iron coefficient at 75% of magnetic 0.50 to
E2-08 saturation flux. 0.75 0.75 No No No A A 315H
coefficient 2 This constant is automatically *4
6-120
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets motor mechanical loss as a
percentage of motor rated output
(W).
Adjust in the following circum-
Motor
stances: 0.0 to
E2-09 mechanical 0.0 No No No No A 316H
• When torque loss is large due 10.0
loss
to motor bearing.
• When the torque loss in the
pump or fan is large.
The set mechanical loss will
compensate for torque.
Motor iron
loss for 0 to 14 W
E2-10 Sets motor iron loss in W units. No A A No No 317H
torque com- 65535 *1
pensation
Set the rated output of the motor
Motor rated in units of 0.01 kW. 0.00 to 0.40 kW
E2-11 No Q Q Q Q 318H
output This constant is automatically 650.00 *1
E2-01.
* 4. The lower limit of E2-08 is the setting value of E2-07.
Manual Motor Constant Setting Methods

The motor constants settings methods are given below. Make (enter) settings referring to the motor test report.
Motor Rated Voltage Setting

Set E2-01 to the rated current on the motor nameplate.
Motor Rated Slip Setting

Set E2-02 to the motor rated slip calculated from the number of rated rotations on the motor nameplate.
Amount of motor rated slip = Motor rated frequency (Hz) - No. of rated rotations (min−1) x No. of motor
poles/120.
Motor No-Load Current Setting

Set E2-03 to the motor no-load current using the rated voltage and rated frequency. The motor no-load current
is not normally written on the motor nameplate. Consult the motor manufacturer.
Factory setting is the no-load current value for a standard Yaskawa 4-pole motor.
Number of Motor Poles Setting

E2-04 is displayed only when V/f control method with PG or flux vector control method is selected. Set the
number of motor poles (number of poles) as written on the motor nameplate.
Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Setting

E2-05 is set automatically when performing motor line-to-line resistance autotuning. When you cannot per-
form tuning, consult the motor manufacturer for the line-to-line resistance value. Calculate the resistance from
the line-to-line resistance value in the motor test report using the following formula, and then make the setting
accordingly.
6-121
• E-type isolation: [Line-to-line resistance (Ω) at 75°C of test report] × 0.92 (Ω)
• B-type isolation: [Line-to-line resistance (Ω) at 75°C of test report] × 0.92 (Ω)
• F-type isolation: [Line-to-line resistance (Ω) at 115°C of test report] × 0.87 (Ω)
Motor Leak Inductance Setting

Set the amount of voltage drop due to motor leak inductance in E2-06 using the percentage over the motor
rated voltage. Make this setting when the high-speed motor inductance is small. If the inductance is not writ-
ten on the motor nameplate, consult the motor manufacturer.
Motor Iron Saturation Coefficients 1 and 2 Settings

E2-07 and E2-08 and are set automatically using rotational autotuning.
Motor Mechanical Loss (SPEC: E or Later Only)

E2-09 is displayed only when the flux vector control method is selected. Adjust mechanical loss in the follow-
ing cases. (There is normally no reason to make this adjustment.) The mechanical loss setting is used to com-
pensate the torque.
• There is excessive torque loss from the motor bearings.
• There is excessive torque loss from a fan, pump, etc.
Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation Setting

E2-10 is displayed only when in V/f control method. To increase the torque compensation accuracy when in
V/f control method, set the motor iron loss in Watts.
Motor Rated Output

Set the rated output value of the motor indicated on the motor nameplate to E2-11.
This constant is automatically set during autotuning.
Setting the V/f Pattern

In V/f control method, you can set the Inverter input voltage and the V/f pattern as the need arises.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Con- Change MEMO
V/f with Vec-
ber tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Set the Inverter input voltage in 1
155 to
Input volt- volt. 200 V
E1-01 255 No Q Q Q Q 300H
age setting This setting is used as a reference *1
*1
value in protection functions.
0 to E: Select from the 15 preset
patterns.
V/f pattern
E1-03 F: Custom user-set patterns 0 to F F No Q Q No No 302H
selection
(Applicable for settings E1-
04 to E1-10.)
6-122
Control Methods
Con- Change MEMO
V/f with Vec-
ber tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
40.0 to
400.0
Max. output *6
E1-04 60.0 Hz No Q Q Q Q 303H
300.0
*5
Max. 0.0 to 200.0

E1-05 255.0 V No Q Q Q Q 304H
voltage
*1 *1*2
Output voltage (V) 0.0 to

400.0
Base *6
E1-06 60.0 Hz No Q Q Q Q 305H
frequency 0.0 to *2
300.0
*5
Frequency (Hz) 0.0 to

400.0
Mid. output To set V/f characteristics in a *6
3.0 Hz
E1-07 straight line, set the same values for No A A A No 306H
frequency 0.0 to *2
E1-07 and E1-09. In this case, the
setting for E1-08 will be disre- 300.0
*5
garded.
Mid. output Always ensure that the four frequen- 0.0 to
E1-08 frequency cies are set in the following manner: 15.0 V No A A A No 307H
voltage E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1- 255 *1 *1 *2
07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
0.0 to
400.0
Min. output *6
E1-09 1.5 Hz No Q Q Q A 308H
frequency 0.0 to *2
300.0
*5
Min. output 0.0 to

E1-10 frequency 9.0 V No A A A No 309H
255.0 *1 *2
voltage *1
0.0 to
400.0
Mid. output *6
E1-11 0.0 Hz No A A A A 30AH
frequency 2 0.0 to *3
300.0
Set only to fine-adjust V/f for the *5
output range. Normally, this setting
Mid. output is not required. 0.0 to
E1-12 frequency 0.0 V No A A A A 30BH
255.0 *3
voltage 2 *1
Base 0.0 to
E1-13 0.0 V No A A Q Q 30CH
voltage 255.0 *4
*1
* 3. E1-11 and E1-12 are disregarded when set to 0.0.
Setting Inverter Input Voltage

Set the Inverter input voltage correctly in E1-01 to match the power supply voltage. This set value will be the
standard value for the protection function and similar functions.
The overvoltage detection level (OV) and the braking transistor operation level (BTR) vary depending on the
input voltage as shown in the following table.
6-123
Inverter Class E1-01 Setting OV Detection Level BTR Operation Level∗
200 V Class All values Approx. 410 V Approx. 394 V
400 V or more Approx. 820 V Approx. 788 V
400 V Class
Less than 400 V Approx. 720 V Approx. 682 V
* These are values of operation levels for braking transistors built in Inverters of 0.4 to 18.5 kW. Refer to FOR VARISPEED-600 SERIES INVERTER BRAK-
ING UNIT BRAKING RESISTOR UNIT INSTRUCTIONS (TOBPC720600000) for operation levels for separately-installed type Braking Resistor Units.
If selecting a fixed V/f pattern (E1-03 = 0 to E) in V/f control the values of the max. voltage (E1-05), the mid.
Output frequency voltage (E1-08), and the min. output frequency voltage (E1-10) will change if the value for
the input voltage setting (E1-01) is changed.
Setting V/f Pattern

Set the V/f pattern in E1-03 when using V/f control (with or without a PG). There are two methods of setting
the V/f pattern: Select one of the 15 pattern types (set value: 0 to E) that have been set beforehand, or set a
user-defined V/f pattern (set value: F).
The factory setting for E1-03 is F. The contents of E1-03 when factory-set to F are the same as when E1-03 is
set to 1.
To select one of the existing patterns, refer to the following table.
Set
Characteristic Application Specifications
Value
0 50 Hz specifications
This pattern is used in general applications. 1 (F) 60 Hz specifications
Constant Torque Used when the load torque is fixed, regard- 60 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
2
Characteristic less of rotation speed, for linear transport 50 Hz
systems. 72 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
3
60 Hz
4 50 Hz specifications,× 3 decrement
This pattern is used for loads with torque 5 50 Hz specifications, × 2 decrement
Variable torque
proportional to two or three times the rota-
characteristic 6 60 Hz specifications, × 3 decrement
tion speed, such as fans and pumps.
7 60 Hz specifications, × 2 decrement
Select the high startup torque V/f pattern 50 Hz specifications, medium startup
only in the following cases. 8
torque
• The wiring distance between Inverter and
High Startup motor is large (approx. 150 m min.) 9 50 Hz specifications, large startup torque
Torque (See • A large torque is required at startup (ele-
vator loads, etc.) 60 Hz specifications, medium startup
Note)* • An AC reactor is inserted in the Inverter A
torque
input or output.
• You are operating a motor that is less B 60 Hz specifications, large startup torque
than optimum.
90 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
C
60 Hz
Fixed Output This pattern is used for frequencies of 60 120 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
D
Operation Hz or higher. A fixed voltage is applied. 60 Hz
180 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
E
60 Hz
* The torque is protected by the fully automatic torque boost function, so normally there is no need to use this pattern.
When you select these patterns, the values of constants E1-04 to E1-10 are changed automatically. There are
three types of values for E1-04 to E1-10, depending on the Inverter capacity.
• 0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f pattern
• 2.2 to 45 kW V/f pattern
• 55 to 300 kW V/f pattern
The characteristics diagrams for each are shown in the following pages.
6-124
0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f Pattern

The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V Class motor. For a 400-V Class motor, multiply all voltages by
2.
• Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)
Set Value 0 50 Hz Set Value 1 60 Hz Set Value 2 60 Hz Set Value 3 72 Hz

(Initial value of set value F)
• Decrement Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)
• High startup torque (Set value 8: to B)
Set Value 8 50 Hz Set Value 9 50 Hz Set Value A 60 Hz Set Value B 60 Hz
• Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to E)
Set Value C 90 Hz Set Value D 120 Hz Set Value E 180 Hz
6-125
2.2 to 45 kW V/f Pattern
2.

• High Startup Torque (Set Value: 8 to B)
6-126
55 to 300 kW V/f Pattern

2.

• High Startup Torque (Set Value: 8 to B)
6-127
When E1-03 is set to F (User-defined V/f pattern), you can set constants E1-04 to E1-10. If E1-03 is set to
anything other than F, you can only refer to constants E1-04 to E1-10. If the V/f characteristics are linear, set
E1-07 and E1-09 to the same value. In this case, E1-08 will be ignored.
Output voltage (V)
E1-05
(VMAX)
E1-13
(V Base)
E1-08
(VC)
E1-10
(VMIN)
Frequency (Hz)
E1-09 E1-07 E1-06 E1-04
(FMIN) (FB) (FA) (FMAX)
Fig 6.66 User-Set V/f Pattern
Setting Precautions
When the setting is to user-defined V/f pattern, beware of the following points.
• When changing control method, constants E1-07 to E1-10 will change to the factory settings for that
control method.
• Be sure to set the four frequencies as follows:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
6-128
Torque Control (SPEC: E or Later Only)

With flux vector control, the motor's output torque can be controlled by a torque reference from an analog
input. Set d5-01 to 1 to control torque.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0: Speed control (C5-01 to C5-
07)
1: Torque control
This function is only available in
Torque con- flux vector control method. To
d5-01 0 or 1 0 No No No No A 29AH
trol selection use the function for switching
between speed and torque con-
trol, set to 0 and set the multi-
function input to “speed/torque
control change.”
Set the torque reference delay

time in ms units.
This function can be used to
Torque refer- adjust the noise of the torque
0 to
d5-02 ence delay control signal or the responsive- 0 ms No No No No A 29BH
1000
time ness with the host controller.
When oscillation occurs during
torque control, increase the set
value.
Set the speed limit command

method for the torque control
method.
Speed limit 1: The analog input limit from
d5-03 1 or 2 1 No No No No A 29CH
selection a frequency reference (see
b1-01)
2: Limited by d5-04 constant
setting values.
Set the speed limit during torque

control as a percentage of the
This function is enabled when
-120 to
d5-04 Speed limit d5-03 is set to 2. Directions are 0% No No No No A 29DH
+120
as follows.
+: Run Command direction
-: Run Command opposite
direction
Set the speed limit bias as a per-

centage of the maximum output
frequency.
Speed limit
d5-05 Bias is given to the specified 0 to 120 10% No No No No A 29EH
bias
speed limit. It can be used to
adjust the margin for the speed
limit.
6-129
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Set the delay time from input-
ting the multi-function input
“speed/torque control change”
(from On to OFF or OFF to ON)
until the control is actually
changed, in ms units.
Speed/torque
This function is enabled when
control 0 to
d5-06 the multi-function input “speed/ 0 ms No No No No A 29FH
switching 1000
torque control change” is set. In
timer
the speed/torque control switch-
ing timer, the analog inputs hold
the values of when the “speed/
torque control change” changes.
Always be sure to allow time for
this process to finish completely.
Signal level
0: −10 to 10 V
1: −10 to 10 V
minal A3)
Multi-func-
tion analog Select from the functions listed
H3-05 input (termi- in the following table. Refer to 0 to 1F 1F No A A A A 414H
nal A3) func- the next page.
tion selection
Gain (termi- 10 V is input. 0.0 to
H3-06 100.0% Yes A A A A 415H

-100.0
Bias (termi- 0 V is input.
H3-07 to 0.0% Yes A A A A 416H
+100.0
0: 0 to +10V, with lower limit

1: −10 to 10 V, without lower
Signal level limit
H3-08 selection 2: 4 to 20 mA 0 to 2 2 No A A A A 417H
(terminal A2) Switch current and voltage input
using the switch on the control
panel.
Multi-func-
tion analog
Select multi-function analog
input
H3-09 input function for terminal A2. 0 to 1F 0 No A A A A 418H
(terminal A2)
Refer to the next table.
function
selection

Gain (termi- 10 V (20 mA) is input. 0.0 to
H3-10 100.0% Yes A A A A 419H

-100.0
Bias (termi- 0 V (4 mA) is input.
H3-11 to 0.0% Yes A A A A 41AH
+100.0
6-130
Multi-function Contact Input Functions (H1-01 to H1-06)

Control Methods
Set-
Open
Loop
V/f with Vec-
Value PG
Vec-
tor
tor
71 Speed/torque control change (ON: Torque control) No No No Yes
78 Polarity Reverse Command for external torque reference No No No Yes
Multi-function Contact Output Functions (H2-01 to H2-03)

Control Methods
Set-
Open
Loop
V/f with Vec-
Value PG
Vec-
tor
tor
Speed control circuit operating for torque control (except when stopped).
32 The external torque reference will be limited if torque control is selected. No No No Yes
Output when the motor is rotating at the speed limit.
Multi-function Analog Inputs (H3-05, H3-09)

Control Methods
Set-
Open
Loop
V/f with Vec-
Value PG
Vec-
tor
tor
0 Add to terminal A1 Yes Yes Yes Yes
13 Torque reference/torque limit at speed control No No No Yes

14 Torque compensation No No No Yes
Monitor Function
Control Methods
Min. V/f
Open
Flux BUS
Output PG
Vec-
tor ter
tor
Torque refer- Monitor in internal torque ref- 10 V: Motor rated torque

U1-09 0.1% No No A A 48H
ence erence value for vector control. (−10 to 10 V possible)
Inputting Torque References and Torque Reference Directions

The torque reference can be changed according to an analog input by setting H3-09 (Multi-function analog
input terminal A2 selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function analog input terminal A3 selection) to 13 (torque refer-
ence) or 14 (torque compensation). The torque reference input methods are listed in the following table.
Torque Reference Input Selection

Reference Location Remarks
Method Method
Set H3-04 to 0 for a 0 to 10-V torque ref-
erence.
H3-04 = 1
Between A3 and AC To switch the torque reference between
H3-05 = 13
positive and negative torque, set a multi-
function analog input to 78.
Voltage input (−10 to 10 V) Set H3-08 to 0 for a 0 to 10-V torque ref-

erence.
Between A2 and AC To switch the torque reference between
H3-08 = 1
(Turn OFF pin 2 of positive and negative torque, set a multi-
H3-09 = 13
SW1.) function analog input to 78.
The input can be used for torque compen-
sation by setting H3-09 to 14.
6-131
Torque Reference Input Selection
Reference Location Remarks
Method Method
To switch the torque reference between
Between A2 and AC positive and negative torque, set a multi-
H3-08 = 2
Current input (4 to 20 mA) (Turn ON pin 2 of function analog input to 78.
H3-09 = 13
SW1.) The input can be used for torque compen-
sation by setting H3-09 to 14.
F2-01 = 0
Option board (AI-14B) The input can be used for torque compen-
Between TC2 and TC4 H3-08 = 1
(−10 to 10 V) sation by setting H3-05 to 14.
H3-09 = 13
The direction of the torque output from the motor will be determined by the sign of the analog signal input. It
does not depend on the direction of the Run Command. The direction of torque will be as follows:
• Positive analog reference: Torque reference for forward motor rotation (counterclockwise as viewed from
the motor output axis).
• Negative analog reference: Torque reference for reverse motor rotation (clockwise as viewed from the
motor output axis).
If the analog signal input level is 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA, a forward torque reference will not be applied. To
apply reverse torque, use an input level of -10 V to 10 V or switch the direction using a multi-function input
set to 78 (polarity Reverse Command for external torque reference).
Torque compensation
from analog input
Torque reference Torque primary delay

from analog input filter d5-02
Speed limit from analog 1 Priority Internal torque

Torque limit
input from terminal A1 circuit reference
+ +
Speed controller + Refer to torque limit setting
(ASR)
− via constants and analog input
Speed limit
d5-04
2
d5-03
Speed limit bias

d5-05
Speed limiter
Speed feedback
Fig 6.67 Torque Control Block Diagram
Speed Limiter and Priority Circuit (Speed Limit Function)

If the external torque reference and load are not balanced during torque control, the motor will accelerate in
either the forward or reverse direction. The speed limit function is used to limit the speed to a specified value
and it consists of the speed limiter circuit and priority circuit.
When the motor speed exceeds the speed limit value during torque control, the speed limiter circuit generates
the suppression torque proportional to the speed above the limit value and adds to the torque reference. The
priority circuit switches the internal torque reference to ASR output so that the motor speed does not exceed
the speed limit value.
6-132
There are two ways to set a speed limit: using an input from an analog input terminal and setting a speed limit
in d5-04. The inputs methods for a speed limit are listed in the following table.
Location of Refer- Constant Set-

Speed Limit Input Method Remarks
ence tings
Set in d5-04 d5-03 = 2 -
Set H3-01 to 0 if the speed limit is always
b1-01 = 1
Between A1 and AC to be positive.
H3-01 = 1
Voltage input (−10 to 10 V) The value will be added to the value input
on A1 to determine the speed limit.
b1-01 = 0
Set H3-03 to 0 if the speed limit input on
Between A2 and AC H3-08 = 1
A2 is always to be positive.
H3-09 = 1
Turn OFF (V side) pin 2 of DIP switch S1
on the terminal board.
The value will be added to the value input
b1-01 = 0
on A1 to determine the speed limit.
Current input (4 to 20 mA) Between A2 and AC H3-08 = 2
Turn ON (I side) pin 2 of DIP switch S1
H3-09 = 1
on the terminal board.
If H3-09 is set to 0, the sum of the input
Option board (AI-14B) b1-01 = 3 between TC2 and TC4 will be added the
Between TC1 and TC4
(−10 to 10 V) F2-01 = 0 input between TC1 and TC4 to determine
the speed limit.
The direction in which speed is controlled is determined by the sign of the speed limit signal and the direction
of the Run Command.
• Positive voltage applied: The speed in the forward direction will be limited for forward operation.
IMPORTANT • Negative voltage applied: The speed in the reverse direction will be limited for reverse operation.
If the direction of motor rotation and the command direction are not the same, speed will be limited to 0 as
long as b5-05 is set to 0.
Torque Limit Operation Examples

Operation examples will be described separately for winding operation, in which the speed and motor torque
are in the same directions, and rewinding operation, in which the speed and motor torque are in opposite direc-
tions.
Winding Operation
In a winding operation, the line (speed) and torque generated by the motor are in the same direction. For the
winding operation, both the speed limit and the torque reference input are positive. The motor will accelerate
when the torque reference input is larger than the load and will decelerate when it is smaller than the load. If
the motor turns faster than the speed limit, a negative compensation value is output from the speed limiter cir-
cuit. When the speed then drops below the speed limit, a positive compensation value is output. The torque
compensation is proportional to the ASR proportional gain. When the sum of the torque reference and the
torque compensation output by the speed limiter is the same as the actual load, the motor will stop accelerating
and run at a constant speed.
Rewinding Operation
In a rewinding operation, the line (speed) and torque generated by the motor are in the opposite directions. (In
this example, we’ll assume that the line speed is positive and the torque reference input is negative.) For the
rewinding operation, the speed limit is positive and the torque reference input is negative. If the motor turns
faster than the speed limit, a negative compensation value is output from the speed limiter circuit. If the motor
is rotating in reverse, a negative compensation value is output. If the speed is 0 or is below the speed limit, a 0
6-133
compensation value is output. In this way, the output from the speed limiter is used to maintain the motor
speed between 0 and the speed limit. When the sum of the torque reference and the torque compensation out-
put by the speed limiter is the same as the actual load, the motor will stop accelerating and run at a constant
speed.
Winding Operation Rewinding Operation
Line direction N T N T Line direction
T N T N
X X X X
Configuration
Line direction Line

direction
M M M M
Normal Rotation
Forward Reverse Forward Reverse
Direction
Torque Reference
Polarity (TREF)
Speed Limit Polar-
ity (SLIM)
Torque Torque Torque
Torque Torque Torque
Torque Torque limit limit
limit ∆N limit
TREF
TREF
(d5-05) ∆N
(d5-05)
SLIM
SLIM
0 Speed
0 Speed
0 0 Speed SLIM
SLIM Speed ∆N
Generated Torque (d5-05) Torque (d5-05)
TREF TREF limit
Torque
Torque ǍN Torque
limit
limit limit
The lower value of ∆N(%) = The lower value of ∆N(%) =

TREF(%) TREF(%)
N(%) = N(%) = TREF(%) or d5-05(%) TREF(%) or d5-05(%)
C5-01 C5-01
C5-01 C5-01
Torque Reference Adjustment

Consider the following information when adjusting the torque.
Torque Reference Delay Time: d5-02

The time constant of the primary filter in the torque reference section can be adjusted. This constant is used to
eliminate noise in the torque reference signal and adjust the responsiveness to the host controller. Increase the
setting if oscillation occurs during torque control.
Setting the Torque Compensation

Set multi-function analog input A2 or A3 to torque compensation (setting 14). When the amount of torque loss
for mechanical loss or other factor at the load is input to one of these terminals, it is added to the torque refer-
ence to compensate for the loss. The direction of torque will be as follows:
• Positive voltage (current): Torque compensation reference for forward motor rotation (counterclockwise as
viewed from the motor output axis).
• Negative voltage: Torque compensation reference for reverse motor rotation (clockwise as viewed from
the motor output axis).
Since the polarity of the voltage input determines the direction, only forward torque compensation can be
input when the 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA signal level has been selected. If you want to input reverse torque com-
pensation, be sure to select the −10 to 10 V signal level.
6-134
Speed/Torque Control Switching Function

It is possible to switch between speed control and torque control when one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01
to H1-06) is set to 71 (Speed/Torque Control Change). Speed control is performed when the input is OFF and
torque control is performed when the input is ON. Set d5-01 to switch speed/torque control.
Setting the Speed/Torque Control Switching Timer

The delay between a change in the speed/control switching function input (ON to OFF or OFF to ON) and the
corresponding change in the control method can be set in d5-06. During the timer delay, the value of the 3 ana-
log inputs will retain the values they had when the ON/OFF status of speed/torque control switching signal
was changed. Use this delay to complete any changes required in external signals.
• The frequency reference (during speed control) is set in b1-01. The speed limit during torque control is set
in d5-03.
• If the torque reference has been assigned to a multi-function analog input, terminal A2, or terminal A3, the
input function changes when the control method is switched between torque control and speed control.
During speed control: The analog input terminal is used as the torque limit input.
During torque control: The analog input terminal is used as the torque reference input.
• When the Run Command turns OFF, the control method when stopped will be for speed control. Even
from the torque control method, the system will automatically change to speed control and decelerate to a
stop when the Run Command turns OFF.
• When A1-02 (control method selection) is set to 3 (flux vector control), the speed/torque change command
(a setting of 71) can be set for a multi-function input (H1-01 to H1-06) to switch between speed and torque
control during operation. An example is shown below.
Terminal No. User Constant No. Factory Setting Setting Function

S8 H1-06 8 71 Speed/torque control change
Frequency reference selection
b1-01 1 1
A1 (terminals A1, A2)
d5-03 1 1 Speed limit (terminals A1, A2)
A3 H3-05 0 13 Torque reference/torque limit
A timing chart for switching between speed and torque control is shown in the following figure.
CLOSED CLOSED
OPEN OPEN
Speed/torque change signal
(terminal S8 input)
Run
Run Command Stop
Control mode Speed Torque Speed Torque Speed (decel to stop)
Speed limit Speed limit

Speed Speed
reference reference
Terminal A1 input
Torque limit Torque limit
Terminal A3 input
Torque Torque
reference reference
Fig 6.68 Speed/Torque Control Switching Time Chart.
6-135
Speed Control (ASR) Structure
Speed control (ASR) during flux vector control adjusts the torque reference so that the deviation between the
speed reference and the estimated speed (PG feedback) is 0.
Speed control (ASR) during V/f control with a PG adjusts the output frequency so that the deviation between
the speed reference and the estimated speed (PG feedback) is 0.
The following block diagram shows the structure of the speed control for open-loop vector or V/f control with
a PG.
Torque limits
C5-01, C5-03
+ + Torque reference
Frequency Primary
P filter
reference
− I +
I limit
C5-06
(C5-10) L7-01 to L7-04
Detected speed C5-02, C5-04 C5-08
Speed Control Block Diagram for Open-loop Vector Control
+ Output frequency
Frequency
reference
+
Limit
+ +
− Change
Detected speed
rate
P
+
limiter
I
C5-01
C5-05
C5-03
C5-02, C5-04
Speed Control Block Diagram for V/f Control with a PG
Fig 6.69 Speed Control Block Diagrams
Related Constants
Control Methods
Con- Change MEMO
V/f with Vec-
ber tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
ASR pro- 1.00 to
Sets the proportional gain of the speed 20.00
C5-01 portional 300.00 Yes No A No A 21BH
loop (ASR.) *2
(P) gain 1 *1
ASR inte- 0.000

Sets the integral time of the speed loop 0.500 s
C5-02 gral (I) time to Yes No A No A 21CH
(ASR) in 1-second units. *2
1 10.000
6-136
Control Methods
Con- Change MEMO
V/f with Vec-
ber tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
ASR pro- Usually setting is not necessary. 1.00 to

20.00
C5-03 portional Set to change the rotational speed gain. 300.00 Yes No A No A 21DH
*2
(P) gain 2 *1
P I
P=C5-01
I=C5-02
P=C5-03
ASR inte- I=C5-04 0.000
0.500 s
C5-04 gral (I) time 0 E1-04 Motor speed (Hz) to Yes No A No A 21EH
*2
2 10.000
Sets the upper limit for the compensa-

tion frequency for the speed control 0.0 to
C5-05 ASR limit 5.0% No No A No No 21FH
loop (ASR) to a percentage of the max- 20.0
imum output frequency.
Sets the filter time constant for output-

ASR pri- ting torque references from the speed 0.000
C5-06 mary delay control loop (ASR). It is set in 1-second to 0.004 s No No No No A 220H
time units. 0.500
Sets the frequency for switching

ASR between Proportion Gain 1, 2 and Inte- 0.0 to
C5-07 switching gral Time 1, 2 in Hz units. 300.0 0.0 Hz No No No No A 221H
frequency The multi-function input “ASR switch- *3
ing proportional gain” has the priority.
Sets the upper limit for the integral (I)

ASR inte- 0 to
C5-08 amount for the speed control loop 400% No No No No A 222H
gral (I) limit 400
(ASR) to a percentage of the rated load.
* 1. When using V/f with PG control, 0.00 to 300.00. The flux vector setting ranges are given.
* 2. When the control method changes, the factory setting is changed. The flux vector control factory settings are given. Refer to
Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02).
Control Methods
Set-
Open
Loop
V/f with Vec-
Value PG
Vec-
tor
tor
Speed control disable setting for V/f control with PG
D OFF: Use speed control V/f control with PG No Yes No No
ON: Do not use speed control for V/f control with PG
Speed control integral reset

E No No No Yes
Enables switching between PI and P control for the speed control loop.
Speed control (ASR) proportional gain switch (switching between C5-01 and C5-03)
77 OFF: Use proportional gain in C5-01 No No No Yes
ON: Use proportional gain in C5-03
6-137
Speed Control (ASR) Gain Adjustment for Flux Vector Control (SPEC: E or Later Only)
Use the following procedure to adjust C5-01 and C5-03 with the mechanical system and actual load con-
nected.
At zero-speed, increase C5-01

(ASR P Gain 1) until there is no oscillation.
At zero-speed, decrease C5-02

(ASR I Time 1) until there is no oscillation.
Does oscillation develop when the motor

operates at the maximum normal operating YES Decrease C5-01 (ASR P Gain 1).
speed?
NO
Adjustment completed. Increase C5-02 (ASR I Time 1).

(When there is higher-level position control,
adjust the position loop gain so that
overshooting/undershooting doesn't occur.)
Fine Adjustments
When you want even finer gain adjustment, adjust the gain while observing the speed waveform. Constant set-
tings like those shown in the following table will be necessary to monitor the speed waveform.
Constant
Name Setting Explanation
No.
H4-01 Multi-function analog output 1 terminal FM monitor selection 2
Settings that allow multi-func-
H4-02 Multi-function analog output 1 terminal FM output gain 1.00 tion analog output 1 to be used
to monitor the output frequency.
H4-03 Multi-function analog output 1 terminal FM bias 0.0
H4-04 Multi-function analog output 2 terminal AM monitor selection 5
Settings that allow multi-func-
H4-05 Multi-function analog output 2 terminal AM output gain 1.00 tion analog output 2 to be used
to monitor the motor speed.
H4-06 Multi-function analog output 2 terminal AM bias selection 0.00
H4-07 Multi-function analog output 1 terminal signal level selection 1 Settings that allow a −10 to 10 V
H4-08 Multi-function analog output 2 terminal signal level selection 1 signal range to be monitored.
The multi-function analog outputs have the following functions with these constant settings.
• Multi-function analog output 1 (terminal FM): Outputs Inverter's output frequency (−10 to 10 V).
• Multi-function analog output 2 (terminal AM): Outputs actual motor speed (−10 to 10 V).
Terminal AC is the multi-function analog output common.
We recommend monitoring both the output frequency and the motor speed to monitor the response delay or
deviations from the reference value, as shown in the following diagram.
6-138
Adjusting ASR Proportional Gain 1 (C5-01)

This gain setting adjusts the responsiveness of the speed control (ASR). The responsiveness is increased when
this setting is increased. Usually this setting is higher for larger loads. Oscillation will occur if this setting is
increased too much.
The following diagram shows the type of changes that can occur in the response when the ASR proportional
gain is changed.
Motor speed
The proportional gain is high.

(Oscillation occurs when the gain is too high.)
The proportional gain is low.
Time
Fig 6.70 Responsiveness for Proportional Gain
Adjusting ASR Integral Time 1 (C5-02)

This constant sets the speed control (ASR) integral time.
Lengthening the integral time lowers the responsiveness, and weakens the resistance to external influences.
Oscillation will occur if this setting is too short. The following diagram shows the type of changes that can
occur in the response when the ASR integral time is changed.
Motor speed
Short integral time
Long integral time
Time
Fig 6.71 Responsiveness for Integral Time
6-139
Different Gain Settings for Low-speed and High-speed
Switch between low-speed and high-speed gain when oscillation occurs because of resonance with the
mechanical system at low speed or high speed. The proportional gain P and integral time I can be switched
according to the motor speed, as shown below.
P = C5-01
P, I
I = C5-02
P = C5-03
I = C5-04 (Low speed)
Motor speed (Hz)

C5-07
If C5-07 is set to 0, P = C5-01 and I = C5-02.
Fig 6.72 Low-speed and High-speed Gain Settings
Setting the Gain Switching Frequency (C5-07)

Set the switching frequency to about 80% of the motor operating frequency or the frequency at which oscilla-
tion occurs.
Low-speed Gain Adjustments (C5-03, C5-04)

Connect the actual load and adjust these constants at zero-speed. Increase C5-03 (ASR proportional gain 2)
until there is no oscillation. Decrease C5-04 (ASR integral time 2) until there is no oscillation.
High-speed Gain Adjustments (C5-01, C5-02)

Adjust these constants at normal operating speed. Increase C5-01 (ASR proportional gain 1) until there is no
oscillation. Decrease C5-02 (ASR integral time 1) until there is no oscillation. Refer to Fine Adjustments on
page 6-138 for details on making fine adjustments of high-speed operation.
ASR Proportional Gain Switch Setting

When one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01 to H1-06) is set to 77, the input can be used to switch between
C5-01 (proportional gain 1) and C5-03 (proportional gain 2). Proportional gain 2 is used when the multi-func-
tion input is ON. This input has higher priority than the ASR switching frequency set in C5-07.
ON
ASR Gain Switch signal
(a multi-function input)
OFF
Proportional gain
Proportional gain (P)
determined
by motor speed.
C5-03 gain setting
C5-02 C5-02
The gain is changed linearly in integral time 1 (C5-02).
Fig 6.73 ASR Proportional Gain Switch
6-140
Gain Adjustment for Speed Control during V/f Control with PG

When using V/f control with PG, set the proportional gain (P) and the integral time (I) at E1-09 (minimum out-
put frequency) and E1-04 (maximum output frequency). Speed Control Gain Integral Time Adjustment for V/f
Control with PG shows how the proportional gain and integral time change in linear fashion based on the
speed.
P and I setting
P = C5-01
I = C5-02
P = C5-03
I = C5-04
Motor speed (Hz)

0 E1-09 E1-04
Min. output frequency Max. output frequency
Fig 6.74 Speed Control Gain Integral Time Adjustment for V/f Control with PG
Gain Adjustments at Minimum Output Frequency

Operate the motor at the minimum output frequency. Increase C5-03 (ASR proportional gain 2) to a level
where there is no oscillation. Decrease C5-04 (ASR integral time 2) to a level where there is no oscillation.
Monitor the Inverter's output current and verify that it is less than 50% of the Inverter rated current. If the out-
put current exceeds 50% of the Inverter's rated current, decrease C5-03 and increase C5-04.
Gain Adjustments at Maximum Output Frequency

Operate the motor at the maximum output frequency. Increase C5-01 (ASR proportional gain 1) to a level
where there is no oscillation. Decrease C5-02 (ASR integral time 1) to a level where there is no oscillation.
Fine Adjustments
When you want even finer gain adjustment, adjust the gain while observing the speed waveform. The adjust-
ment method is the same as that for vector control.
Enable integral operation during acceleration and deceleration (by setting F1-07 to 1) when you want the
motor speed to closely follow the frequency reference during acceleration and deceleration. Reduce the setting
of C5-01 if overshooting occurs during acceleration, and reduce the setting of C5-03 and increase the setting
of C5-04 if undershooting occurs when stopping. If overshooting and undershooting cannot be eliminated by
adjusting only the gain, reduce the value of C5-05 speed control and reduce the limit of the frequency refer-
ence compensation value.
6-141
Increasing the Speed Reference Response (Feed Forward Control)
(SPEC: E or Later Only)
Use feed forward control to increase the responsiveness to speed references. This function is effective for
machines for which the ASR gain cannot be increased to a large value because doing so would result in vibra-
tions. There is also the additional effect of making the system less prone to overshoot.
This function is valid only in flux vector control.
Overshooting when acceleration completed
is being suppressed
Overshooting
Rotation Rotation
speed speed
(min-1) (min-1)
Time(s) Time(s)
Feed forward control Conventional speed control
Overshooting control effect
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Feed forward Select the feed forward control.
N5-01 control selec- 0: Disabled 0 or 1 0 No No No No A 5B0H
tion 1: Enabled
Set the time required to acceler-

ate the motor at the rated torque
(T100) to the rated speed (Nr).
J: GD2/4, P: Motor rated output
Motor accel- 0.001 to
N5-02
eration time ta =
2π x J [kgm2] x Nr [min-1]
[s] 10.000 0.178 s* No No No No A 5B1H
60 x T100 [N x m]
However,
60 P [kW]
T100 = x × 103 [N x m]
2π Nr [min-1]
Set the proportional gain for

Feed forward feed forward control.
0.00 to
N5-03 proportional Speed reference response will 1.0 No No No No A 5B2H
100.00
gain increase as the setting of N5-03
is increased.
Sets the response frequency to a
speed command in units of 0.01
Response fre-
Hz.
quency for 0.00 to
N5-04 Used when the machine rigidity 40.00 No No No No A 5B3H
speed com- 50.00
is high and the N5-03 is cor-
mand
rectly adjusted.
Usually, setting is not required.
* The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.
6-142
Feed Forward Control Structure

• The following block diagram shows the speed controller (ASR) and the feed forward control structure.
N5-02, N5-03 U1-45
Feed
Frequency Secondary
forward Torque limit
U1-44 current
reference controller 㧗
㧗㧗
reference
Primary
Speed controller (ASR)
filter
㧙 C5-06
L7-01 to L7-04
(C5-10)
U1-05
Detected speed
Fig 6.75 Structure of Speed Controller (ASR) and Feed Forward Control
Setting Precautions
• When N5-02 (Motor acceleration time) is not properly set, the acceleration time may not increase. The fac-
tory setting of N5-02 depends on the Inverter capacity. When the Inverter capacity is different from the
motor capacity, calculate an appropriate acceleration time using the equation given in N5-02 of Chapter 5
User Constants or set the time that corresponds to the motor capacity referring to Factory Settings that
Change with the Control Method (A1-02) (Page 5-81)
• When setting the feed forward proportional gain (N5-03), take the inertia of the motor to be equivalent to
1. If the speed reference response is slow, increase the feed forward proportional gain (N5-03). If over-
shoot occurs with the actual speed, or if a negative torque reference is output when acceleration is com-
pleted, reduce the feed forward proportional gain (N5-03).
• When using the droop control function (i.e., if b7-01 is not set to 0.0), disable feed forward control (i.e., set
N5-01 to 0).
Droop Control Function (SPEC: E or Later Only)

Droop control is a function that allows the user to set the amount of motor slip.
When a single load is operated with two motors (such as in a crane conveyor), a high-resistance motor is nor-
mally used. This is to use torque characteristics that exhibit proportion movements due to changes in the sec-
ondary resistor to maintain torque balance with the load and overall speed balance with the load.
If droop control is used, a high-resistance motor characteristics can be set for a general-purpose motor.
The balance of the load is very different with different amounts of slip.
Torque Motor A's torque Torque Motor A's torque characteristics

characteristics
Motor B's torque characteristics
TA TA
Load torque Load torque
TB TB
Motor B's torque The difference between The difference between

characteristics TA and TB is getting larger. TA and TB is getting smaller.
Reference Speed Reference Speed

speed speed
Load balance when using a general-purpose motor Load balance when using a high-purpose motor
6-143
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the slip as a percentage of
maximum frequency when the
maximum output frequency is
Droop control 0.0 to
b7-01 specified and the rated torque 0.0 Yes No No No A 1CAH
gain 100.0
occurs.
Droop-control is not performed
Droop control responsiveness

Droop control constant 0.03 to
b7-02 0.05 s Yes No No No A 1CBH
delay time When hunting or oscillation 2.00
occurs, increase the value.
Setting Precautions
• Droop control is disabled if b7-01 is set to 0.0.
• Set b7-01 to the amount of slip as the percentage of slip when the maximum output frequency is input and
the rated torque is generated.
• Constant b7-02 is used to adjust the responsiveness of droop control. Increase this setting if oscillation or
hunting occur.
• Disable the feed forward control (N5-01 = 0) when using the droop control function.
Setting the Droop Control Gain

Set the droop control gain as the speed reduction at a 100% motor torque, as a percentage of the maximum
output frequency.
Torque
b7-01
100%
Speed
0 Speed reference
Fig 6.76 Droop Control Gain
6-144
Zero-servo Function (SPEC: E or Later Only)

The zero-servo function holds the motor when the motor is stopped in what is call a zero-servo status. This
function can be used to stop the motor even with an external force acts on the motor or the analog reference
input is offset.
The zero-servo function is enabled when one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01 to H1-06) is set to 72 (zero-
servo command). If the zero-servo command is ON when the frequency (speed) reference falls below the zero-
speed level, a zero-servo status is implemented.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Used to set the frequency which
starts DC injection braking in
units of Hz when deceleration to
Zero-speed
stop is selected.
level (DC
When b2-01 is less than E1-09,
injection 0.0 to
b2-01 E1-09 is used to set the starting 0.5 Hz No A A A A 189H
braking start- 10.0
frequency for the DC injection
ing fre-
braking.
quency)
In flux vector control, b2-01 is
used to set the starting frequency
for the zero-speed control.
Adjust the strength of the zero-

servo lock.
Enabled when the “zero-servo
command” is set for the multi-
function input. When the zero-
servo command has been input
Zero-servo and the frequency reference
b9-01 0 to 100 5 No No No No A 1DAH
gain drop below excitation level (b2-
01), a position control loop is
created and the motor stops.
Increasing the zero-servo gain in
turn increases the strength of the
lock. Increasing it by too much
will cause oscillation.
Sets the output width of the
zero-servo completion signal.
Enabled when the “zero-servo
completion (end)” is set for a
multi-function input. The zero-
servo completion signal is ON
Zero-servo when the current position is
0 to
b9-02 completion within the range (the zero-servo 10 No No No No A 1DBH
16383
width start position± zero-servo com-
pletion width.)
Set the allowable position dis-
placement from the zero-servo
start position to 4 times the pulse
rate of the PG (pulse generator,
encoder) in use.
6-145
Control Methods
Set-
Open
Loop
V/f with Vec-
Value PG
Vec-
tor
tor
72 Zero-servo command (ON: Zero-servo) No No No Yes
Multi-function Contact Output Functions (H2-01 to H2-03)
Control Methods
Set-
Open
Loop
V/f with Vec-
Value PG
Vec-
tor
tor
Zero-servo end
33 No No No Yes
ON: Current position is within zero-servo start position ± the zero-servo end width.
To output the zero-servo status externally, assign the Zero-Servo End signal (setting 33) to one of the multi-
function outputs (H2-01 to H2-03).
Monitor Function
Control Methods
Min. V/f
Open
Flux BUS
Output PG
Vec-
tor ter
tor
Zero-servo Shows the number of PG pulses
U1-35 movement times 4 for the movement range (Cannot be output.) 1 No No No A 62H
pulses when stopped at zero.
Time Chart
A time chart for the zero-servo function is given in Time Chart for Zero-Servo.
ON OFF
Run Command
Zero-servo command ON OFF
Frequency (speed) reference
Zero-speed level
b2-01
Motor speed
Zero-Servo End signal Zero-servo status
Fig 6.77 Time Chart for Zero-Servo
6-146
• Be sure to leave the Run Command input ON. If the Run Command is turned OFF, the output will be inter-
rupted and the zero-servo function will become ineffective.
• The holding force of the zero-servo is adjusted in b9-01. The holding force will increase if the value of the
setting is increased, but oscillation and hunting will occur if the setting is too large. Adjust b9-01 after
adjusting the speed control gain.
• The zero-servo detection width is set as the allowable position offset from the zero-servo start position. Set
4 times the number of pulses from the PG.
• The Zero-Servo End signal will go OFF when the zero-servo command is turned OFF.
Do not lock the servo for extended periods of time at 100% when using the zero-servo function. Inverter
errors may result. Extended periods of servo lock can be achieved by ensuring that the current during the ser-
volock is 50% or less or by increasing the Inverter capacity.
IMPORTANT
6-147
Digital Operator Functions
This section explains the Digital Operator functions.
Setting Digital Operator Functions

You can set Digital Operator-related constants such as selecting the Digital Operator display, multi-function
selections, and copy functions.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the monitor item to be dis-
played when the power is turned
on.
Monitor
1: Frequency reference
o1-02 selection after 1 to 4 1 Yes A A A A 501H
2: Output frequency
power up
3: Output current
4: The monitor item set for o1-
01
Sets the units that will be set and

displayed for the frequency ref-
erence and frequency monitor.
0: 0.01 Hz units
1: 0.01% units (Maximum
output frequency is 100%)
2 to 39:
poles.)
40 to 39999:
Frequency User desired display
units of refer- Set the desired values for 0 to
o1-03 0 No A A A A 502H
ence setting setting and display for the max. 39999
and monitor output frequency.
Set 4-digit number

point.
to display.
Example: When the max. out-
put frequency value is 200.0, set
12000
Setting unit
for frequency Set the setting unit for frequency
constants reference-related constants.
o1-04 0 or 1 0 No No No No A 503H
related to V/f 0: Hz
characteris- 1: min−1
tics
Sets the Digital Operator Local/

LOCAL/ Remote Key
REMOTE 0: Disabled
o2-01 0 or 1 1 No A A A A 505H
key enable/ 1: Enabled (Switches between
disable the Digital Operator and the
constant settings.)
6-148
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the Stop Key in the run
mode.
STOP key
0: Disabled (When the Run
during con-
Command is issued from and
o2-02 trol circuit 0 or 1 1 No A A A A 506H
external terminal, the Stop
terminal
Key is disabled.)
operation
1: Enabled (Effective even
during run.)
Clears or stores user initial val-

ues.
0: Stores/not set
1: Begins storing (Records the
User con- set constants as user initial
o2-03 stant initial values.) 0 to 2 0 No A A A A 507H
value 2: All clear (Clears all recorded
user initial values)
When the set constants are
recorded as user initial values,
1110 will be set in A1-03.
When the frequency reference is

set on the Digital Operator fre-
quency reference monitor, sets
Frequency whether the Enter Key is neces-
reference set- sary.
o2-05 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 509H
ting method 0: Enter Key needed
selection 1: Enter Key not needed
When set to 1, the Inverter
accepts the frequency reference
without Enter Key operation.
Sets the cumulative operation

Cumulative
time in hour units. 0 to
o2-07 operation 0 hr No A A A A 50BH
Operation time is calculated 65535
time setting
from the set values.
Set the initial value of the fan

Fan opera-
operation time using time units. 0 to
o2-10 tion time set- 0 hr No A A A A 50EH
The operation time accumulates 65535
ting
from the set value.
* The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
Changing Frequency Reference and Display Units

Set the Digital Operator frequency reference and display units using constant o1-03. You can change the units
for the following constants using o1-03.
• U1-01 (Frequency Reference)
• U1-02 (Output Frequency)
• U1-05 (Motor Speed)
• U1-20 (Output Frequency after Soft Start)
• d1-01 to d1-17 (Frequency references)
Switching Monitors when the Power Supply Is ON

Using constant o1-02, select the monitor item (U1- [status monitor]) to be displayed on the Digital Oper-
ator when the power supply is turned ON. For monitors that can be displayed, refer to U1- in Chapter 5
User Constants.
6-149
Setting Precautions
If selecting monitor constants other than U1-01 (Frequency Reference), U1-02 (Output Frequency), and U1-
03 (Output Current), first select the monitor items to be displayed in o1-01, and then set o1-02 to 4.
Disabling the STOP Key

If b1-02 (Operation Method Selection) is set to 1, 2, or 3, the Stop Command from the STOP Key on the Dig-
ital Operator is an emergency Stop Command.
Set o2-02 to 0 to disable emergency Stop Commands from the STOP Key on the Digital Operator.
Disabling the LOCAL/REMOTE Key

Set o2-01 to 0 to disable the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator. You cannot switch Inverter ref-
erence inputs set using reference inputs from the Digital Operator, b1-01 (Reference Selection), or b1-02
(Operation Method Selection).
Initializing Changed Constant Values

You can save to the Inverter constant set values that you have changed as constant initial values. Change the
set values from the Inverter factory settings, and then set o2-03 to 1.
Set A1-03 (Initialize) to 1110 to initialize the Inverter constants using the user-set initial values in memory. To
clear the user-set initial values in memory, set o2-03 to 2.
Setting the Frequency Reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without Using the
Enter Key
Use this function when inputting frequency references from the Digital Operator. When o2-05 is set to 1, you
can increment and decrement the frequency reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without using the Enter
Key.
For example, enter the Run Command using a 0 Hz reference, and then continuously press the UP Key to
increment the frequency reference by 0.01 Hz only for the first 0.5 s, and then by 0.01 Hz every 80 ms for 3 s
thereafter. Press and hold down the UP Key for 3 s minimum to reach the maximum output frequency 10 s
after that. The frequency reference that has been set will be stored in memory 5 s after the UP or DOWN Keys
are released.
Clearing Cumulative Operation Time

Set the cumulative operation time initial value in time units in constant o2-07. Set o2-07 to 0 to clear U1-13
(Inverter Operating Time).
Clearing Inverter Cooling Fan Operation Time

Set the fan operation time initial value in time units in constant o2-10. Set o2-10 to 0 to clear U1-40 (Cooling
Fan Operating Time).
6-150
Copying Constants
The Digital Operator can perform the following three functions using the built-in EEPROM (non-volatile
memory).
• Store Inverter constant set values in the Digital Operator (READ)
• Write constant set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)
• Compare constant set values stored in the Digital Operator with Inverter constants (VERIFY)
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0: Normal operation
Copy func- 1: READ (Inverter to Operator)
o3-01 0 to 3 0 No A A A A 515H
tion selection 2: COPY (Operator to Inverter)
3: Verify (compare)
Read permit- 0: Read prohibited

o3-02 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 516H
ted selection 1: Read permitted
COPY Function Selection (SPEC: E or Later Only)

The available COPY functions (o3-01 “Copy function selection”) differ depending on the SPEC of Inverter as
shown in the table below.
Inverter with Inverter with Inverter with Inverter with

SPEC: C or SPEC: C or SPEC: E or SPEC: E or
READ Source
earlier earlier earlier earlier
(PRG:101) (PRG:101) (PRG:103) (PRG:103)
Inverter with Inverter with Inverter with Inverter with
SPEC: C or SPEC: E or SPEC: C or SPEC: E or
COPY Destination
earlier earlier earlier earlier
(PRG:101) (PRG:103) (PRG:101) (PRG:103)
READ (Inverter → Operator) Available Available Available Available
READ (Inverter → Operator) Available Available* N/A Available
VERIFY Available N/A N/A Available
* The initial values of user constants that have been stored using the constant o2-03 cannot be copied.
6-151
Storing Inverter set values in the Digital Operator (READ)
To store Inverter set values in the Digital Operator, make the settings using the following method. Set 03-02
(Read permitted selection) to 1 (read permitted).
Table 6.1 READ Function Procedure

Step
Digital Operator Display Explanation
No.
Press the Menu Key, and select advanced pro-

1
gramming mode.
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the

2
constants monitor display.
Display o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using

3
the Increment Key and Decrement Key.

4
constants setting display.
Change the set value to 1 using the Increment

5
Key.
Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER

6
Key. The READ function will start.
If the READ function ends normally, End is

displayed on the Digital Operator. Constant o3-
7
01 is automatically reset to 0, and then the dis-
play returns to o3-01.
An error may occur while saving to memory. If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display
and return to the o3-01 display. Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7
Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Function.)
Error Display Meaning
You are attempting to set o3-01 to 1 while o3-02 is set to 0.
Read data length mismatch or read data error.
Tried to write constants to EEPROM on the Digital Operator, but unable to perform write operation.
Select READ Permitted

Prevent overwriting the data stored in EEPROM in the Digital Operator by mistake. With o3-02 set to 0, if you
set o3-01 to 1, and perform the write operation, PrE will be displayed on the Digital Operator, and the write
operation will be stopped.
6-152
Writing Constant Set Values Stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)
To write constant set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter, make the settings using the follow-
ing method.
Table 6.2 COPY Function Procedure

Step
No.
Press the MENU Key, and select advanced pro-

1
gramming mode.

2

3

4
constants setting display.

5
Key.

6
Key. The COPY function will start.
If the COPY function ends normally, End is dis-

played on the Digital Operator. Constant o3-01
7
is automatically reset to 0, and then the display
returns to o3-01.
During the copy operation, errors may occur. If an error is displayed, set the constants again. Error displays
and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7 Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Func-
tion.)
Inverter product code and Inverter software number are different.
Inverter capacity with which you are trying to copy, and the Inverter capacity stored in the Digital
Operator are different.
The Inverter control method in which you are trying to copy, and the Inverter control method stored
in the Digital Operator are different.
Comparison between the constant written to the Inverter and the constant in the Digital Operator
shows they are different.
After copying has ended, comparison between the sum value of the Inverter constant area and the
sum value of the Digital Operator constant area shows they are different.
6-153
Comparing Inverter Constants and Digital Operator Constant Set Values (VERIFY)
To compare Inverter constants and Digital Operator constant set values, make the settings using the following
method.
Table 6.3 VERIFY Function Procedure
Step
No.
Press the MENU Key. and select advanced pro-

1
gramming mode.

2

3

4
function setting display.

5
Key.

6
Key. The VERIFY function will start.
If the VERIFY function ends normally, End is

displayed on the Digital Operator. Constant o3-
7
01 is automatically reset to 0, and then the dis-
play returns to o3-01.
An error may occur during the comparison. If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display
and return to the o3-01 display. Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7
Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Function.)
Verify error (Settings in the Digital Operator and the Inverter do not match).
Inverter product code and Inverter software number are different.
• When using the copy function, check that the following settings are the same between the Inverter and the
Digital Operator.
• Inverter product and type • Inverter capacity and voltage
• Software number • Control method
• Use the copy function off-line or with a communications option board removed.
• A CPF03 fault (EEPROM error) can occur if the power is shut down while the Inverter constants are being
copied. Do not shut down the power while copying the constants.
6-154
Prohibiting Writing Constants from the Digital Operator

If you set A1-01 to 0, you can refer to and set the A1 and A2 constant groups, and refer to drive mode, using
the Digital Operator.
If you set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-06 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S8 function selec-
tion) to 1B (write constants permitted), you can write constants from the digital operator when the terminal
that has been set is ON. When the set terminal is OFF, writing constants other than the frequency reference is
prohibited. You can, however, reference constants.
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Used to set the constant access
level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only
(Monitoring drive mode and
setting A1-01 and A1-04.)
1: Used to select user constant
(Only constants set in A2-01
Constant
A1-01 to A2-32 can be read and 0 to 2 2 Yes A A A A 101H
access level
set.)
2: Advanced
(Constants can be read and
set in both quick
advanced programming (A)
mode.)
Setting a Password
When a password is set in A1-05, if the set values in A1-04 and A1-05 do not match, you cannot refer to or
change the settings of constants A1-01 to A1-03, or A2-01 to A2-32.
You can prohibit the setting and referencing of all constants except A1-00 by using the password function in
combination with setting A1-01 to 0 (Monitor only).
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Used to set the constant access
level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only
(Monitoring drive mode and
setting A1-01 and A1-04.)
1: Used to select user constant
(Only constants set in A2-01
Constant
A1-01 to A2-32 can be read and 0 to 2 2 Yes A A A A 101H
access level
set.)
2: Advanced
(Constants can be read and
set in both quick
advanced programming (A)
mode.)
6-155
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Password input when a pass-
word has been set in A1-05.
This function write-protects
some constants of the initialize
mode. 0 to
A1-04 Password 0 No A A A A 104H
If the password is changed, A1- 9999
01 to A1-03 and A2-01 to A2-32
constants can no longer be
changed. (Programming mode
constants can be changed.)
Used to set a four digit number

as the password.
This constant is not usually dis-
Password set- played. When the Password 0 to
A1-05 0 No A A A A 105H
ting (A1-04) is displayed, hold down 9999
the RESET Key and press the
Menu Key and the password
will be displayed.
Setting Precautions
Constant A1-05 cannot be displayed using normal key operations. To display A1-05, hold down the RESET
Key and press the MENU Key while A1-04 is displayed.
Displaying User-set Constants Only

You can set and refer to constants necessary to the Inverter only, using the A2 constants (user-set constants)
and A1-01 (Constants Access Level).
Set the number of the constant to which you want to refer in A2-01 to A2-32, and then set A1-01 to 1. You can
set and refer to constants set in A1-01 to A1-03 and A2-01 to A2-32 only, using advanced programming mode.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Used to set the constant numbers
that can be set/read. Maximum
32.
A2-01 Effective when the Constant 106H
User setting b1-01 to
to Access Level (A1-01) is set to - No A A A A to
constants o3-02
A2-32 User Program (1). Constants set 125H
in constants A2-01 to A2-32 can
be set/read in programming
mode.
6-156
Options
Options
This section explains the Inverter option functions.
Performing Speed Control with PG

This section explains functions with V/f control with PG and flux vector control .
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the number of PG (pulse
generator or encoder) pulses. 0 to
F1-01 PG constant 600 No No Q No Q 380H
Sets the number of pulses per 60000
motor revolution.
Sets the PG disconnection stop-

ping method.
0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration
stop using Deceleration
Time 1, C1-02.)
Operation
1: Coast to stop
selection at
F1-02 2: Fast stop (Emergency stop 0 to 3 1 No No A No A 381H
PG open cir-
using the deceleration time
cuit (PGO)
in C1-09.)
machinery, do not normally
make this setting.)
Sets the stopping method when

an overspeed (OS) fault occurs.
Time 1, C1-02.)
Operation
1: Coast to stop
selection at
F1-03 2: Fast stop (Emergency stop 0 to 3 1 No No A No A 382H
overspeed
(OS)
in C1-09.)
machinery, do not normally
make this setting.)
Sets the stopping method when a

speed deviation (DEV) fault
occurs.
Operation Time 1, C1-02.)
F1-04 selection at 1: Coast to stop 0 to 3 3 No No A No A 383H
deviation 2: Fast stop (Emergency stop
in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (DEV is
displayed and operation
continued.)
6-157
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
0: Phase A leads with Forward
Run Command. (Phase B
leads with Reverse Run
Command.)
F1-05 PG rotation 0 or 1 0 No No A No A 384H
1: Phase B leads with Forward
Run Command. (Phase A
leads with Reverse Run
Command.)
Sets the division ratio for the PG

speed control board pulse out-
put.
Division ratio = (1+ n) /m (n=0
PG division or 1 m=1 to 32)
rate (PG
F1-06 F1-06 1 to 132 1 No No A No A 385H
pulse moni-
tor)
n m
This constant is only effective
when a PG-B2 is used.
The possible division ratio set-
tings are: 1/32 ≤ F1-06 ≤ 1.
Sets integral control during

acceleration/deceleration to
either enabled or disabled.
Integral value
0: Disabled (The integral
during accel/
F1-07 function isn't used while 0 or 1 0 No No A No No 386H
decel enable/
accelerating or decelerating;
disable
it is used at constant speeds.)
1: Enabled (The integral
function is used at all times.)
Overspeed Sets the overspeed detection

F1-08 detection method. 0 to 120 115% No No A No A 387H
level Frequencies above that set for
F1-08 (set as a percentage of the
Overspeed maximum output frequency)
that continue to exceed this fre- 0.0 to
F1-09 detection
2.0 0.0 s * No No A No A 388H
delay time quency for the time set in F1-09
are detected as overspeed faults.
Sets the speed deviation detec-
Excessive
tion method.
speed devia-
F1-10 Any speed deviation above the 0 to 50 10% No No A No A 389H
tion detec-
F1-10 set level (set as a percent-
tion level
age of the maximum output fre-
quency) that continues for the
Excessive time set in F1-11 is detected as a
speed devia- speed deviation. 0.0 to
F1-11 tion detec- Speed deviation is the difference 0.5 s No No A No A 38AH
10.0
tion delay between actual motor speed and
time the reference command speed.
Sets the number of teeth on the

Number of
gears if there are gears between
F1-12 PG gear teeth 0 No No A No No 38BH
the PG and the motor.
1
Input pulses from PG 60 F1-13 0 to
F1-01 F1-12 1000
Number of
A gear ratio of 1 will be used if
F1-13 PG gear teeth 0 No No A No No 38CH
either of these constants is set to
2
0.
Used to set the PG disconnec-

PG open-cir-
tion detection time. PGO will be 0.0 to
F1-14 cuit detection 2.0 s No No A No A 38DH
detected if the detection time 10.0
time
continues beyond the set time.
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. The flux vector control factory setting is given.
6-158
Options
Using PG Speed Control Board

There are four types of PG Speed Control Board that can be used in V/f control with PG.
• PG-A2: A-phase (single) pulse input, compatible with open collector or complimentary outputs.
• PG-B2: A/B-phase pulse input, compatible with complimentary outputs.
• PG-D2: A-phase (single) pulse input, compatible with line drivers.
• PG-X2: A/B/Z-phase pulse input, compatible with line drivers.
There are two types of PG Speed Control Boards that can be used for flux vector control.
• PG-B2: A/B phase pulse inputs, complementary outputs
• PG-X2: A/B/Z phase pulse inputs, line driver outputs
For the connection diagram, refer to page 2-36 to 2-38.
Setting Number of PG Pulses

Set the number of PG (Pulse Generator/Encoder) pulses in pulses/rotation. Set the number of A-phase or B-
phase pulses per 1 motor rotation in F1-01.
Matching PG Rotation Direction and Motor Rotation Direction

Constant F1-05 matches the PG rotation direction and the motor rotation direction. If the motor is rotating for-
wards, set whether it is A-phase driven or B-phase driven. Make this setting when using PG-B2 or PG-X2.
Inverter
Motor PG (encoder)
Forward
Command
Pulse output
A-phase driven when set value = 0 B-phase driven when set value = 1
A-phase A-phase
B-phase B-phase
Example: Forward rotation of standard Yaskawa motor (PG used: Samtack (KK))
Motor output axis rotates

counter-clockwise during In-
Forward verter Forward Command.
Command Rotation
(CCW)
A-phase
B-phase
Yaskawa standard PG used is A-phase driven (CCW) when motor rotation is forward.
Fig 6.78 PG Rotation Direction Setting
Generally, PG is A-phase driven when rotation is clockwise (CW) see from the input axis. Also, motor rota-
tion is counter-clockwise (CCW) seen from the output side when Forward Commands are output. Conse-
quently, when motor rotation is forward, PG is normally A-phase driven when a load is applied, and B-phase
driven when a load is not applied.
6-159
Setting Number of Gear Teeth Between PG and Motor
Set the number of PG gear teeth in F1-12 and F1-13. If there are gears between the motor and PG, you can
operate the motor by setting the number of gear teeth.
When the number of gear teeth has been set, the speed of motor rotations within the Inverter is calculated
using the following formula.
Speed of motor rotations (min−1.) = No. of input pulses from PG × 60 / F1-01 × F1-13 (No. of gear teeth on
load side) / F1-12 (No. of gear teeth on motor side)
Matching Motor Speed During Acceleration and Deceleration to Frequency Reference

You can select whether to enable or disable integral operation during acceleration and deceleration when using
V/f with PG control.
To match the motor speed as closely as possible to the frequency reference even during acceleration and decel-
eration, set F1-07 to 1.
If F1-01 is set to 1, overshoot or undershoot may occur easily immediately after acceleration and decelera-
tion. To minimize the possibility of overshoot or undershoot occurring, set F1-01 to 0.
IMPORTANT
Setting PG Pulse Monitor Output Dividing Ratio

This function is enabled only when using PG speed control board PG-B2. Set the dividing ratio for the PG
pulse monitor output. The set value is expressed as n for the higher place digit, and m for the lower place 2
digits. The dividing ratio is calculated as follows:
Dividing ratio = (1 + n)/m (Setting range) n: 0 or 1, m: 1 to 32
F1-06 =
n m
The dividing ratio can be set within the following range: 1/32 ≤ F1-06 ≤ 1. For example, if the dividing ratio is
1/2 (set value 2), half of the number of pulses from the PG are monitor outputs.
Detecting PG Open Circuit

Select the stopping method when PG cable disconnected is detected and the PG open circuit (PGO) detection
time.
When the Inverter is operating with the frequency reference set to 1% minimum (except when operating on
direct current), if the speed feedback from PG is greater than the time setting in F1-14, PGO is detected.
Detecting Motor Overspeed

An error is detected when the number of motor rotations exceeds the regulated limit. An overspeed (OS) is
detected when a frequency that exceeds the set value in F1-08 continues for longer than the time set in F1-09.
After detecting an overspeed (OS), the Inverter stops according to the setting in F1-03.
Detecting Speed Difference between the Motor and Speed Reference

An error is detected when the speed deviation (i.e., the difference between the designated speed and the actual
motor speed) is too great. Speed deviation (DEV) is detected after a speed agreement is detected and when the
speed reference and actual workpiece speed are within the setting of L4-02, if a speed deviation great than the
set value in F1-10 continues for longer than the time set in F1-11. After a speed deviation is detected, the
Inverter stops according to the setting in F1-04.
6-160
Options
Using Digital Output Boards

There are two types of Inverter digital output boards:
• DO-02C
Relay contact output (DPDT contact)
• DO-08
6 photocoupler output channels (shared commons)
2 (independent) relay contact output channels (NC contact)
Photocoupler TD5
CH1 Photocoupler
+24 V TD6
Inverter CH2
TD
1 control TD7
Inverter panel 3CN 3CN CH3
control NC NO 2
CH1
panel 3CN 3 TD8 CH4
3CN
4 TD9 CH5
NC NO 5
CH2 TD10
6 CH6
TD11 COM (0 V common)
TD1
Relay contact TD2 CH7
TD3 Relay contact
DO-02C Digital Output Board TD4 CH8
DO-08 Digital Output Board
Fig 6.79 Digital Output Boards
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Effective when a Digital Output
Channel 1 Board (DO-02C or DO-08) is
F5-01 output selec- used. 0 to 37 0 No A A A A 399H
tion Set the number of the multi-
Effective when a Digital Output

Channel 2 Board (DO-02C or DO-08) is
F5-02 output selec- used. 0 to 37 1 No A A A A 39AH
tion Set the number of the multi-
Effective when a DO-08 Digital

Channel 3
Output Board is used.
F5-03 output selec- 0 to 37 2 No A A A A 39BH
Set the number of the multi-
tion

Channel 4
F5-04 output selec- 0 to 37 4 No A A A A 39CH
tion

Channel 5
F5-05 output selec- 0 to 37 6 No A A A A 39DH
tion

Channel 6
F5-06 output selec- 0 to 37 37 No A A A A 39EH
tion
6-161
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Channel 7
F5-07 output selec- 0 to 37 0F No A A A A 39FH
tion

Channel 8
F5-08 output selec- 0 to 37 0F No A A A A 3A0H
tion

DO-08 out- Set the output mode.
F5-09 put mode 0: 8-channel individual outputs 0 to 2 0 No A A A A 3A1H
selection 1: Binary code output
2: Output according to
F5-01 to F5-08 settings.
Setting Output Items for the DO-02C Digital Output Board

If using DO-02C Digital Output Board, set the output items using F5-01 and F5-02.
Setting Output Items for the DO-08 Digital Output Board

If using DO-08 Digital Output Board, select one of the following three output modes according to the setting
in F5-09.
F5-09 Set to 0
Terminal
Set Value Output Details
Number
TD5-TD11 Overcurrent (SC, OC, GF)
TD6-TD11 Overvoltage (OV)
TD7-TD11 Inverter overload (OL2)
0: 8 separate TD8-TD11 Fuse blown (PUF)

outputs TD9-TD11 Overspeed (OS)
TD10-TD11 Inverter overheated (OH1) or motor overload (OL1)
TD1-TD2 Zero-speed detected
TD3-TD4 Speed agreement
6-162
Options
F5-09 Set to 1
Terminal
Set Value Output Details
Number
TD5-TD11 bit 0
TD6-TD11 bit 1 Encoded output

(Refer to table below)
TD7-TD11 bit 2
1: Binary code TD8-TD11 bit 3

output TD9-TD11 Zero-speed detected
TD10-TD11 Speed agreement
TD1-TD2 Operating
TD3-TD4 Minor fault
The following table shows the code outputs.

Bits 3, 2, 1, Bits 3, 2, 1,
Output Details Output Details
and 0 and 0
0000 No error 1000 External fault (EFxx)
0001 Overcurrent (SC, OC, GF) 1001 Control board error (CPFxx)
0010 Overvoltage (OV) 1010 Motor overload (OL1)
0011 Inverter overload (OL2) 1011 Not used
0100 Inverter overheated (OH, OH1) 1100 Power loss (UV1, UV2, or UV3)
0101 Overspeed (OS) 1101 Speed deviation (DEV)
0110 Fuse blown (PUF) 1110 PG open circuit (PGO)
Dynamic braking resistor (RH)
0111 1111 Not used
Injection brake transistor error (RR)
F5-09 Set to 2
Output depends on the settings in F5-01 to F5-08.
Using an Analog Reference Board (SPEC: E or Later Only)

AI-14B provides 3 channels of bi-polar inputs with 13-bit A/D conversion accuracy (and a + sign bit). The
function of each channel is determined by the setting of F2-01.
AI-14U provides 2 channels of bi-polar inputs with 14-bit A/D conversion accuracy. Channel 1 is a voltage
input and channel 2 is a current input. The sum of channels 1 and 2 is a frequency input. F2-01 does not need
to be set for the AI-14U.
6-163
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the functions for channel 1
to 3 which are effective when
the AI-14B Analog Reference
Board is used.
0: 3-channel individual (Chan-
nel 1: terminal A1, Channel
Bi-polar or
2: terminal A2, Channel 3:
uni-polar
F2-01 terminal A3) 0 or 1 0 No A A A A 38FH
input selec-
1: 3-channel addition (Addition
tion
values are the frequency ref-
erence)
When set to 0, select 1 for b1-
01. In this case the multi-func-
tion input “Option/Inverter
selection” cannot be used.
Setting Precautions
Always set b1-01 (Reference selection) to 1 (control circuit terminal) when using the AI-14B for three chan-
nels of independent inputs. When this is done, H1-01 to H1-06 (multi-function contact inputs) cannot be set to
2 (Option/Inverter selection).
Using a Digital Reference Board (SPEC: E or Later Only)

When using a DI-08 or DI-16H2 Digital Reference Board, set b1-01 (Reference selection) to 3 (Option
Board).
The DI-16H2 can be used to set a frequency using a 16-bit digital reference. The DI-08 can be used to set a
frequency using a 8-bit digital reference.
Related Constants
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the Digital Reference Board
input method.
0: BCD 1% unit
1: BCD 0.1% unit
2: BCD 0.01% unit
3: BCD 1 Hz unit
4: BCD 0.1 Hz unit
5: BCD 0.01 Hz unit
Digital input
F3-01 6: BCD special setting (5-digit 0 to 7 0 No A A A A 390H
option
input)
7: Binary input
6 is only effective when the DI-
16H2 is used.
When o1-03 is set to 2 or higher,
the input will be BCD, and the
units will change to the o1-03
setting.
6-164
Options
Control Methods
Change MEMO
Con- Open
tion Vec- ter
PG tor
tor
Sets the units that will be set and
displayed for the frequency ref-
erence and frequency monitor.
0: 0.01 Hz units
1: 0.01% units (Maximum
output frequency is 100%)
2 to 39:
poles.)
40 to 39999:
Frequency User desired display
units of refer- Set the desired values for 0 to
o1-03 0 No A A A A 502H
ence setting setting and display for the max. 39999
and monitor output frequency.
Set 4-digit number

point.
to display.
Example: When the max. out-
put frequency value is 200.0, set
12000
Selecting Input Terminal Functions for the DI-16H2 Digital Reference Board
The frequency reference from the DI-16H2 Board is determined by the setting of F3-01 and the 12/16-bit
switch on the option board. The possible settings are listed in the following table.
6-165
12-bit Binary 16-bit Binary 3-digit BCD with 4-digit BCD with 5-digit BCD with-
with Sign with Sign Sign Sign out Sign
Terminal Pin No.
F3-01 = 7 F3-01 = 7 F3-01 = 0 to 5 F3-01 = 0 to 5 F3-01 = 6
S1: 12 bit S1: 16 bit S1: 12 bit S1: 16 bit S1: 16 bit
1 Bit 1 (20) Bit 1 (20) 1 1 2
BCD digit 1
2 Bit 1 (21) Bit 1 (21) 2 BCD digit 1 2 BCD digit 1 4
(0, 2, 4, 6, 8)
(0 to 9) (0 to 9)
3 Bit 1 (22) Bit 1 (22) 4 4 8
4 Bit 1 (23) Bit 1 (23) 8 8 1
5 Bit 1 (24) Bit 1 (24) 1 1 2 BCD digit 2

TC1
(0 to 9)
6 Bit 1 (25) Bit 1 (2 )5 2 BCD digit 2 2 BCD digit 2 4
(0 to 9) (0 to 9)
7 Bit 1 (26) Bit 1 (26) 4 4 8
8 Bit 1 (27) Bit 1 (27) 8 8 1
9 Bit 1 (28) Bit 1 (28) 1 1 2 BCD digit 3

(0 to 9)
10 Bit 1 (29) Bit 1 (2 )9 2 BCD digit 3 2 BCD digit 3 4
(0 to 9) (0 to 9)
1 Bit 1 (210) Bit 1 (210) 4 4 8
2 Bit 1 (211) Bit 1 (211) 8 8 1
3 - Bit 1 (212) - 1 2 BCD digit 4

(0 to 9)
4 - Bit 1 (213) - 2 BCD digit 4 4
TC2 (0 to 9)
5 - Bit 1 (214) - 4 8
6 - Bit 1 (215) - 8 1 BCD digit 5

7 Sign signal (0: Forward, 1: Reverse) 2 (0 to 3)
8 SET (read) signal (1: Read)

9 Input signal common (0 V)
TC3 Shield wire connection terminal
• The maximum frequency (100% speed) reference will be used when the binary input is set (setting: 6 or 7)
and all bits are 1.
• Setting F3-01 to 6 is valid only when the D1-16H2 is used. Using this setting, a frequency from 0.00 to
399.8 Hz can be set in BCD. The sign bit is used as a data bit, so only positive (plus) data can be set. Also,
the digit starts from 0, so the minimum setting is 0.02 Hz.
Selecting the Input Terminal Function for a DI-08 Digital Reference Board
The frequency reference from a DI-08 Board is determined by the setting of F3-01, as shown in the following
table.
6-166
Options
8-bit Binary with Sign 2-digit BCD with Sign

Terminal Pin No.
F3-01 = 7 F3-01 = 0 to 5
1 Bit 1 (20) 1
2 Bit 1 (21) 2 BCD digit 1

(0 to 9)
3 Bit 1 (22) 4
4 Bit 1 (23) 8
5 Bit 1 (24) 1
TC 6 Bit 1 (25) 2 BCD digit 2
7 6 4 (0 to 15)
Bit 1 (2 )
8 Bit 1 (27) 8
9 Sign signal
10 SET (read) signal
11 Reference common signal (0 V)
The DI-08 will not function if F3-01 is set to 6
Selecting the Digital Reference

The range of the digital references is determined by the combination of the settings of o1-03 and F3-01. The
information monitored in U1-01 (Frequency reference) will also change.
DI-16H2 Reference Ranges

When using the DI-16H2, the following ranges can be set depending on the settings of the constants.
Switch Reference Setting U1-01 Monitor Unit

o1-03 F3-01 Reference Input Mode
S1 Range o1-03 = 0 o1-03 = 1
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 1% -110 to 110%
0
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 1% -110 to 110%
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 0.1% -110.0 to 110.0%
1
2
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 1 Hz -400 to 400 Hz
3
0 or 1 16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 1 Hz -400 to 400 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.01%
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 0.1 Hz -159.9 to 159.9 Hz
4
5
6 16 bits 5-digit BCD without sign, 0.01 Hz 000.00 to 399.98 Hz
12 bits 12-bit binary with sign, 100%/4095 -4095 to 4095
7
16 bits 16-bit binary with sign, 100%/30000 -33000 to 33000
6-167
Switch Reference Setting U1-01 Monitor Unit
o1-03 F3-01 Reference Input Mode
S1 Range o1-03 = 0 o1-03 = 1
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 1 rpm -1599 to 1599 rpm 1 rpm
2 to 39 -
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 1 rpm -15999 to 15999 rpm 1 rpm
x0040 3-digit BCD with sign, 100%/(1- to 4-
- 12 bits -1599 to 1599
to digit setting of o1-03) 5th digit of o1-03 set-
x9999 ting:
(x = 0 4-digit BCD with sign, 100%/(1- to 4- -9999 to 9999
- 16 bits X = 0, unit: 1
to 3) digit setting of o1-03) (when o1-03 = 9999)
X = 1, unit: 0.1
x1000 X = 2, unit: 0.01
(x = 1 - 16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 100%/10000 -1000 to 1000 X = 3, unit: 0.001
to 3)
DI-08 Reference Ranges

When using the DI-08, the following ranges can be set depending on the settings of the constants.
U1-01 Monitor Unit
F3-01 Reference Input Mode Reference Setting Range
o1-03 = 0 o1-03 = 1
0 2-digit BCD with sign, 1% -110 to 110%
1 2-digit BCD with sign, 0.1% -15.9 to 15.9%
2 2-digit BCD with sign, 0.01% -1.59 to 1.59%
3 2-digit BCD with sign, 1 Hz -159 to 159 Hz
0.01 Hz 0.01%
4 2-digit BCD with sign, 0.1 Hz -15.9 to 15.9 Hz
5 2-digit BCD with sign, 0.01 Hz -1.59 to 1.59 Hz
6 -
7 8-bit binary with sign, 100%/255 -255 to 255
6-168
Using Inverters for Elevating Machines

This section describes precautions to be observed when using the Varispeed F7 for elevating machines
such as elevators and cranes.
Brake ON/OFF Sequence
Brake ON/OFF Sequence

For the holding brake’s ON/OFF sequence, use the following Inverter output signals according to the set con-
trol method.
Brake ON/OFF Signal Brake ON/OFF Level Adjustment
Control Method
Signal Name Constant *1 Signal Name Constant
V/f (A1-02 = 0, Frequency • Speed agree • L4-01 = 1.0 to

detection 2 H2-01 = 05 ∗5
factory setting) detection level 3.0 Hz *2
V/f with PG (A1-02 = 1) Frequency • Speed agree • L4-02 = 0.1 to
Open-loop vector (A1-02 = 2) H2-01 = 36 ∗5 detection width 0.5 Hz *3
detection 5 ∗4
Zero-speed level b2-01 = 0.1 to
Flux vector (A1-02 = 3) During run 2 H2-01 = 37
(OFF timing only) 0.5 Hz
* 1. This example shows multi-function output terminals M1-M2 used for the holding brake ON/OFF signal.
Do not set H2-01 to 0 (During run).
* 2. This is the standard setting range for open-loop vector control. For V/f control, set to approximately the motor rated slip frequency +0.5 Hz.
If the set value is too low, the motor torque is insufficient and the load may slip when the brake is applied. Be sure to set L4-01 to a value larger than that
of E1-09 (Min. output frequency) and larger than that of L4-02 shown in Figure 6.80. If the set value is too large, the motor may not run smoothly when
it starts running.
* 3. The hysteresis in frequency detection 2 can be adjusted (from 0.1 to 0.5 Hz) by L4-02 (speed agree detection width). Change the setting to approxi-
mately 0.1 Hz if there are drops while stopping.
* 4. Applicable for F7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG:1032 or later.
* 5. When using frequency detection 2, set L4-01 before H2-01. If H2-01 is set before L4-01, the holding brake will engage while stopping. For Inverters
with software versions PRG: 1032 or later, use frequency detection 5 in which a holding brake signal is OFF when the Inverter is baseblocked.
L4-01
L4-02
Output frequency Time
ON OFF
Frequency detection 2
Fig 6.80
6-169
Sequence Circuit Configuration
The brake ON/OFF sequence circuit configuration is shown below.
Inverter (Varispeed F7) Holding brake

Fault contacts auxiliary relay coil
MA
UP
S1 MB UP
(Forward run) Sequence
BR
circuit DOWN
DOWN MC
S2
(Reverse run) BR
HIGH/LOW S6
(Multi-step speed reference 2) Energizes the brake when ON
M1 (250 VAC 1 A or less, 30 VDC
SC
1 A or less)
M2
Frequency
detection 2, 5 or
During run
Note Design the sequence so that the holding brake contact is open when the sequence operation conditions are satisfied and the contact between M1 and M2
is closed (ON).
Make sure that the holding brake contact is closed when the emergency stop signal or Inverter fault contact output signal is ON.
Also, make sure that the holding brake is released when an up/down command is issued (ON.)
Fig 6.81 Brake ON/OFF Sequence Circuit Configuration
Time Chart
The brake ON/OFF sequence time charts are shown in Figs. 6.82 and 6.83.
OFF ON
S1-SC UP
Input
High speed/ OFF ON

S6-SC
Low speed
d1-01 (Enabled when b1-01 = 0)

d1-03
Output frequency b4-01
L4-01
0
Output
Time
DC injection braking
Frequency detection 2
ON OFF
M1-M2 (H2-01 = 05)
Holding brake
operation CLOSE OPEN CLOSE
Note For variable speed operation by an analog signal, set to b1-01 = 1.

Fig 6.82 Brake ON/OFF Sequence Time Chart (V/f, V/f with PG, open-loop vector)
OFF ON
S1-SC UP
Input
S6-SC High speed/ OFF ON

Low speed
d1-01 (Enabled when b1-01 = 0)

d1-03
Output frequency b2-01
0 Time
Output
DC injection braking (Zero-speed control)

During run 2
M1-M2 (H2-01 = 37) ON OFF
Holding brake
operation CLOSE OPEN CLOSE
Note For variable speed operation by an analog signal, set to b1-01 = 1.

Fig 6.83 Brake ON/OFF Sequence Time Chart (Flux Vector)
6-170
Stall Prevention during Deceleration

If connecting a braking resistor to discharge regenerative energy, be sure to set Stall prevention selection dur-
ing decel (L3-04) to 0 (Disabled).
If Stall prevention selection during decel (L3-04) is set to 1, 2, or 3 , the motor may not stop within the speci-
fied decelerating time.
Stall prevention selection during accel (L3-01) and Stall prevention selection during running (L3-05) should be
IMPORTANT
set to their initial values 1 (Enabled) to enable these functions.
Autotuning
Always perform autotuning with the motor before operating using vector control. Be sure to disconnect the
motor from the load before conducting autotuning. Conducting autotuning while the motor is connected to an
elevating machine system is dangerous because it automatically runs the motor for approximately one minute.
1. When the motor cannot be disconnected from the load, perform stationary autotuning 1 (T1-01 = 1)
or stationary autotuning 2 (T1-01 = 4). For F7-series Inverters with SPEC: E or later, perform stationary
autotuning 2 (T1-01=4). Stationary autotuning will apply current to the motor in its stopped condition and
IMPORTANT
automatically measure the motor data. In the initial running period after autotuning 1 (T1-01 = 1) (20%
speed min., fixed speed for 1 s min.), the motor data measured by autotuning will automatically be cor-
rected.
2. To improve low-speed torque characteristics using V/f control, conduct stationary autotuning for line to line
resistance only (T1-01 = 2).
3. When conducting autotuning on wound motor or other special types of motors, obtain a test report for the
motor in advance and confirm that the E2 motor constants after autotuning do not vary greatly from those
of the test report.
Braking Resistor Overheating Protection

When using a braking resistor other than the Braking Resistor Unit, provide a sequence with a thermal over-
load relay or similar means to turn off the power input to the Inverter when it detects resistor overheating. See
the Connection Diagram on page 2-3 for this sequence circuit.
Momentary Power Loss Restart

Do not use the momentary power loss restart and fault restart functions in applications for elevating machines.
Make sure that L2-01=0 and L5-01=0. If these functions are used, the motor coasts to a stop with the brake
contact open when a momentary power loss or fault occurs during operation, possibly resulting in serious acci-
dents.
Torque Limit
The torque limit values (L7-01 to L7-04) are the motor's rated torque. When there is a possibility of insuffi-
cient torque at start-up or other time, increase the Inverter capacity and set the torque limit value to between
200% and 300% (factory setting is 200%).
6-171
I/O Open-phase Protection and Overtorque Detection
To prevent the machine from falling when the motor is open-phase or a similar situation, enable L8-05 and L8-
07 (Input and output open-phase protection selection) and L6-01 to L6-06 (Overtorque detection) (factory set-
ting is Disabled).
Falling detection or a similar safety measure should also be provided on the machine side.
External Baseblock Signal

If the external baseblock command (settings 8 and 9 of H1-01 to H1-06) is input while the motor is running,
the motor will immediately coast to a stop. Do not input the external baseblock command while the motor is
running unless necessary.
Make sure that the holding brake operates when using the external base block command for an emergency
stop or interlock to start the Inverter.
If the external baseblock command is input and immediately reset, the Inverter does not output voltage during
the value of L2-03 (Min. baseblock time), which factory setting is 0.5 to 2.0 seconds depending on the Inverter
capacity. Do not use the external baseblock command in an application where the motor is frequently started
and stopped.
Acceleration/Deceleration Time
If the delay time for the holding brake’s mechanical operation is not taken into consideration and the accelera-
tion/deceleration time on the Inverter side is set to a time that is too short, and overcurrent or wear on the
brakes may occur at staring or the load will slip at stopping because the holding brake does not operate on
time. If so, use the dwell function at start described on page 6-175 or the dwell function at stop described on
page 6-176 to tune the timing for the holding brake.
Magnetic Contactor on the Inverter’s Output-side

Do not install a magnetic contactor between the Inverter and the motor. If a magnetic contactor must be
installed because of local electrical codes or regulations or to operate motors with an Inverter, excluding emer-
gencies, open or close the magnetic contactor only when the holding brake is fully closed and the Inverter is in
baseblock status with the baseblock signal ON.
If the magnetic contactor is opened or closed while the Inverter is controlling the motor or DC injection brak-
ing (Zero-speed control), surge voltage or a current from the motor by full-voltage starting may cause an
Inverter fault.
When a magnetic contactor is installed between the Inverter and the motor, set L8-07 (Output open-phase pro-
tection selection) to 1 or 2 (Enabled).
6-172
Control-related Adjustments
The Varispeed F7 is designed to provide sufficient performance for elevating machines. However, if problems
related to controllability should occur, such as vibration or slipping, adjust the following constants in accor-
dance with the control method. Only constants that frequently require adjustment are listed in this table.
Table 6.4 Control-related Adjustments

Con- Recom-
Control Factory
stant Name Performance mended Adjustment Method
Method Setting
Number Setting
• Increasing torque and • Torque or speed response
Speed feed- speed response is insufficient: Reduce the
back detec- • Controlling hunting setting
N2-01 1.00 0.50 to 2.00
tion control and vibration in mid- • Hunting or vibration
(AFR) gain dle-range speeds (10 occurs: Increase the set-
to 40 Hz) ting
• Torque or speed response
Torque com-
• Increasing torque and is insufficient: Reduce the
pensation
speed response setting
C4-02 primary 20 ms 20 to 100 ms
• Controlling hunting • Hunting or vibration
delay time
and vibration occurs: Increase the set-
constant
ting
Slip compen- • Increasing speed • Speed response is slow:
sation pri- response 100 to Reduce the setting
C3-02 200 ms
mary delay • Improving speed sta- 500 ms • Speed is not stable:
Open-loop time bility Increase the setting
vector con-
• Speed is slow: Increase
trol
Slip compen- • Improving speed the setting
(A1-02 = 2) C3-01 1.0 0.5 to 1.5
sation gain accuracy • Speed is too fast: Reduce
the setting
• Reducing motor mag-
• Motor magnetic noise is
netic noise
Carrier fre- high: Increase the setting
• Controlling hunting
C6-02 quency *1 1 to F • Hunting or vibration
and vibration at low
selection occurs at low speeds:
speeds (10 Hz or
Reduce the setting
lower)
Mid. output 12.0 to
E1-08 frequency *2
• Improving torque and 11.0 V 13.0 V*2 • Torque or speed response
voltage (VC) speed response at low is insufficient: Increase
Min. output speeds the setting
frequency • Controlling shock at 2.0 to • Shock at startup is large:
E1-10 startup 2.0 V*2 Reduce the setting
voltage 3.0 V*2
(VMIN)
6-173
Table 6.4 Control-related Adjustments (Continued)
Con- Recom-
Control Factory
stant Name Performance mended Adjustment Method
Method Setting
Number Setting
ASR propor-
C5-01 tional (P) • Torque or speed response
• Increasing torque and
gain 1 is insufficient: Increase
speed response 10.00 to
20.00 the setting
ASR propor- • Controlling hunting 50.00
• Hunting or vibration
C5-03 tional (P) and vibration
occurs: Reduce the setting
gain 2
ASR inte- • Torque or speed response
C5-02 gral (I) time • Increasing torque and is insufficient: Reduce the
1 speed response 0.300 to setting
0.500 s
ASR inte- • Controlling hunting 1.000 s • Hunting or vibration
Flux vector
C5-04 gral (I) time and vibration occurs: Increase the set-
control
2 ting
(A1-02 = 3)
Set the output frequency at
which to change the ASR
Switching the ASR pro-
ASR switch- 0.0 to max. proportional gain and inte-
portional gain and inte- 0.0 Hz (no
C5-07 ing fre- output fre- gral time when the same val-
gral time according to switching)
quency quency ues cannot be used for both
the output frequency.
high-speed and low-speed
operation.
ASR pri- Machine rigidity is low and
• Controlling hunting 0.004 to
C5-06 mary delay 0.004 s the system vibrates easily:
and vibration 0.020
time Increase the setting
• Torque is insufficient for
• Controlling hunting heavy loads: Reduce the
Hunting-pre- and vibration in mid- setting
N1-02 1.00 0.50 to 2.00
vention gain dle-range speeds (10 • Hunting or vibration
to 40 Hz) occurs for light loads:
Increase the setting
• Motor magnetic noise is
• Reducing motor mag-
high: Increase the setting
Carrier fre- netic noise
• Hunting or vibration
C6-02 quency • Controlling hunting *1 1 to F
occurs at low to middle-
selection and vibration at low
range speeds: Reduce the
and medium speeds
setting
V/f control
(A1-02 = 0 • Improving torque at • Torque is insufficient at
or 1) low speeds (10 Hz or low speeds: Increase the
Torque com-
lower) setting
C4-01 pensation 1.00 0.50 to 1.50
• Controlling hunting • Hunting or vibration
gain
and vibration for light occurs for light loads:
loads Reduce the setting
Mid. output 13.0 to
E1-08 frequency 15.0 V*2 • Torque is insufficient at
voltage (VC) • Improving torque at 16.0 V*2
low speeds: Increase the
low speeds
Min. output • Controlling shock at setting
frequency 7.0 to • Shock at startup is large:
E1-10 startup 9.0 V*2
voltage 10.0 V*2 Reduce the setting
(VMIN)
* 1. Varies depending on capacity.
* 2. The setting is given for 200 V Class Inverters. Double the voltage for 400 V Class Inverters.
Note 1. Do not change C4-01 (Torque compensation gain) from its factory setting of 1.00 when using open-loop vector control.
2. If speeds are inaccurate during regeneration in open-loop vector control, enable Slip compensation selection during regeneration (C3-04 = 1). If
speeds are inaccurate in the high-speed range, enable Output voltage limit operation selection (C3-05 = 1).
3. Do not use Slip compensation gain (C3-01) during V/f control (A1-02 = 0). (It is not used with the factory setting.)
6-174
4. Use the ASR constants (C5-01 to C5-05) in their factory settings when using V/f control with PG (A1-02 = 1). Vibration may occur if these constants
are changed greatly from their factory settings.
5. The torque and speed response of high-resistance (high-slip) motors are insufficient. Use appropriate adjustments to improve them. On the contrary,
low-resistance (low-slip) motors are easily subject to hunting and vibration. Here too, use appropriate adjustments to improve them.
6. The current during startup may increase when C4-02 (Torque compensation primary delay time constant) is increased. Check the current during star-
tup while adjusting this constant.
Reducing Shock during Elevating Machine Start, Stop, Acceleration, and

Deceleration
When the riding comfort during start, stop, acceleration, and deceleration is of high importance, as it is for ele-
vators in which people ride, adjust the following constants.
S-curve Characteristics, Acceleration/Deceleration Times
(High speed)
C2-02 C2-03
Output frequency (Low speed)
C2-03
C2-01 C2-04
C2-04
Acceleration time Deceleration time DC injection braking when stopping

(Zero-speed control for flux vector control)
1. The factory setting for C2-04 (S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end) is 0.00 second, while the fac-
tory setting for all other S-curve characteristic times is 0.20 second. Make appropriate settings for the
accel/decel times and S-curve characteristic times at each point. (S-curve characteristic time = Approxi-
IMPORTANT mately 0.2 to 1.0 second)
2. The accel/decel rate can be automatically switched during acceleration and deceleration by using C1-11
(Accel/decel time switching frequency). (Factory setting: Disabled)
Output frequency ≥ set frequency: C1-01, C1-02 accel/decel times
Output frequency < set frequency: C1-07, C1-08 accel/decel times
3. If the output frequency during the S-curve characteristic time for deceleration falls below the value set for
E1-09 (Min. output frequency), the S-curve characteristic will be cancelled, and the DC injection braking
(Zero-speed control) will be applied.
4. Do not use the S-curve characteristic for applications where a short run time is desired, such as in cranes
and hoists. (S-curve characteristic time = Approximately 0.0 to 0.2 second)
Dwell Function at Start
b6-02
(High speed)
(Dwell time at start)
Output frequency 0.1 to 0.3 sec
b6-01 (Dwell frequency at start) 0.1 to 3.0 Hz
Frequency detection t
2 or During run 2 OFF ON
Holding brake
CLOSE OPEN
operation
6-175
If the mechanical operation of the holding brake is slow, use the dwell function at start to prevent brake wear,
and accelerate after the brake is completely open.
1. When using open-loop vector control and V/f control, set b6-01 (Dwell frequency at start) higher than fre-
quency detection 2 (frequency when brakes open).
2. If the motor tends to have insufficient torque when started, use the DC injection braking function to allow
IMPORTANT sufficient motor current (torque) before starting.
• b2-03 (DC injection braking time at start): 0.2 to 0.5 s
• b2-02 (DC injection braking current): 50% to 80% (open-loop vector control, V/f control only)
Stopping with DC Injection Braking and Zero-speed Control
(HIGH) b2-04 (DC injection braking time at stop

(zero-speed control time at stop): 0.3 to 0.5 s
Output frequency (LOW)
Frequency t b2-01 [Zero speed level (DC injection braking
detection 2 or starting frequency)]: 0.1 to 3.0 Hz
During run 2 ON OFF b2-02 (DC injection braking current): 50% to 80%
(open-loop vector control, V/f control only)
Holding brake operation OPEN CLOSE
When the holding brake’s mechanical operation is slow, use DC injection braking (zero-speed control for flux
vector control) until the brakes are fully closed to prevent the brakes from slipping when stopping.
1. When the load cannot be maintained sufficiently using DC injection braking with open-loop vector control
and V/f control, use the dwell functions at stop.
• b6-03 (Dwell frequency at stop): Min. output frequency to 3.0 Hz.
IMPORTANT The value must be less than the frequency when frequency detection 2 is OFF (L4-01 − L4-02).
• b6-04 (Dwell time at stop): 0.3 to 0.5 s
[b2-04 (DC injection braking at stop): 0.0 s]
2. If the Inverter and motor must be isolated while stopping using a magnetic contactor, for example in an ele-
vator, fully close the holding brakes and isolate the Inverter during baseblock (during baseblock signal: ON)
as stipulated by law in the EU.
During motor control or DC injection braking (zero-speed control), an Inverter error may occur due to surge
voltage. When a magnetic contactor is used between the Inverter and motor, set L8-07 (Output open-
phase protection) to 1 (enabled).
Torque Compensation (Flux Vector Control Only) (SPEC: E or Later Only)

When flux vector control is used, the torque compensation signals corresponding to the load can be input from
the multi-function analog input terminals in advance to reduce shock, such as that caused by opening and clos-
ing holding brakes. The load size and motoring/regenerating status must be detected at the machine side in
advance. Check that polarity is correct. Incorrect polarity will increase the shock.
6-176
Sequence Circuit Configuration

The following diagram shows the sequence circuit configuration for torque compensation.
UP
S1 (Forward run)
DOWN
S2 (Reverse run)
HIGH/LOW
S6 (Multi-step speed reference 2)
SC
(Using elevator control circuit) A3

Torque compensation signal H3-04 (multi-function analog input terminal A3 signal level)
−10 to +10 V AC = 1 (−10 to +10 V)
H3-05 (multi-function analog input terminal A3 function
selection) = 14 (torque compensation)
Use H3-06 and H3-07 for fine tuning.
Fig 6.84 Torque Compensation Sequence Circuit Configuration
Time Chart
• Lifting
The analog signals corresponding to the load size are input as torque compensation signals from before the
Inverter starts until operation stops. (Factory setting: 10 V/100% torque)
Positive polarity is input for motor loads and negative polarity is input for regenerative loads.
The following diagram shows the time chart for lifting.
UP (Forward) OFF
ON
HIGH/LOW OFF
ON
Torque compensation
signal: 0 Analog signals corresponding to load size (Motor load: Inputs positive polarity.)
Same as above (Regenerative load: Inputs negative polarity.)
Output frequency
Zero-speed control
0 t
Motor torque (Motor load)

0
(Regenerative load)
During run 2 ON OFF
Holding brake operation OPEN

CLOSE
Fig 6.85 Torque Compensation Time Chart (Lifting)
6-177
• Lowering
In the same way as for lifting, when the torque decreases, the analog signals corresponding to the load size are
input as torque compensation signals from before the Inverter starts until operation stops. (Factory setting: 10
V/100% torque)
Negative polarity is input for motor loads and positive polarity is input for regenerative loads.
The following diagram shows the time chart for lowering.
DOWN (Forward) OFF

ON
HIGH/LOW OFF
ON
Torque compensation Analog signals corresponding to load size (Regenerative load: Inputs positive polarity.)
signal: 0
Same as above (Motor load: Inputs negative polarity.)
0 t
Output frequency
Motor torque (Regenerative load)

0
(Motor load)
During run 2 ON OFF

Holding brake operation OPEN
CLOSE
Fig 6.86 Torque Compensation Time Chart (Lowering)
1. For either increasing or decreasing torque, externally maintain the torque compensation signals during
operation to prevent them from fluctuating. Fluctuation in compensation signals during operation may result
in vibration.
IMPORTANT 2. If reverse run is used for lifting and forward run is used for lowering, the torque compensation signal polar-
ity must be reversed.
Analog Input Filter Time Constant

If noise enters the analog frequency reference during operation using analog frequency reference (b1-01 = 1),
and operation becomes rough, implement noise countermeasures and also set H3-12 (Analog input filter time
constant) to between 0.01 and 0.10 s.
Confirming Startup Current and Reducing Carrier Frequency

When performing trial operation, check the motor current using the Digital Operator or a clamp ammeter with
and without a mechanical load. An extremely large current will flow if the motor torque at start is insufficient,
or if timing is not correct and the motor locks with the holding brake.
For applications with repetitive loads (cranes, elevators, presses, washing machines, etc.), if a current exceed-
ing 125% of the Inverter rated current or more flows repeatedly, the IGBT in the Inverter will be subject to
heat stress, resulting in a shortened life span. In this case, select CT instead of VT and reduce the load,
lengthen the acceleration/deceleration time, or increase the frame size of the Inverter so that the peak current
for repetitive operation will drop to less than 125% of the Inverter rated current. If performing a trial operation
with repetitive loads, make sure that the peak current for repetitive operation is less than 125% of the Inverter
rated current. If particularly low noise is not required, do not increase the Inverter’s carrier frequency to
reduce the influence of heat stress.
6-178
Overvoltage Inhibit Function (SPEC: E or Later Only)

Leave L3-11 (Overvoltage inhibit function selection) set to 0 (disabled: factory setting). This function is used
to prevent overvoltage tripping when the braking resistor is not used with a regenerative load. When this func-
tion is enabled, the torque reference on the regenerative side is automatically inhibited in the Inverter during
regeneration. Using this function in elevating machines is dangerous because the elevator may slip and fall.
Contact your Yaskawa representative for details on applications such as high-speed elevators (speed: 2 m/s or higher),
direct-drive elevators, or Inverters designed for cranes.
6-179
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the fault displays and countermeasure for the Inverter and motor prob-
lems and countermeasures.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions ........................... 7-2

Troubleshooting .........................................................7-21
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
This section describes the alarm functions of the Inverter. The alarm functions include fault detection,
alarm detection, operation error detection, and autotuning error detection.
Fault Detection
When the Inverter detects a fault, the fault contact output operates, and the Inverter output is shut OFF causing
the motor to coast to a stop. (The stopping method can be selected for some faults, and the selected stopping
method will be used with these faults.) A fault code is displayed on the Digital Operator.
When a fault has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the fault.
Be sure to turn Run Command to OFF first, use one of the following methods to reset the fault before restart-
ing the Inverter.
• Set a multi-function contact input (H1-01 to H1-06) to 14 (Fault Reset) and turn ON the fault reset signal.
• Press the RESET Key on the Digital Operator.
• Turn the main circuit power supply OFF and then ON again.
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing

Display Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions
• A short-circuit or ground fault
occurred at the Inverter output. (A
short or ground fault can be caused
by motor burn damage, worn insu- Reset the fault after correcting its
lation, or a damaged cable.) cause.
• The load is too large or the accelera- Note) Before turning the power
tion/deceleration time is too short. ON again, make sure that no
• A special-purpose motor or motor short-circuit or ground fault
Overcurrent with a capacity too large for the occurs at the Inverter output.
The Inverter output current exceeded Inverter is being used.
the overcurrent detection level. (200% • A magnetic contactor was switched
of rated current) at the Inverter output.
• Make sure that incorrect wiring

has not been done.
• A short-circuit between +V, −V, and
• Check the resistance and wir-
AC terminals occurred.
ing for the frequency setting
• Overload in the control circuit ter-
potentiometer, etc. (Check that
minal.
the current for terminals +V and
–V is 20 mA or less.)
Reset the fault after correcting its
A ground fault occurred at the Inverter cause.
output. (A ground fault can be caused Note) Before turning the power
by motor burn damage, worn insula- ON again, make sure that no
tion, or a damaged cable.) short-circuit or ground fault
Ground Fault*
occurs at the Inverter output.
The ground fault current at the
Inverter output exceeded approxi- • Make sure that incorrect wiring
mately 50% of the Inverter rated out- has not been done.
put current. • A short-circuit between +V, −V, and
minal.
* The ground fault here is one which occurs in the motor wiring while the motor is running. A ground fault may not be detected in the following cases.
y A ground fault with low resistance which occurs in motor cables or terminals.
y A ground fault occurs when the power is turned ON.
7-2
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)

• The output transistor has failed
because of a short-circuit or ground
fault at the Inverter output.
Check whether there is a short-cir-
cuit between the following termi-
nals. A short-circuit will damage
Fuse Blown the output transistor: Replace the Inverter after correct-
The fuse in the main circuit is blown. ing the cause.
B1 ( 3) ←→ U, V, W
←→ U, V, W
• Input power was supplied from the
output side. (Improper wiring, the
sequence for switching commercial
power supply was wrong, etc.)
The deceleration time is too short and Increase the deceleration time or
the regenerative energy from the connect a braking resistor (or
motor is too large. Braking Resistor Unit).
Motor ground fault

Check the output cable, relay ter-
(Ground fault current flowed to the
minal, or motor terminal box and
capacitor in the control circuit of the
correct the cause of ground fault.
Inverter through the power supply.)
• Use the speed search function.

Main Circuit Overvoltage • Adjust the settings of the Speed
The main circuit DC voltage exceeded Incorrect constant setting for speed search operating current (b3-02)
the overvoltage detection level. search and Speed search deceleration
200 V Class: Approx. 410 V (The speed search can be performed time (b3-03).
400 V Class: Approx. 820 V during momentary power loss recov- • Use the estimated speed search
(E1-01 ≥ 400 V) ery and auto restart after a fault.) function. (Perform stationary
Approx. 720 V autotuning for line-to-line resis-
(E1-01 < 400 V) tance only.)
Improper PG cable connection Check to see if the PG cable is

(PG noise, PG disconnection) connected properly.
The regenerative energy when an In vector control, enable (Set to 1)
overshoot occurs after acceleration is the overvoltage inhibit selection
completed is too large. (L3-11).
Decrease the voltage so it's within

The power supply voltage is too high.
specifications.
• An open-phase occurred with the

input power supply.
Main Circuit Undervoltage
• A momentary power loss occurred.
The main circuit DC voltage is below
• The wiring terminals for the input
the Undervoltage Detection Level
power supply are loose. • Reset the fault after correcting
(L2-05).
• The voltage fluctuations in the input its cause.
200 V Class: Approx. 190 V
power supply are too large. • Improve the power supply envi-
• A fault occurred in the surge pre- ronment. (Check to see if the
Main Circuit Magnetic Connector
vention circuit. correct power tap is selected.)
Operation Failure
• The magnetic contactor in the con- • Improve the operating environ-
The magnetic connector stopped
trol circuit was released (Contact ment.
responding during Inverter operation.
failure in the auxiliary contact). • Replace the Inverter.
Applicable Inverter Capacities
• The contact of the magnetic contac-
200 V Class: 37 to 110 kW
tor in the control circuit was cor-
roded due to environmental dust or
gas.
7-3
• The wiring of the control power cir-
cuit is incorrect.
• Fix the wiring.
• A Backup Capacitor Unit for
• Try turning the power supply
Momentary Power Loss is not
Control Power Fault off and on.
attached to a 200 V/400 V Class
The control power supply voltage • Replace the Inverter if the fault
Inverter of 11 kW or less and the
dropped. continues to occur.
value of the Momentary power loss
• Attach a Backup Capacitor Unit
ridethru time (L2-02) factory setting
for Momentary Power Loss.
has been changed to the larger
value.
Inrush Prevention Circuit Fault

Malfunction in the inrush prevention
circuit.
The magnetic contactor did not • The magnetic contactor in the main • Try turning the power supply
respond for 10 s even though the mag- circuit failed. off and on.
netic contactor ON signal has been • The magnetic contactor excitation • Replace the Inverter if the fault
output. coil is burned out. continues to occur.
Applicable Inverter Capacities
• An open-phase occurred in the input

Main Circuit Voltage Fault
power supply.
The main circuit DC voltage oscillates
• A momentary power loss occurred.
unusually (not when regenerating).
• The wiring terminals for the input
This fault is detected if a load is Reset the fault after correcting its
power supply are loose.
greater than approximately 80% of the cause.
• The voltage fluctuations in the input
maximum motor capacity.
power supply are too large.
This fault is detected when L8-05 is
• The voltage balance between phases
set to 1.
is bad.
• There is a broken wire in the output

cable.
Output Open-phase Reset the fault after correcting its
• There is a broken wire in the motor-
An open-phase occurred at the cause.
winding.
Inverter output. • The output terminals are loose.
set to 1 or 2. The motor being used has a capacity
Check the motor and Inverter
less than 5% of the Inverter rated out-
capacity.
put current.
The ambient temperature is too high. Install a cooling unit.
Cooling Fin Overheating There is a heat source nearby. Remove the heat source.
The temperature of the Inverter's cool-
ing fins exceeded the setting in L8-02 Replace the cooling fan. (Contact
The Inverter's cooling fan has stopped.
or the overheat protection level. our sales representative.)
OH: The temperature exceeded the
setting in L8-02 (Stopping method can • Make sure that incorrect wiring
be changed by L8-03.). has not been done.
OH1: The temperature exceeded • Check the resistance and wir-
( ) AC terminals occurred.
100°C (Stopping method: Coast to ing for the frequency setting
stop). potentiometer, etc. (Check that
minal.
Inverter's Cooling Fan Fault

• The Inverter's cooling fan has • Replace the cooling fan. (Con-
(11 kW or more)
stopped. tact our sales representative.)
• The heatsink is clogged. • Clean the heatsink.
set to 1.
7-4

Inverter’s Cooling Fan Fault
An Inverter’s cooling fan fault was
detected, and the Inverter-overload The Inverter continued running with
Replace the cooling fan. (Contact
protection was activated based on the an overload after the cooling fan
our sales representative.)
internal electric thermal value. stopped.
set to 0.
Check the size of the load and the
length of the acceleration, deceler-
ation, and cycle times.
Motor Overheating Alarm
Check the V/f characteristics.
The Inverter will stop or will continue
The motor has overheated.
to operate according to the setting of Check the motor temperature
L1-03.
input on terminals A2 and A3 .
Check the setting of E2-01 (motor

rated current).
length of the acceleration, deceler-
ation, and cycle times.
Motor Overheating Fault Check the V/f characteristics.
The Inverter will stop according to the The motor has overheated.
setting of L1-04. Check the motor temperature
input on terminals A2 and A3 .
Check the setting of E2-01 (motor

rated current).
Installed Braking Resistor Over- • Reduce the load, increase the
heating The deceleration time is too short and deceleration time, or reduce the
The braking resistor is overheated and the regenerative energy from the motor speed.
the protection function has operated if motor is too large. • Change to a Braking Resistor
it has been enabled in L8-01. Unit.
• Try turning the power supply

Internal Braking Transistor Fault • The braking transistor is damaged.
off and on.
The braking transistor is not operating • The Inverter’s control circuits are
• Replace the Inverter if the fault
properly. faulty.
continues to occur.
The load is too heavy. The accelera- Check the size of the load and the
tion time, deceleration time, and cycle length of the acceleration, deceler-
time are too short. ation, and cycle times.

• Adjust the settings of the Speed
search operating current (b3-02)
The constant setting for speed search
and Speed search deceleration
is incorrect.
time (b3-03).
(Motor overload occurred due to
• Use the estimated speed search
motor hunting and vibration.)
Motor Overload function. (Perform stationary
The motor overload protection func- autotuning for line-to-line resis-
tion has operated based on the internal tance only.)
electronic thermal value.
• Motor overload occurred when run-
ning at low speed. (If a general-pur-
pose motor is used, motor overload
can occur when running at low • Check the size of the load.
speed even if running within the • Check the setting of L1-01.
rated current.) • Increase the frame size of the
• Motor protection selection (L1-01) Inverter.
is set to general-purpose motor pro-
tection (1) when an Inverter duty
motor is used.
7-5
• Correct the PG wiring.
The directions of the motor and PG
• Correct the motor wiring.
are different. (Only in flux vector con-
• Change the setting of PG rota-
trol)
tion (F1-05).
The V/f characteristics voltage is too

Check the V/f characteristics.
high or too low.
Motor Overload The Motor Rated Current (E2-01) and Check the Motor Rated Current
The motor overload protection func- Motor 2 Rated Current (E4-01) is (E2-01) and Motor 2 Rated Cur-
tion has operated based on the internal incorrect. rent (E4-01).
electronic thermal value.
has not been done.
minal.
The load is too heavy. The accelera- Check the size of the load and the
tion time, deceleration time and cycle length of the acceleration, deceler-
time are too short. ation, and cycle times.

• Adjust the settings of the Speed
search operating current (b3-02)
The constant setting for speed search
and Speed search deceleration
is incorrect.
time (b3-03).
(Motor overload occurred due to
• Use the estimated speed search
motor hunting and vibration.)
function. (Perform stationary
autotuning for line-to-line resis-
tance only.)
• Correct the PG wiring.

The directions of the motor and PG
• Correct the motor wiring.
are different. (Only in flux vector con-
Inverter Overload • Change the setting of PG rota-
trol)
The Inverter overload protection function (F1-05).
tion has operated based on the internal
The V/f characteristics voltage is too
electronic thermal value. Check the V/f characteristics.
high or too low.
Replace the Inverter with one that

The Inverter capacity is too low.
has a larger capacity.

has not been done.
minal.
• Reduce the load.

Inverter overload occurred when run- • Increase the frame size of the
ning at a low speed of 6 Hz or less. Inverter.
• Lower the carrier frequency.
• Make sure that the settings in

Overtorque Detected 1 L6-02 and L6-03 are appropri-
There has been a current greater than ate.
-
the setting in L6-02 for longer than the • Check the mechanical system
setting in L6-03. and correct the cause of the
overtorque.
7-6

• Make sure that the current set-
Overtorque Detected 2 ting in L6-05 and time setting in
There has been a current greater than L6-06 are appropriate.
-
the setting in L6-05 for longer than the • Check the mechanical system
overtorque.
• Make sure the load is an inertial

load.
High-slip Braking OL
The inertia returned to the load is too • Set the system so that the decel-
The output frequency did not change
large. eration time that does not pro-
for longer than the time set in N3-04.
duce OV is the value of N3-04
or less.
• Make sure that the settings in

Undertorque Detected 1 L6-02 and L6-03 are appropri-
There has been a current less than the ate.
-
setting in L6-02 for longer than the • Check the mechanical system
overtorque.
• Make sure that the current set-

Undertorque Detected 2 ting in L6-05 and time setting in
There has been a current less than the L6-06 are appropriate.
-
setting in L6-05 for longer than the • Check the mechanical system
overtorque.
Overshooting/Undershooting are
Adjust the gain again.
occurring.
Overspeed
The speed has been greater than the Check the reference circuit and
The reference speed is too high.
setting in F1-08 for longer than the reference gain.
setting in F1-09.
The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 aren't Check the settings in F1-08 and
appropriate. F1-09.
Fix the broken/disconnected wir-

There is a break in the PG wiring.
ing.
PG Disconnection Detected
PG pulses were input when the The PG is wired incorrectly. Fix the wiring.
Inverter was outputting a frequency Power isn't being supplied to the PG. Supply power to the PG properly.
(soft start output ≥ E1-09).
Check for open circuit when using
Brake is applied to the motor.
brake (motor).
The load is too heavy. Reduce the load.
The acceleration time and deceleration Lengthen the acceleration time

time are too short. and deceleration time.
Excessive Speed Deviation
The speed deviation has been greater The load is locked. Check the mechanical system.
than the setting in F1-10 for longer
than the setting in F1-11. The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 aren't Check the settings in F1-10 and
appropriate. F1-11.

brake (motor).
Control Fault The settings for torque limit aren’t

Check the settings for torque limit.
The torque limit was reached continu- appropriate.
ously for 3 seconds or longer during a
deceleration stop during open-loop The settings of motor constant aren’t • Check the motor constants.
vector control. appropriate. • Perform autotuning.
7-7
PID Feedback Reference Lost
The settings in b5-13 and b5-14 aren’t Check the settings in b5-13 and
A PID feedback reference loss was
appropriate. b5-14.
detected (b5-12 = 2) and the PID feed-
back input was less than b5-13 (PID
feedback loss detection level) for The wiring of the PID feedback circuit
longer than the time set in b5-14 (PID Fix the wiring.
is incorrect.
feedback loss detection time).
Check the Communications

External Fault input from Commu-
- Option Board and communica-
nications Option Board
tions signals.
External Fault (Input Terminal S3)
External Fault (Input Terminal S5) • Reset external fault inputs to the
An "external fault" was input from a
multi-function input terminal (S3 to
• Remove the cause of the exter-
External Fault (Input Terminal S6) S8).
nal fault.
The torque limit is too small. Increase the limit.

Zero-Servo Fault
The rotation position moved during The load torque is too large. Reduce the load torque.
zero-servo operation.
- Check for signal noise.
Exceeded Allowable Number of

Speed Search Retrials
The speed search has been retried The settings in b3-17 and b3-18 aren’t Make sure that the settings in b3-
more than the number of times set in appropriate. 17 and b3-18 are appropriate.
b3-19 (Number of speed search retri-
als).
Digital Operator Connection Fault

The connection to the Digital Operator Check the connection to the Digi-
-
was broken during operation for a Run tal Operator.
Command from the Digital Operator.
MEMOBUS Communications Error

Check the communications
A normal reception was not possible
- devices and communications sig-
for 2 s or longer after control data was
nals.
received once.
Option Communications Error

A communications error was detected Check the communications
during a Run Command or while set- - devices and communications sig-
ting a frequency reference from a nals.
Communications Option Board.
Check the communications tim-
ing such as communications cycle.
SI-T Watchdog Error Synchronization error between master
Refer to MECHATROLINK COM-
Consistency error of received control controller and Inverter for control
MUNICATIONS INTERFACE
data data.
CARD INSTRUCTIONS
(TOBPC73060008) for details.
7-8

Disconnect and then reconnect the
Digital Operator connection is faulty.
SI-F/G Option Board CPU Failure Digital Operator.
SI-F/G Option Board operation failed.
Inverter control circuit is faulty. Replace the Inverter.
Digital Operator Communications The Digital Operator's connector isn't Disconnect the Digital Operator
Error 1 connected properly. and then connect it again.
Communications with the Digital
Operator were not established within 5 The Inverter's control circuits are
seconds after the power was turned Replace the Inverter.
faulty.
on.
Try turning the power supply off

-
CPU External RAM Fault and on again.
The control circuits were destroyed. Replace the Inverter.
Digital Operator Communications The Digital Operator isn't connected Disconnect the Digital Operator
Error 2 properly. and then connect it again.
After communications were estab-
lished, there was a communications The Inverter's control circuits are
error with the Digital Operator for Replace the Inverter.
faulty.
more than 2 seconds.

-
Baseblock Circuit Error and on again.
The control circuit is damaged. Replace the Inverter.

-
and on again.
The Inverter power supply was shut

EEPROM Error Initialize the constant settings
off while writing data to the Inverter
(A1-03).
constants.

-
and on again.

CPU Internal A/D Converter Error has not been done.
minal.

-
and on again.

CPU External A/D Converter Error has not been done.
minal.
7-9
The option board is not connected Turn off the power and insert the
properly. board again.
Option Board Connection Error
Replace the option board or the
The Inverter or option board is faulty.
Inverter.

-
ASIC Internal RAM Fault and on again.

-
Watchdog Timer Fault and on again.

-
CPU-ASIC Mutual Diagnosis Fault and on again.
ASIC Version Fault The Inverter control circuit is faulty Replace the Inverter.
Communications Option Board A/ properly. board again.
D Converter Error The option board's A/D converter is Replace the Communications
faulty. Option Board.

Self Diagnostic Error
Communications Option Board fault. Replace the option board.
Model Code Error
Communications Option Board fault. Replace the option board.
• Use the copy function off-line.

The copy function of the Digital Oper-
Communications Option Board • Use the copy function with an
ator was used during communications.
DPRAM Error option board removed.
properly. board again.
7-10
Table 7.2 Causes and Corrective Actions When the Digital Operator Goes Dark
has not been done.
minal.
The short-circuit bar between +1 and

+2 terminals in the control circuit has Attach the short-circuit bar.
been removed.
• Check the wiring for the Brak-

ing Unit, including cables con-
P terminal and N terminal of the Brak-
There was a drop in control power nected to the Braking Unit and
No display ing Unit are connected in reverse.
voltage. relay terminals.
• Replace the Inverter.
Charge indicator is lit:

• Replace the Digital Operator.
• Replace the control circuit ter-
minal board or the Inverter.
Control power circuit failure
Charge indicator is not lit:
• Check the input power supply
voltage.
• Replace the Inverter.
Turn OFF the power, wait for 5

Malfunction occurred in the control
minutes, and turn ON the power
power circuit.
again.
7-11
Alarm Detection
Alarms are detected as a type of Inverter protection function that do not operate the fault contact output. The
system will automatically returned to its original status once the cause of the alarm has been removed.
The Digital Operator display blinks and an alarm is sent from the multi-function outputs (H2-01 to H2-03) if
selected.
When an alarm occurs, take appropriate countermeasures according to the table below.
Table 7.3 Alarm Displays and Processing

Display Meaning Probable causes Corrective Actions
Check the sequence of the forward
Forward/Reverse Run Commands
and Reverse Run Commands.
Input Together
Since the rotational direction is
(blink- Both the forward and Reverse Run -
unknown, the motor will be deceler-
ing) Commands have been ON for more
ated to a stop when this minor fault
than 0.5 s.
occurs.
Main Circuit Undervoltage

The following conditions occurred
when there was no Run signal.
• The main circuit DC voltage was
below the Undervoltage Detection See causes for UV1, UV2, and UV3 See corrective actions for UV1, UV2,
(blink- Level Setting (L2-05). faults in the previous table. and UV3 faults in the previous table.
ing) • The surge current limiting mag-
netic contactor opened.
• The control power supply voltage
when below the CUV level.
Main Circuit Overvoltage

The main circuit DC voltage exceeded
Decrease the voltage so it's within
(blink- the overvoltage detection level. The power supply voltage is too high.
specifications.
ing) 200 V Class: Approx. 410 V
The ambient temperature is too high. Install a cooling unit.
There is a heat source nearby. Remove the heat source
Replace the cooling fan. (Contact

The Inverter cooling fan has stopped.
your Yaskawa representative.)
Cooling Fin Overheating
(blink- The temperature of the Inverter's cool- • Make sure that incorrect wiring has
ing) ing fins exceeded the setting in L8-02. not been done.
• Check the resistance and wiring for
the frequency setting potentiome-
ter, etc. (Check that the current for
minal.
terminals +V and –V is 20 mA or
less.)
Inverter’s Cooling Fan Fault

An Inverter’s cooling fan fault was
The Inverter’s cooling fan has Replace the cooling fan. (Contact our
(blink- detected.
stopped. sales representative.)
ing) This fault is detected when L8-32 is
set to 0.
Inverter Overheating Pre-alarm

An OH2 alarm signal (Inverter over-
Clear the multi-function input termi-
(blink- heating alarm signal) was input from a -
nal's overheating alarm input.
ing) multi-function input terminal (S3 to
S8).
7-12
Table 7.3 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)

length of the acceleration, decelera-
Motor Overheating tion, and cycle times.
E was set for H3-05 or H3-09 and the
(blink- The motor has overheated.
motor temperature thermistor input Check the V/f characteristics.
ing) exceeded the alarm detection level.
Check the motor temperature input on
terminals A2 and A3.
Overtorque 1 • Make sure that the settings in L6-

There has been a current greater than 02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
(blink- -
the setting in L6-02 for longer than the • Check the mechanical system and
ing) setting in L6-03. correct the cause of the overtorque.
• Make sure that the current setting

Overtorque 2
in L6-05 and time setting in L6-06
There has been a current greater than
(blink- - are appropriate.
the setting in L6-05 for longer than the
ing) • Check the mechanical system and
setting in L6-06.
correct the cause of the overtorque.
Undertorque 1 • Make sure that the settings in L6-

There has been a current less than the 02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
(blink- -
setting in L6-02 for longer than the • Check the mechanical system and
ing) setting in L6-03. correct the cause of the overtorque.
• Make sure that the current setting

Undertorque 2
in L6-05 and time setting in L6-06
There has been a current less than the
(blink- - are appropriate.
setting in L6-05 for longer than the
ing) • Check the mechanical system and
setting in L6-06.
correct the cause of the overtorque.
Overshooting/undershooting are
Adjust the gain again.
occurring.
Overspeed
The speed has been greater than the Check the reference circuit and refer-
(blink- The reference speed is too high.
setting in F1-08 for longer than the ence gain.
ing) setting in F1-09.
The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 aren't Check the settings in F1-08 and F1-
appropriate. 09.
There is a break in the PG wiring. Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
The PG is Disconnected The PG is wired incorrectly. Fix the wiring.

(blink- The Inverter is outputting a frequency, Power isn't being supplied to the PG. Supply power to the PG properly.
ing) but PG pulses aren't being input.
brake (motor).
The load is too large. Reduce the load.
The acceleration time and decelera- Lengthen the acceleration time and
tion time are too short. deceleration time.
Excessive Speed Deviation
The speed deviation has been greater The load is locked. Check the mechanical system.
(blink- than the setting in F1-10 for longer
ing) than the setting in F1-11. The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 aren't Check the settings in F1-10 and F1-
appropriate. 11.

brake (motor).
7-13
External Fault Detected for Com-
munications Board Other Than SI-
K2 Remove the cause of the external
(blink- -
Continuing operation was specified fault.
ing) for EF0 (F6-03 = 3)and an external
fault was input from the option board.
(blink- External Fault (Input Terminal S3)

ing)

ing)

• Reset external fault inputs to the
ing) An external fault was input from a
multi-function input terminal (S3 to
• Remove the cause of the external
S8).
fault.
ing)

ing)

ing)
PID Feedback Reference Lost

The settings in b5-13 and b5-14 aren’t Check the settings in b5-13 and b5-
A PID feedback reference loss was
appropriate. 14.
detected (b5-12 = 2) and the PID feed-
(blink- back input was less than b5-13 (PID
ing) feedback loss detection level) for The wiring of the PID feedback cir-
longer than the time set in b5-14 (PID Fix the wiring.
cuit is incorrect.
feedback loss detection time).
MEMOBUS Communications Error

Normal reception was not possible for Check the communications devices
(blink- -
2 s or longer after received control and signals.
ing) data.
Option Board Communications

Error
A communications error occurred in a Check the communications devices
(blink- -
mode where the Run Command or a and signals.
ing) frequency reference is set from a
Communications Option Board.
Communications on Standby
Check the communications devices
(blink- Control data was not normally -
and signals.
ing) received when power was turned ON.
Reset during Run Command Input

Error Check that a Run Command is not
The reset signal was input during Run - being input from an external terminal
(blink-
Command input from an external ter- or other source.
ing)
minal or other source.
7-14

SI-T Watchdog Error Detected
A Watchdog error was detected when
Synchronization error between master
the Run Command or a frequency ref- Check the communications timing
(blink- controller and Inverter for control
erence was set from an option board such as communications cycle. *
ing) data.
and continuous operation was set for
the E5 operation selection.
Check the setting of the station num-

SI-T Station Number Setting Error Station number setting error.
ber.*
(blink- Station number of SI-T option board
ing) was out of setting range. Check the communications devices
Circuit of SI-T option board is faulty.
and signals.*
SI-T Communications Cycle Set-

Communications cycle of SI-T option Check the communication cycle of
ting Error
(blink- board set in master controller was out SI-T option board set in master con-
Communications cycle of SI-T option
ing) of range. troller.*
board was out of range.
Receiving External Baseblock

Command
(blink- External baseblock was input from - -
ing) external terminal again while it was
input.
* Refer to MECHATROLINK COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE CARD INSTRUCTIONS (TOBPC73060008) for details.
7-15
Operation Errors
An operation error will occur if there is an invalid setting or a contradiction between two constant settings. It
won't be possible to start the Inverter until the constants have been set correctly. (The alarm output and fault
contact outputs will not operate either.)
When an operation error has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the
errors.
Table 7.4 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings

Display Meaning Incorrect settings
Incorrect Inverter The Inverter capacity setting doesn't match the Unit. (Contact your Yaskawa repre-
Capacity Setting sentative.)
The constant setting is outside of the valid setting range.

Constant Setting Range
Press the ENTER Key on the Digital Operator to display OPE fault constant (U1-
Error
34).
One of the following errors has been made in the multi-function input (H1-01 to H1-
06) settings:
• The same setting has been selected for two or more multi-function inputs.
• An up or down command was selected independently. (They must be used
together.)
• The up/down commands (10 and 11) and Accel/Decel Ramp Hold (A) were
selected at the same time.
Multi-function Input
• Speed Search 1 (61, maximum output frequency) and Speed Search 2 (62. set fre-
Selection Error
quency) were selected at the same time.
• The up/down commands (10 and 11) were selected while PID Control Method
Selection (b5-01) was enabled.
• Positive and negative speed commands have not been set at the same time.
• The emergency Stop Command NO and NC have been set at the same time.
• Deceleration at momentary power loss (KEB) command (65 or 66) and High-slip
braking (HSB) (68) were selected at the same time.
Option Board Selection The option board was selected as the frequency reference source by setting b1-01 to
Error 3, but an option board isn't connected (C option).
Control Method Selec- 1 (V/f with PG) or 3 (Flux vector) was selected in A1-02, but a PG Speed Control
tion Error Board isn't connected.
The same setting has been selected for the analog input selection and the PID func-
tion selection.
• H3-09 or H3-05 = B and H6-01 = 1
• H3-09 or H3-05 = C and H6-01 = 2
Multi-function Analog
b1-01 (Reference Selection) is set to 4 (pulse input) and H6-01 (Pulse Train Input
Input Selection Error
Function Selection) is set to a value other than 0 (frequency reference).
H3-13 (Terminal A1/A2 switching) is set to 1 and H3-09 is set to other than 2 or
H3-05 is set to 0 or 2.
The same value is set to H3-05 and H3-09.
A setting has been made that is not required in the current control method. Ex.: A
Constant Selection function used only with open-loop vector control was selected for V/f control.
Error Press the ENTER Key on the Digital Operator to display OPE fault constant (U1-
34).
The following settings have been made at the same time.

PID Control Selection • b5-01 (PID Control Method Selection) has been set to a value other than 0.
Error • b5-15 (PID Sleep Function Operation Level) has been set to a value other than 0.
• b1-03 (Stopping Method Selection) has been set to 2 or 3.
7-16
Table 7.4 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings (Continued)

Display Meaning Incorrect settings
Constants E1-04, E1-06, E1-07, and E1-09 do not satisfy the following conditions:
V/f Data Setting Error • E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
• E3-02 (FMAX) ≥ E3-04 (FA) > E3-05 (FB) ≥ E3-07 (FMIN)
One of the following constant setting errors exists.

• C6-05 (Carrier Frequency Gain) > 6, the Carrier Frequency Lower Limit (C6-04)
> the Carrier Frequency Gain(C6-05)
Constant Setting Error
• Upper/lower limit error in C6-03 to 05.
• C6-01 is 0 and C6-02 is 2 to E.
• C6-01 is 1 and C6-02 is 7 to E.
A verification error occurred when writing EEPROM.

EEPROM Write Error • Try turning the power supply off and on again.
• Try setting the constants again.
Note: If the settings for the constants of an Inverter with a different version of software are copied, an OPE error can occur. Contact your Yaskawa representa-
tive if wanting to copy the settings with a different software version.
7-17
Errors During Autotuning
The errors that can occur during autotuning are given in the following table. If an error is detected, the motor
will coast to a stop and an error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator. The error contact output and
alarm output will not function.
Table 7.5 Errors During Autotuning

There is an error in the data input for
autotuning.
There is an error in the relationship
• Check the input data.
between the motor output and the motor
• Check the capacity of the Inverter and
rated current.
Motor data error motor.
The is an error between the no-load cur-
• Check the motor rated current and no-
rent setting and the input motor rated
load current.
current (when autotuning for only line-
to-line resistance is performed for vector
control).
A minor fault occurred during autotun-

Alarm • Check the input data.
ing (xxx).
• Check wiring and the machine.
The STOP Key was pressed to cancel • Check the load.
STOP key input
autotuning.
Line-to-line resis-
tance error Autotuning was not completed in the • Check the input data.
specified time. • Check the motor wiring.
No-load current error The results of autotuning has exceeded • If the motor is connected to the
the setting range for a user constant. machine, disconnect it.
Rated slip error
• Increase C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).

Acceleration error • Increase L7-01 and L7-02 (Reverse
The motor did not accelerate in the spec-
(detected only for Torque Limits) if they are low.
ified time.
rotational autotuning) • If the motor is connected to the
machine, disconnect it.
• Check the PG wiring.

There is a faulty connection between the
Motor Direction • Check the motor wiring.
Inverter and PC (A or B phase) or the
Error • Check the PG rotation direction and
Inverter and Motor (U, V, or W).
F1-05 (PG rotation).
• If the motor is connected to the

machine, disconnect it.
Motor speed error The torque reference was too high
• Increase C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
(detected only for (100%) during acceleration (for open-
• Check the input data (particularly the
rotational autotuning) loop vector control only).
number of PG pulses and the number
of motor poles).
The current flow exceeded the motor

rated current.
Check the current detection circuit,
Current detection
The detected current sign was the oppo- motor wiring, current detector, and
error
site of what it should be. installation methods.
There is a phase fault for U, V, or W.
Leakage inductance Autotuning was not completed in the

Check the motor wiring.
error specified time.
7-18
Table 7.5 Errors During Autotuning (Continued)

PG Disconnection PG pulses were input when the Inverter
Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
Detected was outputting a frequency.
V/f settings exces-

The torque reference exceeded 100%
sive* • Check and correct the settings.
and the no-load torque exceeded 70%
(detected only for • Disconnect the load from the motor.
during autotuning.
rotational autotuning)
Motor core satura-

The results of autotuning has exceeded • Check the input data.
tion error (detected
the setting range for a user constant so a • Check motor wiring.
only for rotational
temporary setting was made for the • If the motor is connected to the
autotuning)
motor core saturation coefficient. machine, disconnect it.
Rated current setting Check the input data (particularly the

The rated current is set high. motor output current and motor rated
alarm* current).
• Check the input data.

As a result of stationary autotuning 1,
Adjusted slip value • If rotational autotuning is possible,
the slip value has fallen to 0.2 Hz or
fell below lower limit perform it. If impossible, perform sta-
below.
tionary autotuning 2.
* Displayed after autotuning has been completed. For constants in which no error is detected, the settings are reset to the values determined by autotuning.
Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function

The errors that can occur when using the copy function from the Digital Operator are given in the following
table. An error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator. If a Digital Operator key is pressed when an
error code is being displayed, the display will be cleared and 03-01 will be displayed. The error contact output
and alarm output will not function.
Table 7.6 Errors during Copy Function

Func-
tion
o3-01 was set to 1 to write a constant
Digital Operator Set o3-02 to 1 to enable writing con-
when the Digital Operator was write-
write-protected stants with the Digital Operator.
protected (o3-02 = 0).
The read data length does not agree. Repeat the read.
Illegal read data Check the Digital Operator cable.
Read The write data is incorrect. Replace the Digital Operator.
A low Inverter voltage has been

An attempted write of a constant to detected.
Illegal write status
EEPROM on the Digital Writer failed. Repeat the read.
Replace the Digital Operator.
7-19
Table 7.6 Errors during Copy Function (Continued)
Func-
tion
The Inverter product code or software Use the copy function for the same
ID not matched
number is different. product code and software number.
The capacity of the Inverter being

Inverter capacity Use the copy function for the same
copied and the capacity in the Digital
matched Inverter capacity.
Operator are different.
The control method of the Inverter

Control method Use the copy function for the same
being copied and the control method
matched control method.
in the Digital Operator are different.
Copy
The constant written to the Inverter
was compared with the constant in the
Verify error Retry the copy.
Digital Operator and they were differ-
ent.
The checksum in the Inverter constant

area was compared with the checksum
Checksum error Retry the copy.
in the Digital Operator constant area
and they were different.
The Digital Operator and Inverter set-

Verify error Retry the copy and verify again.
tings do not agree.
Verify
The Inverter product code or software Use the copy function for the same
ID not matched
number is different. product code and software number.
7-20
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Due to constant setting errors, faulty wiring, and so on, the Inverter and motor may not operate as
expected when the system is started up. If that should occur, use this section as a reference and apply the
appropriate measures.
If the contents of the fault are displayed, refer to Protective and Diagnostic Functions.
If Inverter Constants Cannot Be Set

Use the following information if an Inverter constant cannot be set.
The display does not change when the Increment and Decrement Keys are pressed.
The following causes are possible.
The Inverter is operating (drive mode).

There are some constants that cannot be set during operation. Turn the Inverter off and then make the settings.
Constant write enable is input.

This occurs when "constant write enable" (set value: 1B) is set for a multi-function input terminal (H1-01 to
H1-06). If the constant write enable input is OFF, the constants cannot be changed. Turn it ON and then set the
constants.
Passwords do not match. (Only when a password is set.)

If the constant A1-04 (Password) and A1-05 (Password Setting) numbers are different, the constants for the
initialize mode cannot be changed. Reset the password.
If you cannot remember the password, display A1-05 (Password Setting) by pressing the Reset/Select Key and
the Menu Key simultaneously while in the A1-04 display. Then reset the password. (Input the reset password
in constant A1-04.)
OPE01 through OPE11 is displayed.

The set value for the constant is wrong. Refer to Operation Errors in this chapter and correct the setting.
CPF00 or CPF01 is displayed.

This is a Digital Operator communications error. The connection between the Digital Operator and the
Inverter may be faulty. Remove the Digital Operator and then re-install it.
7-21
If the Motor Does Not Operate
Use the following information if the motor does not operate.
The motor does not operate when the RUN Key on the Digital Operator is pressed.
If the Inverter is not in drive mode and the DRIVE indicator on the Digital Operator (JVOP-161) does not light
up, the Inverter will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the Menu Key to make the DRIVE indicator
flash, and enter the drive mode by pressing the DATA/ENTER Key. The DRIVE indicator will light when drive
IMPORTANT mode is entered.
The operation method setting is wrong.

If constant b1-02 (Operation Method Selection) is set to 1 (control circuit terminal), the motor will not operate
when the Run Key is pressed. Either press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key* to switch to Digital Operator opera-
tion or set b1-02 to 0 (Digital Operator).
The LOCAL/REMOTE Key is enabled by setting o2-01 to 1 and disabled by setting o2-01 to 2. It is enabled
when the drive mode is entered.
INFO
The frequency reference is too low.

If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Inverter
will not operate.
Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
There is a multi-function analog input setting error.

If H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function Analog
Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) is set to 1 (frequency gain), and if no voltage (current) is input, then
the frequency reference will be zero. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are correct.
The motor does not operate when an external operation signal is input.
The Inverter is not in drive mode.

If the Inverter is not in drive mode and the DRIVE indicator on the Digital Operator (JVOP-161) does not
light up, the Inverter will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the MENU Key make the DRIVE
indicator flash, and enter the drive mode by pressing the DATA/ENTER Key. The DRIVE indicator will light
when drive mode is entered.
7-22
Troubleshooting
The operation method selection is wrong.

If constant b1-02 (reference selection) is set to 0 (Digital Operator), the motor will not operate when an exter-
nal operation signal is input. Set b1-02 to 1 (control circuit terminal) and try again.
Similarly, the motor will also not operate if the LOCAL/REMOTE Key has been pressed to switch to Digital
Operator operation. In that case press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key* again to return to the original setting.
The LOCAL/REMOTE Key is enabled by setting o2-01 to 1 and disabled by setting o2-01 to 2. It is enabled
when the drive mode is entered.
INFO
A 3-wire sequence is in effect.

The input method for a 3-wire sequence is different than when operating by forward/stop and reverse/stop (2-
wire sequence). When 3-wire sequence is set, the motor will not operate even when an input terminal suitable
for forward run/stop and reverse run/stop is turned ON.
When using a 3-wire sequence, refer to the timing chart, set the multi-function input terminal (H1-01 through
H1-06, terminals S3 to S8) to 0, and input the proper signals.
When using a 2-wire sequence, set the multi-function input terminal (H1-01 through H1-06, terminals S3 to
S8) to a value other than 0.
The frequency reference is too low.

If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Inverter
will not operate. Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
There is a multi-function analog input setting error.

If multi-function analog inputs H3-05 or H3-09 is set to 1 (frequency gain), and if no voltage (current) is
input, then the frequency reference will be zero. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are
correct.
The motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected.

The load may be too heavy. The Inverter has a stall prevention function and an automatic torque boost func-
tion, but the motor responsiveness limit may be exceeded if acceleration is too rapid or if the load is too heavy.
Lengthen the acceleration time or reduce the load. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.
The Inverter does not operate.

Probable Causes Descriptions Corrective Actions
If the indicator on the RUN Key is not lit,
Inverter does not operate if a Run command
Run command is not sent. the Run Command is not sent. Input the
is not sent.
Run Command.
b1-02 has to be set according to the Run
Command input method to be used.
b1-02=
The operation method 0: Digital Operator Set b1-02 according to the Run Command
selection is wrong. 1: Control circuit terminal (factory setting) input method to be used.
3: Option board
7-23
Probable Causes Descriptions Corrective Actions
If the indicator on the STOP Key is flash-
The frequency reference has to be set above ing, check the frequency reference moni-
The frequency reference is
the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Out- tor (U1-01) and set the frequency
too low.
put Frequency). reference above the frequency set in E1-
09.
b1-01 has to be set according to the fre-
quency reference input method to be used.
b1-01=
The frequency reference 0: Digital Operator Set b1-01 according to the frequency ref-
selection is wrong. 1: Control circuit terminal (factory setting) erence input method to be used.
3: Option board
The MENU Key was • Press the DATA/ENTER Key.
pressed. If the MENU Key is pressed once or the • Try turning the power supply off and on
ESC Key is pressed twice, the Inverter will again.
exit the drive mode and will not operate. If • Set b8-01 (Run Command selection in
The ESC Key was pressed the MENU Key is pressed during operation, programming modes) to 1(Cannot oper-
twice. the Inverter will not start even if the Run ate) to remain in the drive mode and
Command is sent at the next operation. continue operation even if the MENU
Key or ESC Key is pressed.
• Press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key.
If the LOCAL/REMOTE Key is pressed
• Try turning the power supply off and on
while the Inverter is stopped, the Inverter
The LOCAL/REMOTE Key again.
will switch to Digital Operator operation
was pressed. • Set o2-01 (LOCAL/REMOTE Key
and cannot be operated with the external
enable/disable) to 0 (Disabled) to dis-
input terminals.
able the LOCAL/REMOTE Key.
• Turn the Run Command off and then on
again.
The STOP Key was If the STOP Key is pressed during opera-
• Set o2-02 (STOP key during control cir-
pressed. tion, the Inverter will decelerate to a stop.
cuit terminal operation) to 0 (Disabled)
to disable the STOP Key.
Make sure that H1-01 to H1-10 are set to a
Wrong selection of a 2-wire If 0 is set to one of H1-01 to H1-10, a 3-
value other than 0 to use a 2-wire
or a 3-wire sequence. wire sequence is set.
sequence.
If b1-04 (Prohibition of reverse operation)
“Reverse run prohibited” is is set to 1 (Reverse disabled), the motor will
Check the setting of b1-04.
selected. not start if the Reverse Run Command is
sent.
The Inverter remains in the autotuning Press the MENU Key to display the drive
Autotuning has just been mode right after autotuning has been com- mode on the Digital Operator and press
completed. pleted and cannot be operated even if the the DATA/ENTER Key to enter the drive
Run Command is sent. mode.
The motor does not accelerate.

If the torque limit settings (L7-01 to L7-04) or the torque reference input (torque control) are too small, the
motor may not be able to accelerate. Check the settings and input values.
The motor only rotates in one direction.

"Reverse run prohibited" is selected. If b1-04 (Prohibition of Reverse Operation) is set to 1 (reverse run pro-
hibited), the Inverter will not receive Reverse Run Commands. To use both forward and reverse operation, set
b1-04 to 0.
7-24
Troubleshooting
If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed

If the motor operates in the wrong direction, the motor output wiring is faulty. When the Inverter T1(U),
T2(V), and T3(W) are properly connected to the motor T1(U), T2(V), and T3(W), the motor operates in a for-
ward direction when a Forward Run Command is executed. The forward direction depends on the manufac-
turer and the motor type, so be sure to check the specifications.
The direction of rotation can be reversed by switching two wires among T1(U), T2(V), and T3(W).
If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow

Use the following information if the motor does not output torque or if acceleration is too slow.
The torque limit has been reached.

When a torque limit has been set in constants L7-01 to L7-04, no torque will be output beyond that limit. This
can cause the torque to be insufficient, or the acceleration time to be too long. Check to be sure that the value
set for the torque limit is suitable.
If torque limits have been set for the multi-function analog input (H3-09 or H3-05 = 10 to 12 or 15), check to
be sure that the analog input value is suitable.
The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low.

If the value set for L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration) is too low, the acceleration time will be
too long. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
The stall prevention level during running is too low.

If the value set for L3-06 (Stall Prevention Level during Running) is too low, the speed will drop before out-
putting torque. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
Autotuning has not been performed for vector control

Vector control will not be perform if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning separately for the
motor, or set the motor constants through calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Method Selection
(A1-02) to V/f control (0 or 1).
If the Motor Operates Higher Than the Reference

Use the following information if the motor operates higher than the reference.
The analog frequency reference bias setting is wrong (the gain setting is wrong).
The frequency reference bias set in constant H3-03 is added to the frequency reference. Check to be sure that
the set value is suitable.
7-25
A signal is being input to the frequency reference terminal A2 or A3 .
When 0 (Add to terminal A1) is set for constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function
Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) , a frequency correspond-
ing to the terminal A2 or A3 input voltage (current) is added to the frequency reference. Check to be sure that
the set value and analog input value are suitable.
If the Slip Compensation Function Has Low Speed Precision

If speed control accuracy is low for the slip compensation function, the slip compensation limit has been
reached. With the slip compensation function, compensation cannot be carried out beyond the slip compensa-
tion limit set in constant C3-03. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
If There is Low Speed Control Accuracy at High-speed Rotation in Open-

loop Vector Control Method
The motor's rated voltage is high.
The Inverter's maximum output voltage is determined by its input voltage. (For example, if 200 VAC is input,
then the maximum output voltage will be 200 VAC.) If, as a result of vector control, the output voltage refer-
ence value exceeds the Inverter output voltage maximum value, the speed control accuracy will decrease. Use
a motor with a low rated voltage (i.e., a special motor for use with vector control), or change to flux vector
control.
If Motor Deceleration is Slow

Use the following information when the motor deceleration is slow.
The deceleration time is long even when braking resistor is connected.

"Stall prevention during deceleration enabled" is set.

When braking resistor is connected, set constant L3-04 (Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration) to 0
(disabled) or 3 (with braking resistor). When this constant is set to 1 (enabled, the factory setting), braking
resistor does not fully function.
The deceleration time setting is too long.

Check the deceleration time setting (constants C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, and C1-08).
Motor torque is insufficient.

If the constants are correct and there is no overvoltage fault, then the motor's power is limited. Consider
increasing the motor capacity.
7-26
Troubleshooting
The torque limit has been reached.

When a torque limit has been set in constants L7-01 to L7-04, no torque will be output beyond that limit. This
can cause the deceleration time to be too long. Check to be sure that the value set for the torque limit is suit-
able.
If H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function Analog
Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) is set to 10, 11, 12 or 15 (positive and negative torque limit), check to
be sure that the analog input value is suitable.
If the Vertical-axis Load Drops When Brake is Applied

The sequence is incorrect. The Inverter goes into DC injection braking status for 0.5 seconds after deceleration
is completed. (This is the factory-set default.)
To ensure that the brake holds, set frequency detection 2 (H2-01 = 5) for the multi-function contact output ter-
minals (M1 and Mw) so that the contacts will turn OFF when the output frequency is greater than L4-01 (3.0
to 5.0 Hz). (The contacts will turn ON below L4-01.)
There is hysteresis in frequency detection 2 (i.e., a frequency detection width, L4-02 = 2.0 Hz). Change the
setting to approximately 0.5 Hz if there are drops during stop. Do not use the multi-function contact output run
signal (H2-01 = 0) for the brake ON/OFF signal.
If the Motor Overheats

Take the following steps if the motor overheats.
The load is too big.

If the motor load is too heavy and the motor is used with the effective torque exceeding the motor's rated
torque, the motor will overheat. Some motor rating are given for short period performance and are not contin-
uous ratings. Reduce the load amount by either lightening the load or lengthening the acceleration/decelera-
tion time. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.
The ambient temperature is too high.

The motor rating is determined within a particular ambient operating temperature range. The motor will burn
out if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment in which the maximum ambient operating
temperature is exceeded. Lower the motor's ambient temperature to within the acceptable ambient operating
temperature range.
The withstand voltage between the motor phases is insufficient.

When the motor is connected to the Inverter output, a surge is generated between the Inverter switching and
the motor coil. Normally the maximum surge voltage is three times the Inverter's input power supply voltage
(i.e., 1,200 V for 400 V Class). Be sure to use a motor with a withstand voltage between the motor phases that
is greater than the maximum surge voltage. In particular, when using a 400 V Class Inverter, use a special
motor for Inverters.
7-27
Autotuning has not been performed for vector control
Vector control will not perform if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning, or set the motor
constants through calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Method Selection (A1-02) to V/f control (0
or 1).
If There is Noise When the Inverter is Started or From an AM Radio

If noise is generated by Inverter switching, implement the following countermeasures:
• Change the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. This will help to
some extent by reducing the amount of internal switching.
• Install an Input Noise Filter at the Inverter's power supply input area.
• Install an Output Noise Filter at the Inverter's power supply output area.
• Use metal tubing. Electric waves can be shielded by metal, so encase the Inverter with metal (steel).
• Ground the Inverter and motor.
• Separate main circuit wiring from control wiring.
If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Inverter is Run

The Inverter performs internal switching, so there is a certain amount of leakage current. This may cause the
ground fault interrupter to operate and cut off the power supply. Change to a ground fault interrupter with a
high leakage detection level (i.e., a sensitivity current of 200 mA or greater per Unit, with an operating time of
0.1 s or more), or one that incorporates high frequency countermeasures (i.e., one designed for use with Invert-
ers). It will also help to some extent to change the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the
carrier frequency. In addition, remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened.
If There is Mechanical Oscillation

Use the following information when there is mechanical oscillation.
The machinery is making unusual sounds.

There may be resonance between the mechanical system's characteristic frequency and the
carrier frequency.
If the motor is running with no problems and the machinery is oscillating with a high-pitched whine, it may
indicate that this is occurring. To prevent this type of resonance, adjust the carrier frequency with constants
C6-02 to C6-05.
There may be resonance between a machine's characteristic frequency and the output fre-
quency of the Inverter.
To prevent this from occurring, either use the jump frequency functions in constants d3-01 to d3-04 or install
rubber padding on the motor base to reduce oscillation.
7-28
Troubleshooting
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with open-loop vector control.

The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Reset the gain to a more effective level by adjusting constants C4-02
(torque compensation time constant), C2-01 (S-curve Characteristic Time at Acceleration Start), and C3-02
(Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time) in order. Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time
setting.
Vector control will not perform if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning separately for the
motor, or set the motor constants through calculations. Alternatively, change the control method selection (A1-
02) to V/f control (0 or 1).
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with V/f control.

The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Reset the gain to a more effective level by adjusting constants C4-02
(Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant), N1-02 (Hunting Prevention Gain), and C3-02 (Slip
Compensation Primary Delay Time) in order. Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time setting.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with V/f w/PG control.

The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Adjust the various types of speed control loop (ASR) gain.
If the oscillation cannot be eliminated in this way, set the hunting prevention selection (constant N1-01) to 0
(disabled) and then try adjusting the gain again.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with flux vector control.

The gain adjustment is insufficient. Adjust the various gains for speed control (ASR). If the oscillation points
overlap with those of the machine and cannot be eliminated, increase the primary delay time constant for
speed control (ASR) in C5-06 and then readjust the gains.
If autotuning is not performed, proper performance cannot be achieved for vector control. Perform autotuning
or set the motor constants according to calculations.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with PID control.

If there is oscillation or hunting during PID control, check the oscillation cycle and individually adjust P, I,
and D constants. (Refer to page 6-113.)
Autotuning has not been performed with vector control.

Vector control will not perform if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning separately for the
motor, or set the motor constants through calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Method Selection
(A1-02) to V/f control.
If the Torque Generated for the Motor is Insufficient (Insufficient Power)

If autotuning has not been performed, or the control method has been changed since last performing autotun-
ing, perform autotuning. If the problem occurs after performing stationary autotuning, perform rotational
autotuning.
7-29
If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped
If the motor rotates even when the Inverter output is stopped, the DC injection braking is insufficient. If the
motor continues operating at low speed, without completely stopping, and after a deceleration stop has been
executed, it means that the DC injection braking is not decelerating enough. Adjust the DC injection braking
as follows:
• Increase the constant b2-02 (DC Injection Braking Current) setting.
• Increase the constant b2-04 (DC Injection Braking (initial excitation) Time at Stop) setting.
If OV is Detected When the Fan is Started, or Fan Stalls

Generation of OV (main circuit voltage) and stalling can occur if the fan is turning when it is started. The DC
injection braking is insufficient when starting.
This can be prevented by slowing fan rotation by DC injection braking before starting the fan. Increase the
constant b2-03 (DC injection braking time (initial excitation) at start) setting.
If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference

Use the following information if the output frequency does not rise to the frequency reference.
The frequency reference is within the jump frequency range.

When the jump frequency function is used, the output frequency does not change within the jump frequency
range. Check to be sure that the Jump Frequency (constants d3-01 to d3-03) and Jump Frequency Width (con-
stant d3-04) settings are suitable.
The frequency reference upper limit has been reached.

The output frequency upper limit is determined by the following formula:
Maximum Output Frequency (E1-04) × Frequency Reference Upper Limit (d2-01) / 100
Check to be sure that the constant E1-04 and d2-01 settings are suitable.
7-30
Maintenance and
Inspection
This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection for the Inverter.
Maintenance and Inspection........................................8-2

Outline of Free Warranty

The free warranty period of the Inverter is as follows:
Free warranty Period: This product is warranted for twelve months after being delivered to Yaskawa’s cus-
tomer or if applicable eighteen months from the date of shipment from Yaskawa’s factory whichever comes
first.
Daily Inspection
Check the following items with the system in operation.
• The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises.
• There should be no abnormal heat generation.
• The ambient temperature should not be too high.
• The output current value shown on the monitor displays should not be higher than normal.
• The cooling fan on the bottom of the Inverter should be operating normally.
Periodic Inspection
Check the following items during periodic maintenance.
Always turn OFF the power supply before beginning inspection. Turn OFF the main circuit power supply,
wait for the time indicated on the front cover, and make sure the CHARGE indicator light has gone out, and
then perform maintenance and inspection. Be sure not to touch terminals right after the power has been turned
off. Doing so can result in electric shock.
Table 8.1 Periodic Inspections

Item Inspection Corrective Procedure
External terminals, Are all screws and bolts tight? Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly.
mounting bolts, connec-
tors, etc. Are connectors tight? Reconnect the loose connectors.
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
Heatsinks Are the fins dirty or dusty? dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm2).
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa
PCBs
the PCBs? (4 to 6 kg•cm2).
Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean.
Is there any abnormal noise or vibration or
Cooling fan has the total operating time exceeded Replace the cooling fan.
20,000 hours?
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on
Power elements dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa
the elements?
(4 to 6 kg•cm2).
Are there any irregularities, such as dis-
Smoothing capacitor Replace the capacitor or Inverter.
coloration or odor?
8-2
Periodic Maintenance of Parts

The Inverter is configured of many parts, and these parts must be operating properly in order to make full use
of the Inverter functions.
Among the electronic components, there are some that require maintenance depending on their usage condi-
tions. In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period of time, it is necessary to perform
period inspections and replace parts according to their service life.
Periodic inspection standards vary depending the Inverter's installation environment and usage conditions.
The Inverter's maintenance periods are noted below. Keep them as reference.
Refer to Cooling Fan Replacement Outline (Page 8-6) for replacing a cooling fan and Circulation Fan
Replacement Outline (Page 8-16) for replacing a circulation fan.
To replace other parts, contact your Yaskawa representative or YASKAWA ELECTRIC ENGINEERING
CORPORATION for details on preventive maintenance for Inverters.
Table 8.2 Part Replacement Guidelines

Part Standard Replacement Period Replacement Method
Cooling fan 2 to 3 years Replace with new part.
Replace with new part. (Determine need by
Smoothing capacitor 5 years
inspection.)
Breaker relays - Determine need by inspection.
Fuses 10 years Replace with new part.
Replace with new board. (Determine need by
Aluminum capacitors on PCBs 5 years
inspection.)
Note The standard replacement period is based on the following usage conditions:
Ambient temperature:Yearly average of 30°C
Load factor: 80% max.
Operating rate: 12 hours max. per day
Procedure for Adjusting Constants after Replacement of Control Board

Before replacing the control board, use the COPY function of the Digital Operator to copy the settings of the
constants of the control board from the Inverter to the Digital Operator.
When using the copy function of the Digital Operator, check that the following settings are the same between
the Inverter and the Digital Operator.
• Inverter product and type　　　　　　　
• Software number
• Inverter capacity and voltage
• Control method
Refer to Copying Constants of Chapter 6 on page 6-151.
After replacing the board, use the following procedure to adjust the constants.
Contact your Yaskawa representative if a control board with older version is used.
8-3
Step No. Digital Operator Display Description
Set o2-04 (kVA selection) to the capacity of

1
the Inverter that you use.
Set A1-03 (Initialize) to 2220 (2-wire initial-

ization) or 3330 (3-wire initialization).
2
This example is a typical setting for initial-
ization by a 2-wire sequence.
After initialization has been completed, use

the copy function of the Operator to copy the
settings of the constants of the control board
3 - from the Operator to the Inverter before
replacing the board.
If the copy function is not available, change
the setting of the constants manually.*
Switch the mode to the DRIVE, and then

press the DATA/ENTER Key to display the
4
frequency setting display. The operation
becomes enabled.
* The factory settings of C6-01(CT/VT selection) between Inverters with software version PRG:101 and PRG: 103 are different. Be sure to check the
C6-01 setting of the Inverter before replacing the control board, and set C6-01.
Types and Number of Cooling Fans Used in the Drive

Cooling fans used for the Drive has two types; Heatsink cooling fan and heatsink circulation fan. Heatsink
cooling fan blows air to the Drive cooling fin. Heatsink circulation fan stirs up the air inside the Drive unit.
Table 8.3 shows the number of cooling fans used in the Drive. For more information on models and specifica-
tions of cooling fans, contact your Yaskawa representative or YASKAWA ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COR-
PORATION.
When replacing the fan, use the specified type of the fan. If the inapplicable fans are used, performance of the
Drive will not be fully obtained.
Table 8.3 Number of Cooling Fans to be Used

Maximum Motor 200 V Class 400 V Class
Capacity Heatsink Cooling Heatsink Circulation Heatsink Cooling Heatsink Circulation
(kW) Fan Fan Fan Fan
0.4 - - - -
0.75 - - - -
1.5 - - - -
2.2 - - 1 -
3.7 1 - 1 -
5.5 1 - 1 -
7.5 2 - 2 -
11 2 1 2 1
15 2 - 2 -
18.5 2 1 2 1
8-4
Table 8.3 Number of Cooling Fans to be Used (Continued)

Maximum Motor 200 V Class 400 V Class
Capacity Heatsink Cooling Heatsink Circulation Heatsink Cooling Heatsink Circulation
(kW) Fan Fan Fan Fan
22 2 - 2 -
30 2 - 2 -
37 2 1 2 -
45 2 1 2 -
55 2 1 2 -
75 2 1 2 1
90 2 1 2 1
110 2 1 2 1
132 2 1
160 2 1
185 - 4 2
220 4 2
300 5 2
8-5
Cooling Fan Replacement Outline
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Inverter.
If the Inverter is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Inverter, the cooling fan can be replaced
without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
Removing the Cooling Fan

1. Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows 1 and pull the fan out in the
direction of arrow 2.
2. Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the relay connector.
3. Open the fan cover on the left and right sides and remove the fan cover from the fan.
Mounting the Cooling Fan

1. Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan. Be sure that the airflow direction indicated by the arrows above
faces into the Inverter.
2. Connect the relay connector securely and place the relay connector and cable into the fan cover.
3. Mount the fan cover on the Inverter. Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on
the Inverter.
Airflow direction
2
1
Fan cover
Fig 8.1 Cooling Fan Replacement (200 V Class Inverters of 5.5 kW)
8-6
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 22 kW or More

A cooling fan is attached to the top panel inside the Inverter.
The cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
200 V Class Inverters of 22 kW, 30kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 22 kW to 55 kW

1. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator, and front cover from the front of the Inverter.
2. Remove the control board bracket to which the boards are mounted. Remove all cables connected to the
control board. The cables connected to the control circuit terminals can be removed at the same time by
removing them together with the control circuit terminal board. This procedure is not required for 400 V
Class Inverters of 37 kW, 45 kW, and 55 kW. (Refer to page 8-21.)
3. Remove the cooling fan power cable connector (CN26 and CN27) from the gate drive board positioned at
the back of the controller.
4. Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter.
5. Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one.

After attaching a new cooling fan, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components. Refer to the
next page for attaching the fan cover.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the airflow faces the top of the Inverter.
Air flow direction
Control board bracket Fan cover
Control Connector
board
Gate drive board
Fig 8.2 Cooling Fan Replacement (200 V Class Inverters of 22 kW)
8-7
Attaching the Fan Cover
1. Tilt the fan cover toward the bottom of the Inverter as shown in Fig 8.3 and insert it to the mounting hole
until it meets with A.
Fan cover
Bottom Inverter
Cooling fan
Top Inverter
Fig 8.3
2. Push the fan cover toward the top of the Inverter.
Fig 8.4
3. Make sure that there is no gap between the fan cover and A. Then screw it in place with the three screws.
Make sure that

there is no gap.
NG
A
A
Fig 8.5
8-8
200 V Class Inverters of 55 kW, 75 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW, 90 kW

2. Pull the cooling fan power cable connector that extends from the fan cover cable hole out of the cooling
fan power relay board.
3. Only for 400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW and 90 kW, loosen the resistor unit mounting screws and slide the
resistor unit to remove it. Take care as the resistor unit is hot.

After attaching a new cooling fan, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
Front cover mounting screws
Front cover
Terminal cover
Terminal cover mounting screws
Circulation fan
mounting screws
Fan cable pullout position
Circulation fan
Airflow direction
Fan support Fan support
mounting screws
Fan support
Airflow
direction
Cooling fans
Resistor
unit
Fan power
relay board
Cooling fans
Resistor unit
mounting screws Cooling fan mounting screws
Cooling fan mounting screws
Fan power cable pullout position
Fig 8.6 Cooling Fan Replacement (400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW and 90 kW)
8-9
200 V Class Inverters of 37 kW and 45 kW

2. Remove the panel to which the control board, the gate drive board, and the cooling fan power relay board
are mounted. Remove any cables that are connected to the control board, the gate drive board, and the
cooling fan power relay board. The cable that is connected to the control circuit terminals can be removed
together with the control circuit terminal board. (Refer to page 8-21.)

Fan support mounting screws
Fan cover Panel mounting screws

Front cover mounting screws Cooling fan power relay board
Gate drive
board
Front cover
Panel
mounting
screws
Capacitor
Terminal cover
Terminal
board
Circulation fan mounting screws
Pay attention to
the protruding part Circulation fan
of the fan cable. Cooling fans
Airflow direction
Cooling fan
mounting screws
Fan cover
8-10
200 V Class Inverters of 90 kW

2. Remove the panel to which the control board, the gate drive board, and the cooling fan power relay board
are mounted. Remove any cables that are connected to the control board, the gate drive board, and the
cooling fan power relay board. The cable that is connected to the control circuit terminals can be removed
together with the control circuit terminal board. (Refer to page 8-21.)

Front cover
Terminal cover
Fan cover
mounting screws
Fan power relay board Fan cover
Control board mounting panel
Control board mounting Circulation fan
mounting screws
panel
Control board mounting Circulation fan

panel mounting screws Cooling fan
power connector Cooling fan airflow direction
(CN26)
Fan cover
Gate drive board
Cooling fan
Control circuit terminal board
Cooling fan
airflow direction
Finger guard
Note: A finger guard is not provided on lnverter with slits.
8-11

2. Remove any cables that are connected to the cooling fan power relay board. The cable that is connected to
the control circuit terminals can be removed together with the control circuit terminal board. (Refer to page
8-21.)

Front cover
Terminal cover
Circulation fan
Cooling fan power relay board
Fan cover mounting screws Airflow direction
Circulation fan
mounting screws
Circulation fan
Circulation fan
power connector
8-12
200 V Class Inverters of 110 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 160 kW

the control circuit terminals can be removed together with the control circuit terminal board. (Refer to page
8-21.)

Front cover mounting screws Fan cover Fan cover mounting screws
Fan power
relay board
Gate drive
board
Front cover
Control
board
Terminal
cover
Circulation fan
Circulation fan mounting screws
Circulation fan
Fan cover mounting screws airflow direction
Fan cover
Fan cover
Fan airflow
direction
Fan power relay board

Fan mounting
screws
Finger guard*1
Cooling fan
Fan ground cable*2

* 1. There is no finger guard mounted to the fan for some capacities. (There is a guard on the Inverter side.)
* 2. There is no fan ground cable for the capacities without a finger guard.
8-13

1. Remove the terminal cover and top and bottom front covers from the front of the Inverter.
2. Remove any cables that are connected to the cooling fan power relay board.
3. Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan covers from the Inverter.

Make sure that the fan cable and the fan ground cable are not tangled or pinched.
Fan power relay

Fan cover board Fan cover
Top front
cover
Terminal
Bottom cover
front
cover
Fan cable
Fan cover mounting screws Fan ground
cable
Enlarged view
Fan airflow
Fan cover mounting screws direction
Colling fan
Finger guard
8-14

the terminal board can be removed together with the terminal board.
3. Remove the fan unit screws and pull out the fan units from the Inverter.
4. Replace the fan units with new ones.
And, remove the screws for the fan power relay board and attach this board to the new unit.

After attaching a new cooling fan unit, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
Front cover mounting screws Fan power relay

board Fan cover
Fan cover
Top front
cover
Bottom
front Terminal
cover cover
Relay board mounting screws

Fan cover mounting screws Fan power relay
board
Enlarged
view
Fan cover mounting screws
Fan units
Fan airflow
derection
8-15
Circulation Fan Replacement Outline
With some capacities, there is a small fan installed inside the Inverter for the purpose of increasing circulation
in areas where heat has built up. These fans have built-in fan sensors that output an alarm when the rotation
rate of the fan drops to indicate that replacement is necessary.
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 11 kW

The circulation fan is installed behind the control circuit terminal board inside the Inverter.
The circulation fan can be replaced by removing the control circuit terminal board.
Removing the Circulation Fan

1. Remove the Digital Operator, the terminal cover, and the front cover.
2. Remove the control circuit terminal board. Remove the cables connected to the terminals if necessary.
3. While pushing the two tabs (A) in direction 1, pull the fan out in direction 2.
4. Remove the relay connector connected to the fan.
Mounting the Circulation Fan

Reverse the above procedure to mount the fan.
Be sure to mount the fan so that the air flows towards the top of the Inverter (direction indicated by the arrow).
Mount the fan securely using the tabs (A).
Confirm that there are no cables in contact with the fan’s rotating parts.
Control
board
2
1
Airflow direction
Tabs (A)
Circulation fan
Inverter with Control Circuit Terminal Board Removed
Fig 8.13 Circulation Fan Replacement (200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 11 kW)
8-16
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW

The circulation fan is installed at the top-left corner of the Inverter interior.

1. Remove the Digital Operator, the terminal cover, and the front cover.
2. While pushing the relay connector tab (A) in direction 1, pull the relay connector out in direction 2.
3. While pushing the fan tabs (B) in direction 3, pull the fan out in direction 2.

Be sure to mount the fan so that the air flows towards the bottom of the Inverter (direction indicated by the
arrow).
Mount the fan securely using the fan tabs (B).
4
Circulation fan
2 1
Relay connector tab (A)
Fan tabs (B)
3
Airflow
direction
Fig 8.14 Circulation Fan Replacement (200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW)
200 V Class Inverters of 37 kW or More and 400 V Class Inverters of 75 to 160 kW

The circulation fan is installed in front of the fan cover inside the Inverter. Remove the circulation fan using
the procedure for replacing the cooling fan and replace it with the new fan. (The installation position for 200 V
Class Inverters of 75 kW is different.)

The circulation fan is installed behind the control board mounting panel. Do not subject the fan to shock dur-
ing replacement.
8-17
1. Remove the terminal cover, the Inverter cover, the Digital Operator, and the control board cover.
2. Pull out the cables connected to the control circuit terminal board, the gate drive board, and the cooling fan
power relay board.
3. Remove the control board mounting panel.
4. Replace the circulation fan installed behind the control board mounting panel.

Be sure to mount the fan so that the air flows in the direction indicated by the arrow in the corresponding dia-
gram.
Refer to Fig 8.8 Cooling Fan Replacement (200 V Class Inverters of 90 kW) for details.
8-18

Two circulation fans are installed as described in the following sections.

1. Remove the terminal cover and top and bottom front covers.
2. Unscrew the frame fixing screws and take off the frame.
4. Remove the fan cover mounting screws and pull the fan cover out.
5. Remove the fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one.

gram.
Fan cable
Fix the fan cable with lnsulok ties
Frame
Frame fixing screws
Fan airflow
direction
Enlarged view
Circulation fan
Fan airflow
direction
Fan cover mounting

screws
Enlarged view
Fan cable
Fig 8.15 Circulation Fan Replacement (400 V Class Inverters of 185 kW and 220 kW)
8-19
Two circulation fans are installed as described in the following sections.

1. Remove the terminal cover and top and bottom front covers.
2. Unscrew the frame fixing screws and takeoff the frame.
4. Remove the fan cover mounting screws and pull the fan cover out.
5. Remove the fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one.

gram.
Fan cable
Fix the fan cable with Insulok ties
Frame
Frame fixing screws Fan airflow
direction
Enlarged view
Circulation fan
Fan airflow
direction
Enlarged view
Fix the fan cable
with Insulok ties
Fan cable
Fan cover mounting scerws
Fig 8.16 Circulation Fan Replacement (400 V Class Inverters of 300 kW)
8-20
Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Board

The control circuit terminal board can be removed and mounted without disconnecting the cables.
Always confirm that the charge indicator is not lit before removing or mounting the control circuit terminal
board.
IMPORTANT
Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Board

1. Remove the Digital Operator and front cover.
2. Remove the connecting line connectors connected to FE and NC on the control circuit terminal board.
3. Loosen the mounting screws (1) on the left and right sides of the control terminals until they are free. (It is
not necessary to remove these screws completely. They are self-rising.)
4. Pull the terminal board out sideways (in direction 2) with the screws sticking out from the board.
Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Board

Reverse the removal procedure to mount the terminal board.
Confirm that the control circuit terminal board and the control board properly meet at connector CN5 before
pressing in on the board.
The connector pins may be bent if the board is forced into place, possibly preventing correct Inverter opera-
tion.
Removing and Mounting the

Control Circuit Terminal Board
FE NC
Fig 8.17 Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Board
8-21
Specifications
This chapter describes the basic specifications of the Inverter and specifications for options and
peripheral devices.
Standard Inverter Specifications ..................................9-2

Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices .......9-6
Standard Inverter Specifications
The standard Inverter specifications are listed by capacity in the following tables.
Specifications by Model
Specifications are given by model in the following tables.
200V Class
Table 9.1 200 V Class Inverters

Model Number CIMR-F7A 20P4 20P7 21P5 22P2 23P7 25P5 27P5 2011 2015 2018 2022 2030 2037 2045 2055 2075 2090 2110
Max. applicable motor output
0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110
(kW)
Rated input current (A) 3.8 4.9 8.4 11.5 18 24 37 52 68 84 94 120 160 198 237 317 381 457
Rated output capacity
1.2 1.6 2.7 3.7 5.7 8.8 12 17 22 27 32 44 55 69 82 110 130 160
(kVA)
Output ratings
Rated output current (A) 3.2 4.1 7.0 9.6 15 23 31 45 58 71 85 115 145 180 215 283 346 415
3-phase; 200, 208, 220, 230, or 240 VAC
Max. output voltage (V)
(Proportional to input voltage.)
Max. output frequency CT selected (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150 Hz max. 300 Hz max.
(Hz) VT selected (high carrier, variable torque applications): 400 Hz max.
Rated voltage (V)
3-phase, 200/208/220/230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Power supply characteristics
Rated frequency (Hz)

Allowable voltage fluctua-
+ 10%, - 15%
tion
Allowable frequency fluc-

±5%
tuation
Control characteristics
DC reactor Optional Built in

Measures
for power
supply
harmonics 12-phase rec-
tification
Not possible Possible*3
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the Inverter's
rated current is applicable for the motor's rated current.
* 2. The startup torque for a 200 V Class Inverter for 110 kW is 120% (low carrier).
* 3. A 3-wire transformer is required on the power supply for 12-phase rectification.
9-2
400 V Class
Table 9.2 400 V Class Inverters
Model Number CIMR-F7A 40P4 40P7 41P5 42P2 43P7 45P5 47P5 4011 4015 4018
0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5
(kW) *1
Rated input current (A) 2.2 2.5 4.4 6.4 9.0 15 20 29 37 47
1.4 1.6 2.8 4.0 5.8 9.5 13 18 24 30
Output ratings
(kVA)
Rated output current (A) 1.8 2.1 3.7 5.3 7.6 12.5 17 24 31 39
Max. output voltage (V) 3-phase; 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
Rated voltage (V)

3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz

+ 10%, - 15%
tion

±5%
tuation
DC reactor Optional
Measures
for power
supply
Not possible
tification
Model Number CIMR-F7A 4022 4030 4037 4045 4055 4075 4090 4110 4132 4160 4185 4220 4300
22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 300
(kW)*1
Rated input current (A) 50 66 83 100 120 165 198 238 286 334 407 557 743
34 46 57 69 85 110 140 160 200 230 280 390 510
Output ratings
(kVA)
Rated output current (A) 45 60 75 91 112 150 180 216 260 304 370 506 675
Max. output voltage (V) 3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
Max. voltage (V)

3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz


+ 10%, - 15%
tion

±5%
tuation
DC reactor Built in
Measures
for power
supply
tification Possible*2
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the Inverter's
rated current is applicable for the motor's rated current.
* 2. A 3-wire transformer is required on the power supply for 12-phase rectification.
9-3
Common Specifications
The following specifications apply to both 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters.
Table 9.3 Common Specifications
Model Number
Specification
CIMR-F7A
Sine wave PWM
Control method
Flux vector control , Open-loop vector control, V/f control, V/f with PG control (switched by constant setting)
CT selected (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150% /0.5 Hz (Open-loop vector control)
VT selected (high carrier, variable torque applications): 120%/0.5 Hz (Open-loop vector control)
Torque characteristics CT selected (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150%/0 min-1 (Flux vector control)
VT selected (high carrier, variable torque applications): 120%/0 min-1 (Flux vector control)
Speed control range 1:100 (Open-loop vector control), 1:1000 (Flux vector control) *1
Speed control accuracy *4 ±0.2% (25°C ± 10°C, Open-loop vector control), ±0.02% (25°C ± 10°C, Flux vector control) *1
Speed control response 5 Hz (Open-loop vector control), 40 Hz (Flux vector control) *1
Torque limits Provided for vector control only (4 quadrant steps can be changed by constant settings.)
Torque accuracy *4 ±5%
Frequency control range
0.01 to 150 Hz 300 Hz (CT selected.), 0.01 to 400 Hz (VT selected.)

Frequency accuracy (tem- Digital references: ± 0.01% (-10°C to +40°C)
perature characteristics) Analog references: ±0.1% (25°C ±10°C)
Digital references: 0.01 Hz
Frequency setting resolution
Analog references: 0.06 Hz/60 Hz (+10 bit) 0.03 Hz/60 Hz (±11 bit)
Output frequency resolution 0.001 Hz
Overload capacity and max- CT selected (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150% of rated output current per minute*3, *6, *8
imum current*2 VT selected (high carrier, variable torque applications): 120% of rated output current per minute *6, *8
Frequency setting signal -10 to +10V , 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA, pulse train
Acceleration/Deceleration
0.01 to 6000.0 s (4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings)
time
Braking torque Approximately 20% (Approximately 125% with Braking Resistor option *5, braking transformer built into 200 V and 400 V Class
Inverters for 18.5 kW or less.)
Restarting for momentary power loss, speed searches, overtorque detection, torque limits, 17-speed control (maximum), accelera-
tion/deceleration time changes, S-curve acceleration/deceleration, 3-wire sequence, autotuning (rotational or stationary), dwell
functions, cooling fan ON/OFF control, slip compensation, torque compensation, jump frequencies, upper and lower limits for
Main control functions frequency references, DC braking for starting and stopping, high-slip braking, PID control (with sleep function), energy-saving
control, MEMOBUS communications (RS-485/422, 19.2 kbps maximum), fault reset, Droop control , function copying,
torque control, speed/torque control switching , etc.
Motor protection Protection by electronic thermal overload relay.
Instantaneous overcurrent
Stops at approx. 200% of rated output current.
protection
Fuse blown protection Stops for fuse blown.
Overload protection CT selected (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150% of rated output current per minute*3
VT selected (high carrier, variable torque applications): 120% of rated output current per minute
Protective functions
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above applox. 410 V.
Overvoltage protection
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above applox. 820 V.
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below applox. 190 V.
Undervoltage protection
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below applox. 380 V.
Momentary power loss ride- Stops for 15 ms or more.
thru, *9 With a suitable constant setting, operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s.
Cooling fin overheating Protection by thermistor.
Stall prevention Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration, or running.
Grounding protection*7 Protection by electronic circuits. (Overcurrent level)
Charge indicator Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approx. 50 V or more.
Ambient operating tempera- -10°C to 40°C (Enclosed wall-mounted type)
ture 10°C to 45°C (Open chassis type)
Ambient operating humidity 95% max. (with no condensation)
Environment
Storage temperature - 20°C to + 60°C (short-term temperature during transportation)

Application site Indoor (no corrosive gas, dust, etc.)
Altitude 1000 m max.
10 to 20 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
Vibration
20 to 50 Hz: 2.0 m/s2
9-4
* 1. Rotational autotuning must be performed to ensure obtaining the specifications given for flux or open-loop vector control.
* 2. Increase the Inverter capacity if loads exceeding these current values are expected.
* 3. Only VT can be set for 200 V Class 110 kW as well as 400 V Class 220 kW and 300 kW Inverters.
* 4. The speed control accuracy depends on the installation condition and types of motor used. Contact your Yaskawa representative for details.
* 5. When connecting a Braking Resistor or Braking Resistor Unit, set L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration) to 0 (disabled). Stopping may not be
possible in the specified deceleration time if this function is not disabled.
* 6. Derating is required for applications that use repetitive loads. (Refer to page 10-6 for details.)
* 7. The ground fault here is one which occurs in the motor wiring while the motor is running. A ground fault may not be detected in the following cases.
y A ground fault with low resistance which occurs in motor cables or terminals.
y A ground fault occurs when the power is turned ON.
* 8. If running at a speed of 6 Hz or less, the overload protection function can operate even if running within 150% of rated output current per minute when CT is
selected, 120% of rated output current per minute when VT is selected.
* 9. Attach a Backup Capacitor Unit for Momentary Power Loss if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200 V/400 V Class
9-5
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices
The following options and peripheral devices can be used for the Inverter. Select them according to the
application.
Table 9.4 Options and Peripheral Devices

Purpose Name Model (Code) Descriptions
MCCB or Ground Always connect a breaker to the power supply line to pro-
Protect Inverter wiring NF tect Inverter wiring. Use a ground fault interrupter suitable
Fault Interrupter*1 for high frequencies. Power supply
Prevents burning when Install to prevent the braking resistor from burning out
Magnetic Contac-
a Braking Resistor is SC series when one is used. Always attach a surge absorber to the
tor
used. coil. Molded-case
circuit breaker
Absorbs surge from the magnetic contactor and control or ground fault
Contains switching interrupter
Surge Absorber DCR2- relays. Connect surge absorbers to all magnetic contactors
surge
and relays near the Inverter.
Isolates the I/O signals of the Inverter and is effective Magnetic con-
Isolates I/O signals Isolator DGP tactor (MC)
against inductive noise.
Used to improve the input power factor of the Inverter. All AC reactor for power
Improve the input Inverters of 22 kW or higher contain built-in DC reactors. factor improvement
DC Reactor UZDA-
power factor of the These are optional for Inverters of 18.5 kW or less. Install
AC Reactor UZBA-
Inverter DC and AC reactors for applications with a large power
supply capacity (600 kVA or higher).
Reduces noise coming into the Inverter from the power
Zero phase reactor
LNFD- supply line and to reduce noise flowing from the Inverter
Input Noise Filter
FN- into the power supply line. Connect as close to the
Inverter as possible. Braking resistor
F6045GB
(FIL001098) Input noise filter
Reduce the affects of Finemet zero- Reduces noise from the line that sneaks into the Inverter
radio and control device phase reactor to F11080GB input power system. Insert as close to the Inverter as pos-
noise reduce radio (FIL001097) sible.
noise*2 Can be use on both the input side and output side.
F200160BP
Inverter
(300-001-041)
Output Noise Fil- Reduces noise generated by the Inverter. Connect as close Varispeed F7
LF-
ter to the Inverter as possible.
DC reactor
ERF-150WJ Consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to for power
Braking Resistor
(R00) reduce deceleration time (use rate: 3% ED). factor
improvement
Enable stopping the Braking Resistor LKEB- Consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to Ground
machine in a set time Unit (75600-K0) reduce deceleration time (use rate: 10% ED). Output noise filter
CDBR- Used with a Braking Resistor Unit to reduce the decelera-

Braking Unit
(72600-R0) tion time of the motor.
Zero phase
Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF opera- reactor
VS Operator
JVOP-95• tion control to be performed by analog references from a
(small plastic
(73041-0905X-) remote location (50 m max.).
Operator)
Frequency counter specifications: 60/120 Hz, 90/180Hz
Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF opera-
VS Operator
Operates the Inverter JVOP-96• tion control to be performed by analog references from a
(Standard steel- Motor
externally (73041-0906X-) remote location (50 m max.).
plate Operator)
Frequency counter specifications: 75 Hz, 150 Hz, 220 Hz Ground
1 m cable: (72616-
Digital Operator WV001) Extension cable to use a Digital Operator remotely.
Connection Cable 3 m cable: (72616- Cable length: 1 m or 3 m
WV003)
A system controller that can be match to the automatic
Controls an Inverter VS System Mod-
JGSM- control system to produce an optimum system configura-
system ule
tion.
Provides Inverter Backup Capacitor Handles momentary power losses for the control power
P000
momentary power loss Unit for Momen- supply for models 11 kW or less (maintains power for
(73600-P000)
recovery time tary Power Loss 2 s).
Frequency Meter DCF-6A
Frequency Setter RV30YN20S (2 kΩ)
Set/monitor frequen- Devices to set or monitor frequencies externally.
cies and voltages exter- Frequency Setter
CM-3S
nally. Knob
Measures the output voltage externally and designed for
Output Voltmeter SCF-12NH
use with a PWM Inverter.
Variable Resistor
2 kΩ (ETX003270) Connected to the control circuit terminals to input a fre-
Board for Fre-
Correct frequency refer- quency Reference 20 kΩ (ETX003120) quency reference.
ence input, frequency
meter, ammeter scales Frequency Meter
Scale Correction (RH000850) Calibrates the scale of frequency meters and ammeters.
Resistor
* 1. Use a ground fault interrupter with a current sensitivity of 200 mA minimum and an operating time of 0.1 s minimum to prevent operating errors. The interrupter
must be suitable for high-frequency operation.
Example:NV series by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation (manufactured in or after 1988)
EG, SG series by Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. (manufactured in or after 1984)
* 2. The Finemet Zero-phase Reactor is manufactured by Hitachi Metals, Ltd.
9-6
The following option boards are available

Table 9.5 Option Boards
Code Num- Document
Type Name Function
ber Number
Enables high-precision, high-resolution setting of analog
Analog Ref- speed references.
73600- TOE-C736-
erence Board • Input signal ranges: 0 to 10 V (20 kΩ), 1 channel
C001X 30.13
AI-14U 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω), 1 channel
• Input resolution: 14-bit (1/16384)
Enables high-precision, high-resolution setting of analog

Analog Ref- speed references.
73600- TOE-C736-
erence Board • Input signal ranges: −10 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
Speed C002X 30.14
AI-14B 4 to 20 mA (500 Ω), 3 channels
(Fre-
• Input resolution: 13-bit + sign (1/8192)
quency)
Refer-
Enables 8-bit digital setting of speed references.
ence
Digital Refer- • Input signal: 8-bit binary
Option 73600- TOE-C736-
Boards ence Board 2-digit BCD + sign signal + set signal
C003X 30.15
DI-08 • Input voltage: +24 V (isolated)
• Input current: 8 mA
Enables 16-bit digital setting of speed references.

• Input signal: 16-bit binary
Digital Refer-
73600- 4-digit BCD + sign signal + set signal TOE-C736-
ence Board
C016X • Input voltage: +24 V (isolated) 40.7
DI-16H2
• Input current: 8 mA
With 16-bit/12-bit switch.
Converts analog signals to monitor the Inverter's output status

Built-in (output frequency, output current, etc.) to absolute values and
Analog Mon-
(con- 73600- outputs them. TOE-C736-
itor Board
nect to D001X • Output resolution: 8 bits (1/256) 30.21
AO-08
con- • Output voltage: 0 to +10 V (not insulated)
nector) • Output channels: 2 channels
Output analog signals to monitor the Inverter's output status

Analog Mon- (output frequency, output current, etc.).
73600- TOE-C736-
itor Board • Output resolution: 11 bits (1/2048) + sign
Moni- D002X 30.22
AO-12 • Output voltage: -10 to +10 V (not insulated)
toring
Option • Output channels: 2 channels
Boards
Outputs isolated digital signals to monitor the Inverters oper-
ating status (alarm signals, zero-speed detection, etc.)
Digital Out-
73600- Output form: Photocoupler output, 6 channels TOE-C736-
put Board
D004X (48 V, 50 mA max.) 30.24
DO-08
Relay contact outputs, 2 channels
(250 VAC: 1 A max., 30VDC: 1 A max.)
2C-Relay
73600- Provides two multi-function outputs (DPDT relay contacts) in TOE-C736-
Output Board
D007X addition to those provided by the Inverter. 40.8
DO-02C
Used for V/f with PG control. Speed feedback is performed

using the PG attached to the motor to compensate for speed
PG
fluctuations caused by slipping.
Speed
73600- • A-phase pulse (single pulse) input (voltage, complemen- TOE-C736-
Con- PG-A2
A012X tary, open-collector input) 40.1
trol
• Maximum input frequency: 32767 Hz
Boards
• Pulse monitor output: +12 V, 20 mA
(PG power supply output: +12 V, 200 mA max.)
9-7
Table 9.5 Option Boards (Continued)
Code Num- Document
Type Name Function
ber Number
• Used for V/f control with PG and flux vector control.
• A-, B-phase input (complimentary input)
73600- TOE-C736-
PG-B2 • Maximum input frequency: 32767 Hz
A013X 40.2
• Pulse monitor output: Open-collector
(PG power supply output: +12 V, 200 mA max.)
• Differential input.
Built-in PG
• A-phase pulse (differential pulse) input, for V/f control
(con- Speed
73600- • Maximum input frequency: 300 kHz TOE-C736-
nect to Con- PG-D2
A014X • Input: Conforms to RS-422 40.3
control
• Pulse monitor output: RS-422
nector) Boards
(PG power supply output: +5 or +12 V, 200 mA max.)
• A-, B-, Z-phase pulse (differential pulse) input

• Maximum input frequency: 300 kHz
73600- TOE-C736-
PG-X2 • Input: Conforms to RS-422
A015X 40.4
• Pulse monitor output: RS-422
(PG power supply output: +5 or +12 V, 200 mA max.)
DeviceNet
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer
Communica-
73600- using DeviceNet communications to start/stop Inverter opera-
tions Inter- -
C021X tion, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants (out-
face Board
put frequencies, output currents, etc.).
SI-N1
ProfiBus-DP
Communica-
73600- using ProfiBus-DP communications to start/stop Inverter
tions Inter- -
C033X operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants
face Board
(output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
SI-P1
InterBus-S
Communica-
using InterBus-S communications to start/stop Inverter opera-
tions Inter- * -
tion, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants (out-
face Board
SI-R
Built-in Com- CANopen

(con- muni- Communica-
using CANopen communications to start/stop Inverter opera-
nected cations tions Inter- * -
tion, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants (out-
to con- Option face Board
nector) Boards SI-S
CC-Link
Communica-
73600- using CC-Link communications to start/stop Inverter opera-
tions Inter- -
C032X tion, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants (out-
face Board
SI-C
LONWORKS
Communica-
73600- using LONWORKS communications to start/stop Inverter
tions Inter- -
C035X operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants
face Board
(output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
SI-J
LONWORKS Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer

Communica- using LONWORKS communications to start/stop Inverter
73600-
tions Inter- operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants -
C034X
face Board (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
SI-W1 With Display Data Channel (DDC) function.
9-8
Table 9.5 Option Boards (Continued)

Code Num- Document
Type Name Function
ber Number
MECHA-
Built-in Com-
TROLINK- Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer
(con- muni-
Communi- 73600- using MECHATROLINK communications to start/stop
nected cations
cations Inter- C030X Inverter operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor
to con- Option
face Board constants (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
nector) Boards
SI-T
9-9
Appendix
This chapter provides precautions for the Inverter, motor, and peripheral devices and also pro-
vides lists of constants.
Varispeed F7 Control Methods ..................................10-2

Inverter Application Precautions ................................10-6
Motor Application Precautions ...................................10-9
Conformance to UL Standard .................................. 10-11
Conformance to CE Markings..................................10-13
Wiring Examples......................................................10-20
User Constants ........................................................10-29
10
Varispeed F7 Control Methods
Details of the Varispeed F7-Series Inverter control methods and their features are provided in this section.
Control Methods and Features

Varispeed F7-Series Inverters support the following four control methods, allowing the selection of a control
method to suit the required purpose. Table 10.1 provides an overview of the control methods and their fea-
tures.
Table 10.1 Overview and Features of Control Methods

Open-loop Vector
Control Method V/f Control V/f Control with PG Flux Vector Control
Control
A1-02 = 0
Constant Setting A1-02 = 1 A1-02 = 2 A1-02 = 3
(factory setting)
Voltage/frequency
Voltage/frequency fixed ratio control Current vector con- Current vector con-
Basic Control
fixed ratio control with speed compen- trol without a PG trol with a PG
sation using a PG
Variable speed con-

Very high-perfor-
Variable speed control, applications
mance control with a
trol, particularly for Applications requir- requiring high perfor-
PG on the motor side
control of multiple ing high-precision mance without a PG
(simple servodrives,
Main Applications motors with a single speed control using a on the motor side,
high-precision speed
Inverter and for PG on the machine and for replacing
control, torque con-
replacing existing side open-loop vector con-
trol, and torque limit-
Inverters trol of the previous
ing)
VS-616G5.
PG Speed Control Board Required (PG-A2 or Required (PG-B2 or

Not required. Not required.
(Option) PG-D2). PG-X2).
Speed Control
1:40 1:40 1:100 1:1000
Range*1
Speed Control Accu-

±2 to 3% ±0.03% ±0.2% ±0.02%
racy*2
Basic Speed Response*3 Approx. 1 Hz Approx. 1 Hz 5 Hz 40 Hz

Perfor-
mance Maximum CT 150 Hz 300 Hz 150 Hz 300 Hz 150 Hz 300 Hz 150 Hz 300 Hz
Output Fre-
quency VT 400 Hz 400 Hz 400 Hz 400 Hz
Starting CT 150%/3 Hz 150%/3 Hz 150%/0.5 Hz 150%/0 min−1

Torque*4 VT 120%/3 Hz 120%/3 Hz 120%/0.5 Hz 120%/0 min−1
10-2
Table 10.1 Overview and Features of Control Methods (Continued)

Open-loop Vector
Control Method V/f Control V/f Control with PG Flux Vector Control
Control
Rotational autotun-
Rotational autotun-
ing, stationary auto-
Line-to-line resis- Line-to-line resis- ing, stationary auto-
tuning 1, 2,
Autotuning tance (Normally not tance (Normally not tuning 1, 2, stationary
stationary autotuning
required.) required.) autotuning for line-
for line-to-line resis-
to-line resistance only
tance only
Yes (except during

acceleration/decelera-
tion, below mini-
Torque Limiting*5 No No
mum frequency, or
Yes
during reverse rota-
tion)
Torque Control*6 No No No Yes

Appli-
cation Yes (except for
Func-
Droop Control*7 No No No 0 min−1 and during
tions
reverse rotation)
Zero-servo Control*8 No No No Yes
Speed Estimation Yes (speed and rota- Yes (speed detection Yes (speed and rota- Yes (speed and rota-
(Detection) Instanta- tion direction estima- and rotation direction tion direction estimation direction detec-
neous Speed Search*9 tion) estimation) tion) tion)
Automatic Energy-
Yes Yes Yes Yes
saving Control*10
High-slip Braking*11 Yes Yes No No
Feed Forward Con-

No No No Yes
trol*12
* 1. The variable speed control range. (For continuous operation, the motor's temperature rise must be considered.)
* 2. The speed deviation in relation to the maximum speed with a rated load and when the load is stable. (For open-loop vector control, the motor temperature must be
25 °C ± 10 °C.)
* 3. The speed response guidelines indicating the extent of the motor's actual speed gain in proportion to the speed reference, which changes in a sinusoidal wave
form, within a range where motor torque does not become saturated.
* 4. A guideline for the motor torque that can be generated when started at a low speed and its output frequency (rotations) at that time.
* 5. This function limits the maximum motor torque to protect the machine and the load.
* 6. This function directly controls the amount of torque being generated at the motor and its rotation direction, e.g., to control force.
* 7. This function controls the amount of motor slip that occurs to prevent mechanical shock, when replacing a torque motor, etc.
* 8. This function performs simple positioning control (servo lock), without using an external positioning control device.
* 9. This function instantaneously estimates (or detects) the speed and rotation direction of a coasting motor, and quickly starts it without subjecting it to shock.
* 10.This function automatically adjusts the voltage applied to the motor to optimize the motor's efficiency with light loads.
* 11.This function improves the deceleration time without using a braking resistor by making the motor winding absorb regenerative power. As a standard, this func-
tion is effective with a motor running on 160 kW or less with a high-inertia load. 10
* 12.This function enables proportional gain in relation to changes in the speed reference, even for low rigidity (corresponds to the servo's model gain control).
10-3
Application Function Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the application functions.
• Perform rotational autotuning during trial operation whenever it is possible to separate the motor and
machine. To achieve the characteristics of vector control described in Table 10.1, the control must be
adjusted within a range that the machine will not vibrate after rotational autotuning has been performed.
• With vector control, the motor and Inverter must be connected 1:1. Vector control is not possible when
multiple motors are connected to a single Inverter. Select an Inverter capacity so the rated motor current is
50% to 100% of the rated Inverter current.
• For estimated speed searching, the motor and Inverter must be connected 1:1. The speed search must be
performed at a frequency of 130 Hz or less and with a motor with the same number of frames as or one
frame less than the Inverter capacity.
• During high-slip braking, motor loss increases, so use a high-slip braking frequency of 5% ED or less, and
a braking time of 90 seconds or less. Once high-slip braking has started, the motor cannot be restarted until
it has stopped.
• Feed forward control is a function that improves the proportional gain of the motor speed in relation to the
change in the speed reference. Adjust the response to interference loads using the speed controller (ASR)
constants.
• The torque limit function will not operate during acceleration or deceleration (during soft start transition)
when using a control method such as open-loop vector control. Even if the motor speed drops due to torque
limiting while set to a fixed speed, the speed will not fall below the minimum frequency and the motor will
not slip into reverse rotation.
Control Methods and Applications

Application examples for the Inverter control methods are provided here.
V/f Control (A1-02 = 0)

V/f control is suitable for applications where multiple motors are operated with a single Inverter, such as with
multi-motor drives.
(Thermal relay)
Inverter M1
M2
M3
Fig 10.1
10-4
V/f Control with PG (A1-02 = 1)

V/f control with a PG enables precise control of machine line speed. Speed control using the speed feedback
of the machine shaft is possible in this mode.
Conveyor
Inverter
PG
PG Speed Control Board
(PG-A2 or PG-D2)
Fig 10.2
Open-Loop Vector Control (A1-02 = 2)

Open-loop vector control enables the use of high-performance drives without a speed detector. PG (pulse gen-
erator) wiring is not required.
Inverter M
Fig 10.3
Flux Vector Control (A1-02 = 3) (SPEC: E or Later Only)

Flux vector control is suitable for applications using high-precision drives with PG feedback. High-precision
positioning, zero-speed control, and torque control are possible with this mode.
Inverter M
PG
PG Speed Control Board

(PG-B2 or PG-X2)
Fig 10.4
10
10-5
Inverter Application Precautions
This section provides precautions for selecting, installing, setting, and handling Inverters.
Selection
Observe the following precautions in selecting an Inverter.
Installing Reactors
A large peak current will flow in the power input circuit when the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity
power transformer (600 kVA or higher) or when switching a phase advancing capacitor. Excessive peak cur-
rent can destroy the convertor section. To prevent this, install a DC or AC reactor (optional) to improve the
power supply power factor.
DC reactors are built into 200 V Class Inverters of 22 to 110 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 300 kW.
If a thyristor convertor, such as a DC drive, is connected in the same power supply system, connect a DC or
AC reactor regardless of the power supply conditions shown in the following diagram.
DC or AC reactor
Power supply Required
capacity (kVA)
DC or AC reactor
Not required
Inverter capacity (kVA)
Fig 10.5
Inverter Capacity
When connecting special motors or multiple motors in parallel to an Inverter, select the Inverter capacity so
that the rated output current of the Inverter is 1.1 times the sum of all the motor rated currents.
Applications with Repetitive Loads

Applications with repetitive loads (cranes, elevators, presses, washing machines, etc.) using Inverters require
derating for the repetitive load [reducing carrier frequency and current (changing accel/decel timing, increas-
ing the frame size of the Inverter)]. Contact your Yaskawa representative for details.
Initial Torque
The startup and acceleration characteristics of the motor are restricted by the overload current ratings of the
Inverter that is driving the motor. The torque characteristics are generally less than those required when start-
ing using a normal commercial power supply. If a large initial torque is required, select an Inverter with a
somewhat larger capacity or increase the capacity of both the motor and the Inverter.
Emergency Stop
Although the Inverter's protective functions will stop operation when a fault occurs, the motor will not stop
immediately. Always provide mechanical stop and protection mechanisms on equipment requiring an emer-
gency stop.
10-6
Inverter Application Precautions
Options
Terminals B1, B2, , 1, 2, 3 are for connecting only the options specifically provided by Yaskawa.
Never connect any other devices to these terminals.
Installation
Observe the following precautions when installing an Inverter.
Installation in Enclosures
Either install the Inverter in a clean location not subject to oil mist, air-bourne matter, dust, and other contam-
inants, or install the Inverter in a completely enclosed panel. Provide cooling measures and sufficient panel
space so that the temperature surrounding the Inverter does not go beyond the allowable temperature. Do not
install the Inverter on wood or other combustible materials.
Installation Direction
Mount the Inverter vertically to a wall or other horizontal surface.
Settings
Observe the following precautions when making settings for an Inverter.
Upper Limits
The Digital Operator can be used to set high-speed operation up to a maximum of 400 Hz (depends on the car-
rier frequency). Incorrect settings can be dangerous. Use the maximum frequency setting functions to set
upper limits. (The maximum output frequency is factory-set to 60 Hz.)
DC Injection Braking

The motor can overheat if the DC injection braking voltage or braking time is set to a large value.
Acceleration/Deceleration Times
The motor's acceleration and deceleration times are determined by the torque generated by the motor, the load 10
2
torque, and the load's inertial moment (GD /4). If the stall prevention functions are activated during accelera-
tion or deceleration, increase the acceleration or deceleration time. The stall prevention functions will increase
the acceleration or deceleration time by the amount of time the stall prevention function is active.
To reduce the acceleration or deceleration times, increase the capacity of the motor and Inverter.
Handling
Observe the following precautions when wiring or performing maintenance for an Inverter.
10-7
Wiring Check
The Inverter will be internally damaged if the power supply voltage is applied to output terminal U, V, or W.
Check wring for any mistakes before supplying power. Check all wiring and sequences carefully.
Magnetic Contactor Installation

Do not start and stop operation frequently with a magnetic contactor installed on the power supply line. Doing
so can cause the Inverter to malfunction. Do not turn the Inverter ON and OFF with a magnetic contactor more
than one time every 30 minutes.
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or higher)
If the jumper is inserted into a power tap that does not match the actual power supply voltage, the lifetime of
the transformer for the power supply or the wind capacity of the cooling fan may be reduced.
If the jumper is inserted and the voltage setting is too low for the actual power supply, a power surge may
occur on the transformer for the power supply and reduce the lifetime of the transformer.
If the jumper is inserted and the voltage setting is too high for the actual power supply, the wind capacity of
the cooling fan is reduced.
Insert the jumper into the power tap with the voltage setting nearest to the voltage of the actual power supply.
Refer to Chapter 4 Trial Operation for the procedure.
Maintenance and Inspections

After turn OFF the main circuit power supply, always confirm that the CHARGE indicator is not lit before
performing maintenance or inspections. The voltage remaining in the capacitor may cause electric shock.
10-8
Motor Application Precautions
Motor Application Precautions

This section provides precautions for motor application.
Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor

When a standard motor is operated with the Inverter, power loss is slightly higher than when operated with a
commercial power supply. Observe the following precautions when using an Inverter for an existing standard
motor.
Low Speed Ranges

Cooling effects diminish in the low-speed range, resulting in an increase in the motor temperature. Therefore,
the motor torque should be reduced in the low-speed range whenever using a motor not made by Yaskawa. If
100% torque is required continuously at low speed, consider using a special Inverter or vector motor.
Installation Withstand Voltage

If the input voltage is higher than the motor rated voltage (440 V or higher) or the wiring distance is long, the
motor insulation voltage must be considered. Contact your Yaskawa representative for details.
High-speed Operation
When using the motor at a speed higher than the rated speed, problems may arise in dynamic balance and
bearing durability. Contact your Yaskawa representative for details.
Torque Characteristics
The motor may require more acceleration torque when the motor is operated with the Inverter than when oper-
ated with a commercial power supply. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be used with the
motor to set a proper V/f pattern.
Vibration
The Inverter uses a high carrier PWM to reduce motor vibration. (A constant can be set to select low carrier,
PWM modulation control as well.) The factory setting of the Inverter with SPEC: C or earlier is for a high car-
rier PWM and the one with SPEC: E or later is for a low carrier PWM. When the motor is operated with the
Inverter that uses a high carrier PWM, motor vibration is almost the same as when operated with a commercial
power supply.
Motor vibration may, however, become greater in the following cases. 10
Resonance with the Natural Frequency of the Mechanical System

Take special care when a machine that has been operated at a constant speed is to be operated in variable speed
mode. If resonance occurs, install vibration-proof rubber on the motor base or use the frequency jump function
to skip any frequency resonating the machine.
Imbalanced Rotor
Take special care when the motor is operated at a speed higher than the rated speed.
10-9
Noise
Noise varies with the carrier frequency. At high carrier frequencies, the noise is almost the same when the
motor is operated with a commercial power supply. Motor noise, however, becomes louder when the motor is
operated at a speed higher than the rated speed.
Using the Inverter for Special Motors

Observe the following precautions when using a special motor.
Pole-changing Motor
The rated input current of pole-changing motors differs from that of standard motors. Select, therefore, an
appropriate Inverter according to the maximum input current of the motor to be used. Before changing the
number of poles, always make sure that the motor has stopped. Otherwise, the overvoltage protective or over-
current protective mechanism will be actuated, resulting in an error.
Submersible Motor
The rated input current of submersible motors is higher than that of standard motors. Therefore, always select
an Inverter by checking its rated output current. When the distance between the motor and Inverter is long, use
a cable thick enough to connect the motor and Inverter to prevent motor torque reduction.
Explosion-proof Motor
When an explosion-proof motor is to be used, it must be subject to an explosion-proof test in conjunction with
the Inverter. This is also applicable when an existing explosion-proof motor is to be operated with the Inverter.
Since the Inverter itself is, however, not explosion-proof, always install it in a safe place.
Gearmotor
The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor manufacturer.
In particular, continuous operation of an oil-lubricated motor in the low speed range may result in burning. If
the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than the rated speed, consult with the manufacturer.
Synchronous Motor
A synchronous motor is not suitable for Inverter control. If a group of synchronous motors is individually
turned ON and OFF, synchronism may be lost.
Single-phase Motor
Do not use an Inverter for a single-phase motor. The motor should be replaced with a 3-phase motor.
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains)

If an oil-lubricated gearbox or speed reducer is used in the power transmission mechanism, oil lubrication will
be affected when the motor operates only in the low speed range. The power transmission mechanism will
make noise and experience problems with service life and durability if the motor is operated at a speed higher
than the rated speed.
10-10
Conformance to UL Standard
Conformance to UL Standard
To comply with UL standard, follow the appropriate installation instructions.
Installation Site
Install the Inverter in a pollution degree 2 environment or equivalent.
Specification of Closed-Loop Connector

The closed-loop connectors must be installed on conductors before installing to terminal blocks.
Use UL Listed closed-loop connectors shown below.
Table 10.2 JST Closed-Loop Connector Model

Inverter JST Kit P/N
Model CIMR-F7A Input Output
2011 14-5 14-5
2015 38-6 22-6
2018 38-8 38-8
2022 60-8 38-8
2030 60-8 60-8
2037 100-10 100-10
2045 150-10 150-10
2055 60-10 (2perPh) 60-10 (2perPh)
2075 100-10 (2perPh) 80-10 (2perPh)
2090 150-12 (2perPh) 100-12 (2perPh)
2110 150-12 (2perPh) 150-12 (2perPh)
4022 22-6 14-6
4030 38-6 22-6
4037 38-8 38-8
4045 60-8 60-8
4055 70-8 70-8
4075 100-10 80-10
4090 60-10 (2perPh) 100-10 10

4110 70-10 (2perPh) 60-10 (2perPh)
4132 70-10 (2perPh) 70-10 (2perPh)
4160 80-12 (2perPh) 80-12 (2perPh)
4185 150-16 (2perPh) 150-16 (2perPh)
4220 325-16 (2perPh) 200-16 (2perPh)
4300 150-16 (4perPh) 150-16 (4perPh)
Control Circuit Terminal

A UL Listed, Class 2 power supply must be used for the control circuits. See below table.
10-11
.
Table 10.3 Power Supply for Control Circuits

Input/Output Terminal Power Supply
Open Collec-
P1, P2, PC Class 2 power supply
tor Outputs
S1, S2, S3, S4,

Digital Inputs S5, S6, S7, S8 , LVLC power supply when using
SC internal power supply. Class 2
power supply when using exter-
RP, +V, -V , A1, nal power supply.
Analog Inputs
A2, A3 , AC
Interrupting Rating
Varispeed F7 is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical
amperes, 240 VAC maximum (200 V Class) and 480 VAC maximum (400 V Class).
Use a circuit breaker or fuses having an interrupting rating not less than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes,
600 VAC maximum.
Motor Overheat Protection

To protect the motor from overheating, set the E2-01 constant in the Inverter to the same value as the level of
the motor rated current.
10-12
Conformance to CE Markings
Points regarding conformance to CE markings are given below.
CE Markings
CE markings indicate conformance to safety and environmental standards that apply to business transactions
(including production, imports, and sales) in Europe. There are unified European standards for mechanical
products (Machine Directive), electrical products (Low Voltage Directive), and electrical noise (EMC Direc-
tive). CE markings are required for business transactions in Europe (including production, imports, and sales).
The Varispeed F7-Series Inverters bear CE markings indicating conformance to the Low Voltage Directive
and the EMC Directive.
• Low Voltage Directive: 73/23/EEC
93/68/EEC
• EMC Directive: 89/336/EEC
92/31/EEC
93/68/EEC
Machinery and installations that incorporate the Inverter are also subject to CE markings. It is ultimately the
responsibility of customers making products incorporating the Inverter to attach CE markings to the finished
products. The customer must confirm that the finished products (machines or installations) conform to the
European Standards.
Requirements for Conformance to CE Markings
Low Voltage Directive

Varispeed F7-Series Inverters satisfy testing for conformance to the Low Voltage Directive under the condi-
tions described in European Standard EN50178.
Requirements for Conformance to the Low Voltage Directive

Varispeed F7-Series Inverters must satisfy the following conditions in order to conform to the Low Voltage
Directive.
• It must be used under conditions corresponding to overvoltage category 3 or less and pollution degree 2 or
less as specified in IEC664.
• Input fuses:
For details on selecting fuses, refer to Table 10.4 Selection Requirements for Input Fuses with Examples. 10
• With Inverters CIMR-F7A2022 to 2110 and CIMR-F7A4022 to 4300, an enclosure preventing foreign
matter from entering from the top or front sides is required (IP4X or higher: panel installation).
10-13
Wiring Example
This example shows wiring for conforming to undervoltage reference.
Thermal switch Thermal relay
contact trip contact
Braking Unit
(optional)
Level
detector Motor
Braking Resistor Unit
(optional)
Cooling fan
Noise
filter
Inverter
3-phase power
200 to 240 V CIMR-F7A2022
50/60 Hz
Forward Run/Stop
Thermal relay trip contact (optional)
for Braking Resistor Unit
Reverse Run/Stop
Thermal relay trip contact
for motor cooling fan Thermal switch contact
for Braking Unit
External fault
Shielded twisted-pair
wires
Fault reset Pulse monitor output
Pulse A 30 mA max.
(Main speed switching) Pulse B Wiring distance:
d
30 m max.
Fault contact
Multi-step speed
reference 2
Jog frequency
Multi-function selection Pulse train output
contact inputs
External 0 to 32 kHz (2.2 kΩ)
Factory Default: Output
baseblock command
settings frequency
Ammeter adjustment
-10 to 10 V 2 mA
Default: Output current
CN5 (NPN setting) 0 to +10 V
Ammeter adjustment

-10 to 10 V 2 mA
Default: Output frequency
0 to +10 V
Shield wire
connection
terminal
Pulse train input
Master speed
pulse train Error contact output
Frequency setting 0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ) 250 VAC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
adjustment High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V input
30 VDC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
Frequency Frequency setting power
setter +15 V, 20 mA
External Master speed reference Multi-function contact output
frequency 0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
Master speed reference
250 VAC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
references 30 VDC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω)
Default: Running
[0 to 10 V (20 kΩ) input]
signal
Multi-function anlog input
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
Factory setting: Open collector 1
Not used Default: Zero-
speed Multi-function
open-collector outputs
Open collector 2 48 VDC 50 mA max.
Default: Frequency
Terminating
resistance agree signal
MEMOBUS
communications
RS-485/422
* 1. The main circuit is separated from the terminal cover for safety reasons.
* 2. The contact output circuit is separated from the main circuit and the control circuit by reinforced insulation.
It can be connected to extra-low voltage circuits or circuits that are 250 VAC 1 A, 30 VDC 1 A or less.
* 3. The control circuit is an extra-low voltage circuit and separated from the main circuit and the contact output circuit by reinforced insulation. Always
connect it to extra-low voltage circuits.
Fig 10.6
10-14
Input Fuses
In order to conform to the Low Voltage Directive, fuses must be provided for inputs. Use UL-compatible input
fuses with ratings higher than the voltages and currents, and fusing I2t specifications within the ranges shown
in the table below.
Table 10.4 Selection Requirements for Input Fuses with Examples

Selection Requirements Input Fuse (Examples)
Inverter Model Fusing
Voltage
Number Voltage Current Fusing I2t
Class Model Number Manufacturer Ratings I2t
CIMR-F7A (V) (A) (A2sec)
(A2sec)
600 V
20P4 240 10 12 to 25 A60Q12-2 FERRAZ 17
12 A
600 V
20P7 240 10 12 to 25 A60Q12-2 FERRAZ 17
12 A
250 V
21P5 240 15 23 to 55 CR2LS-20/UL FUJI 27
20 A
250 V
22P2 240 20 34 to 98 CR2LS-30/UL FUJI 60
30 A
250 V
23P7 240 30 82 to 220 CR2LS-50/UL FUJI 200
50 A
250 V
25P5 240 40 220 to 610 CR2LS-75/UL FUJI 276
75 A
250 V
27P5 240 60 290 to 1300 CR2LS-75/UL FUJI 560
75 A
250 V
2011 240 80 450 to 5000 CR2LS-100/UL FUJI 810
100 A
250 V
2015 240 100 1200 to 7200 CR2L-125/UL FUJI 1570
200 V 125 A
Class 250 V
2018 240 130 1800 to 7200 CR2L-150/UL FUJI 2260
150 A
250 V
2022 240 150 870 to 16200 CR2L-150/UL FUJI 2260
150 A
250 V
2030 240 180 1500 to 23000 CR2L-200/UL FUJI 4010
200 A
250 V
2037 240 240 2100 to 19000 CR2L-260/UL FUJI 7320
260 A
250 V
2045 240 300 2700 to 55000 CR2L-300/UL FUJI 9630
300 A
250 V
2055 240 350 4000 to 55000 CR2L-350/UL FUJI 16000 10
350 A
250 V
2075 240 450 7100 to 64000 CR2L-450/UL FUJI 31000
450 A
250 V
2090 240 550 11000 to 64000 CR2L-600/UL FUJI 40000
600 A
250 V
2110 240 600 13000 to 83000 CR2L-600/UL FUJI 52000
600 A
10-15
Table 10.4 Selection Requirements for Input Fuses with Examples (Continued)
Selection Requirements Input Fuse (Examples)
Inverter Model Fusing
Voltage
Number Voltage Current Fusing I2t
Class Model Number Manufacturer Ratings I2t
CIMR-F7A (V) (A) (A2sec)
(A2sec)
600 V
40P4 480 5 6 to 55 CR6L-20/UL FUJI 26
20 A
600 V
40P7 480 5 6 to 55 CR6L-20/UL FUJI 26
20 A
600 V
41P5 480 10 10 to 55 CR6L-20/UL FUJI 26
20 A
600 V
42P2 480 10 18 to 55 CR6L-20/UL FUJI 26
20 A
600 V
43P7 480 15 34 to 72 CR6L-30/UL FUJI 59
30 A
600 V
44P0 480 20 50 to 570 CR6L-30/UL FUJI 59
30 A
600 V
45P5 480 25 100 to 570 CR6L-50/UL FUJI 317
50 A
600 V
47P5 480 30 100 to 640 CR6L-50/UL FUJI 317
50 A
600 V
4011 480 50 150 to 1300 CR6L-50/UL FUJI 317
50 A
600 V
4015 480 60 400 to 1800 CR6L-75/UL FUJI 564
75 A
600 V
4018 480 70 700 to 4100 CR6L-100/UL FUJI 1022
100 A
600 V
4022 480 80 240 to 5800 CR6L-100/UL FUJI 1022
400 V 100 A
Class 600 V
4030 480 100 500 to 5800 CR6L-100/UL FUJI 1022
100 A
600 V
4037 480 125 750 to 5800 CR6L-150/UL FUJI 3070
150 A
600 V
4045 480 150 920 to 13000 CR6L-150/UL FUJI 3070
150 A
600 V
4055 480 150 1500 to 13000 CR6L-200/UL FUJI 5200
200 A
600 V
4075 480 250 3000 to 55000 CR6L-300/UL FUJI 17700
300 A
600 V
4090 480 300 3800 to 55000 CR6L-300/UL FUJI 17700
300 A
700 V
4110 480 350 5400 to 23000 A70P350-4 FERRAZ 15000
350 A
700 V
4132 480 400 7900 to 64000 A70P400-4 FERRAZ 19000
400 A
700 V
4160 480 450 14000 to 250000 A70P450-4 FERRAZ 24000
450 A
700 V
4185 480 600 20000 to 250000 A70P600-4 FERRAZ 43000
600 A
700 V
4220 480 700 34000 to 400000 A70P700-4 FERRAZ 59000
700 A
700 V
4300 480 900 52000 to 920000 A70P900-4 FERRAZ 97000
900 A
10-16
EMC Directive
Varispeed F7-Series Inverters satisfy testing for conformance to the EMC Directive under the conditions
described in European Standard EN61800-3.
Installation Method
In order to ensure that the machinery or installation incorporating the Inverter conforms to the EMC Directive,
perform installation according to the method below.
• Install a noise filter that conforms to European Standards on the input side. (Refer to Table 10.5 EMC
Noise Filters).
• Use a shielded line or metal piping for wiring between the Inverter and Motor. Make the wiring as short as
possible.
• To suppress harmonics, install a DC reactor in CIMR-F7A20P4, 20P7, 40P4, and 40P7 models. (Refer to
Table 10.6 DC Reactors for Suppressing Harmonics.)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 PE

Remove the paint on the ground side.
Inputs
Inverter
Filter
Outputs U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
Wiring length:
40 cm max.
Metallic plate
Wiring length: 20 m max.
IM
Fig 10.7 Installation Method for Filter and Inverter (CIMR-F7A20P4 to 2018, 40P4 to 4018) 10
10-17
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 PE
Inputs
Inverter
Filter
Outputs
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
Wiring length:
40 cm max.
Metallic plate
Wiring length: 20 m max.
IM
Fig 10.8 Installation Method for Filter and Inverter (CIMR-F7A2022 to 2110, 4022 to 4300)
Table 10.5 EMC Noise Filters
Volt- Inverter Model Noise Filter (Made by Shaffner)

age Number Dimensions (mm)
Class Model Number Rated Current (A) Weight (kg)
CIMR-F7A W×D×H
20P4
20P7 FS5972-10-07 10 1.1 141 × 46 × 330
21P5
22P2 FS5972-18-07 18 1.7 141 × 46 × 330
23P7
FS5973-35-07 35 1.4 141 × 46 × 330
25P5
27P5
FS5973-60-07 60 3 206 × 60 × 355
2011
200V 2015
FS5973-100-07 100 4.9 236 × 80 × 408
Class 2018
2022
FS5973-130-35 130 4.3 90 × 180 × 370
2030
2037 FS5973-160-40 160 6 120 × 170 × 451
2045
FS5973-240-37 240 11 130 × 240 × 610
2055
2075
FS5972-410-99 410 10.5 260 × 115 × 386
2090
2110 FS5972-600-99 600 11 260 × 135 × 386
10-18
Table 10.5 EMC Noise Filters (Continued)
Volt- Inverter Model Noise Filter (Made by Shaffner)

age Number Dimensions (mm)
Class Model Number Rated Current (A) Weight (kg)
CIMR-F7A W×D×H
40P4
40P7
41P5 FS5972-10-07 10 1.1 141 × 46 × 330
42P2
43P7
44P0
FS5972-18-07 18 1.3 141 × 46 × 330
45P5
47P5 FS5972-21-07 21 1.8 206 × 50 × 355
4011 FS5972-35-07 35 2.1 206 × 50 × 355
4015
FS5972-60-07 60 4 236 × 65 × 408
4018
400V 4022
FS5972-70-52 70 3.4 80 × 185 × 329
Class 4030
4037
FS5972-100-35 100 4.5 90 × 150 × 330
4045
4055 FS5972-130-35 130 4.7 90 × 180 × 370
4075 FS5972-170-40 170 6 120 × 170 × 451
4090
FN3359-250-28 250 7 230 × 125 × 300
4110
4132
4160 FS5972-410-99 410 10.5 260 × 115 × 386
4185
4220 FS5972-600-99 600 11 260 × 135 × 386
4300 FS5972-800-99 800 31 300 × 160 × 716
Table 10.6 DC Reactors for Suppressing Harmonics

Inverter Model DC Reactor
Voltage Class Number
Model Number Manufacturer Ratings Code Number
CIMR-F7A
10
20P4
200 V Class UZDA-B YASKAWA 5.4 A 8 mH X010084
20P7
40P4
400 V Class UZDA-B YASKAWA 3.2 A 28 mH X010052
40P7
10-19
Wiring Examples
This section provides wiring examples to connect a Braking Unit and other peripheral devices to the main
circuits, examples of wiring a transformer to Inverter I/O, and other aspects of Inverter wiring.
Using a Braking Resistor Unit

This example shows wiring for a Braking Resistor Unit.
CIMR-F7A20P4 to -F7A2018 (200 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 18.5 kW)
CIMR-F7A40P4 to -F7A4018 (400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 18.5 kW)
Braking Resistor overheating contacts

(Thermal overload relay trip contacts)
A sequence is required to turn DC Reactor to
OFF the power supply for the ther- improve input
mal overload relay trip contacts of power factor
the Braking Resistor Unit. (Optional) Braking Resistor Unit *3
Short-circuit bar
3-phase power MC *4 Motor

R/L1 U/T1
200 to 230 V 50/60 Hz
or 380 to 460 V S/L2 V/T2
50/60 Hz T/L3 W/T3
Inverter
200 V Class Inverters: Ground to

Overload relay trip contact 100 Ω max., 400 V Class Inverters:
of Braking Resistor Unit Ground to 10 Ω max.)
* 1. A transformer is not required for 200 V Class

* 2. Remove the short-circuit bar (normally connected) from + 1 and + 2 when connecting
a DC Reactor (Optional).
* 3. Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 and using a Braking
Fault contacts Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is
not changed.
* 4. When connecting a separately-installed type Braking Unit (model CDBR) to Invert-
ers with built-in braking transistor (200 V/400 V 18.5 kW or less), connect the B1
terminal of the Inverter to the + terminal of the Braking Unit and connect the − termi-
nal of the Inverter to the − terminal of the Braking Unit. The B2 terminal is not used
in this case.
Fig 10.9
10-20
Wiring Examples
Using a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit

This example shows wiring for a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit.
CIMR-F7A2022, -F7A2030 (200 V Class Inverters of 22 kW, 30 kW)
DC Reactor to Braking Unit Braking Resistor Unit*2

improve input (Optional) (Optional)
A sequence is required to turn
power factor Level
OFF the power supply for the (Optional) detector
thermal overload relay trip con-
tacts of the Braking Resistor
Unit. Braking Resistor overheating contacts
(Thermal overload relay trip contacts)
Short-circuit bar
MCCB
Motor
3-phase power R/L1 U/T1
200 to 230 V 50/60 Hz S/L2 V/T2
T/L3 W/T3
Inverter
Overload relay trip contact Ground to 100 Ω max.

* 1. Remove the short-circuit bar (normally connected) from + 1 and + 2 when connecting
a DC Reactor (Optional).
* 2. Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 and using a Braking
Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is
Fault contacts not changed.
Forward Run/Stop
Forward Run Command (forward run when ON)
Reverse Run/Stop
Reverse Run Command (reverse run when ON)
Braking Unit
External fault
Fig 10.10
10
10-21
Using Braking Units in Parallel
This example shows wiring for using two Braking Units in parallel.
There are connectors for selecting whether each Braking Unit is to be a Master or Slave. Select “Master” for
the first Braking Unit only, and select “Slave” for all other Braking Units (i.e.) from the second Unit onwards.
A sequence is required to turn OFF the Thermal

power supply for the thermal overload relay
Thermal Braking protector
trip contacts of the Braking Resistor Unit. protector Resistor
Unit Braking
Resistor
Unit
detector
Level
Braking Unit
Thermal switch Thermal switch

MCCB
Motor
3-phase power
R/L1 Inverter U/T1
200 to 220 V 50 Hz S/L2 V/T2
200 to 230 V 60 Hz
T/L3 W/T3
Cooling fan
Overload relay trip contact

Ground to 100 max.
Fault contacts Fault contact output

Forward Run Com-
Forward Run/Stop mand (forward run
when ON)
Reverse Run/Stop Reverse Run Com-
mand (reverse run
Braking Unit when ON)
External fault
* Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 to Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop
within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed.
Fig 10.11
10-22
Wiring Examples
Using a Braking Unit and Three Braking Resistor Units in Parallel

This example shows wiring for using three Braking Resistor Units in parallel.
Thermal Thermal Thermal

protector protector protector
Braking Braking Braking
Resistor Resistor Resistor
A sequence is required to turn OFF the Unit Unit Unit
power supply for the thermal overload relay
trip contacts of the Braking Resistor Unit.
detector
Level
Braking Unit
Thermal switch
MCCB
Motor
R/L1 U/T1
3-phase power Inverter
380 to 480 V S/L2 V/T2
50/60 Hz T/L3 W/T3
Cooling fan
Voltage
setting
Overload relay trip contact Ground to 10 Ω max.

Fault contact output

Fault contacts
Forward Run Com-
Forward Run/Stop mand (forward run
when ON)
Reverse Run/Stop
Reverse Run Com-
mand (reverse run
Braking Unit when ON)
External fault
* Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 to Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop
within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed.
Fig 10.12
10
10-23
Using a VS Operator
This example shows wiring for using a VS Operator. The VS Operator model number is JVOP-95• or
JVOP-96 •.
CIMR-F7A27P5 (200 V Class Inverters of 7.5 kW)
Short-circuit bar
(Standard)
MCCB
Motor
R/L1 U/T1
3-phase power
S/L2 Inverter V/T2
T/L3 W/T3
• •
JVOP-95 , C-96 VS Operator
Forward Run Command Ground to 100 Ω max.

(forward run when closed)
Reverse Run Command
(reverse run when closed)
Multi-function contact inputs
Sequence common (0 V)
Shield terminal
Speed setting power (15 V, 20 mA)

Master speed (0 to 10 V, 20 kΩ)
Master speed (4 to 20 mA, 250 Ω)
Multi-function contact
output (Default: Running
signal)
Fault contact output

Open collector 1 (Default:
Zero-speed signal)
Multi-function Multi-function open-

analog output Open collector 2 (Default: collector output 48 V,
Frequency meter Speed agreement signal) 50 mA max.
Multi-function
analog output
(Default: Output Multi-function output
frequency) common
Fig 10.13
10-24
Wiring Examples
Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 0-V Common in Sinking Mode
with an Internal Power Supply
Set CN5 (shunt connector) on the control board to NPN as shown below for a sequence that uses an NPN tran-
sistor for an input signal (0-V command and sinking mode) and an internal +24-V power supply.
+1 +2 - B1 B2
MCCB
3-phase power
R R/L1 U/T1 Motor
S S/L2 V/T2 IM
T T/L3 Inverter W/T3
Ground
S1
Forward Run/Stop
S2
Reverse Run/Stop
S3
External fault
S4
Fault reset
Multi-function S5
contact inputs
Multi-step
Factory speed setting 1
settings
S8
Baseblock CN5 (NPN setting) +24 V 8 mA
command
SC
+24 V
E(G)
Shield wire
connection terminal
Pulse train input

RP Master speed pulse train
Frequency setting
adjustment 0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ)
2 kΩ High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V input

setter +V
External 3 +15 V 20 mA
frequency 0 to +10 V
2 kΩ
references
1
2
4 to 20 mA P
A1 Master speed reference
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ) 10
P AC 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω)
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ) input
0V
Fig 10.14
10-25
Using Transistors for Input Signals and a +24-V Common in Sourcing
Mode
Set CN5 (shunt connector) on the control board to PNP as shown below for a sequence that uses a PNP tran-
sistor for an input signal (+24-V common and sourcing mode) and an internal +24-V power supply.
+1 +2 - B1 B2
MCCB
3-phase power
R R/L1 U/T1 Motor
S S/L2 V/T2 IM
Ground
S1
Forward Run/Stop
S2
Reverse Run/Stop
S3
External fault
S4
Fault reset
Multi-function S5
contact inputs
Multi-step
Factory speed setting 1
settings
S8
Baseblock CN5 (PNP setting) +24 V 8 mA

command
SC
+24 V
E(G)
Shield wire
connection terminal
Pulse train input

Frequency setting
Frequency +V Frequency setting power

External setter 3 +15 V 20 mA
2 kΩ A1 Master speed reference
references 2
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
1 4 to 20 mA P
P AC 4 to 20 mA (250Ω)
0V
Fig 10.15
10-26
Wiring Examples
Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 0-V Common in Sinking Mode
with an External Power Supply
Set CN5 (shunt connector) on the control board to EXT as shown below for a sequence that uses an NPN tran-
sistor for an input signal (0-V command and sinking mode) and an external +24-V power supply.
+1 +2 - B1 B2
MCCB
3-phase power
R R/L1 U/T1 Motor
S S/L2 V/T2 IM
Ground
S1
Forward Run/Stop
S2
Reverse Run/Stop
S3
External fault
S4
Fault reset
Multi-function S5
contact inputs
Multi-step
Factory
settings speed setting 1
S8
Baseblock CN5 (EXT setting) +24 V 8 mA

command External
+24V
SC
+24 V
E(G) Shield wire
connection terminal
Pulse train input

Frequency setting

External setter
+V
3 +15 V 20 mA
2 kΩ A1 Master speed reference
references 2
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
1 4 to 20 mA P
10
P AC 4 to 20 mA (250 kΩ)
0V
Note:
Set EXT as shown at the right even for
a PNP input signal transistor sequence
connection (+24-V common/sourcing S8
mode) with a +24-V external power
supply. +24 V 8 mA
CN5 (EXT setting)
External
+24V
SC
+24 V
Fig 10.16
10-27
Using Contact and Open Collector Outputs
This example shows wiring for contact outputs and open collector outputs.
The following example is for the CIMR-F7A27P5 (200 V Class Inverter for 7.5 kW).
+1 +2 - B1 B2
MCCB
R R/L1 U/T1 Motor
3-phase power S S/L2 V/T2 IM
T T/L3 Inverter
W/T3
Ground
Ammeter scale adjustment resistor

AM 20 k
-10 to +10 V 2 mA
AM Default: Ouput current,
0 to +10 V
Frequency meter scale adjustment resistor
FM 20 k
AC FM -10 to +10 V 2 mA
Default: Output frequency,
0 to +10 V
E(G)
Sequence
Surge
absorber
MA
MB Error contact output

250 VAC max.
MC 30 VDC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
Multi-function contact output

30 VDC max.
30 VDC, 10 mA min. 1 A max. Flywheel
(Default: RUN) diode
M1
M2
48 VDC max.
E(G) Flywheel
diode
P1
48 VDC max.
Open collector 1
Flywheel
(Default: zero speed)
diode
P2
Open collector 2
PC (Default: Freq agree)
Multi-function
open collector output
48 VDC 50 mA max.
Sequence external power

supply
Fig 10.17
10-28
User Constants
User Constants
Factory settings are given in the following table.
Table 10.7 User Constants
Fac- Fac-
Set- Set-
No. Name tory No. Name tory
ting ting
Setting Setting
Language selection for Digital
A1-00
Operator display 1*1 b3-05 Speed search wait time 0.2
Sets the magnetic flux compensation as

A1-01 Constant access level 2 b3-10 1.10
a percentage of the no-load current.
A1-02 Control method selection 0*1 b3-14 Rotation direction search selection 1
A1-03 Initialize 0 b3-17 Speed search retrial current level 150*14
A1-04 Password 0 b3-18 Speed search retrial detection time 0.10
A1-05 Password setting 0 b3-19 Number of speed search retrials 0
A2-01 to
User setting constants - b4-01 Timer function ON-delay time 0.0
A2-32
b1-01 Reference selection 1 b4-02 Timer function OFF-delay time 0.0
b1-02 Operation method selection 1 b5-01 PID control method selection 0
b1-03 Stopping method selection 0 b5-02 Proportional gain (P) 1.00
b1-04 Prohibition of reverse operation 0 b5-03 Integral (I) time 1.0
Operation selection for setting E1-

b1-05 0 b5-04 Integral (I) limit 100.0
09 or less
b1-06 Read sequence input twice 1 b5-05 Derivative (D) time 0.00
Operation selection after switching

b1-07 0 b5-06 PID limit 100.0
to remote mode
Run Command selection in pro-
b1-08 0 b5-07 PID offset adjustment 0.0
gramming modes
Zero-speed level (DC injection
b2-01 0.5 b5-08 PID primary delay time constant 0.00
braking starting frequency)
PID output characteristics selec-
b2-02 DC injection braking current 50 b5-09 0 10
tion
b2-03 DC injection braking time at start 0.00 b5-10 PID output gain 1.0
b2-04 DC injection braking time at stop 0.50 b5-11 PID reverse output selection 0
Magnetic flux compensation vol- Selection of PID feedback com-

b2-08 0 b5-12 0
ume mand loss detection
PID feedback command loss detec-
b3-01 Speed search selection 2*2 b5-13
tion level
0
120*2 *14 PID feedback command loss detec-

b3-02 Speed search operating current b5-14 1.0
150*2 *14 tion time
b3-03 Speed search deceleration time 2.0 b5-15 PID sleep function operation level 0.0
10-29
Table 10.7 User Constants (Continued)
Fac- Fac-
Set- Set-
ting ting
Setting Setting
b5-16 PID sleep operation delay time 0.0 C1-09 Emergency stop time 10.0
Acceleration/deceleration time for

b5-17 0.0 C1-10 Accel/decel time setting unit 1
PID reference
Accel/decel time switching fre-
b6-01 Dwell frequency at start 0.0 C1-11 0.0
quency
S-curve characteristic time at
b6-02 Dwell time at start 0.0 C2-01 0.20
acceleration start
b6-03 Dwell frequency at stop 0.0 C2-02 0.20
acceleration end
b6-04 Dwell time at stop 0.0 C2-03 0.20
deceleration start
b7-01 Droop control gain 0.0 C2-04 0.00
deceleration end
b7-02 Droop control delay time 0.05 C3-01 Slip compensation gain 0.0*2
Slip compensation primary delay 2000*2

b8-01 Energy-saving mode selection 0 C3-02
time *3
b8-02 Energy-saving gain 0.7*3 C3-03 Slip compensation limit 200
Slip compensation selection during

b8-03 Energy-saving filter time constant 0.50*4 C3-04
regeneration
0
288.20 Output voltage limit operation

b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient C3-05 0
*5*6 selection
Power detection filter time con-
b8-05 20 C4-01 Torque compensation gain 1.00
stant
Torque compensation time con-
b8-06 Search operation voltage limiter 0 C4-02
stant 200*2
b9-01 Zero-servo gain 5 C4-03 Forward starting torque 0.0
b9-02 Zero-servo completion width 10 C4-04 Reverse starting torque 0.0
C1-01 Acceleration time 1 10.0 C4-05 Starting torque time constant 10
C1-02 Deceleration time 1 10.0 C5-01 ASR proportional (P) gain 1 20.00*7
C1-03 Acceleration time 2 10.0 C5-02 ASR integral (I) time 1 0.500*7
C1-04 Deceleration time 2 10.0 C5-03 ASR proportional (P) gain 2 20.00*7
C1-05 Acceleration time 3 10.0 C5-04 ASR integral (I) time 2 0.500*7
C1-06 Deceleration time 3 10.0 C5-05 ASR limit 5.0
C1-07 Acceleration time 4 10.0 C5-06 ASR primary delay time 0.004
C1-08 Deceleration time 4 10.0 C5-07 ASR switching frequency 0.0
10-30
User Constants
Fac- Fac-
Set- Set-
ting ting
Setting Setting
C5-08 ASR integral (I) limit 400 d1-17 Jog frequency reference 6.00
1*8
C6-01 CT/VT selection d2-01 Frequency reference upper limit 100.0
0*8
1 d2-02 Frequency reference lower limit 0.0

(C6-01
= 0)
C6-02 Carrier frequency selection d2-03 Master speed reference lower limit 0.0
6*6
(C6-01
= 1) d3-01 Jump frequency 1 0.0
15.0*6
C6-03*15 Carrier frequency upper limit d3-02 Jump frequency 2 0.0
2.0
15.0*6
C6-04*15 Carrier frequency lower limit d3-03 Jump frequency 3 0.0
2.0
Carrier frequency proportional

C6-05*15 gain 00 d3-04 Jump frequency width 1.0
Frequency reference hold function

d1-01 Frequency reference 1 0.00 d4-01 0
selection
d1-02 Frequency reference 2 0.00 d4-02 + - Speed limits 10
d1-03 Frequency reference 3 0.00 d5-01 Torque control selection 0
d1-04 Frequency reference 4 0.00 d5-02 Torque reference delay time 0
d1-05 Frequency reference 5 0.00 d5-03 Speed limit selection 1
d1-06 Frequency reference 6 0.00 d5-04 Speed limit 0
d1-07 Frequency reference 7 0.00 d5-05 Speed limit bias 10
Speed/torque control switching

d1-08 Frequency reference 8 0.00 d5-06 0
timer
d1-09 Frequency reference 9 0.00 d6-01 Field weakening level 80
d1-10 Frequency reference 10 0.00 d6-02 Field frequency 0.0 10
d1-11 Frequency reference 11 0.00 d6-03 Field forcing function selection 0
d1-12 Frequency reference 12 0.00 d6-06 Field forcing limit 400
d1-13 Frequency reference 13 0.00 E1-01 Input voltage setting 200*9
d1-14 Frequency reference 14 0.00 E1-03 V/f pattern selection F
d1-15 Frequency reference 15 0.00 E1-04 Max. output frequency 60.0*2
200.0
d1-16 Frequency reference 16 0.00 E1-05 Max. voltage *2 *9
10-31
Fac- Fac-
Set- Set-
ting ting
Setting Setting
Motor 2 mid. output frequency
E1-06 Base frequency 60.0*2 E3-06
voltage 1 (VC) 15.0 *9
Motor 2 min. output frequency

E1-07 Mid. output frequency 3.0*2 E3-07
(FMIN) 1.5 *2
15.0 Motor 2 min. output frequency

E1-08 Mid. output frequency voltage *2*9 E3-08
voltage (VMIN) 9.0 *9
E1-09 Min. output frequency 1.5*2 E4-01 Motor 2 rated current 1.90 *6
E1-10 Min. output frequency voltage 9.0*2*9 E4-02 Motor 2 rated slip 2.90 *6
E1-11 Mid. output frequency 2 0.0*10 E4-03 Motor 2 no-load current 1.20 *6
Motor 2 number of poles (number

E1-12 Mid. output frequency voltage 2 0.0*10 E4-04
of poles)
4
E1-13 Base voltage 0.0*11 E4-05 Motor 2 line-to-line resistance 9.842*6
E2-01 Motor rated current 1.90*6 E4-06 Motor 2 leak inductance 18.2*6
E2-02 Motor rated slip 2.90*6 E4-07 Motor 2 rated capacity 0.40*6
E2-03 Motor no-load current 1.20*6 F1-01 PG constant 600
Operation selection at PG open cir-

E2-04 Number of motor poles 4 F1-02 1
cuit (PGO)
Operation selection at overspeed
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance 9.842*6 F1-03
(OS)
1
E2-06 Motor leak inductance 18.2*6 F1-04 Operation selection at deviation 3
E2-07 Motor iron saturation coefficient 1 0.50 F1-05 PG rotation 0
PG division rate (PG pulse moni-

E2-08 Motor iron saturation coefficient 2 0.75 F1-06 1
tor)
Integral value during accel/decel
E2-09 Motor mechanical loss 0.0 F1-07 0
enable/disable
Motor iron loss for torque compen-
E2-10
sation 14*6 F1-08 Overspeed detection level 115
E2-11 Motor rated output 0.40*6 F1-09 Overspeed detection delay time 0.0*7
Excessive speed deviation detec-

E3-01 Motor 2 control method selection 0 F1-10 10
tion level
Motor 2 max. output frequency Excessive speed deviation detec-
E3-02 60.0 F1-11 0.5
(FMAX) tion delay time
E3-03 Motor 2 max. voltage (VMAX) 200.0*2 F1-12 Number of PG gear teeth 1 0
Motor 2 max. voltage frequency

E3-04 60.0 F1-13 Number of PG gear teeth 2 0
(FA)
Motor 2 mid. output frequency 1
E3-05
(FB) 3.0 *2 F1-14 PG open-circuit detection time 2.0
10-32
User Constants
Fac- Fac-
Set- Set-
ting ting
Setting Setting
Bi-polar or uni-polar input selec- Operation selection after SI-T
F2-01
tion
0 F6-08∗17 WDT error 1
Number of SI-T BUS error detec-

F3-01 Digital input option 0 F6-09∗17 tion 2
F4-01 Channel 1 monitor selection 2 H1-01 Terminal S3 function selection 24
F4-02 Channel 1 gain 1.00 H1-02 Terminal S4 function selection 14
F4-03 Channel 2 monitor selection 3 H1-03 Terminal S5 function selection 3 (0)*12
F4-04 Channel 2 gain 0.50 H1-04 Terminal S6 function selection 4 (3)*12
F4-05 Channel 1 output monitor bias 0.0 H1-05 Terminal S7 function selection 6 (4)*12
F4-06 Channel 2 output monitor bias 0.0 H1-06 Terminal S8 function selection 8 (6) *12
Analog output signal level for Terminal M1-M2 function selec-

F4-07 0 H2-01 0
channel 1 tion (contact)
Analog output signal level for Terminal P1 function selection
F4-08 0 H2-02 1
channel 2 (open collector)
Terminal P2 function selection
F5-01 Channel 1 output selection 0 H2-03 2
(open collector)
Signal level selection (terminal
A1)
F5-03 Channel 3 output selection 2 H3-02 Gain (terminal A1) 100.0
F5-04 Channel 4 output selection 4 H3-03 Bias (terminal A1) 0.0
Signal level selection (terminal

A3)
Multi-function analog input (termi-
F5-06 Channel 6 output selection 37 H3-05 1F
nal A3) function selection
F5-07 Channel 7 output selection 0F H3-06 Gain (terminal A3) 100.0
F5-08 Channel 8 output selection 0F H3-07 Bias (terminal A3) 0.0 10
F5-09 DO-08 output mode selection 0 H3-08 Signal level selection (terminal A2) 2
Operation selection after commu- Multi-function analog input (termi-

F6-01 1 H3-09 0
nications error nal A2) function selection
Input level of external fault from
F6-02 0 H3-10 Gain (terminal A2) 100.0
Stopping method for external fault
F6-03 1 H3-11 Bias (terminal A2) 0.0
from Communications Option Board
Trace sampling from Communica- 0.00
F6-04 0 H3-12 Analog input filter time constant
tions Option Board 0.03
Torque reference/torque limit
F6-06 0 H3-13 Terminal A1/A2 switching 0
selection from optical option
10-33
Fac- Fac-
Set- Set-
ting ting
Setting Setting
H4-01 Monitor selection (terminal FM) 2 L1-02 Motor protection time constant 1.0
Alarm operation selection during

H4-02 Gain (terminal FM) 1.00 L1-03 3
motor overheating
Motor overheating operation selec-
H4-03 Bias (terminal FM) 0.0 L1-04 1
tion
Motor temperature input filter time
H4-04 Monitor selection (terminal AM) 3 L1-05 0.20
constant
H4-05 Gain (terminal AM) 0.50 L2-01 Momentary power loss detection 0
Momentary power loss ridethru

H4-06 Bias (terminal AM) 0.0 L2-02
time 0.1*6
Analog output 1 signal level selec-

H4-07
tion
0 L2-03 Min. baseblock time 0.2*6
Analog output 2 signal level selec-

H4-08
tion
0 L2-04 Voltage recovery time 0.3*6
H5-01 Slave address 1F L2-05 Undervoltage detection level 190*9
H5-02 Communication speed selection 3 L2-06 KEB deceleration time 0.0
H5-03 Communication parity selection 0 L2-07 Momentary recovery time 0.0*13
Stopping method after communi- Frequency reduction gain at KEB

H5-04 3 L2-08 100
cation error start
Communication error detection Stall prevention selection during
H5-05 1 L3-01 1
selection accel
120*14
H5-06 Send wait time 5 L3-02 Stall prevention level during accel
150*14
H5-07 RTS control ON/OFF 1 L3-03 Stall prevention limit during accel 50
H5-10 Unit Selection for MEMOBUS Stall prevention selection during

0 L3-04 1
*18 Register 0025H decel
Stall prevention selection during
H6-01 Pulse train input function selection 0 L3-05 1
running
Stall prevention level during run- 120*14
H6-02 Pulse train input scaling 1440 L3-06
ning 150*14
H6-03 Pulse train input gain 100.0 L3-11 Overvoltage inhibit selection 0
H6-04 Pulse train input bias 0.0 L3-12 Overvoltage inhibit voltage level 380V*9
H6-05 Pulse train input filter time 0.10 L4-01 Speed agreement detection level 0.0
H6-06 Pulse train monitor selection 2 L4-02 Speed agreement detection width 2.0
Speed agreement detection level

H6-07 Pulse train monitor scaling 1440 L4-03 0.0
(+/-)
Speed agreement detection width
L1-01 Motor protection selection 1 L4-04 2.0
(+/-)
10-34
User Constants
Fac- Fac-
Set- Set-
ting ting
Setting Setting
Operation when frequency refer- OL2 characteristics selection at
L4-05 0 L8-15 1
ence is missing low speeds
L5-01 Number of auto restart attempts 0 L8-18 Soft CLA selection 1*2
OH1 detection of Inverter’s cool-

L5-02 Auto restart operation selection 0 L8-32*16 ing fan 1
Hunting-prevention function selec-

L6-01 Torque detection selection 1 0 N1-01 1
tion
L6-02 Torque detection level 1 150 N1-02 Hunting-prevention gain 1.00
Speed feedback detection control

L6-03 Torque detection time 1 0.1 N2-01 1.00
(AFR) gain
L6-04 Torque detection selection 2 0 N2-02 50
(AFR) time constant
L6-05 Torque detection level 2 150 N2-03 750
(AFR) time constant 2
High-slip braking deceleration fre-
L6-06 Torque detection time 2 0.1 N3-01 5
quency width
L7-01 Forward drive torque limit 200 N3-02 High-slip braking current limit 150
L7-02 Reverse drive torque limit 200 N3-03 High-slip braking stop dwell time 1.0
L7-03 Forward regenerative torque limit 200 N3-04 High-slip braking OL time 40
L7-04 Reverse regenerative torque limit 200 N5-01 Feed forward control selection 0
Integral time setting for torque

L7-06 200 N5-02 Motor acceleration time 0.178*6
limit
Control method selection for torque limit
L7-07 0 N5-03 Feed forward proportional gain 1.0
during acceleration and deceleration
Protect selection for internal DB Response frequency for speed

L8-01 0 N5-04 40.00
resistor (Type ERF) command
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level 95*6 o1-01 Monitor selection 6
L8-03
Operation selection after overheat
3 o1-02 Monitor selection after power up 1 10
pre-alarm
Input open-phase protection selec- Frequency units of reference set-
L8-05 0 o1-03 0
tion ting and monitor
Output open-phase protection Setting unit for frequency con-
L8-07 0 o1-04 0
selection stants related to V/f characteristics
L8-09 Ground protection selection 1 o1-05 LCD brightness adjustment 3
LOCAL/REMOTE key enable/dis-

L8-10 Cooling fan control selection 0 o2-01 1
able
STOP key during control circuit
L8-11 Cooling fan control delay time 60 o2-02 1
terminal operation
L8-12 Ambient temperature 45 o2-03 User constant initial value 0
10-35
Fac- Fac-
Set- Set-
ting ting
Setting Setting
o2-04 kVA selection 0*6 T1-00 Motor 1/2 selection 1
Frequency reference setting

o2-05
method selection
0 T1-01 Autotuning mode selection 2*2
Operation selection when digital

o2-06
operator is disconnected
0 T1-02 Motor output power 0.40*6
o2-07 Cumulative operation time setting 0 T1-03 Motor rated voltage 200.0*9
Cumulative operation time selec-

o2-08
tion
0 T1-04 Motor rated current 1.90*6
o2-09
For factory adjustment 0 T1-05 Motor base frequency 60.0
*19
o2-10 Fan operation time setting 0 T1-06 Number of motor poles 4
Fault trace/fault history clear func-

o2-12 0 T1-07 Motor base speed 1750
tion
Output power monitor clear selec- Number of PG pulses when turn-
o2-14 0 T1-08 600
tion ing
o3-01 Copy function selection 0 T1-09 Motor no-load current 1.20*6
o3-02 Read permitted selection 0
* 1. Not initialized. (Japanese standard specifications: A1-01 = 1, A1-02 = 2)

The factory setting will change if the control method is changed. The open-loop vector factory setting is given.
* 6. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The values for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW are given.
* 7. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. The flux vector control factory settings are given.
* 8. Only 1 (VT) can be set for 200 V Class 110 kW as well as 400 V Class 220 kW and 300 kW Inverters.
* 9. Setting for 200 V Class Inverters. For 400 V Class Inverters, double the value.
* 10.E1-11 and E1-12 are disregarded when set to 0.0.
* 11.E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
* 12.The values in parentheses indicate factory settings when initialized in 3-wire sequence.
* 13.If the setting is 0, the axis will accelerate to the specified speed over the specified acceleration time (C1-01 to C1-08).
* 14.C6-01 = 1:120%, C6-01 = 0:150%
* 15.This constant can be monitored or set only when F is set for C6-02.
* 16.Applicable for F7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG:1031 or later.
* 17.Refer to MECHATROLINK COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE CARD INSTRUCTIONS (TOBPC73060008) for details.
* 18.Applicable for F7-series Inverters with software versions PRG: 1032 or latter.
* 19.Applicable for F7-series Inverters with software versions PRG: 1033 or latter.
10-36
Index
Symbols crimp terminals, 2-6, 2-23, 2-39
+/- speed, 6-85

D
Numerics daily inspection, 8-2
DC reactor, 2-16
2-wire sequence, 6-15 detecting motor overspeed, 6-160
3-wire sequence, 6-16 detecting motor torque, 6-56
detecting PG open circuit, 6-160
A digital operator, 3-2

digital operator communications error 1, 7-9
AC reactor, 2-16
digital operator communications error 2, 7-9
acceleration and deceleration times, 6-25
digital operator connection fault, 7-8
advanced programming mode, 3-5, 3-9
digital output boards, 6-161
ASIC internal RAM fault, 7-10
drive mode, 3-5, 3-7
ASIC version fault, 7-10
dwell function, 6-29
auto restart, 6-75
autotuning, 4-9
autotuning mode, 3-5, 3-12 E
EEPROM error, 7-9
B EEPROM write error, 7-17

emergency stop, 6-24
baseblock circuit error, 7-9
enclosed wall-mounted type, 1-5
braking resistor, 2-20
energy-saving, 6-118
braking resistor unit, 2-20, 10-20
excessive speed deviation, 7-7, 7-13
braking unit, 10-21
external fault function, 6-88
C F
circuit breaker, 2-15
FJOG, 6-87
common specifications, 9-4
Forward/Reverse Run Commands input together, 7-12
communications on standby, 7-14
frequency reference, 6-6, 6-35
communications option board A/D converter error, 7-10
fuse blown, 7-3
communications option board DPRAM error, 7-10
communications option board model code error, 7-10
communications option board self diagnostic error, 7-10 G
constant selection error, 7-16 ground fault, 7-2
constant setting error, 7-17 ground fault interrupter, 2-15
constant setting range error, 7-16 ground wiring, 2-19
control circuit terminals, 2-23
control fault, 7-7
control method, 4-8 H
control method selection error, 7-16 high-slip braking OL, 7-7
control power fault, 7-4 hunting-prevention function, 6-47
cooling fin overheating, 7-4
CPU internal A/D converter error, 7-9
CPU-ASIC mutual diagnosis fault, 7-10
1
I N
incorrect Inverter capacity setting, 7-16 noise filter, 2-16
inductive noise, 2-18 no-load operation, 4-16
inrush prevention circuit fault, 7-4 number of gear teeth between PG and motor, 6-160
installation site, 1-10 number of PG pulses, 6-159
installed braking resistor overheating, 7-5
internal braking transistor fault, 7-5
Inverter input voltage, 6-123
O
Inverter overload, 7-6 open chassis type, 1-5
open-loop vector control, 4-9
operation errors, 7-16
J option board communications error, 7-14
jump frequency function, 6-38 option board connection error, 7-10
option board selection error, 7-16
option communications error, 7-8
L output open-phase, 7-4
limiting motor rotation direction, 6-65 overcurrent, 7-2
loaded operation, 4-16 overspeed, 7-7, 7-13
overtorque 2, 7-13
M overtorque detected 1, 7-6

overtorque detected 2, 7-7
magnetic contactor, 2-16
main circuit overvoltage, 7-3
main circuit undervoltage, 7-3, 7-12 P
main circuit voltage fault, 7-4 password, 4-17, 6-155
maintenance and inspection, 8-1 periodic inspection, 8-2
MEMOBUS communications, 6-96 periodic maintenance of parts, 8-3
MEMOBUS communications error, 7-8, 7-14 PG (encoder) pulses, 2-40
modes, 3-5 PG disconnection detected, 7-7
motor constants, 6-120 PG pulse monitor output dividing ratio, 6-160
motor overheating, 7-13 PG rotation direction, 6-159
motor overheating alarm, 7-5 PG speed control board, 6-159
motor overheating fault, 7-5 PID control, 6-109
motor overload, 7-5, 7-6 PID control selection error, 7-16
motor protection operation time, 6-62 PID feedback reference lost, 7-8, 7-14
mounting dimensions, 1-7 power ON, 4-3
multi-function analog input, 6-50
multi-function analog input selection error, 7-16
multi-function input selection error, 7-16
Q
multi-speed operation, 6-10 quick programming mode, 3-5, 3-8
2
R W
radio interference, 2-19 watchdog timer fault, 7-10
rated current, 6-61 wire size, 2-23
RJOG, 6-87 wiring, 2-1
Run Command, 6-15
S
S-curve characteristics, 6-28
slip compensation function, 6-43
speed control with PG, 6-157
stabilizing speed, 6-48
stall prevention function, 6-30, 6-32, 6-53
standard connection diagrams, 2-14
standard Inverter specifications, 9-2
stopping methods, 6-17
straight solderless terminals, 2-24, 2-39
surge absorber, 2-16
switching monitors when the power supply is ON, 6-149
T
terminal block, 2-5
thermal overload relay, 2-18
tightening torque, 2-39
timer function, 6-108
torque compensation, 6-45
torque limit function, 6-49
trial operation, 4-1
troubleshooting, 7-1, 7-21
U
undertorque 1, 7-13
undertorque 2, 7-13
undertorque detected 1, 7-7
undertorque detected 2, 7-7
user constant access levels, 4-17
V
V/f control with PG, 4-8
V/f pattern, 6-122, 6-124
verify mode, 3-5, 3-11
VS operator, 10-24
3
Revision History
The revision dates and numbers of the revised manuals are given on the bottom of the back cover.
MANUAL NO.TOE-S616-55.1
Published in Japan April 200100-12 1
Revision number
Date of Date of original
publication publication
Date of Rev.
Section Revised Content
Publication No.
December 2000 − − First edition
April 2001 1 Chapter 4 Addition: Precautions before Using Autotuning etc.
Chapter 6 Revision: Description of carrier frequency and inverter overload current level
May 2001 2 − Addition: Index
April 2002 3 Chapter 10 Revision: Conformance to CE markings

Addition: Setting the power supply voltage jumper
7-8 and 9-4 page Revision: Description about detection level of over voltage and under voltage
August 2002 4 Back cover Revision: Address
March 2003 5 − Revision: NEMA1 → NEMA1 (Type1)

Chapter 4 Addition: LCD brightness adjustment (o1-05)
Chapter 6 Addition: Using Frequency Detection
August 2003 6 Chapter 4 Revision: Autotuning
September 2004 7 − Addition: Information on Inverters with SPEC: E or later.
January 2005 8 Chapter 3 Addition: y DATA/ENTER Key is invalid when UV is detected.

y Table 3.2 Relation of Inverter to RUN and STOP Indicators
Chapter 7 Revision: Note about GF in Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing.
Addition: Note about OC and GF in the Meaning column in Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Process-
ing.
Date of Rev.
Publication No. Section Revised Content
July 2005 9 Preface Addition: Safety Precautions

y Precaution about using an Inverter with an elevator
y Precaution about times when a holding brake is necessary
Chapter 2 Revision: IMPORTANT 2 in Connection Diagram
Addition: y IMPORTANT 13 in Connection Diagram
y IMPORTANT in Standard Connection Diagrams
Chapter 5 Revision: Note *2 about E2-01
Addition: y L8-32
y 36 and 3D settings of multi-function output terminal
y Note *7 about C4-02 in the table in Factory Settings that Change with the Control
Method (A1-01)
Chapter 6 Revision: y Fig.6.49 Baseblock Commands
y Fig.6.63 PID Control Block
y Examples of torque-limit operation in Torque Control
y Application Precautions in Copying Constants
y Fig.6.81 Brake ON/OFF Sequence Circuit Configuration
y Confirming Startup Current and Reducing Carrier Frequency in Using Inverters for
Elevating Machines
Addition: y Information on frequency detection 5 in Using Frequency Detection
y Operation Selection After Cooling Fan Fault
y Description about the changes in the OV and BTR levels that depend on the input
voltage in Setting the V/f Pattern
y Description about frequency detection 5, which is an Inverter output signal to engage a
holding brake, in Using Inverters for Elevating Machines
Chapter 7 Addition: y Fault and Alarm Detections
Descriptions of FAN
y Probable causes and corrective actions for the OC, GF, OH (OH1), OL1, OL2, CPF04,
and CPF05 faults as well as the OH alarm
Descriptions about a short-circuit between, the +V, -V, and AC terminals.
y Note in Table 7.3 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings
Revision: Probable causes and corrective actions for the CPF23 fault
Chapter 8 Addition: y Descriptions in Periodic Maintenance of Parts
y Description of how to attach the fan cover for 200 V Class Inverters of 22 kW or 30
kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 22 kW to 55 kW
y Description of how to replace the cooing fan and circulation fan for 400 V Class
Inverters of 185 kW, 220 kW, and 300 kW
Chapter 10 Addition: Note *4 in Fig.10.9
March 2006 10 Preface Addition: Safety Precautions
Trial Operation
Inverter settings precautions
Chapter 1 Revision: Table 1.9 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-F7A20P4 Shown Above)
Chapter 2 Addition: y Note in Table 2.4 Main Circuit Terminal Functions
y IMPORTANT 14 and 15 in Connection Diagram
Revision: Description of installing a ground fault interrupter in Wiring the Main Circuits
Chapter 4 Revision: Description of stationary autotuning 2
Chapter 5 Addition: y Following constants
H5-10, o2-09
y Note in the table of L2 constants
Revision: Note *3 about E2-03 and E4-03
Chapter 6 Addition: y Inputting Master Speed Frequency Reference Only (Current Input) in Frequency Refer-
ence
y Following items in Continuing Operation
y IMPORTANT in Speed Search
y Additional description of master speed analog input in Continuing Operation at
Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is Lost
Revision: y Restarting Operation After Transient Fault (Auto Restart Function) in Continuing
Operation
y Torque Control in Individual Operation
Example Diagrams of winding and rewinding operation during torque control
Chapter 7 Addition: y Table 7.2 Causes and Corrective Actions for When the Digital Operator Goes Dark
y The Inverter does not operate in Troubleshooting
Revision: Probable causes and corrective actions for the OC, GF, PUF, OV, UV1, UV2, UV3,
OH (OH1), OL1, OL2, and CPF03 to CPF05 faults and OH, PGO, and DEV alarms
Chapter 9 Addition: Notes *8 and *9 in Table 9.3
Chapter 10 Revision: Table 10.5 EMC Noise Filters
December 2007 11 Back cover Revision: Address
September 2008 12 Back cover Revision: Address

Varispeed F7
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
This Inverter is for variable-speed applications with three-phase AC motors for general
Safety industrial use.
・This Inverter was not designed or manufactured for use in devices or systems that
Precautions may directly affect or threaten human lives or health. Customers who intend to use the
product described in this manual for devices or systems relating to transportation,
health care, space aviation, atomic or electric power, or underwater use must contact
their Yaskawa representatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office beforehand.
・This product has been manufactured under strict quality-control guidelines. However,
if this product is to be installed in any location where failure of this product could
involve or result in a life-and-death situation or loss of human life or in a facility where
failure may cause a serious accident or physical injury, safety devices must be
installed to minimize the likelihood of any accident.
・Wiring must be performed by an authorized person qualified in electrical work.
・Do not use this product with any load other than a three-phase AC motor.
IRUMA BUSINESS CENTER (SOLUTION CENTER)

480, Kamifujisawa, Iruma, Saitama 358-8555, Japan
Phone 81-4-2962-5696 Fax 81-4-2962-6138
YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC.
2121 Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A.
Phone 1-847-887-7000 Fax 1-847-887-7370
YASKAWA ELETRICO DO BRASIL LTDA.
Avenida Fagundes Filho, 620 Sao Paulo-SP CEP 04304-000, Brazil
Phone 55-11-3585-1100 Fax 55-11-5581-8795
YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH
Hauptstraβe 185, 65760 Eschborn, Germany
Phone 49-6196-569-300 Fax 49-6196-569-398
YASKAWA ELECTRIC UK LTD.
1 Hunt Hill Orchardton Woods Cumbernauld, G68 9LF, United Kingdom
Phone 44-1236-735000 Fax 44-1236-458182
YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION
7F, Doore Bldg. 24, Yeoido-dong, Youngdungpo-Ku, Seoul 150-877, Korea
Phone 82-2-784-7844 Fax 82-2-784-8495
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.
151 Lorong Chuan, #04-01, New Tech Park 556741, Singapore
Phone 65-6282-3003 Fax 65-6289-3003
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SHANGHAI) CO., LTD.
No.18 Xizang Zhong Road. Room 1702-1707, Harbour Ring Plaza Shanghai 200001, China
Phone 86-21-5385-2200 Fax 86-21-5385-3299
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SHANGHAI) CO., LTD. BEIJING OFFICE
Room 1011A, Tower W3 Oriental Plaza, No.1 East Chang An Ave.,
Dong Cheng District, Beijing 100738, China
Phone 86-10-8518-4086 Fax 86-10-8518-4082
YASKAWA ELECTRIC TAIWAN CORPORATION
9F, 16, Nanking E. Rd., Sec. 3, Taipei, Taiwan
Phone 886-2-2502-5003 Fax 886-2-2505-1280
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
YASKAWA
In the event that the end user of this product is to be the military and said product is to be
employed in any weapons systems or the manufacture thereof, the export will fall under
the relevant regulations as stipulated in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade
Regulations. Therefore, be sure to follow all procedures and submit all relevant
documentation according to any and all rules, regulations and laws that may apply.
Specifications are subject to change without notice
MANUAL NO. TOE-S616-55.1D
for ongoing product modifications and improvements. Published in Japan September 2008 00-12 12 -0
© 2000-2008 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 08-5-10

F7

Uploaded by

F7

Uploaded by

YASKAWA

YASKAWA MANUAL NO. TOE-S616-55.1D

Indicates important information that should be memorized.

 Confirmations upon Delivery

 Setting User Constants

 Maintenance and Inspection

Illustration shows the CIMR-F7A20P4 Illustration shows the CIMR-F7A2022

 Free Warranty Period and Scope

Before Reading This Manual

 Precautions when Using a F7-series Inverter with SPEC: C or Earlier

Inverter Design Revision Order Software Version

1 Handling Inverters ...................................................................1-1

Wiring Control Circuit Terminals .................................................................2-23

Wiring Check ..............................................................................................2-31

3 Digital Operator and Modes................................................... 3-1

Adjustment Suggestions ............................................................................ 4-18

5 User Constants ........................................................................5-1

6 Constant Settings by Function...............................................6-1

Adjusting Frequency References ...............................................................6-35

Output Terminal Functions ......................................................................... 6-89

Options ..................................................................................................... 6-157

7 Troubleshooting ..................................................................... 7-1

Motor Application Precautions ................................................................... 10-9

Varispeed F7 Introduction ............................................1-2

Table 1.1 Varispeed F7 Models

Table 1.1 Varispeed F7 Models (Continued)

Table 1.2 Checks

Inverter model E Inverter

UL file number FILE NO: E131457

Fig 1.1 Nameplate

Inverter Model Numbers

Fig 1.2 Inverter Model Numbers

No. Max. Motor Capacity No. Protective Structure

Fig 1.3 Inverter Specifications

Open Chassis Type (IEC IP00)

Top protective cover

Digital Diecast case Digital

Bottom protective cover

18.5 kW or Less 22 kW or More

Fig 1.4 Inverter Appearance

Fig 1.5 Terminal Arrangement (Examples of Inverters with SPEC: E or later)

Exterior and Mounting Dimensions

 Open Chassis Inverters (IP00)

W D1 ers of 75 to 160 kW.

400 V Class Inverters of 185 to 300 kW

Fig 1.6 Exterior Diagrams of Open Chassis Inverters

Fig 1.7 Exterior Diagrams of Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters

Table 1.3 Inverter Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg)

* Same for Open Chassis and Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters.

185 260 3237 1372 4609

Table 1.5 Installation Site

 Controlling the Ambient Temperature

 Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter

Installation Orientation and Space

Horizontal Space Vertical Space

 Removing the Terminal Cover

 Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

 Attaching the Terminal Cover

Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and

 Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

Removing the Digital Operator

Mounting the Front Cover

Mounting the Digital Operator

Fig 1.13 Mounting the Digital Operator

Removing the Digital Operator

Removing the Front Cover

 Attaching the Front Cover

Attaching the Digital Operator

Removing and Attaching the Protection Cover

 Removing the Protection Cover

Top Protection Cover

Bottom Protection Cover

Top Protection Cover

Holes for bottom hooks

Bottom Protection Cover

Connections to Peripheral Devices..............................2-2

Confirmations upon Delivery

Setting User Constants

Maintenance and Inspection

Free Warranty Period and Scope

Precautions when Using a F7-series Inverter with SPEC: C or Earlier

Inverter Model Numbers

Open Chassis Inverters (IP00)

Controlling the Ambient Temperature

Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter

Removing the Terminal Cover

Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

Attaching the Terminal Cover

Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

Removing the Digital Operator

Mounting the Front Cover

Mounting the Digital Operator

Removing the Digital Operator

Removing the Front Cover

Attaching the Front Cover

Attaching the Digital Operator

Removing the Protection Cover

Top Protection Cover

Bottom Protection Cover

Top Protection Cover

Bottom Protection Cover

Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors

Main Circuit Configurations

CIMR-FA2037 to 2110 CIMR-F7A4075 to 4300

Wiring the Main Circuits

Wiring Main Circuit Inputs

Wiring the Output Side of Main Circuit